Manual Garmin

GTN Xi
Part 23 AML STC

Installation Manual
190-01007-C0 May 2024 Revision 11

© 2024 Garmin International, Inc., or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express prior
written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and
of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and to
print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided such electronic or printed copy of this
manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further any
unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International or its
subsidiaries. Connext™, GDU™, Garmin Pilot™, Flight Stream™, and Telligence™ are trademarks of
Garmin International or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission
of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; ChartView™ is a trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.;
Skywatch® is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications. SD and SDHC Logos are trademarks of
SD-3C, LLC.
© 2024 SiriusXM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM
Radio Inc. All other marks and logos are property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use
of such marks by Garmin is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
© 2024 Android™ is a trademark of Google, Inc.
The term Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance®.
At Garmin, we value your opinion. For comments about this manual, please reference the following
contact information.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 E. 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062 USA
Telephone: (913) 397-8200
Aviation Dealer Technical Support Line (Toll Free): (888) 606-5482
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House
Bull Copse Road
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9LR, UK
Telephone: +44 (0) 23 8052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 23 8052 4004
Aviation Support: +44 (0) 87 0850 1243
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Rd., SE
Salem, OR 97302 USA
Telephone: (503) 581-8101
Fax: (503) 364-2138
190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 11 Page i
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information that is subject to the Export Administration Regulations (EAR) issued by the United
States Department of Commerce (15 CFR, Chapter VII, Subchapter C) and may not be exported, released, or disclosed to foreign
nationals inside or outside of the United States without first obtaining an export license.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. For updates and supplemental information regarding the
operation of Garmin products, visit flyGarmin.com.
Software License Notification

AES Encryption
The product may include AES file encryption software, © 2002 DR. Brian Gladman, subject to the following license:
The free distribution and use of this software in both source and binary form is allowed (with or without changes) provided:
• Distributions of this source code include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.
• Distribution in binary form include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other associated materials.
• The copyright holder’s name is not used to endorse products built using this software without specific written permission.
Alternatively, provided this notice is retained in full, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public
License (GPL) in which case the provisions of the GPL apply instead of those given above.
Disclaimer
The AES file encryption software is provided “as is” with no explicit or implied warranties in respect of its properties, including,
but not limited to, correctness and/or fitness for purpose.

Rev. 11 Page ii
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR GARMIN AVIATION PRODUCTS
The software embedded in your Garmin product (the “Licensed Software”) is owned by Garmin International, Inc. (“Garmin” or
“us”). The Licensed Software is protected under copyright laws and international copyright treaties. The Licensed Software is
provided under this Software License Agreement (hereinafter the “Agreement”) and is subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by End User (“Licensee”, “you” or “your”), on the one hand, and Garmin and its licensors and
affiliated companies of Garmin and its licensors, on the other hand. The Licensed Software is licensed, not sold, to you. Garmin
and Licensee may be referred to individually as a “Party” or jointly as the “Parties.”
IMPORTANT: CAREFULLY READ THIS ENTIRE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT. INSTALLING,
COPYING, OR OTHERWISE USING THIS PRODUCT INDICATES YOUR ACKNOWLEDGMENT THAT YOU HAVE
READ THIS AGREEMENT AND AGREE TO ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS, YOU MAY NOT USE THIS PRODUCT.
1. Definitions. The following capitalized terms shall have the meanings set forth below:
a. “Device” means any Garmin device that is delivered by or on behalf of Garmin to Licensee onto which the Licensed
Software is installed.
b. “Documentation” means Gamin's then-current instructional, technical or functional documentation relating to the
Devices or Licensed Software which is delivered or made available by Garmin in connection with this Agreement.
c. “Licensed Software” means the software in binary executable form that is embedded in the Devices and/or made
available for use on the Devices via a software loader card.
d. “Permitted Purpose” means operating and using the Device on which the Licensed Software is installed for the
Device's intended use.
2. License.
a. License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement and Licensee's compliance with the terms and
conditions of this Agreement, Garmin hereby grants to Licensee a limited, royalty-free, non-exclusive, non-
sublicenseable, non-transferable and revocable right and license to use and perform the Licensed Software as installed
on the Devices and the Documentation solely for the Permitted Purpose and only during the term of this Agreement,
provided that the Licensed Software may only be used by Licensee on Devices on which the Licensed Software has
been installed or otherwise made available by Garmin.
b. Reservation of Rights. Garmin retains exclusive ownership of all right, title and interest in and to the Licensed
Software and Documentation. All of Gamin's rights in and to the Licensed Software and Documentation not expressly
licensed to Licensee under Section 2.1 are expressly reserved for Garmin. Nothing contained in this Agreement shall
be construed as conferring by implication, acquiescence, or estoppel any license or other right upon Licensee. Without
limiting the foregoing, the Parties acknowledge and agree that this Agreement grants Licensee a license of the
Licensed Software under the terms of Section 2.1, and shall not in any manner be construed as a sale of the Licensed
Software or any rights in the Licensed Software.
3. Restrictions; Protection and Third Party Devices.

a. Prohibited Uses. Licensee shall not, shall not attempt to and shall not permit any third party to:
(a) sublicense, lease, loan, sell, resell, market, transfer, rent, disclose, demonstrate, or distribute the Licensed Software
or Documentation to any third party; (b) uninstall the Licensed Software from the Device on which it was originally
installed; (c) make any use of or perform any acts with respect to the Licensed Software or Documentation other than
as expressly permitted in accordance with the terms of this Agreement; (d) use the Licensed Software or
Documentation in any manner that violates any applicable law; (e) reproduce or copy the Licensed Software; (f)
modify, adapt, alter, translate, port, create derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the
Licensed Software or Documentation or otherwise derive the source code or other proprietary information or trade
secrets from the Licensed Software; (g) remove, alter, or obscure any proprietary notices from the Licensed Software
or Documentation; (h) use the Licensed Software or Documentation to provide services to third parties (such as
business process outsourcing, service bureau applications or third party training); (i) use the Licensed Software on any
equipment, hardware or device other than a Device; or (j) export, re-export or otherwise distribute, directly or
indirectly, the Licensed Software or Documentation to a jurisdiction or country to which the export, re-export or
distribution of such Licensed Software or Documentation is prohibited by applicable law.

Rev. 11 Page iii
b. Protection of Software and Documentation. Licensee shall use its best efforts to protect the Licensed Software and
Documentation from unauthorized access, distribution, modification, display, reproduction, disclosure or use with at
least the same degree of care as Licensee normally uses in protecting its own software and documentation of a similar
nature from unauthorized access, distribution, modification, display, reproduction, disclosure or use. Licensee shall
limit access to the Licensed Software and Documentation to only those employees of Licensee who require access to
the Licensed Software or Documentation for the Permitted Purpose and who have been made aware of the restrictions
set forth in this Agreement. Licensee shall take prompt and appropriate action to prevent unauthorized use or
disclosure of the Licensed Software and Documentation.
4. Term and Termination.

a. Term. The term of this Agreement shall commence on the Effective Date, and shall continue in perpetuity thereafter,
unless terminated earlier as provided in this Section 4.
b. Termination by Garmin. Garmin may immediately terminate this Agreement upon written notice to Licensee if
Licensee commits a material breach of this Agreement or breaches a material term of this Agreement.
c. Effect of Termination. Upon any termination of this Agreement for any Party: (a) Licensee shall immediately cease all
use of the Licensed Software and Documentation; (b) all rights and licenses granted to Licensee to the Licensed
Software and Documentation and Gamin's related obligations shall immediately terminate; and (c) Sections 4.3, 5 and
6 shall survive.
5. Disclaimer; Limitations of Liability; Indemnity.

a. DISCLAIMER. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE LICENSED
SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION (INCLUDING ANY RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED FROM ANY USE OF
THE LICENSED SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION) ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”
WITH NO WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES OR REPRESENTATIONS AND NEITHER GARMIN NOR ITS
AFFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION, WARRANTY OR GUARANTEE, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE, UNDER LAW OR FROM THE COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, NON-INTERFERENCE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, OR SIMILAR, UNDER THE LAWS OF
ANY JURISDICTION. GARMIN DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE LICENSED SOFTWARE OR
DOCUMENTATION WILL MEET LICENSEE'S REQUIREMENTS OR THAT OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. LICENSEE ASSUMES THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION. THE
LICENSED SOFTWARE IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN ANY NUCLEAR, MEDICAL, OR OTHER
INHERENTLY DANGEROUS APPLICATIONS, AND GARMIN DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITY FOR ANY
DAMAGE OR LOSS CAUSED BY SUCH USE OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE.
b. EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES; LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE
CONTRARY HEREIN, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES AND REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF ANY CLAIM SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE
TO LICENSEE FOR AN AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF USD $100, OR BE LIABLE IN ANY AMOUNT FOR ANY
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INDIRECT DAMAGES, LOSS OF GOODWILL
OR PROFITS, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES, DATA LOSS, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION,
ATTORNEYS' FEES, COURT COSTS, INTEREST OR EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OR NON-PERFORMANCE OF THE
LICENSED SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF GARMIN HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES.
c. Indemnity. Licensee shall indemnify, defend and hold Garmin and its affiliates harmless against any and all losses,
claims, actions, causes of action, liabilities, demands, fines, judgments, damages and expenses suffered or incurred by
Garmin or its affiliated companies in connection with: (a) any use or misuse of the Licensed Software or
Documentation by Licensee or any third party in Licensee's reasonable control; or
(b) Licensee's breach of this Agreement.
6. General.
a. No Devices or Services. Licensee acknowledges and agrees that nothing in this Agreement shall be construed as
requiring Garmin to: (a) provide or supply the Devices or any other devices or hardware to Licensee; (b) grant any

Rev. 11 Page iv
licenses to any software other than the Licensed Software; or (c) provide any services, such as support, maintenance,
installation or professional services for the Licensed Software.
b. Non-Exclusive. Each Party's rights and obligations under this Agreement are non-exclusive. Garmin is not precluded
from marketing, licensing, providing, selling or distributing the Licensed Software or Documentation, or any other
products, software, documentation or services, either directly or through any third party.
c. Assignment. Licensee may not assign this Agreement or any of its rights, interests or obligations hereunder without
the prior written consent of Garmin. Any purported assignment in violation of this Section 6.3 shall be null and void.
Subject to the foregoing, this Agreement shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of the Parties and their
respective successors and permitted assigns and transferees.
d. Feedback and Data. Licensee may from time to time provide feedback, comments, suggestions, questions, ideas, or
other information to Garmin concerning the Licensed Software or Documentation or Gamin's products, services,
technology, techniques, processes or materials (“Feedback”). Garmin may in connection with any of its products or
services freely use, copy, disclose, license, distribute and otherwise exploit such Feedback in any manner without any
obligation, payment, royalty or restriction whether based on intellectual property rights or otherwise.
e. Governing Law. The validity, interpretation and enforcement of this Agreement will be governed by the substantive
laws, but not the choice of law rules, of the state of Kansas. This Agreement shall not be governed by the 1980 UN
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods.
f. Legal Compliance. You represent and warrant that (i) you are not located in a country that is subject to a U.S.
Government embargo, or has been designated by the U.S. Government as a “terrorist supporting” country, and (ii) you
are not listed on any U.S. Government list of prohibited or restricted parties.
g. Injunctive Relief. The Parties acknowledge and agree that irreparable damage would occur if any provision of this
Agreement was not performed in accordance with its specific terms or was otherwise breached and as such, the Parties
will be entitled to an injunction or injunctions to prevent breaches of this Agreement and to enforce specifically the
performance of the terms and provisions of this Agreement without proof of actual damages, this being in addition to
any other remedy to which any Party is entitled at law or in equity.
h. Amendments and Waivers. This Agreement may be amended and any provision of this Agreement may be waived,
provided that any such amendment or waiver will become and remain binding upon a Party only if such amendment or
waiver is set forth in a writing by such Party. No course of dealing between or among any persons having any interest
in this Agreement will be deemed effective to modify, amend or discharge any part of this Agreement or any rights or
obligations of any Party under or by reason of this Agreement. No delay or failure in exercising any right, power or
remedy hereunder will affect or operate as a waiver thereof; nor will any single or partial exercise thereof or any
abandonment or discontinuance of steps to enforce such a right, power or remedy preclude any further exercise
thereof or of any other right, power or remedy. The rights and remedies hereunder are cumulative and not exclusive of
any rights or remedies that any Party would otherwise have.
i. Severability. The provisions of this Agreement will be severable in the event that for any reason whatsoever any of the
provisions hereof are invalid, void or otherwise unenforceable, any such invalid, void or otherwise unenforceable
provisions will be replaced by other provisions which are as similar as possible in terms to such invalid, void or
otherwise unenforceable provisions but are valid and enforceable and the remaining provisions will remain valid and
enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, in each case so as to best preserve the intention of the
Parties with respect to the benefits and obligations of this Agreement.
j. No Third-Party Beneficiaries. This Agreement is solely for the benefit of the Parties and does not confer on third
parties any remedy, claim, reimbursement, claim of action or other right in addition to those existing without reference
to this Agreement.
k. Entire Agreement. This Agreement shall constitute the entire agreement between Garmin and you with respect to the
subject matter hereof and will supersede all prior negotiations, agreements and understandings of Garmin and you of
any nature, whether oral or written, with respect to such subject matter.
l. Interpretation. In this Agreement: (a) headings are for convenience only and do not affect the interpretation of this
Agreement; (b) the singular includes the plural and vice versa; (c) the words 'such as', 'including', 'particularly' and
similar expressions are not used as, nor are intended to be, interpreted as words of limitation; (d) a reference to a
person includes a natural person, partnership, joint venture, government agency, association, corporation or other
body corporate; a thing includes a part of that thing; and a party includes its successors and permitted assigns; and (e)
no rule of construction applies to the disadvantage of a Party because that Party was responsible for the preparation of
this Agreement. Any translation of this Agreement from English is provided as a convenience only. If this Agreement
is translated into a language other than English and there is a conflict of terms between the English version and the
other language version, the English version will control.

Rev. 11 Page v
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Revision Revision Date Description
Minor change to add new Flight Stream 510 part numbers and update
9 05/05/23
GWX software requirements.
10 04/19/24 Updated software to v20.41. Approved Class A TAWS functionality.
11 05/22/24 Updated software to v20.42.
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES
Section Description of Change
Updated carrier squelch settings to allow for negative values with software v20.42 and
5.4.3.11
later.

Rev. 11 Page vi
DEFINITIONS OF WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING
WARNINGS mean injury or death is possible if the instructions are not obeyed.
CAUTION
CAUTIONS mean that damage to the equipment is possible.
NOTE
NOTES provide more information.
WARNING
This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided
in accordance with California's Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like
additional information, please refer to our website at www.garmin.com/prop65.
WARNING
Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
Refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov./hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
CAUTION
The GTN Xi has a display which is coated with a special anti-reflective coating and is very
sensitive to waxes and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL
HARM THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the display
using a microfiber cloth or with a clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is
safe for anti-reflective coatings.
NOTE
All screen shots used in this document are current at the time of publication. Screen shots
are intended to provide visual reference only. All information depicted in screen shots,
including software file names, versions, and part numbers, is subject to change and may
not be up-to-date.

Rev. 11 Page vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2 Terminology ................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.3 Scope ............................................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.4 System Overview .......................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.5 Technical Specifications ............................................................................................................. 1-12
1.6 GTN Xi Databases ...................................................................................................................... 1-15
2 LIMITATIONS .................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Operational Limitations ................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2 Installation Limitations ................................................................................................................. 2-3
3 PREPARATION ................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2 GTN Xi/GMA 35/Flight Stream 210 Installation Overview ........................................................ 3-2
3.3 Pre-installation Checklist .............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.4 Available Equipment .................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.5 Installation Materials .................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.6 Installation Considerations ......................................................................................................... 3-18
3.7 Electrical Load Analysis ............................................................................................................. 3-52
4 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Antenna Cable Installation and Connections ............................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Instrument Panel Bonding Procedure ........................................................................................... 4-7
4.3 GTN Xi ......................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.4 GMA 35 ...................................................................................................................................... 4-24
4.5 Flight Stream .............................................................................................................................. 4-29
4.6 Electrical Installation Procedure ................................................................................................. 4-32
4.7 Weight and Balance .................................................................................................................... 4-51
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1 System Configuration Overview .................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks ......................................................................................... 5-4
5.3 Connector Engagement Check ..................................................................................................... 5-5
5.4 Configuration Mode Operations ................................................................................................... 5-6
6 SYSTEM CHECKOUT ....................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Ground Checks (Configuration Mode) ......................................................................................... 6-2
6.2 Ground Checks (Normal Mode) ................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3 Flight Checks .............................................................................................................................. 6-30
6.4 Documentation Checks ............................................................................................................... 6-33
APPENDIX A CONNECTORS AND PINOUT FUNCTION ............................................................. A-1
A.1 GTN Xi ........................................................................................................................................ A-2
A.2 GMA 35 ....................................................................................................................................... A-8
A.3 Flight Stream 210 Connector ..................................................................................................... A-10
APPENDIX B INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS ...................................................................................B-1
B.1 GTN Xi Interconnects ..................................................................................................................B-3
B.2 GMA 35 Interconnects .............................................................................................................B-111
APPENDIX C EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION .................................. C-1

Rev. 11 Page viii
C.1 GTN Xi .........................................................................................................................................C-2
C.2 GMA 35 ......................................................................................................................................C-27
C.3 GDL 60 .......................................................................................................................................C-28
APPENDIX D AIRCRAFT MODEL-SPECIFIC INFORMATION .................................................. D-1
APPENDIX E LIGHTNING PROTECTION ........................................................................................E-1
E.1 Lightning Protection for IFR Nonmetallic Aircraft ......................................................................E-2

Rev. 11 Page ix
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1 GTN Xi System Interface Overview ....................................................................................... 1-6
Figure 1-2 GMA 35 System Interface Overview ..................................................................................... 1-7
Figure 1-3 Interface Between One GTN Xi and One GTX ...................................................................... 1-8
Figure 1-4 Interface Between One GTN Xi and Two GTXs .................................................................... 1-8
Figure 1-5 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and One GTX ........................................................... 1-9
Figure 1-6 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and Two GTXs ......................................................... 1-9
Figure 1-7 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and Two GTXs with TIS Traffic ............................ 1-10
Figure 1-8 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and One GTX 345 and GTX 3XX .......................... 1-10
Figure 3-1 GPS/SBAS Antenna Mounting Considerations .................................................................... 3-26
Figure 3-2 GPS/SBAS Antenna Minimum Ground Plane Radius ......................................................... 3-29
Figure 3-3 Electrical Bonding Preparation - Nut Plate ........................................................................... 3-31
Figure 3-4 Electrical Bonding Preparation - Bolt/Nut Joint ................................................................... 3-31
Figure 3-5 Electrical Bonding Preparation - Terminal Lug .................................................................... 3-31
Figure 3-6 Flight Stream 210 with Connector ........................................................................................ 3-32
Figure 3-7 Bonding Strap (Metal Connectors) ....................................................................................... 3-34
Figure 3-8 Bonding Strap (Non-Metal Connectors) ............................................................................... 3-34
Figure 3-9 Pan Head Screw Ground Stud Buildup (Preferred) .............................................................. 3-35
Figure 3-10 Countersunk Screw Stud Buildup ......................................................................................... 3-36
Figure 3-11 Power and Ground Distribution - Single GTN Xi, Aircraft Weight Less Than 6000 lbs ..... 3-38
Figure 3-12 Power and Ground Distribution - Dual GTN Xi, Aircraft Weight Less Than 6000 lbs ....... 3-39
Figure 3-13 Power and Ground Distribution - Single GTN Xi, Aircraft Weight Greater Than 6000 lbs 3-39
Figure 3-14 Power and Ground Distribution - Dual GTN Xi, Aircraft Weight Greater Than 6000 lbs .. 3-40
Figure 3-15 GTN Xi CDI Source Selection Annunciation Field-of-View (+30°) ................................... 3-43
Figure 3-16 GTN Xi GPS Navigation Annunciation Field-of-View (+35°) ............................................ 3-44
Figure 3-17 TAWS Annunciation Field-of-View (+35°) ......................................................................... 3-45
Figure 3-18 Flight Stream 210 Mounting Considerations ........................................................................ 3-47
Figure 3-19 Mounting Orientation - Roll Axis ......................................................................................... 3-47
Figure 3-20 Sample Net Electrical Load Change Calculation .................................................................. 3-53
Figure 3-21 Ammeter Placement for Current Measurements ................................................................... 3-55
Figure 3-22 Blank Electrical Tabulation Form ......................................................................................... 3-56
Figure 3-23 Example Electrical Load Tabulation .................................................................................... 3-58
Figure 3-24 Blank Emergency Power Operation Calculation Form ........................................................ 3-59
Figure 3-25 Example of Completed Emergency Power Operation Calculation ....................................... 3-60
Figure 4-1 GMA 35 Marker Beacon Coaxial Cable D-Sub Termination ................................................ 4-4
Figure 4-2 Bluetooth Antenna Mounting Bracket Example ..................................................................... 4-5
Figure 4-3 Mounting Antenna to Bracket ................................................................................................. 4-6
Figure 4-4 Instrument Panel Bonding ....................................................................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-5 GTN Xi Mounting Rack Plate Support ................................................................................... 4-9
Figure 4-6 Avionics Rack Mounting Rail Considerations ..................................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-7 GTN 6XX Xi Panel Cutout Detail ........................................................................................ 4-14
Figure 4-8 GTN 7XX Xi Panel Cutout Detail ........................................................................................ 4-14
Figure 4-9 GTN Xi Mounting Rack Tab Alignment .............................................................................. 4-15
Figure 4-10 GTN 6XX Xi Dimensions and Center of Gravity ................................................................ 4-16
Figure 4-11 GTN 6XX Xi Mounting Rack Assembly (GTN 650Xi Installation Shown) ........................ 4-17
Figure 4-12 GTN 7XX Xi Dimensions and Center of Gravity ................................................................ 4-18
Figure 4-13 GTN 750Xi Mounting Rack Assembly ................................................................................ 4-19
Figure 4-14 GTN 750Xi with GMA 35 Installation Dimensions and Center of Gravity ......................... 4-20
Figure 4-15 Smart Glide Activation Switch Installation .......................................................................... 4-22
Figure 4-16 GTN 6XX Xi and GTN 7XX Xi Example Installation ......................................................... 4-23

Rev. 11 Page x
Figure 4-17 GTN 6XX Xi Example Installation ...................................................................................... 4-23
Figure 4-18 GTN 7XX Xi Example Installation ...................................................................................... 4-23
Figure 4-19 GMA 35 Dimensions and Center of Gravity ........................................................................ 4-24
Figure 4-20 GMA 35 Mounting Rack Assembly Overview .................................................................... 4-25
Figure 4-21 GMA 35 Installation ............................................................................................................. 4-26
Figure 4-22 GTN 750Xi with GMA 35 Mounting Rack Assembly ......................................................... 4-27
Figure 4-23 Flight Stream 210 Dimensions and Center of Gravity .......................................................... 4-29
Figure 4-24 Flight Stream 210 Mounting ................................................................................................. 4-30
Figure 4-25 Connector and Backshell Assembly ..................................................................................... 4-37
Figure 4-26 Shielded Cable Preparation ................................................................................................... 4-38
Figure 4-27 Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly (Preferred Method) ......................................... 4-39
Figure 4-28 TVS/Fuse Installation (TVS1/F1) ......................................................................................... 4-42
Figure 4-29 Detail of TVS Pin Assembly ................................................................................................. 4-43
Figure 4-30 TVS2 Assembly .................................................................................................................... 4-43
Figure 4-31 Flight Stream 210 Backshell Assembly ................................................................................ 4-45
Figure 4-32 Flight Stream 210 Connector ................................................................................................ 4-45
Figure 4-33 Backshell Assembly (Potted Configuration Module) ........................................................... 4-47
Figure 4-34 Backshell Assembly (Configuration Module with Spacer) .................................................. 4-48
Figure 4-35 Fan Wiring Installation ......................................................................................................... 4-50
Figure 4-36 Sample Aircraft Weight and Balance Calculation ................................................................ 4-52
Figure 5-1 Software Update Installer ....................................................................................................... 5-7
Figure 5-2 System and Software Version ................................................................................................. 5-8
Figure 5-3 Software Loader Card License Agreement ............................................................................. 5-8
Figure 5-4 Software Loader Card Drive ................................................................................................... 5-9
Figure 5-5 Software Loader Card Progress Window ............................................................................... 5-9
Figure 5-6 Software Loader Card Completion ....................................................................................... 5-10
Figure 5-7 System Information Page ...................................................................................................... 5-13
Figure 5-8 GTN Setup Page ................................................................................................................... 5-14
Figure 5-9 ARINC 429 Configuration Page ........................................................................................... 5-14
Figure 5-10 RS-232 Configuration Page .................................................................................................. 5-18
Figure 5-11 HSDB Port Utilization Page ................................................................................................. 5-24
Figure 5-12 Interfaced Equipment Page ................................................................................................... 5-25
Figure 5-13 Main Indicator (Analog) Configuration Page ....................................................................... 5-27
Figure 5-14 Lighting Configuration Page ................................................................................................. 5-28
Figure 5-15 Photocell Configuration Page ............................................................................................... 5-30
Figure 5-16 Enhanced Lighting Configuration Page ................................................................................ 5-31
Figure 5-17 Source Settings Configuration Page ..................................................................................... 5-32
Figure 5-18 Day Mode Operation Configuration Page ............................................................................ 5-33
Figure 5-19 Configuration Curve Page (Day Mode Source Curve Shown) ............................................. 5-34
Figure 5-20 Vertex Incremental Adjustment ............................................................................................ 5-34
Figure 5-21 Audio Configuration Page .................................................................................................... 5-35
Figure 5-22 Voice Command Configuration Page ................................................................................... 5-35
Figure 5-23 Traffic Configuration Page ................................................................................................... 5-36
Figure 5-24 Main System Configuration Page ......................................................................................... 5-36
Figure 5-25 Measurement of GPS Antenna Vertical Offset ..................................................................... 5-37
Figure 5-26 COM Configuration Page ..................................................................................................... 5-42
Figure 5-27 VOR/LOC/GS Configuration Page ....................................................................................... 5-45
Figure 5-28 Discrete Configuration Page ................................................................................................. 5-47
Figure 5-29 Navigation Features Page ..................................................................................................... 5-51
Figure 5-30 Vertical Navigation Configuration Page ............................................................................... 5-52

Rev. 11 Page xi
Figure 5-31 Glide Range Ring Settings Page ........................................................................................... 5-53
Figure 5-32 Glide Range Ring Advanced Settings Page .......................................................................... 5-53
Figure 5-33 Smart Glide Configuration Page ........................................................................................... 5-54
Figure 5-34 Example Glide Table from AFM/POH ................................................................................. 5-55
Figure 5-35 Example Glide Distance from AFM/POH ............................................................................ 5-57
Figure 5-36 Smart Glide Advanced Settings Page ................................................................................... 5-58
Figure 5-37 Ownship Configuration Page ................................................................................................ 5-59
Figure 5-38 Connext Configuration Page ................................................................................................. 5-59
Figure 5-39 GTN Options Page ................................................................................................................ 5-60
Figure 5-40 Terrain Configuration Page ................................................................................................... 5-61
Figure 5-41 Audio Clips Page .................................................................................................................. 5-63
Figure 5-42 Alert Settings Page ................................................................................................................ 5-67
Figure 5-43 Chart Configuration Page ..................................................................................................... 5-68
Figure 5-44 COM Transmit Power Configuration Page ........................................................................... 5-69
Figure 5-45 Weather Radar Page .............................................................................................................. 5-70
Figure 5-46 Search and Rescue Page ........................................................................................................ 5-71
Figure 5-47 GTN Diagnostics Page .......................................................................................................... 5-72
Figure 5-48 External Systems Page .......................................................................................................... 5-74
Figure 5-49 Stormscope Page ................................................................................................................... 5-75
Figure 5-50 Stormscope Configuration Page ........................................................................................... 5-75
Figure 5-51 Stormscope Test Page ........................................................................................................... 5-76
Figure 5-52 Traffic Test Page ................................................................................................................... 5-76
Figure 5-53 GAD 42 Configuration Page ................................................................................................. 5-77
Figure 5-54 XPDR Configuration Page .................................................................................................... 5-78
Figure 5-55 XPDR Inputs/Outputs Page .................................................................................................. 5-79
Figure 5-56 XPDR Installation Settings Page .......................................................................................... 5-83
Figure 5-57 XPDR Audio Configuration Page ......................................................................................... 5-87
Figure 5-58 XPDR1 Configuration Page - Force Airborne Test .............................................................. 5-88
Figure 5-59 Audio Panel Page .................................................................................................................. 5-88
Figure 5-60 Audio Panel Configuration Page (Intercom) ........................................................................ 5-90
Figure 5-61 Audio Panel Configuration Page (Sidetone/COM Connections) .......................................... 5-91
Figure 5-62 Audio Panel Configuration Page (Input Volume) ................................................................ 5-92
Figure 5-63 Audio Panel Configuration Page (Speaker Volume) ............................................................ 5-93
Figure 5-64 Audio Panel Configuration Page (Other) .............................................................................. 5-94
Figure 5-65 Audio Panel Connected Radios Page .................................................................................... 5-95
Figure 5-66 Audio Panel - Marker Beacon Display ................................................................................. 5-96
Figure 5-67 GDL 88 Diagnostics Page ..................................................................................................... 5-97
Figure 5-68 GDL 88 Configuration Page ................................................................................................. 5-98
Figure 5-69 GDL 88 Aircraft Configuration Page ................................................................................... 5-99
Figure 5-70 GDL 88 Antenna Configuration Page ................................................................................. 5-102
Figure 5-71 GDL 88 Audio Configuration Page .................................................................................... 5-103
Figure 5-72 GDL 88 Port Configuration Page ....................................................................................... 5-103
Figure 5-73 GDL 88 Port Selection ........................................................................................................ 5-103
Figure 5-74 GSR 56 Configuration Page ................................................................................................ 5-108
Figure 5-75 Roll Trim Configuration in Normal Mode .......................................................................... 5-109
Figure 5-76 A708 Weather Radar Page .................................................................................................. 5-110
Figure 6-1 Discrete Input Page ................................................................................................................. 6-3
Figure 6-2 Discrete Output Page .............................................................................................................. 6-3
Figure 6-3 HSDB Diagnostics Page ......................................................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6-4 Audio Configuration Page ...................................................................................................... 6-5

Rev. 11 Page xii
Figure 6-5 GAD 42 Configuration Page ................................................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-6 Lighting Bus Configuration Page ........................................................................................... 6-6
Figure 6-7 Main Data Inputs Page ............................................................................................................ 6-7
Figure 6-8 Example EMC Source/Victim Matrix .................................................................................. 6-28
Figure A-1 GTN 6XX Xi Connector Layout Detail - Rear View ............................................................ A-2
Figure A-2 GTN 7XX Xi Connector Layout Detail - Rear View ............................................................ A-2
Figure B-1 GTN Xi System Interface Diagram ........................................................................................B-3
Figure B-2 GTN 650Xi/750Xi Typical Installation Interconnect .............................................................B-4
Figure B-3 GTN 625Xi/725Xi Typical Installation Interconnect .............................................................B-6
Figure B-4 GTN Xi Power Lighting Configuration Interconnect .............................................................B-8
Figure B-5 GTN Xi - PFD/MFD Interconnect ........................................................................................B-11
Figure B-6 GTN Xi - ARINC 429 EFIS Interconnect ............................................................................B-13
Figure B-7 GTN Xi - External NAVSource Selection Annunciator Interconnect ..................................B-16
Figure B-8 GTN Xi - CDI Interconnect ..................................................................................................B-20
Figure B-9 GTN Xi - Bendix King KI 209A Interconnect .....................................................................B-23
Figure B-10 GTN Xi - Bendix King KI 208A Interconnect .....................................................................B-25
Figure B-11 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - VOR-ILS Indicator Interconnect .........................................................B-27
Figure B-12 GTN Xi - Transponder Interconnect .....................................................................................B-29
Figure B-13 GTN Xi - Traffic Source Interconnect ..................................................................................B-35
Figure B-14 GTN Xi - Audio Panel Interconnect .....................................................................................B-38
Figure B-15 GTN Xi - Weather Terrain Interconnect ...............................................................................B-41
Figure B-16 GTN Xi - Weather Radar Interconnect .................................................................................B-43
Figure B-17 GTN Xi - GDL 69/69A Interconnect ....................................................................................B-46
Figure B-18 GTN Xi - Antenna Interconnect ...........................................................................................B-47
Figure B-19 GTN Xi - Terrain/TAWS Annunciators Interconnect ..........................................................B-52
Figure B-20 GTN Xi - Switch Interconnect (Optional) ............................................................................B-54
Figure B-21 GTN Xi - RS-232 Interconnect .............................................................................................B-57
Figure B-22 GTN Xi - GAD 42 Interconnect ...........................................................................................B-59
Figure B-23 GTN Xi - Air Data/AHRS Computer Interconnect ..............................................................B-60
Figure B-24 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - RMI Interconnect ................................................................................B-61
Figure B-25 GTN Xi - Sandel SN3500/4500 Interconnect .......................................................................B-62
Figure B-26 GTN Xi - Sandel SN3308 Interconnect ................................................................................B-64
Figure B-27 GTN Xi - SN3308 - Two GTN Xi Units Interconnect .........................................................B-66
Figure B-28 GTN Xi - SN3308 - Two GTN Xi Units and Two SN3308s Interconnect ...........................B-69
Figure B-29 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - Bendix King DME Interconnect .........................................................B-72
Figure B-30 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - DME Interconnect ...............................................................................B-74
Figure B-31 GTN Xi - Bendix King Autopilot Interconnect ....................................................................B-76
Figure B-32 GTN Xi - Century Autopilot Interconnect ............................................................................B-79
Figure B-33 GTN Xi - Cessna Autopilot Interconnect .............................................................................B-81
Figure B-34 GTN Xi - Collins Autopilot Interconnect .............................................................................B-83
Figure B-35 GTN Xi - S-TEC Interconnect ..............................................................................................B-85
Figure B-36 GTN 7XX Xi - Heading Synchro Interconnect ....................................................................B-89
Figure B-37 GTN Xi - GTN Xi or GTN 6XX/7XX Crossfill Interconnect ..............................................B-91
Figure B-38 GTN Xi - GSR 56 Interconnect ............................................................................................B-92
Figure B-39 GTN Xi - GDU 620 Interconnect .........................................................................................B-93
Figure B-40 GTN Xi - GDL 88/88D Interconnect ....................................................................................B-95
Figure B-41 GTN Xi - Sperry Autopilot Interconnect ..............................................................................B-97
Figure B-42 GTN Xi - Flight Stream 210 Interconnect ............................................................................B-98
Figure B-43 GTN Xi - GDU 700/1060 Interconnect ................................................................................B-99
Figure B-44 GTN Xi - G5 Interconnect ..................................................................................................B-100

Rev. 11 Page xiii
Figure B-45 GTN Xi - GFC 600 Interconnect ........................................................................................B-102
Figure B-46 GTN Xi - G3X Interconnect ...............................................................................................B-104
Figure B-47 GTN Xi - GI 275 Interconnect ............................................................................................B-108
Figure B-48 GTN Xi - GPS 175/GNC 355/GNX 375 Interconnect .......................................................B-109
Figure B-49 GTN Xi - Radio Altimeter Interconnect .............................................................................B-110
Figure B-50 GMA 35/35c - COM/NAV Interconnect ............................................................................B-111
Figure B-51 GMA 35 - Power/RS-232/Marker Beacon Interconnect ....................................................B-113
Figure B-52 GMA 35 - Headset Interconnect .........................................................................................B-115
Figure B-53 GMA 35/35c - Other Audio Sources Interconnect .............................................................B-117
Figure B-54 GMA 35/35c - Discrete Connect (Optional) .......................................................................B-119

Rev. 11 Page xiv
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1 Attributes of GTN Xi Units .................................................................................................... 1-5
Table 1-2 Garmin Installation Manuals ................................................................................................ 1-12
Table 1-3 Equipment Environmental Qualification Forms ................................................................... 1-12
Table 1-4 Garmin STC Documentation ................................................................................................ 1-12
Table 1-5 Garmin Reference Documentation ....................................................................................... 1-13
Table 1-6 Other Reference Documentation .......................................................................................... 1-14
Table 1-7 GTN Xi Database Summary ................................................................................................. 1-15
Table 3-1 Pre-installation Checklist ........................................................................................................ 3-3
Table 3-2 Replacement Pre-installation Checklist .................................................................................. 3-4
Table 3-3 GTN Xi Unit Part Numbers .................................................................................................... 3-5
Table 3-4 GTN Xi Optional Feature Card Part Numbers ....................................................................... 3-5
Table 3-5 GMA 35(c) Unit Part Numbers .............................................................................................. 3-6
Table 3-6 Flight Stream Unit Part Numbers ........................................................................................... 3-6
Table 3-7 GTN 625Xi Black Installation Kit (P/N 010-01997-01) ........................................................ 3-7
Table 3-12 GTN 650Xi Gray Installation Kit (P/N 010-01999-31) ......................................................... 3-8
Table 3-19 GMA 35 Installation Kit (P/N 010-00831-21) ....................................................................... 3-9
Table 3-20 GMA 35c Installation Kit P/N 010-00831-41 Accessories .................................................... 3-9
Table 3-21 Flight Stream 210 Connector Kit P/N 011-03258-00 ............................................................. 3-9
Table 3-22 Accessories Required but Not Supplied ............................................................................... 3-10
Table 3-23 Recommended Crimp Tools ................................................................................................. 3-14
Table 3-24 Screws, Non-Structural ......................................................................................................... 3-15
Table 3-25 Screws, Structural ................................................................................................................. 3-15
Table 3-26 Lock Washer, Carbon Steel, Cad Plated ............................................................................... 3-15
Table 3-27 Washers, Carbon Steel, Cad Plated ...................................................................................... 3-16
Table 3-28 Washers, Carbon Steel, Cad Plated, Large Diameter ........................................................... 3-16
Table 3-29 Washers, Stainless Steel ....................................................................................................... 3-16
Table 3-30 Nuts, Steel ............................................................................................................................. 3-16
Table 3-31 Nuts, Stainless Steel ............................................................................................................. 3-17
Table 3-32 Nut plates, Steel .................................................................................................................... 3-17
Table 3-33 Nut plates, Stainless Steel ..................................................................................................... 3-17
Table 3-34 GPS/SBAS Antennas ............................................................................................................ 3-18
Table 3-35 Power Distribution Section Reference ................................................................................. 3-37
Table 3-36 Circuit Breaker Ratings Reference Figures .......................................................................... 3-38
Table 3-37 LRU Current Draw ............................................................................................................... 3-52
Table 4-1 GPS Antenna TNC Connector ................................................................................................ 4-2
Table 4-2 Socket Contact Part Numbers ............................................................................................... 4-33
Table 4-3 GTN Xi Backshell Assembly ............................................................................................... 4-33
Table 4-4 GMA 35 Backshell Assembly .............................................................................................. 4-35
Table 4-5 Flight Stream 210 Backshell Assembly ................................................................................ 4-36
Table 4-6 Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart ............................................................ 4-46

Rev. 11 Page xv
Table 4-7 Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-03 (P1001) ....................................................... 4-47
Table 4-8 Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-00 (P1001) ....................................................... 4-48
Table 4-9 Fan Kit .................................................................................................................................. 4-49
Table 4-10 Fan Cable Wire Color Reference Chart ................................................................................ 4-49
Table 4-11 LRU Weights ........................................................................................................................ 4-51
Table 5-1 ARINC 429 Speed Selections ............................................................................................... 5-15
Table 5-2 ARINC 429 DATA IN Selections ........................................................................................ 5-15
Table 5-3 ARINC 429 DATA OUT Selections .................................................................................... 5-17
Table 5-4 SDI Selections ...................................................................................................................... 5-18
Table 5-5 RS-232 Channel Input Selections ......................................................................................... 5-19
Table 5-6 RS-232 Channel Output Selections ...................................................................................... 5-22
Table 5-7 GPS Selected Course ............................................................................................................ 5-27
Table 5-8 VLOC Selected Course ........................................................................................................ 5-27
Table 5-9 V-Flag State .......................................................................................................................... 5-28
Table 5-10 Display and Key Lighting Adjustable Fields ....................................................................... 5-30
Table 5-11 Enhanced Lighting Configuration Subpages ........................................................................ 5-32
Table 5-12 Air/Ground Discrete Selections ............................................................................................ 5-37
Table 5-13 Synchro Heading Input Selections ....................................................................................... 5-37
Table 5-14 GPS Select Selections ........................................................................................................... 5-38
Table 5-15 Heading Source Input Selections .......................................................................................... 5-38
Table 5-16 Radio Altimeter Input Selections ......................................................................................... 5-38
Table 5-17 Altitude Source Input Selections .......................................................................................... 5-38
Table 5-18 Enhanced Lighting Mode Selections .................................................................................... 5-39
Table 5-19 Pilot Position Selections ....................................................................................................... 5-39
Table 5-20 Crossfill Status Alert Selections ........................................................................................... 5-39
Table 5-21 Database SYNC Selections .................................................................................................. 5-40
Table 5-22 Blackout Mode Selections .................................................................................................... 5-40
Table 5-23 External Flight Plan Selections ............................................................................................. 5-40
Table 5-24 Remote Database Confirmation Selections .......................................................................... 5-41
Table 5-25 Remote Radio Control Selections ......................................................................................... 5-41
Table 5-26 RX Squelch Mode Selections ............................................................................................... 5-42
Table 5-27 COM RX Squelch Levels ..................................................................................................... 5-43
Table 5-28 Carrier Squelch Selections .................................................................................................... 5-43
Table 5-29 COM Carrier Squelch Levels ............................................................................................... 5-44
Table 5-30 COM Sidetone Source Selections ......................................................................................... 5-44
Table 5-31 Sidetone Pilot Control Settings ............................................................................................. 5-45
Table 5-32 ARINC 429 Configuration Speed (TX) ................................................................................ 5-45
Table 5-33 SDI ........................................................................................................................................ 5-45
Table 5-34 DME Mode ........................................................................................................................... 5-46
Table 5-35 DME Channel Mode ............................................................................................................. 5-46
Table 5-36 Discrete Inputs ...................................................................................................................... 5-48
Table 5-37 Discrete Outputs ................................................................................................................... 5-49
Table 5-38 Vertical Navigation Type ..................................................................................................... 5-52
Table 5-39 Transition To Approach ........................................................................................................ 5-52
Table 5-40 Glide Range Ring Advanced Settings .................................................................................. 5-53
Table 5-41 Smart Glide Configuration Settings ..................................................................................... 5-54
Table 5-42 Glide Table Conversion (Nautical Miles and Feet) .............................................................. 5-56
Table 5-43 Glide Table Conversion (Statute Miles and Feet) ................................................................ 5-56
Table 5-44 Glide Distance Conversion (Nautical Miles per 1000ft Altitude) ........................................ 5-57
Table 5-45 Glide Distance Conversion (Statute Miles per 1000ft Altitude) .......................................... 5-57

Rev. 11 Page xvi
Table 5-46 Smart Glide Advanced Settings ............................................................................................ 5-58
Table 5-47 Stream Active Flight Data Selections ................................................................................... 5-59
Table 5-48 Transfer Past Flight Data Logs Selections ........................................................................... 5-60
Table 5-49 GSD CAUTION Field .......................................................................................................... 5-63
Table 5-50 NCR CAUTION Field .......................................................................................................... 5-63
Table 5-51 ECR CAUTION Field .......................................................................................................... 5-63
Table 5-52 EDR CAUTION Field .......................................................................................................... 5-63
Table 5-53 FIT Flap CAUTION Field .................................................................................................... 5-64
Table 5-54 FIT Gear CAUTION Field ................................................................................................... 5-64
Table 5-55 PDA CAUTION Field .......................................................................................................... 5-64
Table 5-56 FIT Speed CAUTION Field ................................................................................................. 5-64
Table 5-57 FIT Takeoff CAUTION Field .............................................................................................. 5-64
Table 5-58 IOI CAUTION Field ............................................................................................................ 5-64
Table 5-59 ROC CAUTION Field .......................................................................................................... 5-64
Table 5-60 ILI CAUTION Field ............................................................................................................. 5-64
Table 5-61 RLC CAUTION Field .......................................................................................................... 5-65
Table 5-62 ITI CAUTION Field ............................................................................................................. 5-65
Table 5-63 RTC CAUTION Field .......................................................................................................... 5-65
Table 5-64 IOI WARNING Field ........................................................................................................... 5-65
Table 5-65 ROC WARNING Field ........................................................................................................ 5-65
Table 5-66 ILI WARNING Field ............................................................................................................ 5-65
Table 5-67 RLC WARNING Field ......................................................................................................... 5-65
Table 5-68 ITI WARNING Field ............................................................................................................ 5-66
Table 5-69 RTC WARNING Field ......................................................................................................... 5-66
Table 5-70 ECR WARNING Field ......................................................................................................... 5-66
Table 5-71 EDR WARNING Field ......................................................................................................... 5-66
Table 5-72 VCO Field ............................................................................................................................. 5-66
Table 5-73 Airframe-Specific Runway Configuration Data ................................................................... 5-67
Table 5-74 RS-232 Channel 1 Inputs ...................................................................................................... 5-79
Table 5-75 RS-232 Channel 1 Outputs ................................................................................................... 5-79
Table 5-76 RS-232 Channel 2 Inputs ...................................................................................................... 5-80
Table 5-77 RS-232 Channel 2 Outputs ................................................................................................... 5-80
Table 5-78 RS-232 Baud Rate Selections ............................................................................................... 5-81
Table 5-79 RS-232 Parity Selections ...................................................................................................... 5-81
Table 5-80 ARINC 429 Speed Selections ............................................................................................... 5-81
Table 5-81 ARINC 429 Input Selections ................................................................................................ 5-82
Table 5-82 Aircraft Weight ..................................................................................................................... 5-83
Table 5-83 Air/Ground Logic ................................................................................................................. 5-84
Table 5-84 Maximum Airspeed (GTX 33 Only) .................................................................................... 5-84
Table 5-85 Address Type (GTX 33 Only) .............................................................................................. 5-84
Table 5-86 Flight ID Type ...................................................................................................................... 5-85
Table 5-87 RCVR Radio Types .............................................................................................................. 5-96
Table 5-88 GDL 88 Air/Ground Discrete Configurations .................................................................... 5-101
Table 5-89 RS-232 Input Selections ..................................................................................................... 5-104
Table 5-90 RS-232 Output Selections .................................................................................................. 5-105
Table 5-91 ARINC 429 Input Selections .............................................................................................. 5-106
Table 5-92 ARINC 429 Output Selections ........................................................................................... 5-106
Table 5-93 ARINC 429 Speed Selections ............................................................................................. 5-107
Table 5-94 RS-422 Input Selections ..................................................................................................... 5-107
Table 5-95 RS-422 Output Selections .................................................................................................. 5-108

Rev. 11 Page xvii
Table 6-1 Self-Test Values ..................................................................................................................... 6-8
Table 6-2 Marker Beacon Annunciator Light Duration ........................................................................ 6-32
Table 6-3 Autopilot Coupling Limitations ............................................................................................ 6-34
Table C-1 Compatible Audio Panels .......................................................................................................C-2
Table C-2 Compatible Air Data Computers ............................................................................................C-3
Table C-3 Compatible Altitude Serializers and Fuel/Air Data Models ...................................................C-4
Table C-4 Compatible Autopilots ............................................................................................................C-5
Table C-5 Avidyne EFIS Display ............................................................................................................C-7
Table C-6 Honeywell (Bendix/King) EFIS Display ................................................................................C-8
Table C-7 Garmin G500/G600 EFIS Display .........................................................................................C-9
Table C-8 Garmin G5 Display ...............................................................................................................C-10
Table C-9 Garmin G500/G600 TXi EFIS Display ................................................................................C-11
Table C-10 G3X EFIS Display ................................................................................................................C-12
Table C-11 GI 275 EFIS Display ............................................................................................................C-13
Table C-12 Compatible EHSIs ................................................................................................................C-14
Table C-13 Compatible IRU/AHRSs ......................................................................................................C-15
Table C-14 Compatible Transponders .....................................................................................................C-16
Table C-15 Compatible NAV Indicators .................................................................................................C-18
Table C-16 Compatible Weather, Traffic, and Terrain Models .............................................................C-19
Table C-17 Compatible DMEs ................................................................................................................C-20
Table C-18 Compatible CDI/HSIs ...........................................................................................................C-21
Table C-19 Compatible TAWS Annunciator Panels ...............................................................................C-22
Table C-20 Compatible MFDs ................................................................................................................C-23
Table C-21 Compatible Interface Adapters .............................................................................................C-23
Table C-22 Compatible Synchro Heading Sources .................................................................................C-24
Table C-23 Compatible Weather Radar Models .....................................................................................C-24
Table C-24 Compatible Iridium Transceivers .........................................................................................C-25
Table C-25 Compatible ADS-B Traffic and FIS-B Weather Sources .....................................................C-25
Table C-26 Compatible Flight Stream Models ........................................................................................C-25
Table C-27 Compatible Flight Stream 210/510 Equipment ....................................................................C-26
Table C-28 Compatible Radio Altimeters ...............................................................................................C-26
Table C-29 Compatible COM Radios .....................................................................................................C-27
Table C-30 Compatible NAV Radios ......................................................................................................C-27
Table C-31 Compatible RAS Displays ....................................................................................................C-28
Table D-1 Aircraft Model Specific Information ..................................................................................... D-1
Table E-1 Lightning Protection for IFR Nonmetallic Aircraft ................................................................E-2

Rev. 11 Page xviii
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................1-2

1.2 Terminology .....................................................................................................................................1-2
1.3 Scope ................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.3.1 Approved Aircraft with Systems Not Covered by the STC ...................................................1-3
1.3.2 Part 23 Aircraft Not Identified on the AML ..........................................................................1-3
1.3.3 Other Aircraft Not Covered by the AML ...............................................................................1-4
1.3.4 Required Documentation for All Installations .......................................................................1-4
1.4 System Overview .............................................................................................................................1-5
1.4.1 GTN Xi Interface Summary ...................................................................................................1-6
1.4.2 GMA 35 Interface Summary ..................................................................................................1-7
1.4.3 GTN Xi/GTX Interface Overview .........................................................................................1-8
1.5 Technical Specifications ................................................................................................................1-12
1.5.1 Environmental Qualification Forms .....................................................................................1-12
1.5.2 System Documentation ........................................................................................................1-12
1.6 GTN Xi Databases .........................................................................................................................1-15
1.6.1 Basemap Database ...............................................................................................................1-15
1.6.2 Navigation Database ............................................................................................................1-16
1.6.3 FliteCharts® Database (GTN 7XX Xi Only) ......................................................................1-16
1.6.4 ChartView™ Database (GTN 7XX Xi Only) ......................................................................1-16
1.6.5 SafeTaxi® Database ............................................................................................................1-16
1.6.6 Terrain Database ..................................................................................................................1-16
1.6.7 Obstacle Database ................................................................................................................1-16

Rev. 11 Page 1-1
1.1 Introduction
This manual is written for GTN Xi main software v20.12 or later. The software version and information in
this document are subject to change without notice. Visit the Dealer Resource Center on Garmin’s website
for current updates and supplemental information about the GTN Xi.
This manual describes the physical, mechanical, and electrical characteristics, as well as instructions,
conditions, and limitations for installation and approval of the GTN Xi navigators and the optional
GMA 35/35c, GDL 60, and Flight Stream.
1.2 Terminology
Except where specifically noted, references made to:
• “GTN Xi” refer to GTN 625Xi, GTN 635Xi, GTN 650Xi, GTN 725Xi, and GTN 750 Xi.
• “GTN 6XX Xi” refer specifically to the GTN 625Xi, GTN 635Xi, and GTN 650Xi.
• “GTN 7XX Xi” refer specifically to the GTN 725Xi and GTN 750Xi.
• “GMA 35” are synonymous with the GMA 35 and GMA 35c.
“GTN AML STC” refers to STC SA02019SE-D.
Throughout this document, references will be made to metallic and nonmetallic aircraft. For the purposes
of this installation manual, metal aircraft will be those with an aluminum skin. Nonmetallic aircraft will
refer to all other aircraft (e.g., wooden aircraft, aircraft with composite skin, or aircraft with tube-and-
fabric construction).
Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS) refers to a system that supports wide-area augmentation
through the use of broadcast messages from satellites to improve the GPS navigation system accuracy.
SBAS is a general term used to describe systems such as Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) and
European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS).
Enhanced Descent-Only (EDO) Vertical Navigation (VNAV) refers to the VNAV function that provides a
vertical profile guidance during the en route and terminal phases of flight. References made to the VNAV
function will be synonymous with EDO VNAV, unless otherwise noted.
Except where specifically noted, references made to “GTX 335” refer to GTX 335/335R and references
made to “GTX 345” refer to GTX 345/345R. “GTX 3X5” refers to both GTX 335 and GTX 345.

Rev. 11 Page 1-2
1.3 Scope
This installation manual applies to the modification of an aircraft under AML STC SA02019SE-D to
install only the equipment specified below. Additionally, only the interfaces between the GTN Xi,
GMA 35, Flight Stream, and other equipment listed in this manual are covered by STC SA02019SE-D.
 GTN 625Xi
 GTN 635Xi
 GTN 650Xi
 GTN 725Xi
 GTN 750Xi
 GMA 35c
 GDL 60
 Flight Stream 210
 Flight Stream 510
 NAV Antenna cable splitter
 NAV Antenna cable diplexer
 Equipment necessary to support installation of the equipment above, such as the installation kit
accessories (Section 3.5.1) and the wiring and circuit breakers shown in Appendix B.
This STC approves the interface to the equipment listed in Appendix C. However, this STC assumes these
devices are pre-existing. Only the equipment and system interfaces described in this manual have been
determined to be mutually compatible and operationally suitable; these are approved for use as
characterized herein.
This manual does not provide data for the installation mounting or approval of any external sensors or
devices. Equipment and interfaces not covered in this manual require other installation approval.
This STC is applicable for implementation in Part 23 aircraft that are on the Approved Model List (AML).
1.3.1 Approved Aircraft with Systems Not Covered by the STC

Aircraft identified on the Approved Model List have been determined to meet a minimum required
configuration for applicability of the STC. However, because some of these aircraft may have been
modified over the years or may have been manufactured with systems that are not identified or approved in
this manual for integration with the GTN Xi, it may be difficult to use the data herein to completely
substantiate the installation in compliance with the STC. It is the installer’s responsibility to make the final
determination of applicability for each aircraft. Use this manual to assess each installation prior to
modifying any Type Certified aircraft to verify the applicability of the GTN AML STC.
1.3.2 Part 23 Aircraft Not Identified on the AML

Aircraft identified in AC 23.1309-1E as Class I, II, III or IV airplanes that are not identified on the GTN
AML STC may be valid candidates for installation of the GTN Xi/GMA 35. Installers should contact
Garmin Aviation Product Support with detailed drawings of the aircraft’s proposed installation.
Engineering analysis may allow for the inclusion of these aircraft in a future revision of the FAA-
Approved Model List.

Rev. 11 Page 1-3
1.3.3 Other Aircraft Not Covered by the AML
Transport Category Aircraft (Part 25) and Rotorcraft (Part 27/29) are not part of this GTN AML STC.
Certain Part 27 Rotorcraft are covered under the GTN Part 27 AML STC SR02120SE. Aircraft not
covered under either GTN AML STC may be valid candidates for installation of this system. Installers
may contact Garmin for possible additional information that may support an installation of this type.
1.3.4 Required Documentation for All Installations

The configuration log contained in the Maintenance Manual and ICA, GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC must be
completed and retained with the aircraft records and the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness, so any
aircraft with the modifications detailed in this manual may be properly maintained.
NOTE
For software updates, only the differences from the previously installed configuration need
to be recorded and appended to the existing configuration log in the permanent records.

Rev. 11 Page 1-4
1.4 System Overview
The GTN 6XX Xi and GTN 7XX Xi are touch navigators that provide the various attributes identified in
Table 1-1.
The GMA 35 Audio Panel is both a marker beacon receiver and an audio panel that interfaces to the
GTN 7XX Xi, communications and navigation radios, headsets, microphones, and speakers. The GMA 35
is a remote-mounted audio panel that interfaces via RS-232 to the GTN 7XX Xi for control and display of
audio panel functions. The GMA 35 includes a six-position intercom system (ICS) with electronic cabin
noise de-emphasis, two stereo music inputs, and independent pilot/copilot/passenger volume controls. The
intercom provides three selectable isolation modes. A pilot-selectable cabin speaker output can be used to
listen to the selected aircraft radios or to broadcast PA announcements. The GMA 35 marker beacon
receiver includes dual sensitivity and audio muting with automatic re-arming. The GMA 35c provides the
equivalent functionality as the GMA 35, with the additional capability to pair Bluetooth audio sources.
This enables the distribution of audio to ICS positions when using a compatible Bluetooth device.
The addition of a Flight Stream brings wireless connectivity to the cockpit, enabling Portable Electronic
Devices (PED) to stream data to and from the installed avionics. Flight Stream products are compatible
with select iOS and Android devices.
Table 1-1 Attributes of GTN Xi Units

GTN 625Xi GTN 635Xi GTN 650Xi GTN 725Xi GTN 750Xi
GPS/SBAS     
COM Radio   
NAV Radio  
GMA 35 Control  

Rev. 11 Page 1-5
1.4.1 GTN Xi Interface Summary
The GTN Xi utilizes ARINC 429, RS-232, discrete inputs/outputs, and Garmin High Speed Data Bus
(HSDB) interfaces to communicate with other LRUs and systems on the aircraft. A summary of the
GTN Xi interfaces are shown in Figure 1-1. Refer to Appendix B for more details.
NAV Antenna COM AntenQa
GTN 650;L/750;L Only GTN 635;L/650;L/750;LOnly
Antenna
Air Data
Fuel
Management
System
&URVVILOO
Altitude Encoder
>@ >@>@
Transponder Switches/
Annunciators
Garmin
Autopilot
GTN;L GMA 35 Audio
Panel
(or other Audio Panel)
Traffic System
(TAS/TCAS/TCAD) EFIS/MFD
Weather Radar
(GTN 7XX ;Lonly) CDI/HSI
Lightning DME
Detection
Satellite Voice/ GSR 56 [1]

Text/Weather
Flight Stream 210
Datalink [2]
(XM Radio, NEXRAD
Flight Stream 510
GDL 88 [4
GDL Portable
Electronic Device
(Bluetooth capable
>@ GTN;L-GNS Frossfill requires GNS VRIWZDUHv5.03 or later. phone, tablet, etc.)
>@ *71;L*71;;;;FURVVILOOUHTXLUHV*71VRIWZDUHYRUODWHU
>@ *71;L*36*1;*1&FURVVILOOUHTXLUHV*36*1;*1&
VRIWZDUHYRUODWHU
Figure 1-1 GTN Xi System Interface Overview

Rev. 11 Page 1-6
1.4.2 GMA 35 Interface Summary
A summary of the GMA 35 interfaces is shown in Figure 1-2.
Marker Beacon
*71XX;L 56- Antenna
Control+HDG
&20
TUansceiver
&20 Cockpit Speaker

TUansceiver
&20
TUansceiver
Pilot&RSLORW
+HDGVHWV [
NAV 5DGLR Garmin
GM$
NAV5DGLR Audio Panel PDVVHQJHU
+HDGVHWV [
8QVZLWFKHG
DME Radio 8QPXWHG$XGLR
,QSXW [
ADF Radio Music Input [
Marker Beacon
Telephone Audio Annunciators
Bluetooth Audio Flight Control

*0$F2QO\ &RPSXWHU
Figure 1-2 GMA 35 System Interface Overview
The GMA 35 utilizes RS-232, discrete inputs/outputs, and analog audio inputs/outputs to communicate
with other systems on the aircraft. The GMA 35c adds the capability of pairing telephone or music audio
from a Bluetooth device. Refer to Appendix Section B.2 for interconnect drawings.

Rev. 11 Page 1-7
1.4.3 GTN Xi/GTX Interface Overview
This section contains considerations for connecting GTN Xi units to GTX 32/33/327/328/330/3X5
transponders. The GTN Xi utilizes RS-232 to communicate with GTX transponders. Additionally, the
GTN Xi utilizes HSDB to communicate with GTX 345 transponders. Refer to Section 1.4.3.2 if the
GTN Xi will control the transponder. Refer to Section 1.4.3.3 if the GTN Xi will not control the
transponder.
Pressure altitude transmits from the GTN Xi to the GTX over the RS-232 connections. Pressure altitude
does not transmit from the GTX to the GTN Xi over these RS-232 connections except for some GTX 327
interfaces. Refer to Section 1.4.3.2 for more information. It is recommended that the aircraft’s pressure
altitude source be connected directly to the GTN Xi.
If there is only one GTN Xi and one GTX, they communicate over a direct RS-232 connection, as shown
in Figure 1-3.
RS-232
GTN;L GTX 3X/3XX
Figure 1-3 Interface Between One GTN Xi and One GTX
If there are two GTX units, they must both be connected to the GTN Xi, as shown in Figure 1-4. In this
case, the GTN Xi can control both GTX #1 and GTX #2.
GTX 3X/3XX
#1
RS-232
GTN ;L
RS-232
GTX 3X/3XX
#2
Figure 1-4 Interface Between One GTN Xi and Two GTXs

Rev. 11 Page 1-8
Similarly, to connect one GTX to dual GTN Xi units, each GTN Xi needs to have an RS-232 connection to
the single GTX, as shown in Figure 1-5. In this case, both GTN Xi #1 and GTN Xi #2 can control the
transponder.
RS-232
GTN ;L
HSDB GTX 3X/3XX
GTN ;L
RS-232
Figure 1-5 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and One GTX
If there are two GTXs connected to dual GTN Xi units, GTN Xi #1 should be connected to GTX #1 and
GTN Xi #2 should be connected to GTX #2, as shown in Figure 1-6. In this configuration, each GTN Xi is
capable of controlling either GTX.
RS-232 GTX 3X/3XX

GTN ;L
#1
HSDB
GTX 3X/3XX
GTN ;L
RS-232 #2
Figure 1-6 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and Two GTXs

Rev. 11 Page 1-9
To enable TIS traffic for the combination of two GTX units connected to dual GTN Xi units, each of the
GTX units must be connected to both GTN Xi units because the TIS data is not transmitted over HSDB.
Additionally, only the GTX 33, GTX 330, and GTX 335 are capable of receiving TIS traffic data. This
arrangement is shown in Figure 1-7. The pressure altitude source must also be connected to both GTN Xi
units.
RS-232 GTX 33/330

GTN ;L #1
RS-232
#1
HSDB
RS-232
GTX 33/330
GTN ;L #2
RS-232 #2
Figure 1-7 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and Two GTXs with TIS Traffic
1.4.3.1 GTN Xi/GTX 345 Interface Overview

This section contains considerations for connecting GTN Xi units to GTX 345 transponders. The GTN Xi
utilizes HSDB to communicate with GTX 345 transponders. Air data and ADS-B compliant GPS position
data, including heading and pressure altitude, are sent from the GTN Xi to the GTX 345 over HSDB.
ADS-B IN data, including TIS-B traffic and FIS-B data, is transmitted to the GTN Xi from the GTX 345
over HSDB. If an active traffic system is connected to the GTX 345, correlated traffic is provided to the
GTN Xi over HSDB. RS-232 is required only if control of the GTX 345 is desired from the GTN Xi.
GTX 345D/DR transponders require a Time Mark input from the GTN Xi.
For dual transponder installations, if one is a GTX 345 (ADS-B IN), the other must be a GTX 32/33/327/
328/330/335. The GTX 345 can be either Transponder #1 or Transponder #2.
RS-232
HSDB GTX 3

GTN ;L
7LPH0DUN
*7;''5
HSDB
GTN ;L GTX 3/3

RS-232
Figure 1-8 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and One GTX 345 and GTX 3XX

Rev. 11 Page 1-10
1.4.3.2 Installation with GTN Xi Control of GTX Transponder
When connected to a GTX 32/33/327/328/330/3X5, the GTN Xi can control the transponder as well as
transmit pressure altitude (if a pressure altitude source is connected to the GTN Xi). GTN Xi and GTX
configuration settings can be found in Appendix Section C.1.8 and Figure B-12, respectively.
1.4.3.3 Installation without GTN Xi Control of GTX Transponder

The GTX 327, 328, 330, and 3X5 can be connected to the GTN Xi without allowing the GTN Xi to control
the transponder functions. GTN Xi and GTX configuration settings can be found in Appendix Section
C.1.8 and Figure B-12, respectively.
If the GTN Xi is not set to control the GTX 327, the interface to the GTX 327 is not required. However, the
GTN Xi can send GPS groundspeed to the transponder. Also, if the GTN Xi is not controlling the
GTX 327, the GTN Xi can optionally receive pressure altitude from the GTX 327.
NOTE
When the GTN Xi is not controlling the GTX 327 Transponder, pressure altitude data is
not sent from the GTN Xi to the GTX 327. Instead, the pressure altitude source must be
connected to the transponder.
For the GTX 330 and GTX 335, TIS traffic can still be sent to the GTN Xi even if the GTN Xi is not
controlling the transponder. If GTN Xi control of the GTX 330/335 and display of TIS traffic from the
transponder on the GTN Xi is not desired, then GPS position, track, and velocity can still be sent to the
transponder.

Rev. 11 Page 1-11
1.5 Technical Specifications
The following installation manuals contain technical specifications for the specific unit:
Table 1-2 Garmin Installation Manuals

Document Garmin P/N
GTN Xi Series TSO Installation Manual 190-02327-02
GMA 35/35c Installation Manual 190-00858-11
Flight Stream 110/210 TSO Installation Manual 190-01700-00
GDL 60 TSO Installation Manual 190-02525-00
1.5.1 Environmental Qualification Forms

The latest revision of the Environmental Qualification Forms for the GTN Xi, the GMA 35, and the Flight
Stream 210 are available directly from Garmin under the part numbers listed in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3 Equipment Environmental Qualification Forms

Document Garmin P/N
GTN 625/635/650 Bravo Environmental Qualification Form 005-01269-0A
GTN 725/750 Bravo Environmental Qualification Form 005-01269-0B
Garmin GMA 35 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00567-01
Garmin Flight Stream 110/210 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00818-03
Refer to the Dealer Resource Center on Garmin’s website to obtain a copy of these forms.
1.5.2 System Documentation

Table 1-4 Garmin STC Documentation
Document Garmin P/N
Master Drawing List, GTN 6XX/7XX Part 23 AML STC 005-00533-C0
Equipment List, GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC 005-00533-L1
Maintenance Manual and ICA, GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC 190-01007-C1
AFMS or SAFM, Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS Navigation System 190-01007-C2
AFMS or SAFM for the Garmin GTN 6XX Xi/7XX Xi GPS/SBAS
190-01007-C3
Navigation System, GPS Functions Not Approved for IFR Navigation
GTN 6XX/7XX Part 23 Installation Checklist 190-01007-E1
GDL 60 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-02525-10

Rev. 11 Page 1-12
Table 1-5 Garmin Reference Documentation
Document Garmin P/N
Flight Stream 110/210 TSO Installation Manual 190-01700-00
GAD 42 TSO Installation Manual 190-00159-10
GMA 35/35c Installation Manual 190-00858-11
GTN Xi Series TSO Installation Manual 190-02327-02
GTN Xi Series Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03
GTX 3X5 TSO Installation Manual 190-01499-02
400W Series Installation Manual 190-00356-02
500W Series Installation Manual 190-00357-02
G500 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01102-06
G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06
GA 35, GA 36, GA 37 Antenna Installation Instructions 190-00848-00
GDL 60 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-02525-10
GDL 69 Series TSO Manual 190-00355-07
GDL 69/69A Installation Manual 190-00355-02
GDL 69 Series SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Activation Instructions 190-00355-04
GDL 84/88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01310-00
GDL 84/88 TSO Installation Manual 190-01122-00
GDU 620 Installation Manual 190-00601-04
GMA 350/350H Installation Manual 190-01134-11
GMX 200 Installation Manual 190-00607-04
GSR 56 Installation Manual 190-00836-00
GTX 32 Installation Manual 190-00303-60
GTX 327 Transponder Installation Manual 190-00187-02
GTX 330/330D Transponder Installation Manual 190-00207-02
GWX 68 Installation Manual 190-00286-01
GWX 70 Installation Manual 190-00829-01
GWX Processor Installation Manual 190-02009-00
Garmin G5 Electronic Flight Instrument Part 23 AML STC Installation
190-01112-10
Manual
GFC 500 Autopilot with Electronic Stability and Protection
190-02291-00
Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual
GFC 600 Automatic Flight Control System Part 23 AML STC
190-01937-00
Installation Manual
G500/G600 TXi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01717-B3
GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-02246-10

Rev. 11 Page 1-13
Table 1-6 Other Reference Documentation
Document P/N
FAA Advisory Circular, Airborne VHF Communications Equipment
FAA AC 20-67B
Installations
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and
FAA AC 43.13-1B
Practices – Aircraft Inspection and Repair
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and
FAA AC 43.13-2B
Practices – Aircraft Alterations
FAA Advisory Circular, Airworthiness Approval of Global Navigation
FAA AC 20-138D
Satellite System (GNSS) Equipment
Aerospace Systems Electrical Bonding and Grounding for
SAE ARP1870
Electromagnetic Compatibility and Safety
Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load and Power Source
ASTM F2490-05e1
Capacity Analysis

Rev. 11 Page 1-14
1.6 GTN Xi Databases
The GTN Xi utilizes various databases. All databases are loaded to the GTN Xi through the single data
card that is inserted into the vertical slot on the left side of the GTN Xi. All databases are stored internally
to the GTN Xi. Database updates can be applied in Normal mode at power-up. Alternatively, the databases
can be updated in Configuration mode via the Updates page. The GTN Xi, by default, will only update to
effective databases. If loading databases that are not yet effective, or if the GTN Xi GPS time is out-of-
date, press and hold the dual-concentric knob during power-up to install all database updates from the data
card.
Databases are updated by removing the database card from the GTN Xi, updating the database on the card,
and re-inserting the card. Databases can also be updated using a Flight Stream 510 wireless data card and a
portable device. When powering on in Normal mode with a Flight Stream 510 inserted into the database
card slot, the GTN Xi will provide on-screen instructions on how to transfer databases from a portable
device (with a compatible application) over Wi-Fi. Additionally, databases can be updated via an installed
GDL 60. Refer to GDL 60 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual (P/N 190-02525-10) for more
information.
Database cards and the Flight Stream 510 should not be swapped between GTN Xi units, if multiple units
are installed.
GTN Xi users update their database card by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin.
Contact Garmin at (866) 739-5687 or go to flyGarmin.com for more information and instructions. Refer to
Table 1-7 for a summary of the database location and update rate.
The GTN Xi Database Card (Garmin P/N 010-02044-( )) includes the following databases: Basemap,
Obstacle, SafeTaxi, FliteCharts, and Navigation.
GTN Xi users may update their databases by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin. The
database card is programmed using an SD card reader. Contact Garmin at (866) 739-5687 or visit
flyGarmin.com for more information and instructions.
CAUTION
The first time the Supplemental Data Card is inserted into a GTN Xi, it associates
exclusively with that particular GTN Xi and will not work in other units.
Table 1-7 GTN Xi Database Summary

Database Update Rate Stored Location
Basemap Database Periodic (When available) Internal
Navigation Database 28 Days Internal
FliteCharts Database 28 Days Internal
ChartView Database 14 Days Internal
SafeTaxi Database 56 Days Internal
Terrain Database Periodic (When available) Internal
Obstacle Database with Hotlines 56 Days Internal
1.6.1 Basemap Database

The Basemap database provides ground-based references, such as major roads and bodies of water. The
database is stored in the GTN Xi internal memory. The Basemap database does not have a scheduled
update cycle and as such does not have an expiration date. The Basemap database is updated infrequently.

Rev. 11 Page 1-15
1.6.2 Navigation Database
The Navigation database provides the GTN Xi with the required information for displaying flight plan
information.
1.6.3 FliteCharts® Database (GTN 7XX Xi Only)

FliteCharts resembles the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. FliteCharts
database subscription is available from Garmin. The FliteCharts database is stored in the GTN Xi internal
memory.
1.6.4 ChartView™ Database (GTN 7XX Xi Only)

ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The ChartView database is
stored in the GTN Xi internal memory.
GTN Xi users update their ChartView data by purchasing database subscription updates from Jeppesen
Sanderson. The database card is programmed using an SD card reader and Jeppesen-provided software.
Contact Jeppesen at (800) 621-5377 or www.jeppesen.com for more information and instructions.
ChartView is an optional feature that must be activated for use. Instructions for activating the ChartView
function are found in Section 5.4.4.2.
1.6.5 SafeTaxi® Database

SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 900 airports in
the United States. The SafeTaxi database is stored in the GTN Xi internal memory.
1.6.6 Terrain Database

The Terrain database provides basic terrain awareness functionality and is required for terrain proximity
functionality. It is used by the system for TAWS alerting (TAWS enablement is required for functionality).
The Terrain database is stored in the GTN Xi internal memory.
1.6.7 Obstacle Database

The Obstacle database provides identification of known obstacles and power lines greater than 200 feet
AGL. This database is also used with Terrain Proximity and TAWS functionality. The Obstacle database is
stored in the GTN Xi internal memory.

Rev. 11 Page 1-16
2 LIMITATIONS
2.1 Operational Limitations ..................................................................................................................2-2

2.2 Installation Limitations ...................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.1 Equipment Interfaced to the GTN Xi, GMA 35, GDL 60, and Flight Stream 210/510 .......2-3
2.2.2 Power System ........................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.3 Traffic Sensor Interfaced to the GTN Xi ..............................................................................2-3
2.2.4 GPS/SBAS Antenna Limitations ..........................................................................................2-3
2.2.5 External CDI Interface ..........................................................................................................2-3
2.2.6 Flight Stream 210/510 ...........................................................................................................2-3
2.2.7 GMA 35/35c with Marker Beacon in IFR Aircraft ...............................................................2-4
2.2.8 Automatic Speech Recognition .............................................................................................2-4
2.2.9 Installations in EASA-Controlled Member States ................................................................2-4
Limitations for specific aircraft models can be found in Appendix D.

Rev. 11 Page 2-1
2.1 Operational Limitations
Refer to the applicable Airplane Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) for operational limitations.
Refer to Appendix D for additional operational limitations for specific aircraft.

Rev. 11 Page 2-2
2.2 Installation Limitations
2.2.1 Equipment Interfaced to the GTN Xi, GMA 35, GDL 60, and Flight Stream 210/510
Installation approval under this STC is limited to the GTN Xi, GMA 35/35c, Flight Stream 210/510
interfaces to aircraft systems specified in this installation manual. Equipment interfaced to the GTN Xi
must be electrically bonded to the same airframe ground plane as the GTN Xi to ensure that the GTN Xi
cable shields terminating at the remote end equipment are electrically bonded to airframe ground. Refer to
Section 3.6.6.2 for instructions on electrically bonding the interfaced equipment.
The GTN Xi may be interfaced to a weather radar in metal aircraft only.
The Flight Stream 510 cannot be installed in the same system as a GDL 60.
Refer to GDL 60 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual (P/N 190-02525-10) for information, including
limitations, specifically related to the GDL 60.
2.2.2 Power System

For aircraft certified under 14 CFR Part 23, Post Amendment 41, use of the GTN Xi for IFR operations is
limited to aircraft with a functional redundant electrical power system for the primary navigation unit.
2.2.3 Traffic Sensor Interfaced to the GTN Xi

For installations with dual GTN Xi units installed, this STC does not approve interfacing a different traffic
sensor to each GTN Xi. Use of the GTX 345 or GDL 88 to correlate traffic from another traffic sensor is
acceptable and does not violate this limitation.
2.2.4 GPS/SBAS Antenna Limitations

The GTN Xi is limited to using one of the GPS/SBAS antennas listed in Table 3-34. For multiple GPS
installations in nonmetallic IFR aircraft, the GPS antennas must not be mounted in a straight line from the
front to the rear of the fuselage to prevent a single lightning strike causing damage to all GPS systems.
Antennas interfaced to the GTN Xi must be electrically bonded to the same airframe ground plane as the
GTN Xi.
2.2.5 External CDI Interface

An analog course deviation indicator must not be interfaced to the GTN Xi main board connector (P1001)
when the GTN Xi is also interfaced to an electronic display that provides GPS selected course via
ARINC 429. It is acceptable to interface the analog CDI to the GTN Xi navigation board connector
(P1004). Refer to Appendix C for a list of currently approved electronic display interfaces.
2.2.6 Flight Stream 210/510

The Flight Stream 210/510 interface and data provided to a PED is not approved to replace any required or
installed aircraft display equipment, including navigation or traffic/weather display equipment.

Rev. 11 Page 2-3
2.2.7 GMA 35/35c with Marker Beacon in IFR Aircraft
The GMA 35/35c must not be connected to an autopilot and/or more than one PFD if both of the following
conditions are true:
 The GMA 35/35c (P/N 011-02299-20 and P/N 011-02299-40, respectively) is connected to a
marker beacon antenna that is not protected for direct effects of lightning.
 The GMA 35/35c is installed in an IFR-certified aircraft.
2.2.8 Automatic Speech Recognition

The voice command configuration setting described in Section 5.4.3.8.1 must be set to DISABLED in the
following aircraft types:
 Open cockpit aircraft.
 Aircraft with radial engine(s).
 Unpressurized aircraft with turbine engine(s).
 Multi-engine centerline thrust aircraft with horizontally-opposed engines.
 Aircraft with more than two horizontally-opposed engines.
2.2.9 Installations in EASA-Controlled Member States

For installations of the GTN Xi in Class IV aircraft operated in EASA-controlled member states, the
GTN Xi is required to be interfaced to an HSI that is automatically slaved to the computed path.

Rev. 11 Page 2-4
3 PREPARATION
3.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................................3-2

3.2 GTN Xi/GMA 35/Flight Stream 210 Installation Overview ..........................................................3-2
3.3 Pre-installation Checklist ................................................................................................................3-3
3.3.1 Replacement of GTN 6XX/7XX with GTN Xi ....................................................................3-4
3.4 Available Equipment ......................................................................................................................3-5
3.5 Installation Materials ......................................................................................................................3-7
3.5.1 Accessories Available from Garmin .....................................................................................3-7
3.5.2 Items Required but Not Supplied ........................................................................................3-10
3.5.3 Lightning Protection Materials ...........................................................................................3-12
3.5.4 Special Tools Required .......................................................................................................3-14
3.5.5 Hardware .............................................................................................................................3-15
3.6 Installation Considerations ...........................................................................................................3-18
3.6.1 GPS/SBAS Antenna Requirements ....................................................................................3-18
3.6.2 Minimum System Configuration ........................................................................................3-19
3.6.3 GTN Xi External Sensors and Devices ...............................................................................3-20
3.6.4 GDL 88 Interface Considerations .......................................................................................3-25
3.6.5 Antenna Considerations ......................................................................................................3-26
3.6.6 Electrical Bonding ...............................................................................................................3-30
3.6.7 Placards and Labels .............................................................................................................3-37
3.6.8 Power Distribution ..............................................................................................................3-37
3.6.9 Optional Switch Installation ................................................................................................3-40
3.6.10 External Annunciations .......................................................................................................3-41
3.6.11 Unit Mounting Considerations ............................................................................................3-41
3.6.12 Cable and Wiring Considerations .......................................................................................3-48
3.6.13 GTN Xi Cooling Requirements ..........................................................................................3-49
3.6.14 GMA 35 Cooling Requirements .........................................................................................3-49
3.6.15 Flight Stream 210 Cooling Requirements ...........................................................................3-49
3.6.16 Audio Electrical Noise ........................................................................................................3-49
3.6.17 GMA 35 Wiring Considerations for Failsafe Operation .....................................................3-50
3.6.18 Magnetic Compass Recalibration .......................................................................................3-50
3.6.19 Weather Radar Wiring Considerations ...............................................................................3-50
3.6.20 Smart Glide Considerations ................................................................................................3-50
3.6.21 TAWS-A Installation Considerations .................................................................................3-51
3.7 Electrical Load Analysis ...............................................................................................................3-52
3.7.1 Aircraft with Existing Electrical Load Analysis .................................................................3-53
3.7.2 Aircraft without Existing Electrical Load Analysis ............................................................3-53
3.7.3 Performing an Electrical Load Analysis by Measurement .................................................3-54

Rev. 11 Page 3-1
3.1 Introduction
This section is an overview of the steps required for the installation of the GTN Xi Navigator, GMA 35
Audio Panel, and the Flight Stream 210/510.
NOTE
Refer to Appendix E and Appendix D for additional information regarding electrical
bonding and lightning protection.
3.2 GTN Xi/GMA 35/Flight Stream 210 Installation Overview
NOTE
The Flight Stream 210/510 interface and data provided by the device is not approved to
replace any required aircraft navigation or other required equipment. Use of the data
provided by the Flight Stream interface in this way is outside of the scope of this STC
approval.
Always follow acceptable avionics installation practices per AC 43.13-1B, AC 43.13-2B, or later revisions
of these documents. The GPS/SBAS installation instructions have been prepared to meet the guidance
material contained in AC 20-138D, Airworthiness Approval of Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)
Equipment. The communications installation instructions have been prepared to meet the guidance
material defined by AC 20-67B, Airborne VHF Communications Equipment Installations. Follow the
installation procedure in this section, as it is presented, to accomplish a successful installation. Read the
entire section before beginning the work.
Prior to installation, consider the structural integrity of the GTN Xi, GMA 35, and Flight Stream 210
installation as defined in Section 4.3, Section 4.4, and Section 4.5, respectively. Complete an Electrical
Load Analysis (in accordance with the instructions in Section 3.7) on the aircraft prior to starting the
modification to ensure the aircraft has the electrical capacity to carry the load for the new equipment being
installed. Once the installation is complete, perform the post-installation checkout described in Section 6
before closing the work area.

Rev. 11 Page 3-2
3.3 Pre-installation Checklist
Before beginning a GTN Xi/GMA 35 installation, it is important to verify that the aircraft meets the
prerequisites for the installation of the GTN Xi system under this STC. The following checklist is provided
to help the installer determine the necessary requirements that must be met before beginning installation of
the GTN Xi in a specific aircraft. Ensure each of the items outlined is completed as necessary before
beginning the modification.
If replacing an existing GTN 6XX/7XX with an equivalent GTN Xi unit, instead refer to Section 3.3.1.
Table 3-1 Pre-installation Checklist
GTN 625Xi
GTN 635Xi
GTN 650Xi
GTN 725Xi
GTN 750Xi
Complete
GMA 35
Item Reference
AML attached to       
Aircraft is on Approved Model List (AML)
STC Certificate
Acceptable mounting provisions have been      
Section 4.3
identified for GTN Xi
Acceptable mounting provisions have been  
Section 4.4
identified for GMA 35
Acceptable GPS/SBAS antenna installed Section 3.6.1      
Section 3.5.2.1   
NAV antenna installed
Section 3.6.5.7
Section 3.5.2.1    
COM antenna installed
Section 3.6.5.7
Marker beacon antenna installed for GMA 35c  
Section 3.5.2.1
installations
External annunciations supplied if required for      
Section 3.6.11
IFR installations
Planned equipment interfaces are approved       
Appendix C
under the STC or have other FAA approval [1]
Installation/operational limitations reviewed to
ensure that the limitations will not adversely Section 2       
impact the installation
Aircraft electrical system is sufficient for GTN Xi       
Section 3.7
and GMA 35 installation
External CDI for IFR installations and/or Section 3.6.2.2      
installation in Type Rated Aircraft [2] Section 3.6.2.3
Second GPS navigator, COM radio, or NAV radio Section 3.6.2.2      
for IFR installations Section 3.6.2.3
Determination of applicable lightning protection Appendix E      
needed for each aircraft model Appendix D
Notes:
[1] For installations that intend to enable the VNAV function, ensure that the GTN Xi has an
approved baro-corrected altitude source and is connected to an approved audio panel.
[2] Refer to Appendix Section C.1.9 for a list of CDIs approved for use with the GTN Xi.

Rev. 11 Page 3-3
3.3.1 Replacement of GTN 6XX/7XX with GTN Xi
When replacing an existing GTN 6XX/7XX that was installed per STC SA02019SE-D with an equivalent
GTN Xi unit, use this checklist to determine the required procedures to replace the unit.
Table 3-2 Replacement Pre-installation Checklist
GTN 625Xi
GTN 635Xi
GTN 650Xi
GTN 725Xi
GTN 750Xi
Complete
Step Item Reference
GTN 6XX/7XX Part 23

Upgrade GTN 6XX/7XX software to      
1 AML STC Installation
v6.70 or later prior to removal.
Manual
Verify that the GTN 6XX/7XX GTN 6XX/7XX Part 23
2 Configuration Log is available and AML STC Maintenance      
correctly filled out. Manual Appendix A
Remove the GTN 6XX/7XX unit and
GTN Xi Part 23 AML
install the GTN Xi unit per the      
3 STC Maintenance
instructions in the maintenance manual.
Manual
Update the software if needed.
Verify that the removed GTN 6XX/7XX
installation meets the installation
4 limitations contained in Section 2 of this Section 2      
manual. Modify the installation as
necessary to satisfy these limitations.
Configure COM and VOR/LOC/GS Section 5.4.3.11
5 settings on the GTN Setup page using    
the guidance in this manual. Section 5.4.3.12
Verify Lighting/Enhanced Lighting GTN 6XX/7XX Part 23

6 settings match the GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Maintenance      
Configuration Log. Manual Appendix A
In dual GTN Xi or a GTN Xi-GTN 6XX/
7XX installation, configure the      
7 Section 5.4.3.4
Cross-side Navigator setting
appropriately on both units.
GTN 6XX/7XX Part 23
Verify all configuration settings using the      
8 AML STC Maintenance
GTN 6XX/7XX Configuration Log.
Manual Appendix A
Complete the Configuration Log in the GTN Xi Part 23 AML
9 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Maintenance STC Maintenance      
Manual. Manual Appendix A
Update all databases (existing database      
10 Section 1.6
cards are usable).
Complete all applicable checkout      
11 Section 6
procedures.

Rev. 11 Page 3-4
3.4 Available Equipment
Table 3-3 GTN Xi Unit Part Numbers
Model Unit P/N Catalog P/N
GTN 625Xi 011-04629-00 010-01997-00
011-04630-00 010-01998-00
GTN 635Xi
011-04630-01 [2] 010-01998-04 [2]
011-04631-00 010-01999-00
011-04631-01 [2] 010-01999-04 [2]
GTN 650Xi
011-04631-30 [1] 010-01999-30 [1]
011-04631-31 [1] [2] 010-01999-34 [1] [2]
GTN 725Xi 011-04632-00 010-02000-00
011-04634-00 010-02002-00
011-04634-01 [2] 010-02002-04 [2]
GTN 750Xi
011-04634-30 [1] 010-02002-30 [1]
011-04634-31 [1] [2] 010-02002-34 [1] [2]
Notes:
[1] Indicates gray bezel units.
[2] Requires COM software v2.10 or later.
Each enablement card listed in Table 3-4 can only be used with the unit that it was initially used to enable
the feature and cannot be used to enable the feature on any other GTN Xi.
Table 3-4 GTN Xi Optional Feature Card Part Numbers

Item P/N
GTN 6XX/7XX 16 Watt COM Enablement Card 010-00878-04
GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS-A Enablement Card 010-00878-05
GTN 6XX/7XX Internal TAWS-B Enablement Card 010-00878-01
GTN 6XX/7XX Search and Rescue Enablement Card [1] 010-00878-03
GTN 7XX ChartView Enablement Card 010-00878-40
GTN 7XX Digital Radar Enablement Card 010-00878-42
GTN 7XX Radar AGCS Enablement Card 010-00878-44
GTN 7XX Radar Turbulence Detection 010-00878-45
Radar AGCS Enablement, G500/G600 TXi/GTN Xi 010-01477-4T
Radar Turbulence Detection, G500/G600 TXi/GTN Xi 010-01477-4U
GWX 8000 Enablement, G500/G600 TXi/GTN Xi 010-01477-4S
Notes:
[1] In dual installations, only one enablement card is needed to activate search and rescue
patterns. The second unit is automatically enabled.

Rev. 11 Page 3-5
Table 3-5 GMA 35(c) Unit Part Numbers
Item Unit P/N Catalog P/N Voltage (VDC)
GMA 35 011-02299-20 010-00831-20 11-33
GMA 35c 011-02299-40 010-00831-40 11-33
Table 3-6 Flight Stream Unit Part Numbers

Item Unit P/N Catalog P/N Voltage (VDC)
Flight Stream 210 011-03257-40 010-01194-40 11-33
011-03595-00 010-01322-01
Flight Stream 510 N/A
011-03595-10 [1] 010-01322-11
Notes:
[1] Requires Flight Stream software v2.80 or later.
For part numbers related to the installation of the GDL 60, refer to GDL 60 Part 23 AML STC Installation
Manual (P/N 190-02525-10).

Rev. 11 Page 3-6
3.5 Installation Materials
3.5.1 Accessories Available from Garmin
Table 3-7 GTN 625Xi Black Installation Kit (P/N 010-01997-01)

Used With Item P/N
Connector kit, GTN 625 011-02325-00
SMP, mounting rack, GTN 6XX 115-01293-00
GTN 625Xi (Black) Backplate sub-assembly, GTN 625 011-02245-00
Configuration module kit 011-00979-03
Product info kit, GTN Xi Series K00-01079-00

Used With Item P/N

Used With Item P/N
GTN 635Xi (Black)
Backplate sub-assembly, GTN 635 011-02245-01
-X1

Used With Item P/N

Used With Item P/N
GTN 650Xi (Black)
-X1

Rev. 11 Page 3-7
Table 3-12 GTN 650Xi Gray Installation Kit (P/N 010-01999-31)
Used With Item P/N
GTN 650Xi (Gray) Backplate sub-assembly, GTN 650 011-02245-02

Used With Item P/N
GTN 650Xi (Gray)
-X1

Used With Item P/N
GTN 725 (Black) Backplate sub-assembly, GTN 725 011-02246-00

Used With Item P/N
GTN 750 (Black) Backplate sub-assembly, GTN 750 011-02246-02

Used With Item P/N
GTN 750 (Black)
-X1

Rev. 11 Page 3-8
Used With Item P/N
GTN 750 (Gray) Backplate sub-assembly, GTN 750 011-02246-02

Used With Item P/N
GTN 750 (Gray)
-X1
Table 3-19 GMA 35 Installation Kit (P/N 010-00831-21)

Used With Item P/N
Backplate assembly, GMA 35 011-02300-00
GMA 35 Connector kit, GMA 35 011-02302-00
SMP, install rack, GMA 35 115-01464-00
Table 3-20 GMA 35c Installation Kit P/N 010-00831-41 Accessories

Used With Item P/N
Backplate assembly, GMA 35 011-02300-00
Connector kit, GMA 35 011-02302-00
GMA 35c
Install rack, SMP 115-01464-00
Bluetooth antenna kit 011-03909-00
Table 3-21 Flight Stream 210 Connector Kit P/N 011-03258-00

Used With Item P/N
Backshell assembly with hardware 011-01855-00
Flight Stream 210 15-pin high density D-sub 330-00626-15
Crimp pins #22 336-00021-00

Rev. 11 Page 3-9
3.5.2 Items Required but Not Supplied
3.5.2.1 GTN Xi and GMA 35 Accessories
The following accessories are required for the installation, but not supplied by Garmin.
Table 3-22 Accessories Required but Not Supplied

Item Requirements
Must meet TSO-C144( ). Refer to Section 3.6.1 for acceptable part
GPS/SBAS Antenna
numbers.
COM Antenna Must meet TSO-C37( ) and C38( ) or TSO-C169( ). 50 , vertically
(GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi only) polarized with coaxial cable.
Marker Beacon Antenna
Must meet TSO-C35( ).
(GMA 35)
Must meet TSO-C40( ) and C36( ). 50 , horizontally polarized with
NAV Antenna
coaxial cable. Note that if the NAV antenna is a combined VOR/
(GTN 650Xi/750Xi only)
LOC/GS antenna, it must meet TSO-C40( ), C36( ), and C34( ).
Glideslope Antenna Must meet TSO-C34( ).50 , horizontally polarized with coaxial
(GTN 650Xi/750Xi only) cable or low-loss splitter used with the VOR/LOC antenna.
Headphones 500  nominal impedance.
Microphone Low impedance, carbon or dynamic, with transistorized pre-amp.
3.5.2.2 GTN Xi Installation Materials

The following items are required for installation, but not supplied:
 Wire (MIL-W-22759/16, MIL-W-22759/18, or equivalent). If MIL-W-22759/18 wire is utilized,
extra care must be taken to adequately support and protect the wiring due to its thinner insulation.
 Shielded wire (MIL-C-27500 cable utilizing M22759/18 wire (TG) or ETFE jacket).
 Aircraft grade category 5 Ethernet cable is required for installations utilizing HSDB interfaces.
The following Ethernet cable part numbers are acceptable for this installation:
Manufacturer Part Number Gauge
E10422 [1] 22 AWG
PIC WIRE AND CABLE E10424
E12424
EMTEQ D100-0824-100
24 AWG
THERMAX MX100Q-24
CARLISLE IT 392404
GIGAFLIGHT GF100T-24CAT5
Notes:
[1] E10422 cable is not recommended because of the larger insulation diameter, making it very
hard to work with in the high density connectors. E1042X cable is also not recommended due
to the insulation shrinkage that can occur.
 Refer to Section 3.5.5 for installation hardware, including screws, nuts/nut plates, washers, and
rivets.
 Klixon 7274 Series push/pull manually resettable circuit breakers (refer to drawings in
Appendix B for circuit breaker ratings).

Rev. 11 Page 3-10
 Tie wraps or lacing cord.
 Ring terminals (MS25036).
 Coaxial cable (RG-400, RG-142B, or equivalent) (refer to Section 3.6.12.2).
 Shield terminators (MIL-S-83519).
 Silicone fusion tape (A-A-59163, MIL-I-46852C).
 Certain installations require aluminum foil tape (3M P/N 436, 438, or other adhesive-backed dead
soft aluminum foil 7.2 mils thick or greater) (Refer to Section 3.6.5.6).
 Tubular braid, 7/16" or wider (P/N QQB575R30T437)
OR
Flat braid, 3/4" or wider (P/N QQB575F36T781).
 M39012/26-0503 connector, RF Coaxial, TNC Straight Plug, MIL-PRF-39012.
 Lightning protection is required for some models on the AML. Refer to Table E-1. Refer to
Section 3.5.3 for a list of materials required for lightning protection.
3.5.2.3 GMA 35c Installation Materials

 Aircraft hardware for installation, including screws, nuts/nut plates, washers, and rivets, as noted
in Section 4.3.
 Stereo headphone jacks (up to six), microphone jacks (up to six), 3.5mm stereo jacks (up to two),
and insulating washers for all.
 Coaxial cable RG-400 and RG-188 (or RG-179).
 Hook and loop fastener tape (optional) A-A 55126.
3.5.2.4 Flight Stream 210 Installation Materials

 Aviation hardware for installation, including #6 screws, and nut/nut plates, as noted in
Section 4.5.1.
 Bonding strap hardware detailed in Section 3.6.6, including 1/4" braid (P/N QQB575R36T0250)
or wider.
3.5.2.5 NAV Antenna Interface Accessories

Some aircraft may require the use of a splitter or diplexer for connection of the VOR/LOC and GS
antennas, or combination VOR/LOC/GS antennas. Refer to Figure B-18 to determine if a splitter or
diplexer is required for the installation.
 Garmin P/N 013-00112-00 (Mini-Circuits ZFSC-2-1B+)
 Comant Diplexer VOR/GS, Model CI-507

Rev. 11 Page 3-11
3.5.3 Lightning Protection Materials
3.5.3.1 Transient Voltage Suppression Materials
Refer to Appendix Section E.1 for detailed information regarding which parts are required for a particular
aircraft model.
CAUTION
Either 15KPA48A or 30KPA48A can be used for TVS1. Only 30KPA48A can be used for TVS2.
• Transient Voltage Suppressor 30KPA48A

OR
Transient Voltage Suppressor 15KPA48A
Referred to as TVS1 and TVS2 in the interconnect drawings in Appendix B
• Fuse, 3AG Fast-Acting, 4A Littelfuse (P/N 0312004)
Referred to as F1 in Figure B-4
• Fuse, 10A Littelfuse, (P/N 0312010)
Referred to as F2 in Figure B-4
• Fuse Holder, Inline, Cooper Bussmann (P/N HFB)
Referred to as F1 or F2 in Figure B-4
• Connector, 4-Pin Plug (socket housing) and Cap (pin housing),
Tyco Electronics (P/Ns 1-480424-0 and 1-480426-0, respectively)
Referred to as 4 Pin Connector in Appendix B
• Sockets, Qty. 4, Tyco Electronics P/N (60617-1 or 60619-1)
• Pins, Qty. 4, Tyco Electronics, P/N (60618-1 or 60620-1)
• Electrical tie-down strap, MS3367-1-X
3.5.3.2 Instrument Panel Bonding Materials

If the instrument panel is electrically isolated from the aircraft structure, it must be bonded to the aircraft
structure for this installation. Refer to Section 4.2 for the installation procedure of the instrument panel
bonding strap. The following items are required, but not supplied:
• Tinned copper flat braid, 3/4", QQB575F36T781 (recommended)
OR
Tinned copper tubular braid, 7/16", QQB575R30T437
• Terminal lug, 5/16", uninsulated, MS20659-131
• Bolt, AN5-XA
• Locknut, 5/16"
• Lock washer, 5/16", NASM35338-45 (Figure 4-4, washer 1)
• Flat washer, 5/16", NAS1149F0532P (Figure 4-4, washer 2)
• Flat washer, 0.063" thick, NASM970-5 (AN970-5) (Figure 4-4, washer 3)

Rev. 11 Page 3-12
3.5.3.3 Manufacturer Information
NOTE
Manufacturer information is provided for convenience only. It was current at the time of
initial publication and may change at any time.
Aluminum Foil Tape: Fuse holder:

3M COOPER Bussmann
3M Corporate Headquarters 114 Old State Road
3M Center Ellisville, MO 63021-5942
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000 Phone: 636-394-2877
Phone: 1-888-364-3577 Fax: 800-544-2570
www.3m.com www.cooperindustries.com
Tinned Copper Braid: TVS:
Alpha Wire Company711 Microsemi Corporation Corporate Headquarters
Lidgerwood Avenue One Enterprise
Elizabeth, NJ 07207-0711 Aliso Viejo, CA 92656
Phone: 1-800-522-5742 Phone: (800) 713-4113
Fax: (908) 925-6923 Fax: (949) 215-4996
www.alphawire.com www.microsemi.com
OR OR
Daburn Electronics & Cable Littelfuse World Headquarters
44 Richboynton Road 8755 West Higgins Road Suite 500
Dover, NJ 07801 Chicago, IL 60631 USA
Phone: (973) 328-3200 Phone: (773) 628-1000
Fax: (973) 328-3130 Fax: (847) 391.0894
www.daburn.com www.littelfuse.com
Fuse:
4-Pin Connector & Contacts:
Littelfuse World Headquarters
Tyco Electronics Corporation
8755 West Higgins Road Suite 500
1050 Westlakes Drive
Chicago, IL 60631
Berwyn, PA 19312
Phone: (773) 628-1000
Phone: (610) 893-9800
Fax: (847) 391.0894
www.tycoelectronics.com
www.littelfuse.com

Rev. 11 Page 3-13
3.5.4 Special Tools Required
NOTE
To perform ground checks of Flight Stream 210 installations, a compatible PED with the
Garmin Pilot application installed is required. Visit Garmin’s website for a list of
compatible devices.
Crimp tools necessary for consistent, reliable crimp contact connections are identified in Table 3-23.
A milliohm meter with an accuracy of ±0.1 mΩ (or better) is required to measure the electrical bonding
between the GTN Xi and GMA 35c system components and aircraft ground.
Table 3-23 Recommended Crimp Tools

Standard Density 20-24 AWG High Density 22-28 AWG
Hand (Power/Ground) (P1001-P1005)
Manufacturer Crimping Insertion/ Insertion/
Tool Positioner Extraction Positioner Extraction
Tool Tool
Military
M81969/14-02 M81969/14-01
Specification M22520/2-01 M22520/2-08 M22520/2-09
M81969/1-02 M81969/1-04
P/N
Positronic 9507 9502-5 M81969/1-02 9502-3 M81969/1-04
ITT Cannon 995-0001-584 995-0001-604 980-2000-426 995 N/A
AMP 601966-1 601966-5 91067-2 601966-6 91067-1
Daniels AFM8 K13-1 M81969/1-02 K42 M81969/1-04
Astro 615717 615724 M81969/1-02 615725 M81969/1-04
3.5.4.1 GMA 35c Installations

 5/16” SMA connector torque wrench
Recommended SMA connector torque wrenches can be found at www.pasternack.com.

Rev. 11 Page 3-14
3.5.5 Hardware
NOTE
Part numbers in parentheses are inactive or canceled part numbers; these numbers may
still be available and/or referred on packaging material.
Table 3-24 Screws, Non-Structural

Size
Type
6-32 8-32 10-32
NASM35206 NASM35206
Pan Head, Low Carbon NASM35207
(MS35206) (MS35206)
Steel (MS35207)
(AN515) (AN515)
NASM35214
Pan Head, Brass - (MS35214) -
(AN515B)
MS51957
Pan Head, Stainless - MS51958
(AN515C)
Pan Head, Alloy Steel NAS601 NAS602 NAS603
NASM24693
100 Deg Countersunk (MS24693) - -
(AN507)
100 Deg Countersunk,
NAS514P - -
Alloy Steel
Table 3-25 Screws, Structural

Size
Type
8-32 10-32
NASM27039 NASM27039
Pan Head (MS27039) (MS27039)
(NAS220) (NAS221)
Table 3-26 Lock Washer, Carbon Steel, Cad Plated

Nominal Size Part Number
NASM35338-41
#6
(MS35338-41)
NASM35338-42
#8
(MS35338-42)
NASM35338-43
#10 or 3/16
(MS35338-43)
NASM35338-45
5/16
(MS35338-45)

Rev. 11 Page 3-15
Table 3-27 Washers, Carbon Steel, Cad Plated
Size
Nominal Inside Diameter
0.016 Thick 0.032 Thick 0.063 Thick
NAS1149FN616P NAS1149FN632P
#6 -
(AN960-6L) (AN960-6)
NAS1149FN816P NAS1149FN832P
#8 -
(AN960-8L) (AN960-8)
NAS1149F0332P NAS1149F0363P
#10 or 3/16 -
(AN960-10L) (AN960-10)
NAS1149F0532P NAS1149F0563P
5/16 -
(AN960-516L) (AN960-516)
Table 3-28 Washers, Carbon Steel, Cad Plated, Large Diameter

Size
#10 or 3/16 - - AN970-5
Table 3-29 Washers, Stainless Steel

Size
NAS1149CN616R NAS1149CN632R
#6 -
(AN960C-6L) (AN960C-6)
NAS1149CN816R NAS1149CN832R
#8 -
(AN960C-8L) (AN960C-8)
NAS1149C0332R NAS1149C0363R
#10 or 3/16 -
(AN960C-10L) (AN960C-10)
NAS1149C0563R
5/16 - -
(AN960C-516)
Table 3-30 Nuts, Steel

Type
Size Nut, Self-locking Nut, Self-locking Nut, Self-locking Nut, Self-locking
Metal, Hex, Thin Elastic, Hex, Thin Metal, Hex Elastic, Hex
6-32 NASM21042 NASM21083 NASM21045 NASM21044
8-32 NAS1291 NAS1022N (MS21045) NAS1021N
10-32 or 3/16 (MS21042) (MS21083) (MS21044N)
(AN363) (MS20364) (MS20365)
5/16
(AN364) (AN365)

Rev. 11 Page 3-16
Table 3-31 Nuts, Stainless Steel
Type
Size Nut, Self-locking Nut, Self-locking Nut, Self-locking Nut, Self-locking
Metal, Hex, Thin Elastic, Hex, Thin Metal, Hex Elastic, Hex
6-32 NASM21043 NASM21083C NASM21046C MS20365C
8-32 NAS1291C NAS1022C (MS21046C) MS21044C
(MS21043) (MS21083C) NAS1021C
10-32 or 3/16
(AN363C) (AN364C) (AN365C)
Table 3-32 Nut plates, Steel

Type
Size One Lug Two Lug Two Lug
One Lug Fixed Corner Side-by-Side
Floating Fixed Floating
6-32 MS21051 MS21061 MS21047 MS21059 MS21055 MS21086
8-32 MS21053 MS21049 MS21075 MS21057
10-32 or 3/16 MS21071 MS21069 MS21073
Table 3-33 Nut plates, Stainless Steel

Type
Size One Lug Two Lug Two Lug
One Lug Fixed Corner Side-by-Side
Floating Fixed Floating
6-32 MS21052 MS21062 MS21048 MS21060 MS21056 MS21087
8-32 MS21054 MS21050 MS21076 MS21058
10-32 or 3/16 MS21072 MS21070 MS21074

Rev. 11 Page 3-17
3.6 Installation Considerations
3.6.1 GPS/SBAS Antenna Requirements
Antenna performance is critical to GPS/SBAS operation. Antennas that meet Garmin’s minimum
performance specifications are listed in Table 3-34. The GTN Xi must be interfaced with one of these
antennas to achieve acceptable performance.
Table 3-34 GPS/SBAS Antennas

Model, Description Connector Type Manufacturer P/N Notes
GA 35, GPS/WAAS TNC Garmin 013-00235-( ) [1] [2]
GA 36, GPS/WAAS TNC Garmin 013-00244-( ) [2]
GA 37, GPS/WAAS/XM TNC Garmin 013-00245-( ) [2]
A33W, WAAS Antenna TNC Garmin 013-00261-( ) [3]
GPS/VHF Antenna TNC/BNC Comant CI-2580-200
GPS/VHF Antenna TNC/BNC Comant CI-2728-200
GPS/XM/VHF Antenna TNC/BNC Comant CI-2580-410
GPS/XM/VHF Antenna TNC/TNC/BNC Comant CI-2728-410
GPS Antenna TNC Comant CI-428-200
GPS/XM Antenna TNC/TNC Comant CI-428-410
Notes:
[1] Same mounting hole pattern as the GA 56, but the GA 35 antenna has a physically larger footprint.
[2] Installation of this antenna may be accomplished using Garmin GPS/XM Antenna
STC SA02018SE-D.
[3] Same mounting hole pattern as the A33.

Rev. 11 Page 3-18
3.6.2 Minimum System Configuration
The following section describes the minimum configuration required for IFR and VFR installations of the
GTN Xi.
3.6.2.1 VFR GPS Installation

For a VFR installation of a GTN Xi, the following equipment is required:
 GTN Xi unit installed in the aircraft manufacturer approved location for 6.25-inch wide avionics
equipment.
 GPS/SBAS antenna required for GPS navigation functions.
 An external CDI and proper source selection annunciation are required for installations using the
VOR navigation and glideslope information. Refer to Appendix Section C.1.9 for a list of
approved CDIs.
 If the GTN Xi does not meet the field-of-view requirements as outlined in Section 3.6.11.1.1, then
a display that can display source selection must be installed. Refer to Appendix Section C.1.12 for
a list of applicable CDI source selection annunciators and Appendix Section C.1.5 for approved
EFIS displays. The GTN Xi provides these annunciations if mounted within the required field-of-
view.
 A NAV antenna is required for VHF NAV functions (GTN 650Xi/750Xi only).
 A COM antenna is required for COM functions (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi only).
VFR installations must be placarded “GPS LIMITED TO VFR USE ONLY” in clear view of the pilot. The
placard must be located immediately adjacent to the GTN Xi. Refer to Section 3.6.7 for additional placard
requirements. VFR GPS installations must use AFMS or SAFM for the Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS
Navigation System, GPS Functions Not Approved for IFR Navigation (P/N 190-01007-C3).
3.6.2.2 IFR Installation of a GTN 625Xi/635Xi/725Xi

For an IFR installation of a GTN 625Xi, GTN 635Xi, or GTN 725Xi, the criteria in Section 3.6.2.1 must
be met in addition to the following:
 If the GTN Xi is installed for GPS primary navigation, then the GTN Xi must be interfaced to a
navigation indicator installed in the pilot’s primary field-of-view (or in the aircraft manufacturer
approved mounting location).
 The navigation indicator must have a vertical deviation indicator (GS) in order to perform
approaches with vertical guidance. EFIS, EHSI, and NAV indicators that are approved to interface
to the GTN Xi under this STC are listed in Appendix C.
 Additional lightning protection may be required for some models on the AML. Refer to Table E-1
for lightning protection requirements.
 Either a second GPS navigator or a separate VHF navigation radio must be installed. Refer to
Section 3.6.2.3 if installing a GTN 650Xi or GTN 750Xi.
Refer to AFMS or SAFM Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS Navigation System to meet these requirements.

Rev. 11 Page 3-19
3.6.2.3 IFR Installation of a GTN 650Xi/750Xi
For an IFR installation of a GTN 650Xi or GTN 750Xi, the criteria in Section 3.6.2.1 must be met in
addition to the following:
• If the GTN Xi is installed for GPS primary navigation, then the GTN Xi must be interfaced to a
navigation indicator installed in the pilot’s primary field-of-view (or in the aircraft manufacturer
approved mounting location).
 The navigation indicator must have a vertical deviation indicator (GS) in order to perform
approaches with vertical guidance. Approved EFIS, EHSI, and NAV indicators are listed in
Appendix C.
 Additional lightning protection may be required for some models on the AML. For lightning
protection requirements, refer to Table E-1.
 If the GTN Xi does not meet the field-of-view requirements outlined in Section 3.6.11, then an
EFIS display capable of displaying source selection annunciatons must be installed (refer to
Appendix Section C.1.5). The GTN Xi provides these annunciations if mounted within the
required field-of-view.
 Either a second GPS navigator or a separate VHF navigation radio is required in the following
installations:
◦ Aircraft with a maximum certified gross takeoff weight of greater than 6000 lbs.
◦ Turbine-powered aircraft.
◦ Multi-engine aircraft.
◦ A CDI is connected to connector P1004 pin 29 and there is no other way of displaying VHF
navigation deviation information from the GTN 650Xi/750Xi. Refer to Figure B-9,
Figure B-10, and Figure B-11. This is not required for installations that have a CDI or HSI
connected to the main connector P1001 that can be switched to output either GPS or VHF
navigation information.
Refer to AFMS or SAFM Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS Navigation System to meet these requirements.
3.6.3 GTN Xi External Sensors and Devices

When the GTN Xi is interfaced to external sensors, these sensors must be installed in accordance with the
sensor manufacturer’s data. Refer to Appendix C for a list of sensors approved to interface with the
GTN Xi.
The GTN Xi can accept data from multiple sources. If multiple sources are used, the GTN Xi will accept
data as described below. The input priority of each external data source cannot be configured. If available,
verify the higher priority sources are connected to the GTN Xi.
If multiple sources for a specific data type are supplied to the GTN Xi, only valid data from the highest
priority source is used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the next
highest priority source. The data sources listed in Section 3.6.3.1 through Section 3.6.3.9 are prioritized
from highest to lowest.

Rev. 11 Page 3-20
3.6.3.1 Multiple Uncorrected Pressure Altitude Sources
Priority Uncorrected Pressure Altitude Source
1 HSDB from G500/G600 TXi
2 HSDB from GI 275
3 ARINC 429 label 203 from Airdata
4 ARINC 429 label 203 from Airdata/AHRS
5 ARINC 429 label 203 from GDU Format 1
7 ARINC 429 label 203 from EFIS Format 2
8 ARINC 429 label 203 from Data Concentrator
9 ARINC 429 label 203 Traffic Format 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
10 RS-232 FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1
11 RS-232 Altitude Format 1 or 3
NOTE
Only certain altitude sources are acceptable for providing altitude to the GDL 88. Refer to
Section 3.6.4 for more information.
3.6.3.2 Multiple Baro-Corrected Altitude Sources
NOTE
Baro-corrected altitude is not required by the GTN Xi to meet the requirements of
TSO-C146c; however, to take full advantage of the GTN Xi capabilities, a baro-corrected
altitude source is recommended for automatic sequencing of altitude leg types and EDO
VNAV function. If no baro-corrected altitude data is provided to the GTN Xi, altitude leg
types must be manually sequenced and EDO VNAV will be unavailable.
Priority Multiple Baro-Corrected Altitude Source

2 HSDB from GI 275

Rev. 11 Page 3-21
3.6.3.3 Multiple Heading Sources
NOTE
A heading source is not required by the GTN Xi; however, with a heading source the
following will be provided:
◦ Autopilot roll steering on ARINC 424 heading legs (for priority 1 through 12 sources only).
◦ Map orientation to heading up.
◦ Display of TAS traffic, ADS-B traffic when correlated with a TAS/TCAS source (e.g., GDL 88
connected to GTS 8XX).
◦ WX-500 Stormscope and weather radar data on the moving map.
◦ Wind calculation if airspeed is also available.
Priority Heading Source

2 HSDB from GI 275
3 ARINC 429 label 314 from EFIS Format 1 or Format 3
4 ARINC 429 label 320 from EFIS Format 1 or Format 3
8 ARINC 429 label 314 from INS/IRU
10 ARINC 429 label 320 from INS/IRU
12 ARINC 429 label 320 from GAD Format 1
15 XYZ Synchro
17 ARINC 429 label 320 from Traffic Format 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
19 RS-232 bus from Lightning Detector 1
20 HSDB Traffic System

Rev. 11 Page 3-22
3.6.3.4 Multiple Indicated Airspeed Sources
Priority Indicated Airspeed Source
2 HSDB from GI 275
6 RS-232 bus from FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1
3.6.3.5 Multiple True Airspeed Sources
NOTE
True Airspeed is not required for the GTN Xi; however, the GTN Xi uses true airspeed to
calculate winds aloft if heading is also available.
Priority True Airspeed Source

2 GI 275 from GI 275
3.6.3.6 Multiple VLOC Selected Course Sources

Priority VLOC Selected Course Source
2 HSDB from GI 275
5 TO/FROM course from an Omni-Bearing Selector (OBS) control

Rev. 11 Page 3-23
3.6.3.7 Multiple GPS Selected Course Sources
Priority GPS Selected Course Source
2 HSDB from GI 275
3 ARINC 429 label 100 from EFIS Format 1 or 3
10 TO/FROM course from an Omni-Bearing Selector (OBS) control
3.6.3.8 Multiple Total Air Temperature Sources

Priority Total Air Temperature Source
2 HSDB from GI 275
3.6.3.9 Multiple Static Air Temperature Sources

Priority Static Air Temperature Source
2 HSDB from GI 275

Rev. 11 Page 3-24
3.6.4 GDL 88 Interface Considerations
When a GDL 88 is interfaced with a GTN Xi, altitude data can be forwarded from sources connected to the
GTN Xi to the GDL 88. The GTN Xi is also capable of forwarding Gray code received from an altimeter
connected to a GTX transponder. All of these sources must meet the minimum performance requirements
of TSO-C10 or TSO-C106, or altitude digitizers/encoders must meet TSO-C88 (reference AC 20-165,
Section 3-4(a)(1) and (2)).
Heading data from the following sources will not be forwarded from the GTN Xi to the GDL 88:
 ARINC 429 label 320 from Data Concentrator
 ARINC 429 label 320 from Traffic Format 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
 RS-232 FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1
 RS-232 bus from Lightning Detector 1
If a compatible TAS system and the GDL 88 are installed in an aircraft, the compatible TAS system should
be directly connected to the GDL 88. The traffic data is then sent from the GDL 88 to the GTN Xi over
HSDB.
NOTE
When a GDL 88 is connected to a TAS/TCAS traffic sensor, a heading source is required to
display traffic on the moving map. Refer to Figure B-40 for more information on the
connection.
Refer to GDL 88 TSO Installation Manual and GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual for more
information on configuration of the GDL 88 and systems connected to the GDL 88.

Rev. 11 Page 3-25
3.6.5 Antenna Considerations
Location considerations for antennas used by LRUs installed under this STC are contained in this section.
General installation guidance is provided to ensure the installed antennas meet the GTN Xi/GMA
performance requirements.
NOTE
Refer to Garmin Antenna STC SA02018SE-D for GPS/SBAS antennas installation.
Figure 3-1 shows the recommended placement of GPS/SBAS and COM antennas.
ANTENNA MASKED BY
VERTICAL FIN, T-TAIL OR
DORSAL),1$17(11$127
02817('/(9(/:,7+
5(63(&7727+(1250$/
)/,*+7$77,78'(
DISTANCE BETWEEN COM AND GPS/SBAS
ANTENNAS SHOULD BE GREATER THAN 2 FT.
GOOD BETTER
GREATER THAN 3" AFT OF WINDSCREEN
NORMAL
FLIGHT
ATTITUDE
SIDE VIEW
ANTENNA MUST BE ON
TOP OF AIRCRAFT
CENTERLINE
GPS 1
COMM
GPS 2
GPS/SBAS ANTENNA
OFFSET FROM
TOP VIEW CENTERLINE WITH

TYPICAL DUAL GPS
INSTALLATION
Figure 3-1 GPS/SBAS Antenna Mounting Considerations

Rev. 11 Page 3-26
3.6.5.1 GPS Antenna Location
The GPS antenna is a key element in the overall system performance and integrity for a GPS/SBAS
system. The antenna location, geometry, and surroundings of the antenna can affect the system
performance and/or availability. The following guidance provides information to aid the installer in
ensuring the optimum location is selected for the installation of the GPS antenna. The installation
guidelines presented here meet the intent of AC 20-138D Chapter 13, Section 13-1. The greater the
variance from these guidelines, the greater the chance of decreased signal availability. Because meeting all
of these installation guidelines may not be possible on all aircraft, these guidelines are listed in order of
importance to achieve optimum performance. The sub-items of step 3 below are of equal importance and
their significance may depend on the aircraft installation. The installer should use their best judgment to
balance the installation guidelines.
Figure 3-1 shows the recommended placement of the GPS antenna.
1. The antenna should be mounted as close to level as possible with respect to the normal cruise flight
attitude of the aircraft. If the normal flight attitude is not known, substitute with the waterline,
which is typically referenced as level while performing a weight and balance check.
2. The GPS antenna should be mounted in a location to minimize the effects of airframe shadowing
during typical maneuvers. Typically mounting farther away from the tail section reduces signal
blockage seen by the GPS antenna.
3. The GPS antenna should be mounted:
a. No closer than 2 feet from any VHF COM antenna or any other antenna that may emit
interference. Complete an aircraft EMC check to ensure there is no GPS degradation. Refer
to Section 5. If an EMC check reveals unacceptable interference, a GPS notch filter (Garmin
P/N 330-00067-00) can be inserted in line with the offending VHF COM or the
(re-radiating) ELT transmitter, or a different GPS antenna location can be selected. The
GPS/WAAS antenna is less susceptible to harmonic interference if a 1.57542 GHz notch
filter is installed on the COM transceiver antenna output.
NOTE
When mounting a combination antenna, the recommended distance of 2 feet or more is not
applicable to the distance between the antenna elements in a combination antenna (e.g.,
GPS and COM, GPS and SiriusXM) provided the combination antenna is TSO-approved
and has been tested to meet Garmin’s minimum performance standards.
NOTE
The internal GTN Xi COM does not interfere with its own GPS receiver. However,
placement of the GTN Xi GPS/SBAS antenna relative to transmitting antennas (including
the GTN Xi COM antenna) is critical.
b. No closer than 2 feet from any antennas emitting more than 25 watts of power. If an EMC
check reveals unacceptable interference, a different GPS antenna location can be selected.
c. No closer than 9 inches (center-to-center) from other antennas, including passive antennas
such as another GPS antenna or XM antenna.
4. To maintain a constant gain pattern and limit degradation by the windscreen, avoid mounting the
antenna closer than 3 inches from the windscreen.

Rev. 11 Page 3-27
5. For multiple GPS installations, the antennas should not be mounted in a straight line from the front
to the rear of the fuselage (i.e., so that a single lightning strike does not damage all GPS systems).
Additionally, varying the mounting location will help minimize any airframe shadowing by the
wings or tail section (i.e., in a particular azimuth, when one antenna is blocked, the other antenna
may have a clear view). Refer to Section 2.2.4 for GPS/SBAS antenna limitations.
6. A 12-inch center-to-center spacing between GPS antennas is required to achieve the best possible
low-elevation antenna gain by minimizing pattern degradation due to shadowing and near-field
interaction. When practical, installers must use a 12-inch center-to-center spacing between GPS
antennas. If a 12-inch spacing is not practical, installers must use the maximum center-to-center
spacing possible, but never less than a 9-inch center-to-center spacing. Tests have shown that
spacing less than 9 inches center-to-center results in unacceptable antenna pattern degradation.
3.6.5.2 COM Antenna Location

The COM antenna should be electrically bonded to a flat ground plane over as large an area as possible (at
least 18 inches square). The antenna should be mounted at least 6 feet from other COM antennas, 4 feet
from any ADF sense antennas, 2 feet from the GTN Xi and its GPS/SBAS antenna, and as far apart as
practical from the ELT antenna for best performance. A configuration of one top-side antenna and one
bottom-side antenna is recommended.
3.6.5.3 NAV Antenna Location

The GTN 650Xi/750Xi NAV antenna should have a clear line of sight in all directions, if possible. The
antenna should be mounted as close to the centerline of the aircraft as possible, minimizing the lateral
offset.
3.6.5.4 Marker Beacon Antenna Location

The marker beacon antenna should be mounted on a flat surface on the underside of the aircraft body.
Mount the antenna to minimize the amount of structure between it and the ground radio stations. Locate it
as far away as possible from transmitter antennas.
If the antenna is installed on a composite aircraft, ground planes must sometimes be added. Conductive
wire mesh, radials, or thin aluminum sheets embedded in the composite material provide the proper ground
plane. It allows the antenna pattern (gain) to be maximized for optimum performance.
3.6.5.5 GMA 35c Bluetooth Antenna Location

The GMA 35c kit supplies a Bluetooth antenna and a pre-fabricated coaxial cable harness that must be
installed to provide Bluetooth audio. Consider each seating location that may utilize the Bluetooth audio
routing when selecting the installation location. For best reception, the antenna should have clear line of
sight to the audio source; however, inconspicuous mounting may make this impractical. For crew and
passengers in small aircraft, selecting a location on the underside of the glare shield or behind the
instrument panel will yield acceptable reception.

Rev. 11 Page 3-28
3.6.5.6 Ground Plane
Verify the GPS/NAV/COM antennas are electrically bonded to the same aircraft ground plane as the
GTN Xi. Follow the aircraft manufacturer’s instructions for the NAV and COM antenna installations.
As a prerequisite of this STC, the GPS/SBAS antenna requires a minimum ground plane radius of
7.5 inches around the perimeter of the antenna. Refer to Figure 3-2. For metal aircraft, the surrounding
metal skin on which the antenna is mounted supplies the ground plane. For nonmetallic aircraft, the ground
plane can be composed of heavy duty aluminum foil tape, such as 3M P/N 438, 3M P/N 436, or other
adhesive-backed dead soft foil with aluminum 7.2 mils or greater.
WARNING
If the antenna is struck by lightning, the foil by itself may not be sufficient to dissipate
lightning currents. Additional protection may be needed depending on the construction of
the structure to which the antenna is mounted. Refer to the aircraft structural repair
manual (SRM) for details.
GPS ANTENNA
GROUND PLANE
UM
IM
IN
.M
IN
5
7.
Figure 3-2 GPS/SBAS Antenna Minimum Ground Plane Radius
3.6.5.7 COM and NAV Antenna Installation Considerations

Avoid running wires and coaxial cables near the COM and NAV antenna cables. If there are two separate
COM antennas, attempt to run the COM coaxial cables independently of each other and provide zonal
separation as much as possible in the aircraft to avoid loss of both COMs in a single event.
3.6.5.7.1 NAV Antenna Cable Splitter/Diplexer Considerations

The GTN 650Xi/750Xi includes one NAV antenna input. It is recommended that a single VOR/localizer/
glideslope antenna be used for the installation. Some installations will require the use of a splitter or
diplexer. Refer to Section 3.5.2.5 for acceptable part numbers. Refer to Figure B-18 for splitter and
diplexer installation wiring details. Install the splitter and diplexer in accordance with Section 4.3 and
Section 4.1.3.2.

Rev. 11 Page 3-29
3.6.6 Electrical Bonding
Electrical equipment chassis, shield/ground terminations, interfaced antennas, supporting brackets, and
racks must be electrically bonded to the aircraft’s main structure (metallic or tube/fabric aircraft) or
instrument panel (composite aircraft). Refer to SAE ARP 1870 Section 5 when surface preparation is
required to achieve electrical bond. The electrical bond must achieve direct current (DC) resistance less
than or equal to:
• 2.5 mΩ to local structure in equipment mounting locations for metallic or tube-and-fabric aircraft.
• 5.0 mΩ to the instrument panel for composite aircraft.
For some aircraft, the instrument panel is attached with vibration mounts. For these aircraft, the vibration-
isolated instrument panel must be grounded to the airframe metallic structure. A bonding strap meeting the
following criteria can be installed to accomplish this:
• 7/16" or wider tubular braid (QQB575R30T437) or 3/4" or wider flat braid (QQB575F36T781).
• The strap length must not exceed 6 inches. Detailed instructions for constructing a bonding strap
meeting these requirements are in Section 4.2.
Antenna baseplates must be electrically bonded to the aircraft ground plane.
Brackets installed to main structure or instrument panel with four or more rivets can provide sufficient
electrical bond to allow equipment chassis or install rack to be bonded to the bracket. More rivets or
surface preparation may be needed for brackets that will carry large DC/AC or lightning currents.
For the best results when bonding the GTN Xi rack to the supporting structure, contact locations between
the mounting structure and installation rack should be cleaned and prepared for bond. The following steps
are an acceptable method for bonding aluminum surfaces:
1. Clean grounding location with solvent.
2. Remove non-conductive films or coatings from the grounding location.
3. Apply a chemical conversion coat, such as Alodine 1200, to the bare metal.
4. Once the chemical conversion coat is dry, clean the area.
5. Install bonding aluminum tape or equipment at grounding location.
6. After the satisfactory electrical bond is accomplished, any coatings or protective films removed
from the surface must be reapplied. Refer to the model-specific aircraft maintenance manual or
Standard Practices Manual for surface protection requirements applicable to affected areas.
The correct material finish is important when mating untreated or bare dissimilar metals. They should be
galvanically compatible. When corrosion protection is removed to make an electrical bond, any exposed
area after the bond is completed should be protected again. Additional guidance can be found in
AC 43.13-1B and SAE ARP1870.
Typical electrical bonding preparation examples are shown in Figure 3-3, Figure 3-4, and Figure 3-5. The
hardware specified in Section 3.5.5 must be used unless otherwise specified in this manual. Bonding
details for composite and tube-and-fabric aircraft are included in Appendix E.

Rev. 11 Page 3-30
LOCK WASHER
E-BOND PREP
FLAT WASHER 0.50
Figure 3-3 Electrical Bonding Preparation - Nut Plate
LOCK WASHER
E-BOND PREP
FLAT WASHER 0.50
FLAT WASHER
E-BOND PREP
LOCK NUT
Figure 3-4 Electrical Bonding Preparation - Bolt/Nut Joint
LOCK WASHER
FLAT WASHER
E-BOND PREP
0.50
FLAT WASHER
Figure 3-5 Electrical Bonding Preparation - Terminal Lug

Rev. 11 Page 3-31
3.6.6.1 Electrical Bonding for Flight Stream 210
In order to provide a ground path for the Flight Stream 210, a bonding strap must be constructed. This is
accomplished by attaching 10 AWG #8 ring terminal (MS25036) to both ends of 1/4" braid (item 6 in
Figure 3-6). The length should be as short as practical but no longer than 20 inches. A wider braid is also
acceptable. Cut the flat braid to the desired length.
TERMINATING THE BONDING STRAP

Numbers in steps correspond to Figure 3-6.
1. Place a split washer (2) on the pan head screw (5).
2. Place a flat washer (3) on the screw next to the split washer (2).
3. Place the terminal lug (4) on the pan head screw (5) and insert the screw into the tapped hole on
the shield block.
4. Terminate the remaining end of the ground wire to nearby grounded metallic structure by selecting
a suitable location for the terminal lug. Drill a 0.1695 ±0.005-inch through-hole in the structure.
Depending on the installation location, the terminal stud may be secured using a 8-32 nut plate or a flat
washer and lock nut. For suitable hardware, refer to Section 3.5.5.
5. If using a nut plate, install the nut plate to the back side of the structure.
6. Clean and prepare the surface as described in Section 3.6.6.
7. Using a MS35206 pan head screw (1), build up the terminal hardware as shown in Figure 3-5.
8. Screw the fastener into the nut plate; the recommended torque value is between 12-15 in-lbf. This
torque value also applies if using a lock nut and washer in lieu of a nut plate.
9. Measure between the shield block on the Flight Stream 210 connector and nearby aircraft metallic
structure.
10. Ensure the bonding resistance is less than or equal to 10 mΩ.
5
2
1 3
6 4
2
Item Detail
1 MS35206 (AN515) #8 Pan head screw
2 MS35338-42 #8 lock washer
3 NAS1149FN832P (AN960-8) #8 washer
4 MS25036 #8 ring terminal
5 MS51957-42 screw
6 QQB575F36T0250 flat braid or wider braid
Figure 3-6 Flight Stream 210 with Connector

Rev. 11 Page 3-32
3.6.6.2 GTN Xi Interfaced Equipment Electrical Bonding
Equipment interfacing to the GTN Xi must be electrically bonded to the same airframe ground plane as the
GTN Xi. Follow the interfacing equipment electrical bonding requirements.
If the interfaced equipment and connectors are metal and designed to maintain shield continuity to airframe
ground via the connectors and chassis, then electrical bonding is achieved by electrically bonding the
interfaced equipment chassis to airframe ground per the interfacing equipment electrical bonding
requirements.
If the interfaced equipment and/or connectors are not metal or not designed to maintain shield continuity to
airframe ground via the connectors and chassis, then a bonding strap of less than 6 inches must be
connected from the backshell (metal connector) or from a shield drain (non-metal connector) to a #10
ground stud. The bonding strap must be connected to the backshell or shield drain with the GTN wiring.
Ensure the bonding strap meets the following specifications:
 The braid is a 7/16” or wider tubular braid (P/N QQB575R30T437, 24120 circular mils).
 The braid contains a terminal lug (mil-spec MS20659-130) at each end.
 The strap length is as short as possible, not exceeding 6 inches.
Create the bonding strap using the following instructions:

1. Cut an appropriate length of a metal braid (maximum of 6 inches).
2. Terminate both ends with the stated MS20659 terminal.
3. Find a location on the structure to create or re-use an existing ground stud that is size #10 for
connection to this bonding strap from the LRU backshell.
4. If creating a new ground stud, create a #10 ground stud in accordance with the instructions in
Section 3.6.6.2.1. The hole should be 0.201 inches in diameter.
5. Use the method in Figure 3-7 to connect the #10 terminal to the LRU backshell if the connector is
metal. Use the method in Figure 3-8 if the connector is not metal.
6. Torque hardware buildup to 11 to 17 in-lbf.

Rev. 11 Page 3-33
Figure 3-7 Bonding Strap (Metal Connectors)
MS21044N08
BONDING STRAP
NAS1149FN832P
NAS1149F0316P
*71;L
6+,(/'
'5$,16
AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE
MS35206-245
MS35333-38B
NAS1149FN832P
NAS1149F0316P
Figure 3-8 Bonding Strap (Non-Metal Connectors)

Rev. 11 Page 3-34
3.6.6.2.1 Ground Stud Buildup
New ground studs for equipment grounding may be required for some LRU installations. Refer to
Figure 3-9 (pan head) or Figure 3-10 (countersunk) for the parts required and the buildup sequence for
each ground stud installation. Use the surface preparation steps provided in Section 3.6.6. The pan head
screw is the preferred ground stud buildup. If a ground stud is required in a restricted area, or if installed on
an instrument panel, the countersunk screw buildup can be used to maintain the aesthetic of the panel.
Clean and prepare one side of the sheet metal surface in accordance with Section 3.6.6.
Figure 3-9 Pan Head Screw Ground Stud Buildup (Preferred)

Rev. 11 Page 3-35
Figure 3-10 Countersunk Screw Stud Buildup

Rev. 11 Page 3-36
3.6.7 Placards and Labels
Placards and labels added as part of the GTN Xi, GMA 35, and Flight Stream 210 installation must be
displayed in a conspicuous place and must not be easily erased, disfigured, or obscured. They must be
readable in all cockpit lighting conditions. Ambient flood lighting is acceptable. Text height must be a
minimum of 0.10 inches, and the text must contrast with the placard surroundings such that it is easily
readable. The text must be a solid-color font of at least 300 DPI (dots per inch).
New circuit breakers and switches installed for the GTN Xi, GMA 35, and Flight Stream 210 unit must be
labeled as shown in the applicable interconnect drawing in Appendix B. Applicable interconnect diagrams
are listed in Table 3-36.
3.6.7.1 Smart Glide Placard or Label

If Smart Glide is configured per Section 5.4.3.15, a Smart Glide discrete switch must be installed and
configured or a placard must be added per the guidance below. Refer to Figure B-20, Sheet 2, for
acceptable discrete switches and labeling requirements.
If a discrete switch is not configured or installed, and Smart Glide is configured in the aircraft, a placard
with the text “Press and hold the Direct-to button to activate Smart Glide.” must be installed adjacent
to the #1 GTN Xi in a single or dual GTN Xi installation. In a GTN Xi-GTN 6XX/7XX installation, the
placard must be installed adjacent to the GTN Xi.
3.6.8 Power Distribution

For the purpose of this section, an avionics bus is considered to be any group of circuit breakers fed from a
common source or multiple sources with a remote switch for the intent of controlling the power to avionics
equipment.
The power distribution requirements to install the GTN Xi are based on the aircraft and operational
capabilities. Refer to the applicable section listed in Table 3-35 for GTN Xi power distribution/electrical
bus structure based on aircraft gross take-off weight (GTOW).
Table 3-35 Power Distribution Section Reference

Aircraft GTOW Weight IFR/VFR/Both Section
Less than 6000 lbs Both 3.6.8.2 or 3.6.8.3
Greater than 6000 lbs VFR 3.6.8.2 or 3.6.8.3
Greater than 6000 lbs IFR 3.6.8.4 or 3.6.8.5

Rev. 11 Page 3-37
3.6.8.1 Circuit Protection
Circuit protection devices for the GTN Xi, GMA 35, and Flight Stream 210 must be push-pull manually
resettable circuit breakers (MS26574, MS22073, or other trip-free, push-pull circuit breaker type as
specified by the aircraft manufacturer). Figures that contain the circuit breaker ratings for each unit are
listed in Table 3-36.
Table 3-36 Circuit Breaker Ratings Reference Figures

Unit Figure
GTN Xi Figure B-4
GMA 35 Figure B-51
Flight Stream 210 Figure B-42
The circuit breakers must be readily accessible to the pilot.

A single circuit breaker must be dedicated to the GTN Xi Main and NAV power inputs, as shown in
Figure B-4. A single circuit breaker must also be dedicated to the COM input for the GTN 635Xi/650Xi/
750Xi. Do not combine more than one unit on the same circuit breaker.
3.6.8.2 Power Distribution - Single GTN Xi, Aircraft Weight Less Than 6000 lbs
When installing a single GTN Xi in a VFR only aircraft or an IFR aircraft with a maximum gross takeoff
weight of less than 6000 lbs, the GTN Xi should be connected to the avionics bus. The NAV/GPS and
COM circuit breakers (refer to Figure B-4) must be connected to the same avionics bus.
When the GTN Xi is the second NAV/COM unit being installed in the aircraft, the GTN Xi should be
connected to the avionics bus. The NAV/GPS and COM circuit breakers (refer to Figure B-4 and
Figure B-42) must be connected to the same avionics bus. The GTN Xi and other NAV/COM must be
grounded at separate ground terminal/stud locations on the aircraft. The power and ground wiring for the
GTN Xi should be routed separately from the power and ground wiring for the other NAV/COM. This
method, shown in Figure 3-11, will maximize system redundancy if the ground connection for one radio
fails.
Avionics Bus
COM
Other NAV/COM GTN ;L
Ground Plane
Figure 3-11 Power and Ground Distribution - Single GTN Xi, Aircraft Weight Less Than
6000 lbs

Rev. 11 Page 3-38
3.6.8.3 Power Distribution - Dual GTN Xi, Aircraft Less Than 6000 lbs or VFR Only
Installation
For dual GTN Xi installations in a VFR only or IFR aircraft with a maximum certified gross takeoff
weight less than 6000 lbs, connect GTN Xi #1 to the avionics bus. The NAV/GPS and COM circuit
breakers (refer to Figure B-4) for GTN Xi #1 must be connected to the same avionics bus. If a second
avionics bus is available, connect GTN Xi #2 to the second avionics bus; otherwise, connect GTN Xi #2 to
the same avionics bus as GTN Xi #1. The NAV/GPS and COM circuit breakers for GTN Xi #2 must be
connected to the same avionics bus.
The GTN Xi must be grounded at separate ground terminal/stud locations on the aircraft. Power and
ground wiring for GTN Xi #1 should be routed separately from the power and ground wiring for GTN Xi
#2 (Figure 3-12). This will maximize system redundancy if the ground connection for one GTN Xi fails.
Preferred Alternate
Avionics Bus 1 Avionics Bus 2 Avionics Bus
COM
COM
COM
COM
GTN ;L GTN ;L GTN ;L GTN ;L
Ground Plane Ground Plane
Figure 3-12 Power and Ground Distribution - Dual GTN Xi, Aircraft Weight Less Than
6000 lbs
3.6.8.4 Power Distribution - Single GTN Xi, IFR Installation in Aircraft Greater Than
6000 lbs
When a single GTN Xi is installed in an aircraft with a maximum certified gross takeoff weight of 6000 lbs
or greater, the GTN Xi must be installed on a bus (main or avionics) separate from that of other
pre-existing NAV/COM systems in the aircraft, as shown in Figure 3-13. The GTN Xi NAV/GPS and
COM circuit breakers (refer to Figure B-4) must be connected to the same avionics bus.
The GTN Xi and other NAV/COM must be grounded at separate ground terminal/stud locations on the
aircraft. The power and ground wiring for the GTN Xi must be routed separately from the power and
ground wiring for the other NAV/COM, including no shared connectors. This will maximize system
redundancy if the ground connection for one radio fails.
Avionics Bus 1 Avionics Bus 2 Avionics Bus Main Bus
COM
COM
Other NAV/COM GTN ;L OR Other NAV/COM GTN ;L
Figure 3-13 Power and Ground Distribution - Single GTN Xi, Aircraft Weight Greater Than
6000 lbs

Rev. 11 Page 3-39
3.6.8.5 Power Distribution - Dual GTN Xi Units, IFR Installation in Aircraft Greater Than
6000 lbs
When dual GTN Xi units are installed in an aircraft with a maximum certified gross takeoff weight of
6000 lbs or greater, each GTN Xi must be installed on a separate avionics bus. If two avionics buses are
not available in the aircraft, install GTN Xi #1 on the main bus and GTN Xi #2 on the avionics bus. Both
options are shown in Figure 3-14. Preferably, GTN Xi #1 should not be connected to the bus that supplies
power to the GTN Xi #2 avionics bus. The GTN Xi #1 NAV/GPS and COM circuit breakers (refer to
Figure B-4) must be connected to the same bus, and the GTN Xi #2 NAV/GPS and COM circuit breakers
must also be connected to the same bus.
The GTN Xi must be grounded at separate ground terminal/stud locations on the aircraft. The power and
ground wiring for GTN Xi #1 must be routed separately from the power and ground wiring for GTN Xi #2,
including no shared connectors. This will maximize system redundancy if the ground connection for one
GTN Xi fails.
Avionics Bus 1 Avionics Bus 2 Main Bus Avionics Bus
COM
COM
COM
COM
GTN ;L GTN ;L GTN ;L GTN ;L

OR
Figure 3-14 Power and Ground Distribution - Dual GTN Xi, Aircraft Weight Greater Than
6000 lbs
3.6.8.6 Power Distribution - GMA 35 Audio Panel

The GMA 35 Audio Panel must be connected to the same electrical bus as the interfaced GTN Xi if
GTN Xi #1 and GTN Xi #2 are on separate buses. If the GTN Xi units are on the same bus, any avionics
bus can be used.
3.6.8.7 Power Distribution - Flight Stream 210

When a Flight Stream 210 is installed, it should be connected to an avionics bus. It is recommended that
the Flight Stream 210 is installed on the same avionics bus as the interfaced GTN Xi. In dual GTN Xi
installations, it is preferred to connect the Flight Stream 210 to a GTN Xi that is on an avionics bus.
3.6.9 Optional Switch Installation

If optional switches are installed as part of the GTN Xi and GMA 35 installations, each switch installed
must meet the following requirements:
 The switch must be labeled as specified in the interconnect drawings in Appendix B.
 The label must be adjacent to the switch.
 The switch must be readily accessible to the pilot.
 The label must be visible under all cockpit lighting conditions (refer to Section 3.6.7).

Rev. 11 Page 3-40
3.6.10 External Annunciations
Refer to Section 3.6.11.1.1 to determine if external annunciators are required.
3.6.11 Unit Mounting Considerations

3.6.11.1 GTN Xi Mounting Considerations
The GTN Xi should be mounted in the avionics stack in the aircraft instrument panel within view and
reach of the pilot. The primary unit location should minimize pilot head movement when transitioning
between looking outside of the cockpit and viewing or operating the GTN Xi. The location should be such
that the GTN Xi is not blocked by the glare shield on top or by the engine controls, control yoke, etc., on
the bottom. If the aircraft has a throw-over yoke, ensure it does not interfere with the GTN Xi.
For VFR-only installations, the GTN Xi must be mounted in the aircraft manufacturer’s approved location
or other FAA-approved location. A CDI/HSI is necessary for installations using VOR/ILS information. If a
CDI/HSI is installed, a proper source selection annunciation must be used.
For IFR GPS installations, the GTN Xi must be mounted in the aircraft manufacturer’s approved location
or other FAA-approved location, and the required CDI/HSI must be mounted in the primary field-of-view.
CDI/HSI navigation source selection annunciation must be on or near the affected display and any
additional annunciations must be mounted within the normal field-of-view.
The source selection annunciation displayed on the GTN Xi must be within 13.9 inches of the pilot’s view
centerline (refer to Figure 3-15). If the CDI is to the left or right of the centerline, it must favor the same
side as the GTN Xi placement (i.e., typically the radio stack is on the right of the pilot’s view centerline, so
the CDI should be on the right side of the basic primary flight instruments). A CDI/HSI with a built-in
annunciation may be used in lieu of a separate external annunciator to satisfy the source selection
annunciation requirement. Additionally, required GPS navigation annunciations (refer to Section
3.6.11.1.3) must be within 16.8 inches of the pilot’s view centerline. If the GTN Xi display is within this
area, then no external GPS navigation annunciations are required.
The GTN Xi may be installed outside the acceptable view parameters if it is used as a redundant or
secondary navigation device. (e.g., the GTN Xi may be installed to the right of a center radio stack when
two columns of avionics are available. This places the unit too far from the pilot’s normal scan. As such,
IFR flights may not originate or be predicated on this unit unless the primary system has failed).
If a GNS 400W/500W or GPS 175/GNX 375/GNC 355 is installed concurrently with a GTN Xi, it is
recommended the GTN Xi be mounted in the #1 position relative to the other navigator. In a typical radio
stack, this would be above the other navigator. This recommendation is only applicable if the crossfill
function is utilized in the installation.

Rev. 11 Page 3-41
3.6.11.1.1 Determination of Acceptable Field-of-View
The FAA has determined the acceptable field-of-view for TSO-C146c annunciations related to navigation
source selection is approximately 30° horizontally from the center of the attitude indicator (or centerline
of the pilot’s seat/yoke), and the acceptable field-of-view for TSO-C146c annunciations related to GPS
navigation data is approximately 35° horizontally from the center of the attitude indicator. These angles
are based on the closest panel distance of 24 inches resulting in a measured offset from the attitude
indicator of 13.9 inches and 16.8 inches, respectively.
The acceptable vertical field-of-view includes the area from the top of the instrument panel to the portion
of the instrument panel that is immediately below the basic “T” instruments. For an IFR-approved GPS
installation, either:
 The GTN Xi must be located within the 35° horizontal acceptable field-of-view; or
 Source selection and GPS annunciations are required to be installed.
If the GTN Xi is installed between 30° and 35° horizontally, at a minimum, source selection annunciation
must be installed. Note that Figure 3-15, Figure 3-16, and Figure 3-17 show a GTN 7XX Xi. The
dimensions shown in these drawings are also applicable to the GTN 6XX Xi. If the GTN Xi is installed
within 30° horizontally, no external annunciations are required.
NOTE
If a GTN Xi is installed with an EFIS in the primary field-of-view that provides the
annunciations discussed in the following sections, then external annunciators are not
required. The G5, GDU 620, and GDU 700/1060 provide all of the annunciations required
by these sections.

Rev. 11 Page 3-42
3.6.11.1.2 Source Selection Annunciation
Installations of the GTN Xi in the existing center radio stack in aircraft with an analog T configuration are
considered to be in the primary (acceptable) field-of-view per AC 20-138D.
Use the steps below to determine whether or not the integrated source selection annunciation displayed on
the GTN Xi to be installed is within the acceptable field-of-view. Refer to Figure 3-15.
1. Determine the pilot’s primary view centerline, utilizing the following criteria:
 For aircraft with a basic “T” instrument configuration, with the attitude indicator in the upper-
center location, the center of this instrument should be used as the primary view centerline.
 If the basic “T” is offset away from the radio stack with respect to the control yoke, or a non-
standard instrument cluster is present in the aircraft, the center of the control yoke or stick in
the neutral position may be used as the primary view centerline.
 If the control yoke/stick is offset from the center of the pilot’s seat, an imaginary line extended
through the center of the pilot’s seat may be used as the primary view centerline.
2. Measure the horizontal distance from the primary view centerline to the left or right edge of the
GTN Xi.
3. If the GTN Xi is mounted to the right of the primary instruments, the internal annunciations are
considered to be within the acceptable field-of-view if the following criteria are met:
 The left edge of the GTN Xi bezel is within 10.6 ± 0.25inches of the primary view centerline.
 The top edge of the GTN Xi is no lower than the bottom edge of the primary flight instruments
or the unit is line abreast with the affected CDI.
4. If the GTN Xi is mounted to the left of the primary instruments, the internal annunciations are
 The right edge of the GTN Xi is within 10.0 ± 0.25 inches of the primary view center line.
The GTN Xi may only be installed outside of the acceptable field-of-view if it is interfaced to a Garmin
EFIS display or a non-Garmin EFIS display that is capable of displaying Source Selection annunciation
(refer to Appendix Section C.1.5).
UPPER LIMIT PILOT’S INSTRUMENT “T”
Glareshield
ACCEPTABLE
FIELD-OF-VIEW
AREA
GTN 750 SHOWN
LOWER LIMIT Instrument “T” Centerline
10.3 10.9
13.9 13.9
Figure 3-15 GTN Xi CDI Source Selection Annunciation Field-of-View (+30°)

Rev. 11 Page 3-43
3.6.11.1.3 GPS Navigation Annunciation
Use the steps below to determine whether or not the integrated GPS navigation annunciation displayed on
the GTN Xi to be installed is within the acceptable field-of-view, as depicted in Figure 3-16.
1. Determine the pilot’s primary view centerline, as defined in step 1 of Section 3.6.11.1.1.
GTN Xi.
 The left edge of the GTN Xi bezel is within 14.4 inches of the primary view centerline.
 The right edge of the GTN Xi bezel is within 12.2 inches of the primary view centerline.
The GTN Xi may only be installed outside of the acceptable field-of-view if it is interfaced to a Garmin
EFIS display (refer to Appendix Section C.1.5 for approved displays) that is providing GPS navigation
annunciations.
Glareshield
ACCEPTABLE
FIELD-OF-VIEW
AREA
GTN 7XX SHOWN
LOWER LIMIT
12.2 14.4
16.8 16.8
Instrument “T” Centerline
Figure 3-16 GTN Xi GPS Navigation Annunciation Field-of-View (+35°)

Rev. 11 Page 3-44
3.6.11.1.4 TAWS Annunciation (Units with TAWS Only)
Use the steps below to determine whether or not the integrated TAWS annunciations displayed on the
GTN Xi to be installed are within the acceptable field-of-view, as depicted in Figure 3-17.
1. Determine the pilot’s primary view centerline, as defined in step 1 of Section 3.6.11.1.2.
GTN Xi.
 The left edge of the GTN Xi bezel is within 15.4 inches of the primary view centerline.
 The right edge of the GTN Xi bezel is within 11.5 inches of the primary view centerline.
If the GTN Xi internal TAWS annunciations do not meet the criteria for acceptable field-of-view as
defined above, an external annunciator unit must be installed within 16.8 inches of the view centerline.
The external TAWS annunciator unit must contain, at a minimum, the following annunciations:
 PULL UP (terrain warning) – red
 TERR (terrain caution) – amber/yellow
 TER N/A (terrain not available) – amber/yellow
 TER INHB (terrain inhibited) – white
Glareshield
ACCEPTABLE
FIELD-OF-VIEW
AREA
GTN 750 SHOWN
LOWER LIMIT
11.5 15.4
16.8 16.8
Instrument “T” Centerline
Figure 3-17 TAWS Annunciation Field-of-View (+35°)

Rev. 11 Page 3-45
3.6.11.2 Flight Stream 210 Mounting Considerations
The following must be considered when selecting a Flight Stream 210 mounting location:
 The Flight Stream 210 contains an attitude sensor so it must be mounted rigidly to aircraft
structure where vibration is minimized.
 Do not use shock mounting. Mounting in a vibration-prone area may result in degraded accuracy.
 The Flight Stream 210 can be mounted in any direction on the roll axis and up to and including 45°
from centerline for the pitch axis. For details, refer to Figure 3-18 and Figure 3-19.
 The Flight Stream 210 may be mounted offset from the aircraft centerline, but must be mounted
with the connector pointed in the direction of flight on the yaw axis. Up to 3° of deviation is
acceptable for mounting along the yaw axis (the arrow symbol on the side of the unit points in the
direction of flight). Failure to mount the Flight Stream 210 with the connector pointed in the
direction of flight will result in attitude error.
 The Flight Stream 210 must be installed within the cabin/cockpit of the aircraft.
 Mounting location must allow for a minimum of 3 inches between the edge of the connector and
nearby objects.
 The Flight Stream 210 housing is made up of a non-metallic material. A ground terminal strap
must be installed to ground the shield block to aircraft ground. Identify a terminal lug location
when selecting a mounting location for the Flight Stream. Refer to Section 3.6.6.1 for detailed
instructions on how to properly terminate the Flight Stream 210.

Rev. 11 Page 3-46
45°
45°
Figure 3-18 Flight Stream 210 Mounting Considerations
Figure 3-19 Mounting Orientation - Roll Axis

Rev. 11 Page 3-47
3.6.12 Cable and Wiring Considerations
Wiring should be installed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11, Sections 8 through 13. Observe
the following precautions when installing cables and wiring:
 Care must be taken to adequately support and protect cable harnesses from chafing.
 Cable harnesses should not be located near flight control cables, high-capacity electrical lines
(e.g., DC electric motor cables), or fuel lines.
 Cable harnesses should be located in a protected area of the aircraft (i.e., isolated from engine rotor
burst).
 Cable harnesses should not be routed near high-energy sources (e.g., DC motors, high-heat
sources).
 Shield drains must be less than 3 inches.
 For dual GTN Xi (or GTN 6XX/7XX) installations, the cable harnesses must be routed separately.
Refer to Appendix B for the applicable wiring connections to assemble the wiring connectors.
3.6.12.1 Pressurized Aircraft Considerations

In pressurized aircraft, wiring that penetrates the pressure vessel must be installed in accordance with the
Type Design of the aircraft. Any wires that penetrate the pressure bulkhead must use existing provisions,
such as spare pins in the existing bulkhead connectors or through existing sealed bulkhead feedthroughs, in
accordance with the aircraft maintenance manual.
Substantiation for additional holes in the pressure vessel is beyond the scope of this manual and requires
additional data from the aircraft manufacturer or other FAA-approved data.
If mounting the Flight Stream 210 in a pressurized location, the internal pressure sensor will read the
ambient pressure in the cockpit. This function may be disabled on the connected PED.
3.6.12.2 Coaxial Cable Considerations

When routing coaxial cables, observe the following precautions:
 All cable routing should be kept as short and as direct as possible.
 Avoid sharp bends.
 Avoid routing cables near power sources (e.g., 400 Hz generators, trim motors, etc.) or near power
for fluorescent lighting.
 Avoid routing the marker beacon antenna cable near other antenna cables (e.g., ADF, COM,
NAV, G/S).
Refer to Section 3.5.2.1 and Section 3.5.2.2 for recommended coaxial cable types.

Rev. 11 Page 3-48
3.6.12.3 Shield Termination Consideration
Shield terminations must be kept as short as possible and should be less than 3 inches unless the
non-Garmin equipment manufacturer’s installation requirements specify otherwise. When there are no
requirements given by the non-Garmin equipment manufacturer’s installation manual, then the shields
may be connected to the metal connector backshell when the backshell is grounded to airframe ground.
Alternatively, the shield termination may be directly connected to airframe ground. Maintain shield
continuity through all intermediate connectors unless otherwise specified (including audio lines).
Audio line shields should be continuous from end-to-end and be grounded only at one end to prevent
ground loops. Refer to Section 3.6.16.
If wiring from the GTN Xi goes to a unit that uses overbraided wires, then the GTN Xi wiring to that unit
must also be overbraided. If the wiring passes through bulkhead connectors, then each segment must be
overbraided and the overbraid must be grounded at both ends, unless otherwise shown in the equipment’s
installation manual. The overbraid must be terminated as close to the connector as possible and in
accordance with manufacturer’s installation requirements.
3.6.13 GTN Xi Cooling Requirements

The GTN Xi has a cooling fan integrated into the backplate to draw forced-air cooling through the unit.
There are inlets along the left, right, and bottom sides of the GTN Xi bezel that allow air to flow through
the unit. Ensure there are no obstructions to the air inlets or fan exhaust. Airflow should be unrestricted
from the bezel inlets to the fan outlet in the backplate on the rear of the unit.
3.6.14 GMA 35 Cooling Requirements

The GMA 35 does not have provisions for attaching cooling air. Installing an external fan or providing
space for natural convection is always a good practice and is recommended to increase the product life.
3.6.15 Flight Stream 210 Cooling Requirements

The Flight Stream 210 does not require external cooling.
3.6.16 Audio Electrical Noise

Take care to minimize effects from coupled interference and ground loops. Avoid routing audio system
interconnecting cables near large AC electric fields, AC voltage sources and pulse equipment
(e.g., strobes, spark plugs, magnetos, EL displays, CRTs, etc.), and large AC current-carrying conductors
or switched DC equipment (e.g., heaters, solenoids, fans, autopilot servos, etc.).
All audio jacks should be isolated from ground. Audio shields should only be grounded at one end to
prevent ground loops. The wiring diagrams and accompanying notes in this manual should be followed
closely to minimize audio electrical noise effects.

Rev. 11 Page 3-49
3.6.17 GMA 35 Wiring Considerations for Failsafe Operation
The GMA 35 includes a failsafe circuit that connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly to
COM 1 in the event that power is interrupted or RS-232 communication with the GTN Xi is lost.
When the GMA 35 is installed with a GTN 750Xi and a second COM radio, the GTN 750Xi COM must be
connected to the COM 2 pins on the GMA 35. The other radio should be connected to the COM 1 pins.
This will prevent the loss of both COM radios if power to the GMA 35 or RS-232 communication to the
GMA 35 is lost. The GTN Xi includes a configuration setting to allow the GTN 750Xi COM radio to
appear as COM 1 in the GTN Xi user interface. COM 1 Is Connected As COM 2 should be set to True in
this case. Refer to Section 5.4.6.6.2 for information about this setting.
If the GMA 35 is installed with a GTN 725Xi (no COM) and two other COM radios, wire COM 1 to the
COM 1 pins on the GMA 35 and COM 2 to the COM 2 pins. COM 1 Is Connected As COM 2 should be
set to False in this case. Refer to Section 5.4.6.6.2 for information about this setting.
If the GMA 35 is installed with dual GTN 750Xi units, wire the GTN 750Xi that is controlling the
GMA 35 to the COM 2 pins on the GMA 35 and wire the GTN 750Xi that is not controlling the GMA 35
to the COM 1 pins on the GMA 35. If GTN 750Xi #1 is the one that is controlling the GMA 35, COM 1 Is
Connected As COM 2 should be set to True; otherwise, it should be set to False.
3.6.18 Magnetic Compass Recalibration

If the GTN Xi is mounted less than 12 inches from the compass, the compass should be recalibrated and
the necessary changes for noting correction data should be made.
3.6.19 Weather Radar Wiring Considerations

This STC only approves GTN Xi interface with weather radar in metal aircraft. Weather radar data can be
displayed only on GTN 7XX Xi units. Weather radars that use ARINC 453/708 for data transfer must be
connected directly to the GTN 7XX Xi. For an installation that includes a GWX 68/70/75 and two GTN Xi
units, the GWX 68/70/75 can be connected to either GTN Xi and the data will be forwarded over HSDB to
the GTN 7XX Xi.
3.6.20 Smart Glide Considerations

Smart Glide requires TAS, HDG, roll angle, OAT, and baro altitude information from an approved
ADAHRS source or connected G500/G600 TXi, GI 275 PFD, G3X, or G5. The GTN Xi uses the
information to calculate real-time winds for glide performance calculation. Smart Glide provides aural
alerts and therefore requires a connection to an unswitched input on an audio panel from the #1 GTN Xi in
a single or dual GTN Xi installation or from the GTN Xi in a GTN Xi-GTN 6XX/7XX installation.

Rev. 11 Page 3-50
3.6.21 TAWS-A Installation Considerations
NOTE
Do not install windshear alerting systems in TAWS-A installations.
To install the GTN Xi with Class A TAWS functionality, the following are required in the aircraft:
• ARINC 429 radio altimeter that meets the requirements of TSO-C87 or ETSO-2C87.
• Active-low discrete landing gear position sensor/switch.
• Active-low discrete flap position sensor/switch.
• GTN Xi configured according to Section 5.4.4.1.3.
• Any VHF navigation radios meeting the requirements of TSO-C34( )/ETSO-2C34( ) or GPS
navigators certified to provided vertical guidance on GPS approaches in addition to the GTN Xi(s)
must be connected to the GTN Xi using ARINC 429 to enable glideslope alerting when
approaches are flown using that LRU.
• To mute alerting systems (e.g., TCAS, ADS-B, PFD) during active TAWS and GPWS alerts,
connect the TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE ANNUNCIATE* discrete output to the system providing the
alerts.
• TSO-C10b compliant barometric altitude source, TSO-C8e compliant vertical speed source, and
TSO-C2d compliant airspeed source
OR
TSO-C106 compliant ADC

Rev. 11 Page 3-51
3.7 Electrical Load Analysis
An Electrical Load Analysis (ELA) must be completed on each aircraft prior to installation to verify the
aircraft electrical system is capable of supporting the GTN Xi, GMA 35, and Flight Stream 210. If it is
determined the modification results in an increase in electrical load, then it must be further verified the
aircraft electrical system remains in compliance, which includes both electrical generation capacity and, if
loads have been increased, that reserve battery capacity remains adequate to support loads essential to
continued safe flight and landing. If the existing battery does not meet the battery capacity requirements, a
battery that has sufficient capacity must be installed. The installation of another battery is beyond the scope
of this STC. The Blank Emergency Power Calculation Form (Figure 3-25) may be used for this reserve
battery capacity calculation.
ASTM F2490-05, Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load for Power Source Analysis provides
acceptable guidance for conducting a complete analysis of increased electrical load.
As part of the installation it must be shown the maximum electrical system demand does not normally
exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating. Satisfactory completion of the ELA should be recorded on
FAA Form 337. There are several approaches that could be taken, as described in the following sections.
For each approach, use the values outlined in Table 3-37.
The GTN Xi, GMA 35, and Flight Stream 210 are capable of operating at either 14 or 28 VDC. Refer to
the individual equipment Environmental Qualification Forms for details on surge ratings and minimum/
maximum operating voltages.
Table 3-37 LRU Current Draw

14V System 28V System
LRU
Typical Maximum Typical Maximum
GTN 625Xi/635Xi/650Xi
1.6 A [1] 2.8 A [2] [3] 0.8 A [1] 1.5 A [2] [3]
(Main Connector)
GTN 635Xi/650Xi 5.66 A (16W COM) 2.33 A (16W COM)
0.45 A 0.21 A
(COM Connector) 4.02 A (10W COM) 1.76 A (10W COM)
GTN 650Xi
0.60 A 0.90 A [2] 0.30 A 0.45 A
(NAV Connector)
GTN 725Xi/750Xi
2.4 A [1] 3.4 A [2] [3] 1.2 A [1] 1.8 A [2] [3]
(Main Connector)
GTN 750Xi 5.66 A (16W COM) 2.33 A (16W COM)
0.45 A 0.21 A
(COM Connector) 4.02 A (10W COM) 1.76 A (10W COM)
GTN 750Xi
0.60 A 0.90 A [2] 0.30 A 0.45 A [2]
(NAV Connector)
GMA 35 0.80 A 1.50 A 0.40 A 1.0 A
GMA 35c 0.80 A 1.50 A 0.40 A 1.0 A
Flight Stream 210 0.10 A 0.10 A 0.05 A 0.05 A
GDL 60 [4]
Notes:
[1] The specified current draw is with the display backlight set to 100% and the fan operating at
low speed. If the superflags are connected, their current draw must be added in addition to the
specified current. The superflags will supply up to 320 mA each regardless of the GTN Xi’s
input voltage.
[2] The specified current draw does not include the superflags. If connected, their current draw
must be added to the specified current. The superflags will supply up to 320 mA each
regardless of the GTN Xi’s input voltage.

Rev. 11 Page 3-52
[3] The Flight Stream 510 adds 0.1 A to the maximum current draw at both 14 and 28 volts.
[4] Refer to Section 3 of GDL 60 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual (P/N 190-02525-10) for
current draw values.
3.7.1 Aircraft with Existing Electrical Load Analysis

If there is an existing ELA for the aircraft, this must be updated to reflect the modification. It must show
the alternators/generators have adequate capacity to supply power to the modified systems in all
anticipated conditions. Add the applicable typical current draw values from Table 3-37 to the existing ELA
under continuous operating conditions. Verify the new aircraft electrical load does not exceed the rated
capacity of the installed generator/alternator. After performing the calculations, if the additional load
exceeds the rated capacity of the generator/alternator, proceed to the steps in Section 3.7.2. If the additional
load still exceeds the generator rated capacity, alternate FAA approval is required for installation of the
GTN Xi, GMA 35, or Flight Stream 210 in the aircraft.
3.7.2 Aircraft without Existing Electrical Load Analysis

Prior to undertaking a complete Electrical Load Analysis, the net change to the electrical load resulting
from the GTN Xi installation should be determined. Refer to Figure 3-20 for a sample calculation. The
results of this analysis will determine how to proceed further.
Items removed from
Electrical Load (A) [1] Comment
aircraft:
GNS 530W (Main Connector) 1.4 A
GNS 530W (COM Connector) 0.015 A Used non-transmitting current draw.
GNS 530W (NAV Connector) 0.5 A
PMA 7000M 2.5 A
Subtotal: 4.415 A
Items added to aircraft: Electrical Load (A) [1] [2] Comment

GTN 750Xi (Main Connector) 1.2 A
GTN 750Xi (COM Connector) 0.21 A Used non-transmitting current draw.
GTN 750Xi (NAV Connector) 0.3 A
GMA 35 0.40 A
Flight Stream 210 0.05 A
Subtotal: 2.16 A
Net Change in Bus Load: -2.255 A [3]
Notes:
[1] Use typical current draw when performing this calculation.
[2] Use 28V current draw values for this calculation.
[3] To obtain a Net Change in bus load, subtract the “Items Removed” subtotal from the “Items
Added” subtotal.
Figure 3-20 Sample Net Electrical Load Change Calculation

Rev. 11 Page 3-53
3.7.3 Performing an Electrical Load Analysis by Measurement
CAUTION
To avoid damage to equipment, ensure the ammeter is capable of handling the anticipated load.
CAUTION
The pitot heat should only be switched on long enough to take the current measurement and then
switched off. The pitot probe may get hot, so care should be exercised to avoid burns or damaging
the unit.
NOTE
Performing an ELA using electrical measurements is not an acceptable method for commuter
category airplanes.
NOTE
Intermittent electrical loads are not measured. It is assumed that if additional current is required
beyond what the alternator can supply, this short-duration demand will be provided by the battery.
NOTE
It is permissible to exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating during the takeoff/landing phase
of flight when the pitot heat and landing light are switched on simultaneously. However, for this
condition (i) you must not exceed 95% of the alternator data plate rating, and (ii) you must not
exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating with the pitot heat on and the landing light off.
The following section describes how to perform an ELA for a single alternator/single battery electrical
system. This should be modified accordingly for aircraft with multiple batteries or alternators, and it must
be shown the maximum electrical demand for each alternator does not normally exceed 80% of the
alternator data plate rating.
In this section, the following definitions are used:
 Normal operation: the primary electrical power generating system is operating normally.
 Emergency operation: the primary electrical power generating system is inoperative.
An in-circuit or clamp-on, calibrated ammeter with 0.5 A or better accuracy can be used for current
measurement. Record the continuous (data plate/nameplate) rating for the alternator and battery.
1. Compile a list of electrical loads on the aircraft using the blank electrical load tabulation form
provided in Figure 3-22. Generally, this is a list of circuit breakers and circuit breaker switches. An
example is shown in Figure 3-23.
2. Identify whether each load is continuous (e.g., GPS) or intermittent (e.g., stall warning horn,
landing gear).
3. Identify whether each load is used in a particular phase of flight for normal operation using the
worst-case flight condition. If some loads are mutually exclusive and will not be turned on
simultaneously (e.g., pitot heat and air conditioning), use only those loads for the worst-case
condition.
4. Identify whether each load is used in a particular phase of flight for emergency operation. As a
minimum, these systems include:
◦ COM radio #1
◦ NAV radio #1

Rev. 11 Page 3-54
◦ Transponder and associated altitude source
◦ Audio panel
◦ Stall warning system (if applicable)
◦ Pitot heat
◦ Landing light (switched on during landing only)
◦ Instrument panel dimming
5. Insert or attach the calibrated ammeter in the line from the external power source to the master
relay circuit as shown in Figure 3-21. This eliminates errors due to the charging current drawn by
the battery.
EXTERNAL ALTNTR
POWER
ELECTRICAL BUS
+
Ammeter placement – either
BATTERY location acceptable (does not
- include battery charging current)
MASTER
RELAY
Figure 3-21 Ammeter Placement for Current Measurements
6. Verify that all circuit breakers are closed.

7. Apply external power to the aircraft. Power source voltage should be set to nominal alternator
voltage (usually 13.8 VDC or 27.5 VDC).
8. Turn on the battery master switch.
9. Set the lighting as described below. These settings will be used for every current measurement that
follows.
◦ All instrument panel and flood lights should be set to maximum brightness.
◦ The GTN Xi backlight should be set to 50% brightness.
◦ Any other displays with a backlight should be set to 50% brightness.
10. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads used in the taxiing
phase and record ammeter current reading (measurement (a) in Figure 3-22). The following items
should be taken into consideration for this measurement:
◦ The autopilot circuit breaker should be closed, but the autopilot should not be engaged
11. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads used in the normal
takeoff/landing phase and record ammeter current reading. Measurements must be taken with the
landing lights ON and OFF (measurements (b1) and (b2) in Figure 3-22).
◦ The autopilot circuit breaker should be closed, and the autopilot should be engaged.
12. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads used in the normal
cruise phase and record the ammeter current reading (measurement (c) in Figure 3-22).
◦ The autopilot circuit breaker should be closed, and the autopilot should be engaged.
13. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads used in the
emergency cruise phase and record the ammeter current reading. Record the current drawn with
the landing light switched OFF and again with the landing light switched ON.
14. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for
the emergency landing phase and record the ammeter current reading.
15. Using the values measured and recorded, complete the ELA using the blank form in Figure 3-22.
Verify the maximum demand does not exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating.

Rev. 11 Page 3-55
Date: ______________ Electrical Load Measurement Tail No.:______________
Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Land
10 min 10 min 60 min Cruise 10 min
Circuit Used in Used in Used in Used in Used in
Circuit/ Breaker Operating this phase this phase this phase this phase this phase
System No. Time of flight? of flight? of flight? of flight? of flight?

Figure 3-22 Blank Electrical Tabulation Form
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page 3-56
Date: ______________ Electrical Load Measuremen t (cont’d) Tail No.:____________
Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Land
10 min 10 min 60 min Cruise 10 min
Used in Used in Used in Used in this Used in
Circuit/ Breaker Operating this phase this phase this phase phase of this phase
System No. Time of flight? of flight? of flight? flight? of flight?

(b1)
MEASURED Ldg light ON
(Amps): (a) (c) (d) (e)
VALUE
(b2)
Alternator Rating (Amps):
Percent of Ldg light ON

Alternator Capacity (< 95%) N/A N/A
(< 80 %) (< 80 %)
Used:
Ldg light OFF
(< 80%)
Figure 3-22 Blank Electrical Tabulation Form

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page 3-57
Date: 1/6/20 Electrical Load Measurement Tail No.: N5272K
Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
10 min 10 min 60 min (calculated) 10 min
Circuit Used in Used in this Used in Used in Used in
Circuit/ Breaker Operating this phase phase of this phase this phase this phase
System No. Time of flight? flight? of flight? of flight? of flight?
Alternator Field A1 Continuous X X X
Annunciator Panel C1 Continuous X X X X X
Vacuum Warning C2 Intermittent
Stall Warning C3 Intermittent
Gear Warning C4 Intermittent
Gear Actuator C5 Intermittent
Cluster Gage D1 Continuous X X X X X
Ignition D2 Intermittent
PFD D3 Continuous X X X X X
Turn Coordinator D4 Continuous X X X
Gear Relay D5 Intermittent
ADC E1 Continuous X X X X X
Panel Lights E2 Continuous X X X X X
Glareshield Lights E3 Continuous X X X X X
AHRS E4 Continuous X X X X X
Flap Actuator E5 Intermittent
Com 1 F1 Continuous X X X X X
GPS/NAV 1 F2 Continuous X X X X X
Com 2 F3 Continuous X X X
GPS/NAV 2 F4 Continuous X X X
Autopilot F5 Continuous X* X X
Audio Panel G1 Continuous X X X X X
Radio Blower G2 Continuous X X X
ADF G3 Continuous X X X
Transponder G4 Continuous X X X X X
GDL 69 H1 Continuous X X X
TCAD H2 Continuous X X X
JPI Engine Monitor H3 Continuous X X X X X
Bose Headsets H5 Continuous X X X X X
Altitude Encoder J1 Continuous X X X X X
Strobe Light SW1 Continuous X X X X X
Nav Lights SW2 Continuous X X X X X
Recognition Lights SW3 Continuous X X X X X
Landing Light SW4 Continuous X X X
Pitot Heat SW5 Continuous X X X X
Elevator Trim SW6 Intermittent
Boost Pump SW7 Intermittent
60.0 (b1)
Ldg light ON
MEASURED
(Amps): 47.5 (a) 43.5 (c) 34.0 (d) 48.1 (e)
VALUE
44.7 (b1)
Ldg light OFF
Alternator Rating (Amps): 70
86 %
Ldg light ON
Percent of (< 95%)
68 % 62 %
Alternator Capacity N/A N/A
(< 80 %) (< 80 %)
Used: 64 %
Ldg light OFF
(< 80%)
PASS PASS PASS
*Autopilot circuit breaker is closed, but autopilot is not engaged.
Figure 3-23 Example Electrical Load Tabulation

Rev. 11 Page 3-58
Date: ______________ Tail No.:______________
Power Sources
Item Number Voltage Manufacturer Model
Installed (DC Volts) Number
Alternator
Battery
Battery Capacity: x 0.75 (derating factor) = ________ Ah x 60 min = ________ A-min [i]
Current drawn during Normal Cruise (amps): ________ (c) enter current calculated in step 13. above
Cruise consumption during recognition: (c) A x 5 min = ________ A-min [ii]
Emergency Landing Current (amps): _________ (e) enter current measured in step 15. above
Emergency Landing Consumption: (e) A x 10 min = ________ A-min [iii]
Capacity remaining for cruise: ([i] – [ii] – [iii]) ________ - ________ - ________ = ________ A-min [iv]
Emergency Cruise Current (amps): _________ (d) enter current measured in step 14. above
Emerg Cruise Duration ([iv] / (d) ): ____________ [iv] / ___________ (d) = __________ min [v]
The total duration of flight on emergency power is determined by adding the time for recognition of the failure
(5 minutes) to the time for emergency cruise (calculated above) to the time for landing (10 mins).
Total Duration for Flight on Emergency Power (5 + [v] + 10) = ________ min [vi]
Verify that the total flight duration on emergency power [vi] is 30 minutes (for a typical Part 23 aircraft).
Assumptions:
1. Most severe operating condition is considered to be _________________________________________
2. Motor load demands are shown for steady state operation and do not include inrush current draw.
3. Load shedding is accomplished (how)___________________________________________within five minutes of

warning annunciation.
Measured loads using __________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-24 Blank Emergency Power Operation Calculation Form

Rev. 11 Page 3-59
Date: 1/6/202 Tail No.: N5272K
Power Sources
Item Number Voltage Manufacturer Model
Installed (DC Volts) Number
Alternator 1 13.75 Prestolite AL 12-P70

Battery 1 12 Gill G-35
Battery Capacity: 35 x 0.75 (derating factor) = 26.25 Ah x 60 min = 1575 A-min [i]
Current drawn during Cruise (amps): 43.5 (c) enter current calculated in step 13. above
Cruise consumption during recognition: (c) 43.5 A x 5 min = ___217.5__ A-min [ii]
Emergency Landing Current (amps): ____48.1_____ (e) enter current measured in step 15. above
Emergency Landing Consumption: (e) 48.1 A x 10 min = ___481 __ A-min [iii]
Capacity remaining for cruise: ([i] – [ii] – [iii]) 1575 - 217.5 - 481 = 876.5 A-min [iv]
Emergency Cruise Current (amps): ____34.0_____ (d) enter current measured in step 14 above
Cruise Duration ([iv] / (d) ): 876.5 [iv] / ____34.0_____ (d) = ____25.8__ min [v]
Total Duration for Flight on Emergency Power (5 + [h] 25.8 + 10) = _____40.8___ min [vi]
The total flight duration on emergency power [vi] is 30 minutes. [PASS]
Assumptions:
1. Most severe operating condition is considered to be night IFR with the Pitot heat operating.
2. Motor load demands are shown for steady state operation and do not include inrush current draw.
3. Load shedding is accomplished manually by the pilot within five minutes of warning annunciation.
4. Measured loads using a calibrated Extech clamp-on DC ammeter on the battery terminal to the master relay
cable.
Figure 3-25 Example of Completed Emergency Power Operation Calculation

Rev. 11 Page 3-60
4 INSTALLATION
4.1 Antenna Cable Installation and Connections ..................................................................................4-2

4.1.1 GPS/SBAS Antenna Cable Installation ................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 COM Antenna Cable Installation ..........................................................................................4-2
4.1.3 NAV Antenna Cable Installation ..........................................................................................4-3
4.1.4 Coaxial Cable Termination ...................................................................................................4-3
4.1.5 Marker Beacon Antenna Cable Termination ........................................................................4-4
4.1.6 Remote Bluetooth Antenna Installation ................................................................................4-5
4.2 Instrument Panel Bonding Procedure .............................................................................................4-7
4.3 GTN Xi ...........................................................................................................................................4-8
4.3.1 Requirements for GTN Xi Installations ................................................................................4-8
4.3.2 General Requirements for GTN Xi Installations ..................................................................4-8
4.3.3 Avionic Stack Cutout ..........................................................................................................4-10
4.3.4 Instrument Panel .................................................................................................................4-12
4.3.5 GTN Xi Preparation ............................................................................................................4-13
4.3.6 GTN Xi Installation ............................................................................................................4-16
4.3.7 GTN Xi Insertion ................................................................................................................4-21
4.3.8 Smart Glide Activation Switch Installation ........................................................................4-22
4.3.9 Example Instrument Panel Layouts with GTN Xi Installations .........................................4-23
4.4 GMA 35 ........................................................................................................................................4-24
4.4.1 GMA 35 Installation ...........................................................................................................4-24
4.4.2 GMA 35c Unit Insertion .....................................................................................................4-28
4.5 Flight Stream .................................................................................................................................4-29
4.5.1 Flight Stream 210 Installation .............................................................................................4-29
4.5.2 Flight Stream 510 Unit Insertion ........................................................................................4-31
4.6 Electrical Installation Procedure ...................................................................................................4-32
4.6.1 Wire Harness Buildup .........................................................................................................4-32
4.6.2 Backshell Assembly and D-Sub Connectors ......................................................................4-33
4.6.3 TVS and Fuse Installation (Nonmetallic IFR Aircraft Only) .............................................4-41
4.6.4 Flight Stream 210 Backshell Assembly ..............................................................................4-45
4.6.5 GTN Xi Fan Installation .....................................................................................................4-49
4.7 Weight and Balance ......................................................................................................................4-51

Rev. 11 Page 4-1
4.1 Antenna Cable Installation and Connections
4.1.1 GPS/SBAS Antenna Cable Installation
This section provides information on the antenna cable installation. Refer to Section 3.6.5.1 for antenna
installation location considerations.
NOTE
GPS/SBAS antenna cable loss must be between 1.5 dB and 6.5 dB in order to maintain
proper rejection of interference signals. If RG-142B or RG-400 is used, it must be between
6.5 and 35 feet long to meet the cable loss requirement. For longer lengths, use low-loss
double or triple-shielded, 50  coaxial cable.
It is permissible to temporarily locate the GPS antenna with a coaxial cable connected to the GTN Xi and
check the GPS performance as described in Section 6.2.2. Once the antenna mounting position has been
established, route the coaxial cable from the antenna to the GTN Xi. Proper selection of coaxial cable and
assembly of connectors is critical to GPS signal performance.
An acceptable connector used to connect the coaxial cable to the GPS/SBAS antenna is listed in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 GPS Antenna TNC Connector
Item Amphenol P/N
Connector, TNC, Male, Crimp 31-4452
Additional loss from coaxial connectors and adapters, such as TNC to BNC, should be considered when
computing cable loss. A typical loss of 0.2 dB can be used for each connection. To maintain integrity of the
SBAS signal, the GPS antenna coaxial cable must have a minimum of two shields (e.g., RG-400 or
RG-142B).
For very short runs, where the loss is less than 1.5 dB, additional cable should be used to increase the loss
to within 1.5 dB and 6.5 dB. This additional cable may be coiled, taking into account the minimum bend
radius of the cable.
4.1.2 COM Antenna Cable Installation

The antenna coaxial cable must be made of RG-142B, RG-400 or a comparable quality 50  coaxial.
Check for insertion loss and VSWR. A directional power meter such as a Bird or similar directional power
meter with a minimum power rating of 50 watts and covering 118-137 MHz should be used to measure
VSWR. The power meter should be inserted as close to the transceiver as possible. When rack and harness
buildup is performed in the shop, the coax termination may be provisioned by using a 6" inline BNC
connection. This would be an acceptable place to insert the power meter. Any problem with the antenna
installation is most likely seen as high reflected power. The VSWR should typically be less than 2.5:1 at
the band edges of 118 MHz and 137 MHz. In some installations, especially on rotorcraft, the VSWR
measured may be as high as 3:1 depending on mounting proximity to skids, floats, cargo pods and/or wire
strike devices. However, a VSWR of 3:1 will reduce the operational range but the transmitter is designed
to work into a VSWR up to 5:1 without damage.

Rev. 11 Page 4-2
4.1.3 NAV Antenna Cable Installation
For the NAV antenna(s), it is recommended the installer use RG-142B, RG-400, or equivalent 50 Ω
coaxial.
4.1.3.1 NAV Antenna Cable Splitter Installation

The need for a NAV antenna cable splitter (P/N 013-00112-00) is installation-dependent. Wire the splitter
as shown in the applicable diagram in Figure B-18. Use the following guidance when determining a proper
location to mount the splitter:
 Locate the splitter such that minimal coaxial cable is used in the installation. In general, this will
be as close to the GTN Xi as practical.
 Install the splitter on a flat surface in the fuselage in a location free from excessive vibration.
 Splitter installation requires four #4-40 fasteners (torque within 5 to 6 in-lbf).
 Fasteners must be standard aircraft hardware meeting industry-accepted specifications (e.g., AN,
MS, or NAS).
4.1.3.2 NAV Antenna Cable Diplexer Installation

The need for a NAV antenna cable Comant CI-507 diplexer is installation-dependent. Wire the diplexer as
shown in the applicable diagram in Figure B-18. When determining a proper location to mount the
diplexer, use the following guidance:
 Locate the diplexer such that minimal coaxial cable is used in the installation. In general, this will
be as close to the antennas as practical.
 Install the diplexer on a flat surface in the fuselage in a location free from excessive vibration.
 Diplexer installation requires two #10-32 fasteners (torque within 22 to 25 in-lbf).
 Fasteners must be standard aircraft hardware meeting industry-accepted specifications (e.g., AN,
MS, or NAS).
4.1.4 Coaxial Cable Termination

Follow the steps below for installation of coaxial cables:
1. When routing the coaxial cable to the radio rack location, keep in mind the recommendations in
Section 4.1.3.
2. Secure the cable in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11, Section 11.
3. Trim the coaxial cable to the desired length.
4. Install the TNC or BNC connectors per the manufacturer’s instructions.

Rev. 11 Page 4-3
4.1.5 Marker Beacon Antenna Cable Termination
This section provides guidance for terminating the marker beacon coaxial cable into the GMA 35 D-sub
connector. MS17/128-RG-400 coaxial cable is recommended for the marker beacon antenna. Due to the
thickness of this cable, an RG-179 or RG-188 cable assembly must be constructed to terminate the coaxial
in the GMA 35 D-sub. The termination cable assembly should be terminated to the RG-400 cable using a
BNC connector. Cable routing for the marker beacon coaxial cable must be routed in accordance with
Section 3.6.12.
When terminating the coaxial cable into the D-Sub, observe the following guidance. Refer to Figure 4-1:
 Ensure the distance from the beginning of the exposed shield to D-Sub is no more than
1.5 inches long.
 Terminate the center conductor by directly connecting it to the D-Sub with a crimp pin.
A suggested method for terminating the marker beacon coaxial cable using RG-188 terminated into a high
density D-Sub connector is shown in Figure 4-1 below. Refer to Table 3-23 for crimp tool, pin, and crimp
tool insert part numbers. Use a BNC connector to connect the RG-400 coaxial cable from the antenna to
the RG-188 or RG-179 marker beacon cable termination assembly. Terminate the antenna end of the
RG-400 coaxial cable with a BNC-F connector and attach to the marker beacon antenna.
GPN
336-00021-00
USE ON SHIELD
DRAIN WIRE
OF OR
GE T
K ED NNEC
A C CO
B
UB
DS
X
MA
H ES
INC
1.5
SOLDER SHIELD
DRAIN WIRE TO
SHIELD
LD
HIE
E DS
OS D
XP IEL
FE SH
DO ED
GPN EN XP OS
336-00044-00 O FE
ING
USE ON CENTER INN
CONDUCTOR BEG
G LD
BIN HIE
E TU ED S D RG-188
BL S IEL
CENTER KA XPO SH
CONDUCTOR H RIN ND E RED
S
OU LDE
AR SO IRE
D
A AIN W
N
D R
TO BNC
Connector
Figure 4-1 GMA 35 Marker Beacon Coaxial Cable D-Sub Termination

Rev. 11 Page 4-4
4.1.6 Remote Bluetooth Antenna Installation
NOTE
Complete a Bluetooth audio checkout to determine if the location of the antenna is
suitable before permanently attaching the antenna. Refer to Section 6.2.6.10.
The GMA 35c installation kit is equipped with a 2.4GHz 90° antenna (Garmin P/N 700-00076-00) along
with a cable assembly (Garmin P/N 325-00458-00 or P/N 325-00458-01). Install the antenna with the
supplied cable assembly to optimize antenna performance.
The antenna is through-mounted or installed with a bracket similar to the one shown in Figure 4-2.
R.375
.250
.750
.375
.063 .75
.750
Figure 4-2 Bluetooth Antenna Mounting Bracket Example
Brackets or modifications to the aircraft instrument panel structure to mount the antenna should be
performed in accordance with the methods outlined in AC 43.13-2B Chapter 2, AC 43.13-1B Chapter 4,
and these requirements:
 The material must be a minimum 0.040 inches thick if directly mounting to an instrument panel.
 Maintain an edge distance of at least 2d (center of hole to edge of part) for all new holes.
 Maintain a minimum of 3d (center-to-center) for all new holes.
 Material for a fabricated bracket must be 2024-T3 sheet aluminum, minimum thickness of
0.032 inches.
 Use sheet metal techniques (e.g, bend radius, fillets, etc.) applicable to material type and thickness.
 Fabricated parts must be corrosion protected. Apply zinc chromate primer that meets FED STD
TT-P-1757, or epoxy primer that meets MIL-P-23377, or other corrosion protection methods listed
in the aircraft’s maintenance manual.
 If fabricating a bracket, the bracket or plate must have a minimum of two fastener holes (#6-32
screws).
 Nut plates may be installed on the bracket or plate to secure the #6-32 screws.
 The bracket may be secured using A-A 55126, hook and loop fastener tape if using the provided
bracket design.
 Trim fastener tape to cover the entire base of the bracket mounting surface and mount on a flat
surface.

Rev. 11 Page 4-5
 The antenna cable must be secured so the cable assembly will not interfere with any controls under
the instrument panel.
 Use tie wraps to relieve strain at the installed antenna location.
To install the cable assembly to mounting bracket, perform the following steps:
CAUTION
Failure to fully engage the right angle connector will prevent the GTN Xi from properly
seating.
1. Secure the right angle connector of the cable assembly to the GMA 35c Bluetooth connector.
2. Torque the right angle connector to 8-10 in-lbf with a 5/16" SMA torque wrench.
3. Attach the other end of the cable assembly to the bracket or mounting location with supplied
locking washer and nut.
4. Torque the brass nut to 28-32 in-lbf.
5. Torque the antenna onto cable assembly to 8-10 in-lbf with a 5/16" SMA torque wrench.
Figure 4-3 Mounting Antenna to Bracket

Rev. 11 Page 4-6
4.2 Instrument Panel Bonding Procedure
The instrument panel bonding strap length should be as short as possible and must not exceed 6 inches in
length. The installation must be so that it avoids the bonding strap looping back on itself. Refer to
Section 3.5.3.2 for hardware specifications. Complete the installation using the following procedure along
with the guidance in AC 43.13-2B, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices - Aircraft Alterations,
AC 43.13-1B, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices – Aircraft Inspection and Repair, and
aircraft make/model-specific structural repair documentation, as indicated.
Construct a bonding strap by attaching 5/16" inside diameter terminal lugs to both ends of the braid.
Install the bonding strap with the following procedure:
1. Secure one end of the bonding strap to the instrument panel with a 5/16" bolt, washers, and nut, in
accordance with bonding requirements in Section 3.6.6. The washers must seat fully against the
panel without overhang or interference from other hardware.
2. Secure the other end of the bonding strap to the aircraft metallic structure with a 5/16" bolt,
washers, and nut, in accordance with bonding requirements in Section 3.6.6. The washers must
seat fully against the aircraft metallic structure, without overhang or interference from other
hardware.
BOLT
LUG
WASHER 1
WASHER 2
WASHER 3
WASHER 3
INSTRUMENT PANEL
LOCK NUT
Figure 4-4 Instrument Panel Bonding
If using an electrical bonding clamp, the installation must be in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11
and the following criteria:
• Use cadmium plated steel clamp, nut, and washers. Only AN735-6 and larger diameter clamps are
permitted.
• Select location to minimize the presence of moisture and allow for easy inspection.
• The AN735 conductive clamp must not be installed in Lightning Zones 1A, 1B, or 2B. Refer to
AC 20-155A, or later revision.
• Ensure all surface preparation material (e.g., primer, paint, etc.) is removed between the clamp
and the metallic tube in an area that is equal to the width of the clamp and 1 inch in circumference
to ensure a good contact surface is made.
• After assembly and bonding check, prime airframe tube and clamp in accordance with the
approved maintenance manual, or use MIL-PRF-85285 Type I, Color to suit (36081 Flat Gray
Preferable) Coating: Polyurethane, Aircraft And Support Equipment, or MIL-PRF-23377 Type I,
Class N, Primer Coatings: Epoxy, High-Solids.

Rev. 11 Page 4-7
4.3 GTN Xi
4.3.1 Requirements for GTN Xi Installations
The GTN Xi navigators are designed to be installed in the mounting rack attached to the back of the
instrument panel. In many cases, the existing brackets or rails fastened to the face of an instrument panel
can provide adequate means to attach the GTN Xi mounting racks and may be reused, requiring no
modifications to the instrument panel.
4.3.2 General Requirements for GTN Xi Installations

Figure 4-5 and Figure 4-6 illustrate the avionics rack mounting rails and forward rack support required in
all GTN Xi installations.
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the GTN Xi, the following conditions must be met:
1. If existing structure is to be used for mounting the GTN Xi, it must meet the following require-
ments:
a. Sheet aluminum instrument panel structure must be at least 0.062 inches thick.
b. Avionics stack brackets or rails must be at least 0.032 inches thick.
2. It is acceptable to reuse existing support brackets or plates. Minor modifications can be made to
adjust for the GTN Xi mounting rack hole patterns.
a. Maintain an edge distance of at least 2d (center of hole to edge of part) for all new holes.
b. Maintain a minimum of 3d (center to center) for all new holes.
3. If support brackets or plates do not exist, cannot be modified to fit, or otherwise need to be
fabricated for this installation, they should be fabricated and attached to the aircraft instrument
panel structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC 43.13-2B Chapter 2, AC 43.13-1B
Chapter 4, and the following requirements:
a. Material must be 2024-T3 sheet aluminum (bare or Clad) and a minimum of 0.032 inches
thick.
b. Apply aviation standard sheet metal techniques (e.g., bend radius, fillets, etc.) for the
material type and thickness selected for the fabricated parts.
c. Bracket or plate must have a minimum of two fastener holes (6-32 screws) for each GTN Xi
mounting rack. Nut plates may be installed on the bracket or plate to secure the 6-32 screws.
d. Fabricated parts must be corrosion protected. Apply zinc chromate primer that meets FED
STD TT-P-1757, or epoxy primer that meets MIL-P-23377, or other corrosion protection
methods listed in the aircraft’s maintenance manual.
e. If possible, fabricate and install a support between the mounting tray and a nearby structural
member of the aircraft, as recommended in AC 43.13-2B Chapter 2.
Refer to Section 4.3.9 for example layouts.

Rev. 11 Page 4-8
Use existing avionics mounting rails for the attachment to
instrument panel. Existing mounting rails must be electrically
grounded to the instrument panel. The rail surface that
touches the GTN Xi racks need to be cleaned and prepped for
electrical bond. Refer to Section 3.6.6 for electrical bonding
guidance.
Be sure to support the forward end of the

installation by securing mounting brackets
together using a plate (shown), brackets,
links, or similar method. The support at the
forward end can be attached to the nearby
structural member of the aircraft for added
stiffness of the installation.
Figure 4-5 GTN Xi Mounting Rack Plate Support

Rev. 11 Page 4-9
4.3.3 Avionic Stack Cutout
Some instrument panels may require minor modification to increase width or height of the avionics stack
cutout to accommodate installation of the GTN Xi.
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the installation of the GTN Xi, the following conditions
must be met:
1. A cutout cannot be made into aircraft primary structure.
2. Cutout area must not affect any subpanel structure.
3. Some stationary instrument panels are considered primary structure. Modification of such panels
is not covered by this STC and requires additional approval.
4. Refer to Figure 4-9 for dimensions of GTN Xi cutouts.
5. Radius corners and remove burrs from cut edges. Finish paint the cut edge or apply corrosion
protection as specified in Section 4.3.2.
4.3.3.1 Modification of Avionics Stack Mounting Rails

Existing mounting rails may contain holes from previously installed equipment. If existing rail holes do
not match holes in GTN Xi mounting racks, it may be acceptable to modify the rails by adding fastener
holes to accept installation of GTN Xi mounting racks.
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the installation of the GTN Xi, the following conditions
must be met:
1. Additional fastener holes must maintain an edge distance at least 2d.
2. Added and existing holes in the mounting rail must maintain at least 3d distance between hole
centers.
3. If existing brackets or mounting rails are determined to be unsuitable for installation of the
GTN Xi, new parts need to be fabricated. In some cases, there may be too many holes from
previous avionics mounting tray installations.
4. Carefully remove existing mounting rails from instrument panel. Avoid enlarging existing rivet
holes.
5. Fabricate new parts as close to the original design as possible (e.g., rails that had too many holes
drilled to be functional for another installation should be replaced with new rails of the same
material thickness and type with only the holes necessary for the planned avionics stack).
6. If the material type of the original rails or brackets is unknown, replace with 2024-T3 (bare or
Clad) of the same thickness as the original part. Apply aviation standard sheet metal techniques
(e.g., bend radius, fillets, etc.) for the material type and thickness selected for the fabricated rails or
brackets.
7. Fabricated parts must be corrosion protected. Apply zinc chromate primer that meets FED STD
TT-P-1757, or epoxy primer that meets MIL-P-23377, or other corrosion protection methods listed
in the aircraft’s maintenance manual. Area around the fastener holes on the side of the fabricated
rail that attaches to the GTN Xi mounting rack must be cleaned and prepared for electrical bond, as
detailed in Section 3.6.6 of this manual.
8. Install fabricated mounting rails to instrument panel using the same number and size of rivets as
those removed.

Rev. 11 Page 4-10
3xD
MINIMUM
Ø 0.144 ±0.005
2xD
MINIMUM
USE EXISTING
RAIL THICKNESS
Figure 4-6 Avionics Rack Mounting Rail Considerations

Rev. 11 Page 4-11
4.3.4 Instrument Panel
Given the age of the aircraft and the number and type of past avionics rack modifications, it may not be
possible to reuse the existing instrument panel. For example, removal and replacement of the mounting
rails may create a scenario where the rivet holes in the instrument panel have been enlarged too much to
repair. In such cases, GTN Xi installations may require a new instrument panel purchased from an aircraft
manufacturer. Under certain conditions, it may be possible to fabricate an identical instrument panel to
allow installation of the GTN Xi.
Such modifications require that the existing instrument panel must not be part of the aircraft primary
structure. Modifications that affect instrument panel structure are not approved through this STC and
require separate review and approval.
If the existing instrument panel is replaced with a new instrument panel, the new panel must comply with
the following requirements:
1. Material must be the same thickness and type as the original instrument panel (with a minimum
thickness of 0.062 inches).
2. Aircraft manufacturer Standard Practices or Repair Manuals are followed in selection of corrosion
protection and sheet metal techniques applicable to the installation. Alternatively AC 43.13-1B,
Chapter 4, Section 4 (Metal Repair Procedures) can be used as a reference. If not specified by
aircraft manufacturer, the panel shall be chemical conversion coat per MIL-DTL-5541 TYPE II, or
MIL-DTL-81706 TYPE II and primed with high-solids chemical and solvent resistant epoxy
primer per MIL-PRF-23377, CLASS N.
3. The original mounting locations, shape, form, and/or bends must not be modified from the original
design.
4. Bends in the material must not exceed the minimum bend radius specification of the material used.
5. OEM processes may allow for tighter bends (e.g., a “soft” material is formed then heat treated to
increase hardness”).
6. Panels must not be combined (i.e., an original two-piece panel cannot be combined to create a
single-piece panel). Likewise, panels must not be split (i.e., creating a two-piece panel from a
single-piece panel).
7. Movement or consolidation of instruments, gauges, annunciators, placards, lighting, etc., is
beyond the scope of this STC and will require separate approval.
8. Instrument panels are often more than a single piece; they are assembled with other brackets and
components permanently or semi-permanently attached to form supporting structure. The new
instrument panel must not alter the design of the instrument panel assembly features from the
original design. These features must be duplicated in the new panel structure.
9. The only intended difference between the new and the old instrument panel assembly is the
installation of the GTN Xi, which should occur in the location of the existing radio stack. Every
other feature of the panel, including aspects of the structure invisible to the pilot, must be
duplicated. Modification of the instrument panel that will not comply with these requirements is
not approved under this STC.

Rev. 11 Page 4-12
4.3.5 GTN Xi Preparation
Use the dimensions shown in Figure 4-10 (GTN 6XX Xi) or Figure 4-12 (GTN 7XX Xi) to prepare the
mounting holes for the GTN Xi. The GTN Xi mounting rack itself may also be used as a template for
drilling the mounting holes.
1. The backplate of the rack may optionally be removed for ease of mounting in the aircraft panel. To
do so, remove the two #4-40 screws, tilt the backplate away from the tray, and then slide the
backplate to the side.
2. Figure 4-9 shows outline dimensions for the various GTN Xi units. Install the rack in a rectangular
6.32 × 4.60 inch hole (or gap between units) in the instrument panel (refer to Figure 4-21). The
lower-front lip of the rack should be flush with, or extend slightly beyond, the face of aircraft
instrument panel.
NOTE
If the front lip of the mounting rack is behind the surface of the aircraft panel, the GTN Xi
connectors may not fully engage.
3. Ensure that no screw heads or other obstructions prevent the unit from fully engaging in the rack
(refer to Section 5.3). Exercise caution when installing the rack into the instrument panel.
Deformation of the rack may make it difficult to install and remove the GTN Xi.
4. Install the rack in the aircraft panel using six #6-32 flat head screws and six self-locking nuts. The
screws are inserted from the inside through the holes in the sides of the rack. Torque screws
12-15 in-lbf.
5. Verify the GTN Xi/GMA rack is electrically bonded to aircraft structure or instrument panel as
required in Section 3.6.6.
6. If the backplate was previously removed (refer to step 1), replace the backplate by positioning the
tabs on the backplate in the slots of the left side of the rack (viewing it from the cockpit) and
attaching it by replacing the two #4-40 screws. Torque 5 to 6 in-lbf.

Rev. 11 Page 4-13
Figure 4-7 GTN 6XX Xi Panel Cutout Detail
Figure 4-8 GTN 7XX Xi Panel Cutout Detail

Rev. 11 Page 4-14
GTN 7XX Mounting Rack
GTN 6XX Mounting Rack
During installation of the mounting racks,

ensure edge of the tab (bottom flange of
the rack) is flush with the face of the
instrument panel.
Tabs
Figure 4-9 GTN Xi Mounting Rack Tab Alignment

Rev. 11 Page 4-15
4.3.6 GTN Xi Installation
.894 [22.71] .575 [14.61]
6.300
6.250 [158.75] 5.800 [160.02]
BEZEL [147.32] RACK
"A"
1.815 "B" .250 [6.35]

[46.10]
1.10 [264.41] TO COAX
11.264 [286.11] TO STRAIN RELIEF GTN 650;L SHOWN
Ø.213 [Ø5.41] .331 [8.41]

100° CSK INSIDE RACK TO .0" DIMPLES
.125 [3.18]
(5 PER SIDE)
.985
2.640 [67.06] 25.02 2.665
1.970 67.69
BEZEL .985 50.04 TO .0"
"C" 25.02 DIMPLES
.364
8.000
.437 [11.10] [203.20] TO .0"
DIMENSIONS: INCHES [MILLIMETERS]

1
WEIGHT: POUNDS [KILOGRAMS]
2 CG LOCATION INCLUDES UNIT WITH CONNECTOR KIT, MOUNTING RACK, AND BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY.
DIMENSIONS inches [mm] [1] WEIGHT lbs [kg]

MODEL UNIT +
A B C UNIT
CONNECTOR KIT
GTN 625Xi 3.06 [77.8] 4.59 [116.6] 1.34 [34.1] 4.1 [1.88] 5.3 [2.40]
GTN 635Xi 3.19 [81.0] 4.72 [119.9] 1.22 [31.0] 4.8 [2.18] 6.2 [2.80]
GTN 650Xi 3.19 [81.0] 4.92 [125.0] 1.09 [27.7] 5.5 [2.48] 7.0 [3.19]
Notes:
[1] Dimensions to CG include GTN 6XX Mounting Rack.
Figure 4-10 GTN 6XX Xi Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 11 Page 4-16
211-60234-08
SCREW, 4-40 x .25 (4X) 1
00053-02
BNC/TNC CONNECTOR 1
00053-01
BNC CONNECTOR 1
00022-00
SHOULDER WASHER 1
115-01293-A0
GTN 6XX MOUNTING RACK
60234-23
SCREW, 4-40 x 1.375 (4X) 1
253-00421-00
1
CHASSIS GASKET
330-00053-01
1 BNC CONNECTOR
125-00220-10
1 GTN 6XX BACKPLATE
371-00014-01
1 FAN
011-02325-0X
CONNECTOR KIT
NOTES
PART OF P/N 011-02245-00 (GTN 625), P/N 011-02245-01 (GTN 635), AND P/N 011-02245-02 (GTN 650)
1 BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY KITS. REFER TO TABLE BELOW KIT CONTENT DIFFERENCES.
2 TORQUE TO 4.5 - 5.2 IN-LBF.
INSTALLATION KITS CONTAIN THE UNIT, CONNECTOR KIT, BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY KIT, MOUNTING RACK,
3 AND CONFIGURATION MODULE.
BACKPLATE KIT
CONTENT DIFFERENCES
UNIT INSTALL CONNECTOR MOUNTING BACKPLATE
WASHER QTY BNC CONN QTY
DESCRIPTION KIT P/N KIT P/N RACK P/N KIT P/N
GTN 625Xi,
010-01997-01 011-02325-00 115-01293-00 011-02245-00 1 0
Black
GTN 635Xi,
010-01998-01 011-02325-01 115-01293-00 011-02245-01 2 1
Black
212-00022-00 330-00053-01
GTN 650Xi,
010-01999-01 011-02325-02 115-01293-00 011-02245-02 3 2
Black
GTN 650Xi,
010-01999-31 011-02325-02 115-01293-00 011-02245-02 3 2
Gray
Figure 4-11 GTN 6XX Xi Mounting Rack Assembly (GTN 650Xi Installation Shown)

Rev. 11 Page 4-17
.892 [22.65]
6.250 [158.] 6.300 [160.02]

BEZEL RACK
“A”
1.820 [46.23] “B”

1.10 [264.41] TO COAX
11.264 [286.11] TO STRAIN RELIEF
1.000 [25.40]
GTN 750;L SHOWN
.125 [3.17]
Ø.213 [Ø5.41]
2.385 100° CSK INSIDE RACK
[60.57] (5 PER SIDE)
6.000 [152.4] 6.010 [152.65]

BEZEL TO .0" DIMPLES
3.811 [96.80]
2.220 [56.39]
“C” 1.970 [50.04]
0.39 [.] TO 0.0" DIMPLES
.437 [11.10] 8.000 [203.20]
DIMENSIONS: INCHES [MILLIMETERS]

1
WEIGHT: POUNDS [KILOGRAMS]
2 CG LOCATION INCLUDES UNIT WITH CONNECTOR KIT, MOUNTING RACK, AND BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY.
DIMENSIONS inches [mm] [1] WEIGHT lbs [kg]

MODEL UNIT +
A B C UNIT
CONNECTOR KIT
GTN 725Xi 3.22 [81.8] 4.16 [105.6] 1.99 [50.5] 5.7 [2.60] 7.3 [3.29]
GTN 750Xi 3.22 [81.8] 4.47 [113.5] 1.78 [45.2] 7.1 [3.22] 9.0 [4.07]
Notes:
[1] Dimensions to CG include GTN 6XX Mounting Rack.
Figure 4-12 GTN 7XX Xi Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 11 Page 4-18
211-60234-08
SCREW, 4-40 x .25 (4X) 1
330-00053-01
BNC CONNECTOR 1
330-00053-02
BNC/TNC CONNECTOR 1
212-00022-00
SHOULDER WASHER 1
115-01294-00
GTN 7XX MOUNTING RACK
330-00053-01
1 BNC CONNECTOR
253-00421-00
1 CHASSIS GASKET
125-00221-10
1 GTN 7XX BACKPLATE
371-00014-01
1 FAN
011-02326-0X
211-60234-23 CONNECTOR KIT
1 SCREW, 4-40 x 1.375 (4X)
NOTES
PART OF P/N 011-02246-00 (GTN 725) AND P/N 011-02246-02 (GTN 750) BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY KITS. REFER
1 TO TABLE BELOW KIT CONTENT DIFFERENCES.
2 TORQUE TO 4.5 - 5.2 IN-LBF.
INSTALLATION KITS CONTAIN THE UNIT, CONNECTOR KIT, BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY KIT, MOUNTING RACK,
3 AND CONFIGURATION MODULE.
BACKPLATE KIT
CONTENT DIFFERENCES
UNIT INSTALL CONNECTOR MOUNTING BACKPLATE
WASHER QTY BNC CONN QTY
DESCRIPTION KIT P/N KIT P/N RACK P/N KIT P/N
GTN 725Xi,
010-02000-01 011-02326-00 115-01294-00 011-02246-00 1 1
Black
GTN 750Xi,
010-02002-01 011-02326-02 115-01294-00 011-02246-02 212-00022-00 3 330-00053-01 2
Black
GTN 750Xi,
010-02002-31 011-02326-02 115-01294-00 011-02246-02 3 2
Gray
Figure 4-13 GTN 750Xi Mounting Rack Assembly

Rev. 11 Page 4-19
Figure 4-14 GTN 750Xi with GMA 35 Installation Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 11 Page 4-20
4.3.7 GTN Xi Insertion
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the GTN Xi, take precautions to prevent electro-static discharge
(ESD) when handling the GTN Xi unit, connectors, fan, and associated wiring. ESD
damage can be prevented by touching an object that is of the same electrical potential as
the GTN Xi before handling the GTN Xi itself.
CAUTION
The Bluetooth antenna port on the GMA 35c has a tight clearance between the GMA and
GTN Xi. Verify the unit and antenna cable are fully seated before inserting the GTN Xi.
The GMA 35c is seated when the face of the unit is flush with the mounting rack.
It may be necessary to insert the hex drive tool into the access hole and rotate the cam mechanism 90°
counterclockwise to ensure the correct position prior to placing the unit in the rack. The GTN Xi is
installed in the rack by sliding it straight in until it stops, about 1 inch short of the final position. A 3/32"
hex drive tool is then inserted into the access hole at the bottom of the unit face. Rotate the hex tool
clockwise while pressing on the left side of the bezel until the unit is firmly seated in the rack.
Be sure not to overtighten the unit into the rack. The application of hex drive tool torque exceeding
15 in-lbf can damage the locking mechanism.

Rev. 11 Page 4-21
4.3.8 Smart Glide Activation Switch Installation
NOTE
A Smart Glide activation switch is recommended to be installed when Smart Glide is
configured. If a Smart Glide activation switch is not installed while Smart Glide is
configured, a placard must be installed in accordance with Section 3.6.7.1. If installed, the
activation switch must be connected to all GTN Xi units.
Use the dimensions shown in Figure 4-15 to prepare the mounting hole for the Smart Glide activation
switch. The switch must be mounted in a location within easy reach of the pilot and readily distinguishable
from other switches. Refer to Figure B-20 for more information.
AIRCRAFT CONSOLE REF.
GUARD, 340-00273-00 REF.

PART OF KIT 011-05930-00
SWITCH REF.
NUT PART OF KIT 011-05930-00
PART OF KIT
011-05930-00
0.63
Switch (No Keycap)

(9.4) (1.2) x (2.0) Typ (3.7)
.370 M16 P1 .146
.047 x .079
(0.5) Typ
.020
NC
3 6
NO
NO
2 L 5
(9.7)
-+
.382
1 4
(2.8) Typ COM
.110
(15.0) Sq (7.3) (7.3) (6.0)

.591 .287 .288 .236
(18.0) Sq (8.3) (24.3) (11.1)
.709 .327 .957 .437
Dimensions: (mm) inch Single pole models do not have terminals 4, 5, & 6.
Figure 4-15 Smart Glide Activation Switch Installation

Rev. 11 Page 4-22
4.3.9 Example Instrument Panel Layouts with GTN Xi Installations
Figure 4-16, Figure 4-17, and Figure 4-18 show various configurations utilizing the GTN 6XX Xi and/or
the GTN 7XX Xi with other avionics.
Figure 4-16 GTN 6XX Xi and GTN 7XX Xi Example Installation
GTX 330
S- TEC FI FTY FI VE X
HDG NA V APR REV ALT VS
Figure 4-17 GTN 6XX Xi Example Installation
Figure 4-18 GTN 7XX Xi Example Installation

Rev. 11 Page 4-23
4.4 GMA 35
4.4.1 GMA 35 Installation
Use the six #6-32 screws that accompany the GMA 35 Installation Kit to install the GMA 35 mounting
rack to a GTN 7XX mounting rack. The screws are installed from the bottom side of the GTN 7XX
mounting rack using through-holes to access the mounting locations on the GMA 35 mounting rack. Refer
to Figure 4-19 and Figure 4-22.
8.07 [204.9]
6.25 [158.7]
6.00 [152.3]
"B"
1.48 [37.5]
1.16 [29.5]
.92 [23.4] 1.10 [27.9] 1.52 [38.5]
.65 [16.4]
.20 [5.1]
2X 4.5 [114.3]
.81 [20.5]
2X 2.25 [57.2]
2X .800 [20.3]
1.15 [29.2]
SEE NOTE 4
3X 5.360 [136.1]
6.29 [159.8]
"A"
DIMENSIONS WEIGHT
UNIT, RACK,
MODEL P/N A B UNIT BACKPLATE, AND
CONNECTOR KIT
GMA 35 011-02299-00 3.1 [79.2] 3.6 [92.2] 1.4 lb [.64 kg] 2.2 lb [1.00 kg]
GMA 35 011-02299-20 3.1 [78.5] 3.8 [95.3] 1.3 lb [.59 kg] 2.1 lb [.95 kg]
GMA 35c 011-02299-40 3.2 [80.3] 3.7 [93.0] 1.3 lb [.61 kg] 2.1 lb [.95 kg]
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS: INCHES[mm]. METRIC VALUES ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
2. DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL AND TOLERANCES ARE NOT IMPLIED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY STATED.
3. CG MEASURED WITH UNIT, RACK, BACKPLATE, AND CONNECTORS.
4. BLUETOOTH ANTENNA CABLE IS ONLY REQUIRED FOR GMA 35c INSTALLATIONS.
Figure 4-19 GMA 35 Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 11 Page 4-24
211-60234-08
1 5
SCREW, 4-40 X .250
115-01464-00
GMA 35 MOUNTING RACK 3
211-63234-11
5 2
SCREW, 4-40 X .437
125-00040-00
1
GMA 35 BACKPLATE
011-00950-02 BACKSHELL (2X)
011-01169-00 GROUND ADAPTER (4X)
2
330-00185-44 CONNECTOR (2X)
336-00021-00 PINS (A/R)
1 PART OF 011-02300-00 BACKPLATE KIT

2 PART OF 011-02302-00 CONNECTOR KIT
3 PART OF 010-00831-01 INSTALLATION KIT
4 SEE TABLE FOR KIT REFERENCE INFORMATION
5 TORQUE 4.5 – 5.2 IN-LBS
UNIT DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION KIT CONNECTOR KIT 3 BACKPLATE KIT 3
GMA 35 010-00831-01 011-02302-00 011-02300-00

GMA 35 010-00831-21 011-02302-00 011-02300-00
GMA 35c 010-00831-41 011-02302-00 011-02300-00
Figure 4-20 GMA 35 Mounting Rack Assembly Overview

Rev. 11 Page 4-25
325-00458-() BLUETOOTH ANTENNA/CABLE KIT
011-03909-00
700-00076-00 GMA35c ONLY
211-60234-08 GMA35 BACK PLATE KIT

4 PLACES 011-02300-00
125-00040-00
011-02299-()
115-01464-00
211-63234-11
4 PLACES
330-00185-44
GMA 35 CONNECTOR KIT 2 PLACES
011-02302-00
SEE NOTE 1 011-00950-02
2 PLACES
NOTES:
011-01169-00
1. REFER TO 190-00313-09 FOR ADDITIONAL PARTS LIST.
VIEW LOOKING AT REAR OF GMA 35

J3502
J3501 PIN 44 PIN 44
PIN 1 PIN 1
Figure 4-21 GMA 35 Installation

Rev. 11 Page 4-26
115-01294-00
1 011-02645-00
GTN 7XX INSTALL RACK 2
GMA 35 INSTALL RACK
211-62237-09 2 3
SCREW, 6-32 X .312 (6X)
PART OF 011-00819-50 (GTN 725, BLACK), 011-00820-50 (GTN 750, BLACK), AND 011-00890-50
1
(GTN 750, GRAY) KITS
2 PART OF 011-02645-00 (GMA 35) KIT
3 TORQUE 8.5 – 9.5 IN-LBS
Figure 4-22 GTN 750Xi with GMA 35 Mounting Rack Assembly

Rev. 11 Page 4-27
4.4.2 GMA 35c Unit Insertion
The GMA 35c is installed in the rack by sliding it straight in until it stops. A 3/32" hex drive tool is then
inserted into the hex hole at the bottom-center of the unit. Rotate the hex tool clockwise while pressing the
unit on the front until the GMA 35c is firmly seated in the rack.
Be sure not to overtighten the unit into the rack. The application of hex drive tool torque exceeding
15 in-lbf can damage the locking mechanism.

Rev. 11 Page 4-28
4.5 Flight Stream
4.5.1 Flight Stream 210 Installation
2.28
1.37 0.43
0.91
3.16
2.00 3.78
5.75
2.74
0.92
Figure 4-23 Flight Stream 210 Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 11 Page 4-29
CAUTION
Care should be taken when tightening the mounting screws of the Flight Stream 210.
Excessive tightening may damage the mounting flange or break the screws.
T
IGH
FL
OF
I ON
ECT
DIR
FLIGHT STREAM 210: P/N 011-03257-40
CONNECTOR KIT ASSEMBLY: P/N 011-03258-00
Figure 4-24 Flight Stream 210 Mounting
1. Verify the chosen mounting location meets the criteria specified in Section 3.6.11.2.
2. Using four #6 pan head screws, install to supporting structure. Fasteners should be tightened until
snug, plus one-quarter turn.
NOTE
Nut plates or self-locking nuts may be used to secure the screws.
3. Verify the Flight Stream 210 electrical bond to aircraft structure or instrument panel as required in
Section 3.6.6.1.

Rev. 11 Page 4-30
4.5.1.1 Bracket Fabrication and Considerations
If fabricating a bracket for Flight Stream 210 mounting:
 Use 2024-T3 sheet (bare or Clad) or angle aluminum with minimum 0.025-inch thickness. Keep
bracket as small as possible with thin material.
 Use sheet metal techniques (e.g., bend radius, fillets, etc.) applicable to the material thickness and
type.
 Apply zinc chromate primer that meets FED STD TT-P-1757, epoxy primer that meets
MIL-P-23377, or other corrosion protection methods listed in the aircraft’s maintenance manual.
Metallic Aircraft
 Attach fabricated parts to metal structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC 43.13-2B
Chapter 2 and AC 43.13-1B Chapter 4 using mil-spec hardware.
 Use of blind fasteners may be necessary in some installations due to lack of access for other
fastening methods. Only use structural blind fasteners, such as NAS9301B (CherryMAX CR3213)
rivets.
Tube-and-Fabric Aircraft
When fabricating a new bracket to attach to tube-and-fabric aircraft, a small plate may be fabricated and
secured between tubular structure using MS21919 clamps attached to the tubular frame. Guidance should
be followed for fabricating a sheet metal bracket for metallic aircraft and in accordance with the methods
outlined in AC 43.13-2B Chapter 2.
Composite Aircraft
When fabricating a new bracket to attach to composite structure, follow guidance provided by the aircraft
manufacturer, such as the aircraft’s maintenance manual (MM) and/or structural repair manual (SRM).
AC 43-214, Repairs and Alterations to Composite and Bonded Aircraft Structure, may be used as a
supplement to manufacturer guidance material. Repair procedures contained in the MM or SRM may be
used to support the installation of new brackets or shelves fabricated for installation of the Flight
Stream 210.
4.5.2 Flight Stream 510 Unit Insertion

To install the Flight Stream 510, insert the Flight Stream 510 data card into the GTN Xi data card slot until
it stops. The label should be facing to the right.

Rev. 11 Page 4-31
4.6 Electrical Installation Procedure
4.6.1 Wire Harness Buildup
The installation kits for the GTN Xi, Flight Stream 210, and GMA 35 include connectors and crimp
contacts. Use wire specified in Section 3.5.2 for all connections. Make the crimp connections with a crimp
tool as specified in Table 3-23.
Refer to the interconnect diagrams in Appendix B for the applicable connections. Use 22 or 24 AWG wire
for all connections. For power and ground, use the wire gauge specified in the interconnect drawing in
Appendix B, then 22 AWG for the short length from the splice to the connector. Install the configuration
module as described in Section 4.6.4.2. Once the wire harness assemblies have been made, use anti-chafe
tape and attach the backshell/connector to the rear of the mounting unit. Route the wire harness as
applicable. Avoid sharp bends that may damage the wire harness.
Allow adequate space for installation of wire harnesses and connectors. Refer to interconnect diagrams in
Appendix B. Refer to Appendix A for connector pinout information. All electrical connections to the GTN
Xi are made through the following connectors provided by Garmin:
 J1001 Main – 78-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male)
 J1002 Main – 26-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male)
 J1003 COM – 44-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male) (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi only)
 J1004 NAV – 62-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male) (GTN 650Xi/750Xi only)
 J1005 I/O – 62-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male) (GTN 7XX Xi only)
All electrical connections to the GMA 35c are made through the following connectors provided by
Garmin:
 J3501 – 44-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male)
 J3502 – 44-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male)
All electrical connections to the Flight Stream 210 are made through the following connector provided by
Garmin:
 J301 - 15-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male)
Construct the wire harness according to the information contained in this and the following sections. Strip
all wires going to the connectors 0.17 inches. Insert the wire into the pin and crimp with one of the
recommended (or equivalent) crimping tools. Insert the pin into the connector housing location as
specified by the interconnect drawing in Appendix B. Verify the pin is properly engaged into the connector
by gently tugging on the wire.
Appendix A provides the pinout information for the GTN Xi, GMA 35, and Flight Stream 210. Required
connectors and associated hardware are supplied with the connector kits.
CAUTION
Check wiring connections for errors before inserting the unit into the rack. Incorrect
wiring could cause component damage.

Rev. 11 Page 4-32
Table 4-2 Socket Contact Part Numbers
Wire Gauge 22-28 AWG [1]
Garmin 336-00021-00
Military M39029/58-360 [2]
AMP 204370-2 [2]
Positronic MC8522D [2]
ITT Cannon 030-2042-000 [2]
Notes:
[1] For configuration module pins, ensure the crimp tool is set to crimp 28 AWG wire (use the
indenter settings provided on the positioner tool).
[2] Non-Garmin part numbers shown are subject to change without notice.
4.6.2 Backshell Assembly and D-Sub Connectors

The GTN Xi connector kits include Garmin backshell assemblies and ground adapter assemblies.
Backshell connectors give the installer the ability to terminate shield grounds at the backshell housing
using the shield block ground kit. Garmin part numbers for the D-Sub connectors and the backshell
assemblies are listed in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3 GTN Xi Backshell Assembly

Refer to
Figure 4-25
Description Garmin P/N Notes
through
Figure 4-27
Backshell (P1001) 125-00085-00
Backshell (P1002) 125-00082-00
1 [1]
Backshell (P1003) 125-00083-00
Backshell (P1004, P1005) 125-00084-00
Shield block (P1002, P1003) 117-00147-00
2 [2]
Shield block (P1001, P1004, P1005) 117-00147-01
3 Screw, 4-40 x 0.250, FLHP100, SS/P, Nylon 211-63234-08 [2] [3]
6 Screw, 4-40 x 0.375, PHP,SS/P, w/Nylon 211-60234-10 [1]
Strain relief (P1001, P1004, P1005) 115-00499-03
7 Strain relief (P1002) 115-00499-01 [1]
Strain relief (P1003) 115-00499-02
Cover (P1001) 115-00500-04
Cover (P1002) 115-00500-01
8 [1]
Cover (P1003) 115-00500-02
Cover (P1004, P1005) 115-00500-03
9 Screw, 4-40 x 0.187, FLHP100,SS/P, w/Nylon 211-63234-06 [1]
Connector, D-sub, HD, 78-pin (P1001) 330-00185-78
10 Connector, D-sub, HD, 44-pin (P1003) 330-00185-44 [3]
Multiple conductor shielded cable (refer to
11 As Required [4]
interconnect diagrams, Appendix B)
12 Shield terminator As Required [4] [5]

Rev. 11 Page 4-33
Refer to
Figure 4-25
through
Figure 4-27
13 Wire, insulated (20-22 AWG), 3" max length As Required [4] [5]
14 Pin contacts, #22D 336-00021-00 [3]
MS25036-149,
Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG, 14-16
15 MS25036-153, [4] [6]
AWG, 12–10 AWG
MS25036-156
Screw, PHP, 8-32 x 0.312", stainless or cad MS51957-42,
16 [4] [6]
plated Steel MS35206-242
Split washer, #8, (0.045" compressed MS35338-137,
17 [4] [6]
thickness) stainless or cadmium plated steel MS35338-42
NAS1149CN83
Flat washer, #8, 0.032" thick, 0.174"ID, 0.375" 2R,
18 [4] [6]
OD, stainless or cad-plated steel NAS1149FN832
P
19 Silicone fusion tape 249-00114-00 [4]
Notes:
[1] Supplied as part of Backshell Kits P/N 011-00950-04 (P1001), P/N 011-00950-01 (P1002),
P/N 011-00950-02 (P1003), and P/N 011-00950-03 (P1004 and P1005).
[2] Supplied as part of Ground Adapter Kits P/N 011-01169-01 (P1001, P1004, P1005) and
P/N 011-01169-00 (P1002, P1003).
[3] Supplied as part of GTN Xi Connector Kit P/N 011-02325-00 (GTN 625Xi), P/N 011-02325-01
(GTN 635Xi), P/N 011-02325-02 (GTN 650Xi), P/N 011-02326-00 (GTN 725Xi), and
P/N 011-02326-01 (GTN 750Xi).
[4] Not supplied – must be purchased separately.
[5] Solder sleeve with pre-installed shield drain wire may be used instead of items 12 and 13.
[6] Not a Garmin part number.

Rev. 11 Page 4-34
Table 4-4 GMA 35 Backshell Assembly
Refer to
Figure 4-25
through
Figure 4-27
1 Backshell 125-00083-00 [1]
2 Shield block 117-00147-00 [2]
3 Screw, 4-40 x 0.250, FLHP 100, SS/P 211-63234-08 [2]
6 Screw, 4-40x 0.437, FLHP100, SS/P, nylon 211-60234-11 [1]
7 Strain relief 115-00499-02 [1]
8 Cover 115-00500-02 [1]
9 Screw, 4-40 x 0.187, FLHP100, SS/P, w/nylon 211-63234-06 [1]
10 Connector, D-sub, HD, 44-pin 330-00185-44 [3]
11 Multiple conductor shielded cable As Required [4]
14 Pin contacts, #22D 336-00021-00 [3]
15 Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG MS25036-149 [4] [6]
16 Screw, PHP, 8-32 x 0.312", stainless or cad plated MS51957-42, [4] [6]
17 Split washer, #8, (0.045" compressed thickness) MS35338-137 [4] [6]
Flat washer, #8, 0.032" thick, 0.174"ID, 0.375" OD, NAS1149CN832R,
18 [4] [6]
stainless or cad plated steel NAS1149FN832P
Notes:
[1] Supplied as part of backshell kit P/N 011-00950-02 (P3501 and P3502).
[2] Supplied as part of ground adapter kit P/N 011-01169-00 (P3501 and P3502).
[3] Supplied as part of GMA 35 connector kit P/N 011-02302-00.

Rev. 11 Page 4-35
Table 4-5 Flight Stream 210 Backshell Assembly
Refer to
Figure 4-31
1 Backshell 125-00083-00
6 Screw, 4-40 x 0.375", PHP, SS/P with nylon 211-60234-10
7 Clamp, backshell, jackscrew 115-01078-00
8 Cover, backshell, jackscrew 115-01079-00
9 Screw, 4-40 x 0.187", FLHP100, SS/P with nylon 211-63234-06
10 15-pin D-sub connector 211-00170-00
Refer to
Figure 4-27
11 Multiple conductor shielded cable As Required [2]
14 Pin contacts, #22D 336-00021-00 [1]
15 Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG, MS25036-149 [2] [4]
16 Screw, PHP, 8-32, cad plated MS51957-42 [2] [4]
17 Split washer, #8, (0.045" compressed thickness) MS35338-137 [2] [4]
Flat washer, #8, 0.032" thick, 0.174"ID, 0.375" OD, NAS1149CN832R,
18 [2] [4]
stainless or cad plated steel NAS1149FN832P
Notes:
[1] Supplied as part of Connector Kit P/N 011-03258-00.

Rev. 11 Page 4-36
4.6.2.1 Shield Block Ground Procedure
This section describes the acceptable methods for terminating shielded wires for the GTN Xi, Flight
Stream 210, and GMA 35 wires.
NOTE
The three tapped holes on the shield block above the GTN Xi fan must not be used for
grounding shield terminal lugs on P1001. There is insufficient clearance between the fan
case and the P1001 shield block to allow these holes to be used for grounding shield
terminal lugs. Refer to Section 4.6.5 for more information.
NOTE
Alternatively, use a Raychem S-2 series solder sleeve with the thermochromic temperature
indicator. These solder sleeves come with a pre-installed lead and effectively take the
place of items 12 and 13. Refer to Raychem installation procedure for detailed instructions
on product use.
9 2X
3X
6
1
2X 3
3 4X
Figure 4-25 Connector and Backshell Assembly

Rev. 11 Page 4-37

PREFERRED METHOD
ALTERNATE METHOD
Figure 4-26 Shielded Cable Preparation

Rev. 11 Page 4-38
) &7
* (2 17$
(' &2 ;
0$
$5
.(
7
62&
'
+ ,(/
)6
*2
1 1,1
*,
%(
$5

$5
$5
$5 $;
0 ('
326 /'
(; +,(
6
$5 $5
$5
$5
Figure 4-27 Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly (Preferred Method)

Rev. 11 Page 4-39
The screws (16) used to ground the shields to the shield block should penetrate two to four threads past the
shield block when installed. If the screws are too long, they could potentially damage the wires going into
the backshell.
Each tapped hole on the backshell can accommodate only two ring terminals (15). It is preferred that only
two wires (13) be terminated per ring terminal. Two wires per ring terminal will necessitate the use of a
ring terminal, #8, insulated, 14-16 AWG (MS25036-153). If only a single wire is left or if only a single
wire is needed for this connector a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG (MS25036-149) can
accommodate this single wire. If more wires exist for the connector than two per ring terminal, it is
permissible to terminate three wires per ring terminal.
Prepare all of the shielded cables as shown in Figure 4-26. Refer to Figure 4-27 for details of the shield
termination to the connector backshell. Skip to step 5 below for wires with no shielding.
1. At the end of the shielded cable (11), strip back a 2.5-inch maximum length of the jacket to expose
the braid.
2. Remove the exposed braid.
3. Carefully score the jacket 1/4 to 5/16 inches from the end and remove the jacket to leave the braid
exposed.
4. Connect a 20 or 22 AWG wire (13) to the exposed shield of the prepared cable assembly. Refer to
Figure 4-26.
5. Slide a shield terminator (12) onto the prepared cable assembly (11).
6. Connect the wire (13) to the shield using a heat gun approved for use with solder sleeves. The
chosen size of solder sleeve must accommodate both the number of conductors present in the cable
and the wire (13) to be attached.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 3 as needed for the remaining shielded cables.
8. Crimp pins/sockets (14) onto the wires.
9. Terminate wires in the connector (10) in accordance with the aircraft wiring drawings.
10. For P1001, install the configuration module wires into the connector. Refer to Section 4.6.4.2 for
instructions on installing the configuration module.
Refer to Figure 4-25 to complete the following steps to assemble the backshell onto the connector:
1. Attach the shield block (2) to the backshell (1) by inserting the flathead screws (3) through the
holes on the shield block and threading into the tapped holes on the backshell (1) (refer to
Figure 4-25).
2. Wrap the wire harness with silicone fusion tape (19, or a similar version) at the point where the
backshell strain relief and cast housing will contact the wire harness.
3. Place the smooth side of the backshell strain relief (7) across the wire harness and secure using the
two screws (6). Ensure each half of the strain relief bar is supporting half of the wire harness.
CAUTION
Placing the grooved side of the strain relief across the wire harness may damage wires.
4. For P1001, install the configuration module into the connector backshell. Refer to Section 4.6.4.2
for instructions on installing the configuration module into the backshell.
5. Attach the cover (8) to the backshell using two screws (9).
6. Install ring terminals (15) onto the shield drain wires (13), grouping wires as applicable for the
connector.

Rev. 11 Page 4-40
7. Terminate the ring terminals to the shield block (2) by placing items on the pan head screw (16) in
the following order: split washer (17), flat washer (18), first ring terminal, second ring terminal if
needed, before finally inserting the screw into the tapped holes on the shield block.
8. Insert the assembled connector into the backplate. Using screws (3), secure the connector into the
backplate. For the Flight Stream 210 connector, mate the connector directly to the Flight
Stream 210 LRU and thread the jackscrew until snug.
4.6.2.1.1 Special Considerations

Up to three shields or wires may be terminated within the 14-16 AWG MS25036-153 #8 ring terminal, and
a maximum of three ring terminals may be installed on each shield block terminal location.
4.6.3 TVS and Fuse Installation (Nonmetallic IFR Aircraft Only)

This section applies to IFR, nonmetallic aircraft only. VFR, non-metal aircraft do not require the use of
TVSs or fuses.
Certain IFR, nonmetallic aircraft will require TVSs at the main and NAV power inputs of the GTN Xi. To
determine which aircraft require TVSs, refer to Table E-1. TVS component part numbers are found in
Section 3.5.3.

Rev. 11 Page 4-41
4.6.3.1 TVS/Fuse Installation
For all TVS1/F1 assemblies that are required for lightning protection, install them in accordance with
Figure 4-28 and the notes on the applicable interconnect diagram in Appendix B.
PLACE SMOOTH SIDE OF STRAIN RELIEF ACROSS

CABLE BUNDLE. DO NOT PLACE GROOVED SIDE
ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.
T
T AC
ON
E TC
CK
F SO
O .
GE AX
ED . 0"M
6
L
TA
MEN
ON
VIR
EN LICE
SP
LENGTH TO
ENVIRONMENTAL
SPLICE 6" MAX
FUSE HOLDER AND

FUSE
HEATSHRINK
SOLDER TVS TO 22
AWG WIRES
Figure 4-28 TVS/Fuse Installation (TVS1/F1)

Rev. 11 Page 4-42
4.6.3.2 TVS2 Assembly (Nonmetallic IFR Aircraft Only)
Refer to Figure 4-30 while completing the following steps.
Certain IFR, nonmetallic aircraft will require a TVS assembly at the power bus that supplies power to the
GTN Xi (refer to Appendix Section E.1 to determine which aircraft require them). Refer to Section 3.5.3
for TVS component part numbers. Refer to Figure B-4 for interconnect drawings that show the TVS
installed.
SOCKET CONTACT
CRIMP & SOLDER
0.5"
Max
Figure 4-29 Detail of TVS Pin Assembly
DETAIL OF TVS
HEAT SHRINK ANODE
CATHODE
0.44" FUSE
Max HOLDER
SOLDER
TO TO POWER
GROUND BUS
Environmental Splice
0.75" TVS (Qty. 4)
Max
4 Pin Connector
12.0"
Max
NOTE
:
.
All four TVSs must be installed with the cathode facing the connector.
Figure 4-30 TVS2 Assembly
1. Cut the TVS leads to 0.75 +0.00/-0.10 inches on both sides.

2. Crimp and solder each of the four TVS banded side (cathode) leads to their connector sockets
(refer to Figure 4-29), and insert into the 4-pin connector.
3. Install heat shrink around the four TVSs – this will help to hold them in place during the following
steps.
4. Solder the four leads at the anode (ground) end of the assembly onto a length of 18 AWG wire.
Attach a terminal lug onto the wire end.
5. Attach a piece of heat shrink to cover the soldered TVS leads and four TVSs.

Rev. 11 Page 4-43
6. Attach a larger piece of heat shrink over the 4-pin connector with sockets and back over the four
TVSs. These two pieces of heat shrink should overlap along the entire length of the TVSs.
7. Crimp and solder four 18 AWG wires to their connector pins and insert them into the 4-pin
connector.
8. Attach lengths of 18 AWG to both ends of the fuse and fuse holder assembly.
9. Splice the four wires from the connector with pins to one of the wires attached to the fuse
assembly.
10. Attach a terminal lug to the 18 AWG coming from the other end of the fuse assembly.
11. Connect the two halves of the four-pin connector together.
12. Verify the 10A fuse is installed in the fuse holder.
4.6.3.2.1 TVS2 Assembly Polarity Check

Using a multimeter that is set to the diode mode, check conductivity across the entire TVS2 assembly. The
meter should indicate open when the red lead is attached to the power bus terminal lug and the black lead is
attached to the ground terminal lug. The meter should indicate 2.0 to 2.5 volts when the red lead is attached
to the ground terminal lug and the black lead is attached to the power bus terminal lug.
4.6.3.2.2 TVS2 Installation

Refer to Figure B-4 while completing the following steps:
1. Attach the fuse (power) end of the TVS assembly to the power bus at the specific point detailed in
the drawing.
2. Attach the ground end of the TVS2 assembly to aircraft ground.

Rev. 11 Page 4-44
4.6.4 Flight Stream 210 Backshell Assembly
The Flight Stream 210 device supports one RS-422 input/output and two RS-232 inputs/outputs. Shields
for each of these wires must be terminated on the connector shield block. The Flight Stream connector
contains two tapped holes on the shield block for termination of grounding shield terminal lugs.
Up to three shields or wires may be terminated within the 14-16 AWG MS25036-153 #8 ring terminal. Up
to three ring terminals may be located on each of the two tapped holes on the shield block. It is
recommended to terminate each of the shield drains on one of the terminal holes to ensure there is adequate
room on the shield block to terminate the unit ground terminal braid on the other terminal. Refer to
Section 3.6.6.1 for details on how to build and terminate the ground terminal braid.
10
Figure 4-31 Flight Stream 210 Backshell Assembly
4.6.4.1 Flight Stream 210 Installation Special Considerations

To avoid incorrectly attaching the 15-pin D-sub connector and damaging the unit, it is required to populate
pin 6 of the connector.
11 12 13 14 15
6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5
Figure 4-32 Flight Stream 210 Connector

Rev. 11 Page 4-45
4.6.4.2 Configuration Module Installation (P1001 Only)
GTN Xi P1001 connector assemblies serve as the housing for a configuration module. This section lists the
two configuration module assemblies that are supplied with GTN Xi installation kits.
Table 4-6 Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart

Color Function P1001 Contact
Red Vcc 65
Black Ground 64
Yellow Data 62
White Clock 63
NOTE
The pin contacts supplied with the GTN Xi configuration module are specifically made to
accommodate 28 AWG wire.

Rev. 11 Page 4-46
4.6.4.2.1 Configuration Module Assembly with Potted PCB
Refer to Figure 4-33 and Table 4-5 for details and item numbers referenced in the following procedure.
1. Strip 0.17 inches of insulation from each wire prior to crimping.
2. Crimp pins (4) onto each wire of the 4-conductor wire harness (3).
3. Insert the newly crimped pins and wires (3, 4) into the applicable connector housing (5) locations
shown in Figure 4-33 and Figure B-4.
4. Plug the 4-conductor wire harness (3) into the connector on the PCB (1).
5. Insert the PCB (1) into the backshell (6) recess.
6. Attach cover (7) to backshell (6) using screws (8).
Table 4-7 Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-03 (P1001)

Refer to
Description Garmin P/N
Figure 4-33
1 Configuration module, PCB board assembly w/EEPROM 011-02178-00
3 4-conductor harness 325-00122-00
4 Pin contact, crimp, #22D 336-00021-00

Figure 4-33 Backshell Assembly (Potted Configuration Module)

Rev. 11 Page 4-47
4.6.4.2.2 Configuration Module Assembly with Spacer
NOTE
Configuration module assembly kit P/N 011-00979-00 may not be available for new
GTN Xi installations. Refer to Section 4.6.4.2.1 for new GTN Xi installations.
Table 4-8 Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-00 (P1001)

Refer to
Figure 4-34
1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 012-00605-00
2 Spacer, Configuration Module 213-00043-00
3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00
4 Pin Contact, Crimp, #22D 336-00021-00
Refer to Figure 4-34 for details and item numbers referenced in the following procedure.
2. Crimp socket contacts (4) onto each wire of the 4-conductor wire harness (3).
3. Insert newly crimped socket contacts and wires (3, 4) into the applicable connector housing
location shown in Figure 4-34 and Figure B-4.
4. Apply the spacer (2) by wrapping it around the PCB board (1) making sure to insert the plastic
connector mounted on the board into the hole provided in the spacer.
5. Plug the 4-conductor wire harness (3) into the connector on the PCB board (1).
6. With spacer (2) in position, insert PCB board (1) into the backshell recess.
7. Orient the connector housing so the inserted 4-conductor wire harness (3) is on the same side of
the backshell as the inserted PCB board (1).
Figure 4-34 Backshell Assembly (Configuration Module with Spacer)

Rev. 11 Page 4-48
4.6.5 GTN Xi Fan Installation
Part numbers for the fan kit that is used with P1001 only are listed in Table 4-9.
Table 4-9 Fan Kit

Refer to
Figure 4-35
1 Fan cable assembly, 3-conductor harness 320-00600-00
2 Pin contact, crimp, #22D 336-00021-00
3 Silicone fusion tape 249-00114-00
Table 4-10 Fan Cable Wire Color Reference Chart

Color Function P1001 Contact
Red Power 59
Black Ground 43
Yellow Fan tach 58
The GTN Xi backplate assembly has a cooling fan mounted to it. The cooling fan is mounted to the
backplate assembly at the factory. The fan is necessary for proper cooling and air circulation within the
unit. The fan is powered from the GTN Xi and must be wired to the GTN Xi connector P1001.
2. Crimp socket contacts onto each wire of the 3-conductor wire harness.
3. Insert newly crimped socket contacts and wires into the applicable connector housing location as
shown in Figure 4-35 and the interconnect drawings in Appendix B.
4. Plug the 3-conductor wire harness connector into the connector on the fan.

Rev. 11 Page 4-49
NOTES:
1 Do not use the three tapped holes on the shield block above the fan.There is insufficient clearance between the fan
casing and terminal lugs.
2 Wrap fan wire with fusion tape separately from the main harness to prevent the fan wires from being dislodged or
damaged if there is excess movement between the main harness and the fan harness.
3 Ensure the fan wires do not exceed eight inches in length.
Figure 4-35 Fan Wiring Installation

Rev. 11 Page 4-50
4.7 Weight and Balance
Weight and balance computation is required after the installation is complete. Follow the applicable
guidelines as established in AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 10, Section 2. Make applicable entries in the equipment
list indicating items added, removed, or relocated along with the date the installation was accomplished.
GTN Xi and GMA 35c unit weights are listed in Table 4-11. Refer to Figure 4-10 (GTN 6XX Xi) and
Figure 4-12 (GTN 7XX Xi) for unit centers of gravity.
Refer to Figure 4-36 for a sample calculation. Include a copy of the updated aircraft weight and balance in
the aircraft POH/AFM.
Table 4-11 LRU Weights

LRU Std. Wt. [Metric Wt.]
GTN 750Xi (unit only) 7.1 lbs [3.22 kg]
GTN 750Xi (with rack and backplate) 9.0 lbs [4.07 kg]
GMA 35 (-00 unit only) 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg]
GMA 35 (-00 with rack and backplate) 2.2 lbs [1.00 kg]
GMA 35 (-20 unit only) 1.3 lbs [0.58 kg]
GMA 35 (-20 with rack and backplate) 2.1 lbs [1.00 kg]
GMA 35c (unit only) 1.3 lbs [0.58 kg]
GMA 35c (with rack and backplate) 2.2 lbs [1.00 kg]
Flight Stream 210 (unit only) 0.16 lbs [0.07 kg]
Flight Stream 210 (with connector) 0.27 lbs [0.12 kg]
Flight Stream 510 [1] Negligible
Notes:
[1] Flight Stream 510 should be added to the equipment list as an optional LRU and may be
installed/removed by the owner or operator.

Rev. 11 Page 4-51
Previous
Aircraft
Useful Load (lb) Empty Weight (lb) C.G. (in) Moment (lb-in)
Weight and
Balance
Calculated:
1093.3 2306.70 138.83 320233.96
01/06/20
Description of Items removed from
Weight (lb) Arm (in) Moment (lb-in)
aircraft
SL15 Audio Panel 1.00 55.00 55.00
GMX200 4.60 55.00 253.00
CNX80/GNS480 Color
6.10 55.00 335.50
GPS/NAV/COM
SL30 NAV/COM 2.30 55.00 126.50
Total Removed: 14.00 770.00
Description of items added to
Weight (lb) Arm (in) Moment (lb-in)
aircraft
GTN 750Xi 9.00 54.90 494.10
GTN 650Xi 7.00 54.90 384.30
GMA 35 2.20 52.90 116.38
Total Added: 18.20 994.78
Change +4.20 +224.78
New Aircraft
Weight and Useful Load (lb) Empty Weight (lb) C.G. (in) Moment (lb-in)
Balance
Calculated:
1089.1 2310.9 138.66 321228.74
01/06/20
Figure 4-36 Sample Aircraft Weight and Balance Calculation

Rev. 11 Page 4-52
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
5.1 System Configuration Overview ....................................................................................................5-3

5.2 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks ............................................................................................5-4
5.3 Connector Engagement Check ........................................................................................................5-5
5.4 Configuration Mode Operations .....................................................................................................5-6
5.4.1 Updates ..................................................................................................................................5-6
5.4.1.1 GTN Xi Software Loader Card ....................................................................................5-7
5.4.1.2 GTN Xi Software Loading .........................................................................................5-11
5.4.1.3 GMA 35 Software Loading ........................................................................................5-12
5.4.1.4 GMA 35 Boot Block Loading ....................................................................................5-12
5.4.2 System Information Page ....................................................................................................5-13
5.4.3 GTN Setup Page ..................................................................................................................5-14
5.4.3.1 ARINC 429 Configuration Page ................................................................................5-14
5.4.3.2 Serial Ports Configuration Page .................................................................................5-18
5.4.3.3 HSDB Port Configuration Page .................................................................................5-24
5.4.3.4 Interfaced Equipment Page ........................................................................................5-25
5.4.3.5 Main Indicator (Analog) Configuration Page ............................................................5-27
5.4.3.6 Lighting Configuration Page ......................................................................................5-28
5.4.3.7 Enhanced Lighting Configuration Page .....................................................................5-31
5.4.3.8 Audio Configuration Page ..........................................................................................5-35
5.4.3.9 Traffic Configuration Page ........................................................................................5-36
5.4.3.10 Main System Configuration Page ..............................................................................5-36
5.4.3.11 COM Configuration Page (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only) ....................................5-42
5.4.3.12 VOR/LOC/GS Configuration Page (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only) .................................5-45
5.4.3.13 ARINC 708 Configuration Page (GTN 7XX Xi Only) .............................................5-47
5.4.3.14 Discrete Configuration Page ......................................................................................5-47
5.4.3.15 Navigation Features ...................................................................................................5-51
5.4.3.16 Ownship .....................................................................................................................5-59
5.4.3.17 Connext ......................................................................................................................5-59
5.4.3.18 Update Config Module ...............................................................................................5-60
5.4.4 GTN Options Page ..............................................................................................................5-60
5.4.4.1 Terrain ........................................................................................................................5-61
5.4.4.2 Charts (GTN 7XX Xi Only) .......................................................................................5-68
5.4.4.3 COM Transmit Power (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only) ..........................................5-69
5.4.4.4 Weather Radar ............................................................................................................5-70
5.4.4.5 Search and Rescue ......................................................................................................5-71
5.4.5 GTN Diagnostics Page ........................................................................................................5-72
5.4.5.1 ARINC Inputs ............................................................................................................5-72
5.4.5.2 Serial Inputs ...............................................................................................................5-72
5.4.5.3 Discrete Inputs ...........................................................................................................5-72
5.4.5.4 Discrete Outputs .........................................................................................................5-73
5.4.5.5 HSDB (Ethernet) ........................................................................................................5-73
5.4.5.6 Main Indicator (Analog) ............................................................................................5-73
5.4.5.7 Analog Inputs .............................................................................................................5-73
5.4.5.8 Power Stats .................................................................................................................5-73
5.4.5.9 WAAS ........................................................................................................................5-73
5.4.5.10 Temps .........................................................................................................................5-73

Rev. 11 Page 5-1
5.4.5.11 Logs ............................................................................................................................5-73
5.4.5.12 Main Data Inputs ........................................................................................................5-73
5.4.5.13 VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog) (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only) ..........................................5-74
5.4.5.14 Com Board (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only) ...........................................................5-74
5.4.5.15 Clear Config Settings .................................................................................................5-74
5.4.6 External Systems .................................................................................................................5-74
5.4.6.1 GDL 69 .......................................................................................................................5-74
5.4.6.2 Stormscope .................................................................................................................5-75
5.4.6.3 Traffic Test Page ........................................................................................................5-76
5.4.6.4 GAD 42 Configuration ...............................................................................................5-77
5.4.6.5 XPDR .........................................................................................................................5-78
5.4.6.6 Audio Panel (GMA 35/35c) .......................................................................................5-88
5.4.6.7 Audio Panel (GMA 350) ............................................................................................5-96
5.4.6.8 GDL 88 .......................................................................................................................5-97
5.4.6.9 GSR 56 Configuration ..............................................................................................5-108
5.4.6.10 Weather Radar (GTN 7XX Xi Only) .......................................................................5-109
5.4.6.11 GDL 60 Configuration .............................................................................................5-112

Rev. 11 Page 5-2
5.1 System Configuration Overview
Instructions for configuring the GTN Xi and GMA 35c for each installation are contained in this section.
Checks to verify the system is properly installed and functioning correctly are also included. The steps that
are not applicable to a particular installation may be skipped. The checkout log included in Section 6.4.3
should be filled out during the checkout procedures and maintained with the aircraft permanent records. A
configuration log is included in Maintenance Manual and ICA, GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC and must be
filled out during configuration. The completed configuration log must be maintained with the aircraft
permanent records to document the configuration of this installation. A summary of the steps required for
configuration and checkout of the GTN Xi is as follows:
1. Perform installation checks (Sections 5.2 and 5.3).
2. If required, load software into the GTN Xi (Section 5.4.1.1).
3. If required, load software into GMA 35 (Section 5.4.1.2 through Section 5.4.1.3).
4. Configure the GTN Xi for the specific installation (Section 5.4.3).
5. Configure GMA 35 (Section 6.2.6).
6. Perform ground checks to confirm proper operation of the external sensors with the GTN Xi
(Section 5.4.1, Section , Section 6.1, and Section 6.2).
7. Perform the specified database checks (Section 6.2.14).
8. Perform the specified flight checks (Section 6.3).
9. Complete the checkout log (Section 6.4.3).
10. Update the aircraft documentation (Section 6.4).
NOTE
Throughout the next section, many screen shots and examples are used to illustrate the
software loading and configuration and checkout process. Changes may occur that result
in the examples being out-of-date. Always refer to Equipment List, GTN Xi Part 23 AML
STC for the correct software versions and part numbers.
NOTE
Throughout the next section, many screen shots are shown of the GTN 7XX Xi. The
procedures and methods for accessing pages on the GTN 6XX Xi are similar to what is
described for the GTN 7XX Xi, unless specifically noted.

Rev. 11 Page 5-3
5.2 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks
Verify all wire harnesses and cables are properly secured and shields are connected to the shield block of
the connectors. Check the movement of the flight and engine controls to verify there is no interference.
Prior to powering up the GTN Xi and GMA 35c, the wire harnesses must be checked for proper
connections to the aircraft systems and other avionics equipment. Point-to-point continuity must be
checked on all wiring to expose any faults such as shorting to ground. Any faults or discrepancies must be
corrected before proceeding. If any TVSs are installed as part of the installation, proper TVS installation
should be verified prior to application of power. Refer to Section 4.6.3 for guidance on checking each TVS
assembly. Check the lighting bus wiring to verify it is wired correctly before applying power to the
GTN Xi.
CAUTION
Incorrect lighting bus wiring could cause damage to the GTN Xi.
After accomplishing a continuity check, perform power and ground checks to verify there is proper power
distribution to the GTN Xi and GMA 35c, including the lighting bus and any high level inputs to the
GTN Xi. Any faults or discrepancies should be corrected at this time. Remove power from the aircraft
upon completion of the wire harness checkout.
The GTN Xi/GMA 35c can be installed after completion of the continuity and power checks. The
GMA 35c should be installed into the rack and secured as described in Section 4.3.7. The GTN Xi should
be installed into the rack and secured as described in Section 4.3.7. The GTN Xi backplate must be
connected to the wire harness and antenna coaxial cables.

Rev. 11 Page 5-4
5.3 Connector Engagement Check
Prior to configuration and checkout of the GTN Xi, the connector engagement should be checked as
described below:
1. Ensure the GTN Xi GPS/NAV and COM circuit breakers are pulled.
2. Slide the GTN Xi straight into the rack until it stops about 1 inch short of the fully seated position.
3. Insert a 3/32" hex drive into the unit retention mechanism access hole at the bottom of the unit face
and rotate the tool clockwise while pressing the bezel until the unit is firmly seated in the rack.
4. With the GTN Xi seated, reapply power by closing the circuit breakers and turning on the avionics
master switch (if installed).
5. Again, insert the hex drive into the unit retention mechanism access hole.
6. Rotate the tool counterclockwise to back out the retention mechanism.
7. Verify that three complete revolutions of the Allen screw can be performed without red “X”
indication or loss of power to the GTN Xi.
NOTE
If power is lost or the red “X” condition occurs with fewer than three turns, verify there
are no obstructions to the unit fully seating in the rack. Also, the mounting rack may need
to be moved aft (toward the pilot) so the instrument panel does not obstruct the unit from
properly engaging in the rack.
8. Re-seat the GTN Xi per step 3.

Rev. 11 Page 5-5
5.4 Configuration Mode Operations
NOTE
A Garmin transponder (GTX 32/32X/33/3XX) controlled by the GTN Xi will reboot into
the same mode as the controlling GTN Xi (i.e. if the GTN Xi boots into Configuration
mode, the transponder will also boot into Configuration mode).
CAUTION
Before configuring the GTN Xi, verify there are no configuration module service messages
displayed in the message queue. This would indicate the configuration module is
improperly wired or damaged.
Configuration mode is used to configure the GTN Xi settings for each specific installation. To access
Configuration mode, remove power from the GTN Xi. With the GTN Xi turned off (i.e., circuit breaker
pulled), press and hold the HOME key and re-apply power to the GTN Xi (i.e., push in the circuit
breaker). Release the HOME key when “Garmin” appears fully lit on the display. The first page displayed
is the Configuration mode home page. While in Configuration mode, pages can be selected by touching the
desired key on the display. Some pages may require page scrolling to view all of the information and keys
on the page; this can be done by touching the screen and dragging the page in the desired direction or by
touching the Up or Down keys.
5.4.1 Updates
The GTN Xi comes pre-loaded with software. However, to ensure it is loaded with the software that is
applicable to this STC, a GTN Software Loader Card must be created. Refer to Section 5.4.1.1 for
additional information. For dual GTN Xi installations, the software loading procedures in Section 5.4.1.2
must be carried out on each GTN Xi; however, the same Software Loader Card created in Section 5.4.1.1
may be used.
NOTE
Prior to installing a version of the GTN Xi main board software that is older than the
currently installed version, all RS-232 and ARINC 429 ports should be set to Off.
NOTE
Screen shots in this section are provided for reference only. Refer to Equipment List,
GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC for actual GTN Xi software versions.

Rev. 11 Page 5-6
5.4.1.1 GTN Xi Software Loader Card
A GTN Xi Software Loader Card may be created using a GTN Xi Downloadable Software SD Card
(P/N 010-01000-00) in conjunction with a GTN Xi software application downloaded from the Dealer
Resource Center on Garmin’s website. As an alternative, a pre-programmed software loader card may be
purchased from Garmin. Refer to Equipment List, GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC (P/N 005-00533-L1) for the
correct part number of the pre-programmed GTN Software Loader Card.
NOTE
The downloadable application to create the GTN Software Loader Card only runs on
Windows PCs (Windows 2000, XP, Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 10 are supported).
There is no Mac support at this time.
NOTE
An SD card reader is needed to create the GTN Software Loader Card using the
application that is downloaded from Garmin. The approved readers are SanDisk
SDDR-99 and SDDR-93, although other SD card readers may work.
Create a GTN Software Loader Card as follows:

1. Go to the Dealer Resource Center on Garmin’s website.
2. Download the GTN Software Loader Image. Refer to Equipment List, GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC
for the correct Software Loader Image part number.
3. Run the executable file. The window shown in Figure 5-1 will appear. Click Setup.
Figure 5-1 Software Update Installer

Rev. 11 Page 5-7
4. The window shown in Figure 5-2 will appear to guide you through the software loader card
creation process.
Figure 5-2 System and Software Version
5. Ensure you have an SD card reader connected to the PC. Insert the GTN Downloadable Software
SD Card (P/N 010-01000-00) into the card reader. Click Next.
6. Read and accept the license agreement, as shown in Figure 5-3. Click Next when finished.
Figure 5-3 Software Loader Card License Agreement
7. Click Find Drive or select the correct drive from the drop-down menu. Click Next.
CAUTION
In order to create a GTN Software Loader Card, the drive that you select will be
completely erased.

Rev. 11 Page 5-8
Figure 5-4 Software Loader Card Drive
8. The progress window shown in Figure 5-5 will appear while the card is being created.
Figure 5-5 Software Loader Card Progress Window

Rev. 11 Page 5-9
9. After the card has been created, the window shown in Figure 5-6 will appear. Select Finish to
complete the update process.
Figure 5-6 Software Loader Card Completion
10. Eject the card from the card reader (or stop the card reader in Windows). The GTN Software
Loader Card is now ready to use.

Rev. 11 Page 5-10
5.4.1.2 GTN Xi Software Loading
1. Remove power from the GTN Xi by opening the circuit breaker.
2. Remove the database card from the data card slot and insert the correct GTN Software Loader
Card into the data card slot. Refer to Section 5.4.1.1 for instructions on how to create a loader card.
3. Restore power to the GTN Xi by closing the circuit breaker.
4. The Configuration mode home page should now be displayed. Touch Updates to display the
software updates that are available.
5. Verify the software version being loaded to the GTN Xi matches the software version listed on
Equipment List, GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC. The Updates page displays the version that is installed
on the unit and the version installed on the loader card.
6. Verify the available GTN Xi software updates are being displayed by ensuring “GTN Software
Updates” is displayed on the key in the upper-left corner of the display.
7. To update the GTN Xi with all software available, touch Select All.
8. To begin the software update, touch Update on the bottom of the display.
9. The GTN Xi will display the prompt, “Start GTN Software Updates?”.
10. Touch OK to allow the GTN Xi to go through the update process.
11. When the updates are finished, the GTN Xi will display “Update Complete!”.
12. When finished, remove power from the GTN Xi and remove the Software Loader Card. Re-insert
the database card into the data card slot.
13. Cycle power on the GTN Xi and verify the software was correctly updated by going to the System
Information page and selecting the GTN Xi.

Rev. 11 Page 5-11
5.4.1.3 GMA 35 Software Loading
NOTE
The GMA 35 software will be present on the SD card when creating a GTN Software
Loader Card. A separate card is not required to perform GMA 35 software updates. Refer
to Section 5.4.1.1 for instructions to create the GTN Software Loader Card.
1. Remove power from the GTN 7XX Xi.

2. Insert the GTN Software Loader Card into the GTN Xi data card slot.
3. Push the HOME key.
4. Apply power to the GTN Xi.
5. Release the HOME key when “Garmin” is fully lit on the display.
6. Ensure the GMA 35 circuit breaker is closed.
7. Touch the Updates key.
8. Touch the GTN Software Updates key.
9. Touch the GMA 35 Software Updates key.
10. Touch the Select All key.
11. Touch the Update key.
12. Touch the OK key.
13. Remove power from the GTN Xi and GMA 35 when finished.
14. Remove the Software Loader Card.
15. Re-insert the database card in the data card slot.
17. Apply power to the GMA 35.
18. Navigate to the System Information page.
19. Select GMA 35.
20. Verify the software version matches what was on the Software Loader Card.
5.4.1.4 GMA 35 Boot Block Loading
CAUTION
The GMA 35 Boot Block Loader Card is separate from the GMA 35 Software Loader Card
and is required to update Boot Block software to v4.10. Refer to Section 5.4.1.3 for
instructions to create the GMA 35 Software Loader Card.
1. Remove power from the GTN 7XX Xi.

2. Insert the GTN Boot Block Loader Card into the GTN Xi data card slot.
3. Ensure the GMA 35 circuit breaker is closed.
5. Select all GMA 35 Boot Block updates.
6. Touch the Update key.
7. Touch OK.
8. Remove power from the GTN Xi.

Rev. 11 Page 5-12
9. Remove power from the GMA 35.
10. Remove the Boot Block Loader Card.
11. Re-insert the database card in the data card slot.
13. Apply power to the GMA 35.
14. Navigate to the System Information page.
15. Select GMA 35.
16. Verify the software version matches what was on the GTN Boot Block Loader Card.
5.4.2 System Information Page

The System Information page, shown in Figure 5-7, allows information related to the system, such as unit
type, serial number, system ID, and software versions, to be viewed. To access the System Information
page, touch the System Information key from the Configuration mode home page. System information
for remote LRUs can also be viewed from this page. To select a remote LRU, touch the key at the top of
the System Information page and select an LRU from the menu. Select the GTN Xi or other LRU to view
applicable LRU-specific system information.
Figure 5-7 System Information Page

Rev. 11 Page 5-13
5.4.3 GTN Setup Page
GTN 6XX Xi GTN 7XX Xi
Figure 5-8 GTN Setup Page
5.4.3.1 ARINC 429 Configuration Page

To access the ARINC 429 Configuration page, shown
in Figure 5-9, first access the GTN Setup page from the
Configuration mode home page by touching GTN
Setup, then touching ARINC 429.
This page allows configuration of the ARINC 429
input ports and the ARINC 429 output ports. Select the
correct speed for each port depending upon the
installed interfaced equipment by touching the Speed
key and toggling the high or low selection.
NOTE
Refer to Appendix C for approved third-party
equipment interfaces to the GTN Xi.
Select the correct Data In and Data Out settings for

each port. The correct setting is dependent upon the
interfaced equipment. The data selections are described
in Table 5-2, Table 5-3, and Table 5-4. Refer to
Appendix C for the correct data format selections for
each piece of interfaced equipment.
Figure 5-9 ARINC 429 Configuration
Page

Rev. 11 Page 5-14
Table 5-1 ARINC 429 Speed Selections
Selection Description
Low Standard low-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 12.5 Kb per second)
High High-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 100 Kb per second)
Table 5-2 ARINC 429 DATA IN Selections

Selection GNS Equivalent Description Notes
Off Off No unit(s) connected to this ARINC 429 input.
Altitude, temperature, and speed information from the
following Air Data systems:
Airdata Airdata [1]
• B&D 90004-003
• Bendix/King KDC281/481
Heading, altitude, temperature, and speed
Airdata/AHRS Airdata/AHRS information from Air Data/AHRS systems.
This interface is not used in this STC.
This is a Garmin data concentration format. Only high
Data Concentrator Garmin GTX 330 speed ARINC 429 should be used.
Selected course, true heading, magnetic heading,
and joystick waypoint information from the following
EFIS Format 1 EFIS [2]
EFIS systems:
• Bendix/King EFS 40/50
altitude, temperature, true airspeed information, and
EFIS Format 2 EFIS/Airdata joystick waypoint information from the following [2]
systems:
EFIS Format 3 Honeywell EFIS and joystick waypoint information from EFIS systems.
Selected course, magnetic heading, baro-corrected
altitude from the following EFIS systems:
EFIS Format 4 Sandel EHSI • Avidyne EXP5000 [2]
• Sandel SN 3308
• Sandel SN 3500/4500
joystick waypoint information, and true airspeed
GAD Format 1 Garmin GAD 42 [3]
information from the following system:
• Garmin GAD 42
Selected course, magnetic heading, pressure
altitude, baro-corrected altitude, temperature,
GDU Format 1 Garmin GDU calibrated airspeed, and true airspeed information [2]
from the following systems:
• Garmin GDU 620

Rev. 11 Page 5-15
Selected course, magnetic heading, pressure
altitude, baro-corrected altitude, temperature,
GDU Format 2 Garmin GDU indicated airspeed, true airspeed, mach number, and [2]
VS information from the following systems:
• Garmin G3X Touch
True heading and magnetic heading information from
INS/IRU INS/IRU the following Inertial systems: [4]
• Collins AHS-85E
RADAR Joystick waypoint information from a RADAR
RADAR Graphics
Graphics graphics unit.
Radio Altimeter height above ground from radar
altimeters.
Radio Altimeter N/A
• Collins ALT-4000
• Collins ALT-55B
Traffic information from the following traffic systems:
Traffic Format 1 Traffic Advisory [5]
• Garmin GTS 800
• Garmin GTS 820/850
• Skywatch HP SKY899
Traffic Format 4 Traffic Advisory • Bendix/King KTA 870/970 [5]
• Bendix/King KMH 880/980
• Avidyne TAS (Ryan 9900BX)
• Sky 497 Skywatch
Notes:
[1] Refer to Appendix Section C.1.2 for more information.
NOTE
Refer to GTN Xi Series TSO Installation Manual for information about ARINC 429 labels.
NOTE
Only one ARINC 429 output port can be configured to a GAMA Format output at one time. If more
than one interfaced system requires a GAMA Format output, splice the GAMA 429 output wires
from the GTN Xi into each system requiring GAMA Format information.

Rev. 11 Page 5-16
Table 5-3 ARINC 429 DATA OUT Selections
GNS
Selection Description Notes
Equivalent
Off Off No unit(s) connected to ARINC 429 output.
ARINC 429 ARINC 429 Standard ARINC 429 output data (non-GAMA).
ARINC 429 data as defined by the General Aviation
Manufacturers’ Association (GAMA) General Aviation Subset,
2nd Edition. The output data includes navigation and flight plan
GAMA Format 1 GAMA 429 [1]
information to the following systems:
• Garmin GDU 620
ARINC 429 data as defined by the GAMA General Aviation
Subset, 2nd Edition including GAMA Graphics Protocol ‘A’. This
format outputs intersection symbols as generic waypoint
GAMA 429
GAMA Format 2 symbols. The output data includes navigation and flight plan [1] [2]
Graphics
information (including graphical representation of flight plan
procedures) to the following EFIS systems:
• Avidyne EX500/EX5000/EXP5000
Subset, 2nd Edition including GAMA Graphics Protocol ‘A’. The
output data includes navigation and flight plan information
GAMA 429
GAMA Format 3 (including graphical representation of flight plan procedures) to [3]
Graphics w/Int
the following systems:
• Sandel SN3308
• Sandel SN3500/4500
GAMA 429
GAMA Format 4 Subset, 2nd Edition. The output data includes navigation and
Pro Line 21
flight plan information.
GAMA 429
GAMA Format 5 Subset, 2nd Edition. The output data includes navigation and
Sextant
flight plan information.
Subset, 2nd Edition. The output data includes navigation, flight
GAMA 429 plan, and GPS vertical guidance information to the following
GAMA Format 6 [1]
Bendix King systems:
GAMA Format 7 N/A This output format is not approved under this STC.
GAMA Format 8 N/A This output format is not approved under this STC.
Radar Format 1 N/A ARINC 429 output for control of ARINC 708 weather radars. [4]
The output includes navigation, VNAV guidance, and GPS
vertical guidance for the following systems:
Garmin 429 N/A • Garmin G5 [5]
• Garmin GFC 500
• Garmin G3X Touch
Notes:
[5] G5 software v5.50 or later.

Rev. 11 Page 5-17
Table 5-4 SDI Selections
RX: Accepts all ARINC 429 inputs
Common
TX: Generates all ARINC 429 outputs with SDI = 0
Number 1 (Pilot) long-range navigator
LNAV 1 RX: Accepts 429 inputs with SDI = 0 or 1
TX: Generates 429 outputs with SDI = 1
Number 2 (Copilot) long-range navigator
LNAV 2 RX: Accepts 429 inputs with SDI = 0 or 2
TX: Generates 429 outputs with SDI = 2
5.4.3.2 Serial Ports Configuration Page

Select the Serial Configuration page, shown in Figure
5-10, from the GTN Setup page by touching the Serial
Ports key.
This page allows configuration of the RS-232 input
ports and the RS-232 output ports. Change the inputs or
outputs to match the equipment that is interfaced to
each channel. Touch the key corresponding to the
RS-232 channel and select the applicable input or
output setting. The input/output settings are described
in Table 5-5 and Table 5-6. Refer to Appendix C for the
correct data format selections for each piece of
interfaced equipment.
More RS-232 Setup (Forward ALT to GTX)

This provides a means to enable or disable the output of
pressure altitude to a Garmin transponder. For this page
to appear, a Garmin transponder must be configured in
the RS-232 inputs and outputs.
Figure 5-10 RS-232 Configuration Page

Rev. 11 Page 5-18
NOTE
Refer to Appendix C for third-party equipment interfaces to the GTN Xi that are approved
under STC SA02019SE-D.
Table 5-5 RS-232 Channel Input Selections

GNS
Equivalent
Off Off No unit(s) connected to input of this channel.
Serial air data information from the following units:
Airdata Format 1 Shadin-ADC [1]
• Shadin ADC 200/2000
Serial altitude data from the following units:
• Icarus Instruments 3000
• Sandia SAE5-35
Altitude Format 1 Icarus-alt [1]
• Garmin GTX 327 Transponder
• Trans-Cal Industries IA-RS232-X, SSD120
• ACK Technologies A-30 (Mod 8 and above)
Serial altitude data from the following units:
Altitude Format 3 Shadin-alt [1]
• Shadin 8800T, 9000T, 9200T
Format used to accept data from a PED via the
Connext Format 1 N/A following unit:
• Flight Stream 210
Connext Format 2 N/A Flight plan information from G3X Touch. [8]
Serial air data and fuel flow information from the
following units:
Shadin- • INSIGHT TAS 1000 Air Data Computer
FADC Format 1 [2]
FADC • Shadin F/ADC 200
• Shadin F/ADC 2000
• Shadin AIS-380
Serial fuel flow information from the following units:
• ARNAV FC-10, FT-10
Fuel Format 1 Arnav/ei-fuel [1]
• Electronics International FP-5L
• Shadin AIS-380
Serial fuel flow information from the following units:
• Shadin 91053XP, 91204XT(38)D, 91053,
Fuel Format 2 Shadin-fuel [1]
912802-( ) Digital Fuel Management System
• JP Instruments EDM-700 Engine Monitor
This input format supports the GMA 35 audio panel
GMA Format 1 N/A [3]
interface.
This format enables marker beacon display on a
GMA Format 2 N/A GTN Xi from the GMA 350 panel-mounted audio
panel.
Select this format to transmit flight plan information
GNS Crossfill N/A automatically to a connected GNS 400W/500W [7]
navigator.
GSR Format 1 N/A Select this format for the Garmin GSR 56. [6]

Rev. 11 Page 5-19
GNS
Equivalent
Select this format for the GTX 32/327 transponder #1.
Provides status data and flight ID. Choosing this input
GTX Mode C #1 N/A [4]
setting will automatically configure the corresponding
channel output to the same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 32/327 transponder #2.
Provides status data, and flight ID. Choosing this
input setting will automatically configure the
corresponding channel output to the same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33/328/330
transponder #1. Provides status data, ICAO address,
GTX Mode S #1 N/A and flight ID. Choosing this input setting will [4]
automatically configure the corresponding channel
output to the same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33ES/330ES
transponder #1 with GTX software v7.01 or later and
for the GTX 335/335R/345/345R for AC 20-165( )
GTX Mode S+ #1 N/A compliance. Provides status data, ICAO address, and [4]
flight ID. Choosing this input setting will automatically
configure the corresponding channel output to the
same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33/328/330
transponder #2. Provides status data, ICAO address,
GTX Mode S #2 N/A and flight ID. Choosing this input setting will [4]
transponder #2 with GTX software v7.01 or later and
for the GTX 335/335R/345/345R for AC 20-165( )
GTX Mode S+ #2 N/A compliance. Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO [4]
address, and flight ID. Choosing this input setting will
Select this format for the GTX 33/33ES/330/330ES
transponder #1. Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO
GTX w/TIS #1 N/A address, and flight ID. Choosing this input setting will [4]
transponder #1 with GTX software v7.01 or later or
GTX 335/335R transponder #1 for AC 20-165( )
GTX w/TIS+ #1 N/A compliance. Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO [4]
Select this format for the GTX 33/33ES/330/330ES
transponder #2. Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO
GTX w/TIS #2 N/A address, and flight ID. Choosing this input setting will [4]

Rev. 11 Page 5-20
GNS
Equivalent
transponder #2 with GTX software v7.01 or later or
GTX 335/335R transponder #2 for AC 20-165( )
GTX w/TIS+ #2 N/A compliance. Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO [4]
MapMX Format 2 N/A This format is not used under this STC.
Select this format for the GTX 330 transponder #1.
Panel GTX This provides TIS data from the panel mount
N/A [4]
w/TIS #1 GTX 330/ transponder without controlling the
transponder via the GTN Xi.
Select this format for the GTX 330ES transponder #1
with GTX software v7.01 or later or GTX 335
Panel GTX transponder #1 for AC 20-165( ) compliance. This
N/A [4]
w/TIS+ #1 provides TIS data from the panel mount
GTX 330/330ES transponder without controlling the
Select this format for the GTX 330 transponder #2.
Panel GTX This provides TIS data from the panel mount
N/A [4]
w/TIS #2 GTX 330 transponder without controlling the
Select this format for the GTX 330ES transponder #2
with GTX software v7.01 or later or GTX 335
Panel GTX transponder #2 for AC 20-165( ) compliance. This
N/A [4]
w/TIS+ #2 provides TIS data from the panel mount
GTX 330/330ES transponder without controlling the
Lightning Lightning strike information from an
WX-500 [5]
Detector 1 L-3 Communications WX-500 Stormscope.
Radio CTRL
N/A This format is not used under this STC.
Format 1
Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900B Series
Traffic Format 7 Ryan TCAD [5]
traffic system.
Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900BX Series
traffic system.
Notes:
[7] If Auto GNS Crossfill is used, the GTN Xi should be installed as the #1 navigator.

Rev. 11 Page 5-21
Table 5-6 RS-232 Channel Output Selections
Off Off No unit(s) connected to output of this channel.
Serial communication of GPS data to Garmin
panel mount mode S transponders. Note: This
ADS-B ADS-B [1]
format is not required when using any other GTX
output format.
Serial communication of GPS data at 9,600 baud
to Garmin GTX 330ES transponder with GTX
software v7.01 or later, or GTX 335/345
ADS-B+ Format 1 N/A transponder for AC 20-165( ) compliance. [1]
Note: This format is not required when using any
other GTX output format that is described as
being for AC 20-165( ) compliance.
ADS-B+ Format 2 N/A This format is not approved under this STC.
Serial position, GPS altitude, velocity, and
navigation data to the following units:
Aviation Output 1 Aviation [2]
• Garmin MX20 (V5.6 or later), GMX 200
• Garmin GTX 327 Transponder
Serial position, velocity, and navigation data to the
Aviation Output 2 Aviation no alt following units: [2]
• Garmin MX20 (V5.5 or earlier)
Aviation data to support interface to a PED via the
Connext Format 1 Connext Format 1 following unit:
• Flight Stream 210
Connext Format 2 N/A Flight plan information to G3X Touch. [8]
Serial communication to a Bendix/King
External EGPWS HW EGPWS [3]
(Honeywell) KGP 560 EGPWS.
GMA Format 1 N/A Control of GMA 35c Audio Panel functions. [4]
GMA Format 2 N/A This format is not used in this STC.
Select this format to transmit flight plan
GNS Crossfill N/A information automatically to a connected GNS [5]
400W/500W navigator.
GSR Format 1 N/A Select this format for the Garmin GSR 56. [6]
Control of GTX 32/327 #1 transponder functions,
pressure altitude data, and groundspeed data.
Control of GTX 33/328/330 #1 transponder
GTX Mode S #1 N/A functions, pressure altitude data, and [1]
groundspeed data.
GTX Mode S #2 N/A [1]
GTX w/TIS #1 N/A pressure altitude data, groundspeed data, and TIS [1]
traffic.

Rev. 11 Page 5-22
GTX w/TIS #2 N/A pressure altitude data, groundspeed data, and TIS [1]
traffic.
Select this format for the GTX 330 transponder
Panel GTX #1.This provides groundspeed, GPS PVT, and
N/A [1]
w/TIS #1 pressure altitude information to the transponder
without controlling the transponder via the GTN Xi.
Select this format for the GTX 330 transponder
Panel GTX #2. This provides groundspeed, GPS PVT, and
N/A [1]
w/TIS #2 pressure altitude information to the transponder
without controlling the transponder via the GTN Xi.
transponder #1 with GTX software v7.00 or later
or GTX 335/335R/345/345R transponder #1 for
GTX Mode S+ #1 N/A [1]
AC 20-165( ) compliance. This format provides
control of transponder functions, pressure altitude
data, and groundspeed data.
or GTX 335/335R/345/345R transponder #2 for
GTX Mode S+ #2 N/A [1]
AC 20-165( ) compliance. This format provides
control of transponder functions, pressure altitude
or GTX 335/335R transponder #1 for
GTX w/TIS+ #1 N/A AC 20-165( ) compliance. This format provides [1]
control of transponder functions, control of TIS
traffic, pressure altitude data, and groundspeed
data.
or GTX 335/335R transponder #2 for
GTX w/TIS+ #2 N/A AC 20-165( ) compliance. This format provides [1]
control of transponder functions, control of TIS
traffic, pressure altitude data, and groundspeed
data.
Select this format for the GTX 330ES transponder
#1 with GTX software v7.00 or later or GTX 335
Panel GTX transponder #1 for AC 20-165( ) compliance
N/A [1]
w/TIS+ #1 without controlling the transponder. This format
provides control of TIS traffic, pressure altitude
Select this format for the GTX 330ES transponder
#2 with GTX software v7.00 or later or GTX 335
Panel GTX transponder #2 for AC 20-165( ) compliance
N/A [1]
w/TIS+ #2 without controlling the transponder. This format
provides control of TIS traffic, pressure altitude

Rev. 11 Page 5-23
Lightning Serial communication to an L-3 Communications
WX-500 [3]
Detector 1 WX-500 Stormscope.
Serial position, GPS altitude, velocity, and
navigation data to the following units:
MapMX Format 1 MapMX • Garmin MX20 (V5.6 or later), GMX 200 [2] [7]
• Garmin GDU 620
• Garmin G5
• GFC 600
MapMX Format 2 N/A This format is not used under this STC.
Radio CTRL
N/A This format is not used under this STC.
Format 1
Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900B
Series traffic system.
Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900BX
Series traffic system.
Notes:
[5] If Auto GNS Crossfill is used, the GTN Xi should be installed as the #1 navigator.
[7] Refer to Appendix Section C.1.5 for more information on GDU 620 or G5 interface.
5.4.3.3 HSDB Port Configuration Page

The HSDB Port Utilization page, as shown in
Figure 5-11, can be accessed from the GTN Setup page.
To configure each HSDB port, touch the key next to the
port to configure it as Connected or Not Connected.
If a Garmin LRU is connected to a specific HSDB port,
then configure the port as Connected. If no LRU is
connected to the port, configure it as Not Connected.
NOTE
The GTN Xi does not provide heading received
from ARINC 429 over HSDB to the GWX
weather radar. ARINC 429 heading sources
must be wired to both GTN Xi and the GWX.
Enable 100MB Ethernet

Allows fast syncing of databases between GTN Xi and
a G500/G600 TXi (SW v3.50 or later) or GI 275 (SW
v2.60 or later) while on-ground. It is automatically
Figure 5-11 HSDB Port Utilization Page
disabled while airborne.

Rev. 11 Page 5-24
5.4.3.4 Interfaced Equipment Page
To access the Interfaced Equipment page, as shown in
Figure 5-12, touch the Interfaced Equipment key from
the GTN Setup page.
This page configures which LRUs are installed and
interfaced to the GTN Xi. From the available list of
LRUs, select either Present or Not Present. The
transponder interfaced equipment configuration should
be pre-populated when the RS-232 data format is
selected for each RS-232 channel.
Cross-Side Navigator
In a single GTN Xi installation, select Not Present. In a
dual GTN Xi installation or GTN Xi-GTN 6XX/7XX/
GPS 175/GNX 375/GNC 355 installation, select
Present. Under Settings, select the second navigator.
NOTE
In a dual GTN Xi installation, verify that both
units have “GTN Xi” configured. In a GTN Xi-
GTN 6XX/7XX installation, verify that the Figure 5-12 Interfaced Equipment Page
GTN Xi has “GTN” configured and that the
GTN 6XX/7XX has “GTN Xi” configured.
GDL 60
Select either Present or Not Present. If Present, select the HSDB port or Other LRU.
GDL 69/69A
Select either Present or Not Present. If Present, select either GDL 69 or GDL 69A based upon the
installed LRU.
GDL 88
Select either Present or Not Present. If present, touch GDL 88 to select the external traffic source (None,
TCAD, or TAS/TCAS) connected to the GDL 88 and the GDL 88 ADS-B transmit state (Enabled or
Disabled). Configuration of these parameters enables portions of the GDL 88 user interface in Normal
mode and does not configure the GDL 88. Refer to GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual for
more information on configuring the GDL 88.

Rev. 11 Page 5-25
ADS-B In Source
NOTE
For installations with multiple GTN Xi units, the same source must be selected on each
GTN Xi.
The ADS-B In Source setting is used to specify which interfaced LRU is used to provide ADS-B In traffic/
FIS-B weather (if applicable) to the GTN Xi. The GTN Xi is only able to select one source for display.
Select either Not Present, GDL 88, GTX #1, GTX #2, GTS, GNX #1, or GNX #2.
If an active traffic source is connected to the interfaced ADS-B In sensor, select the type. Available
selections are None, TCAD or TAS/TCAS.
GDU #1, GDU #2, GDU #3, and GDU #4

Set GDU #1 as Present if there is one G500/G600 system installed. Set GDU #2 as Present if there are two
G500/G600 systems installed. Set GDU #3/#4 to Not Present. If Present, the option for GDU 620 and
GDU TXi appear. Select GDU 620 for interface to the G500/G600. Select GDU TXi for interface to the
G500/G600 TXi.
GI 275
Select either Present or Not Present. If Present, select ID of the GI 275. ID selections are GI #1, GI #2,
GI #3, GI #4, GI #5, or GI #6.
Transponder #1 and Transponder #2

Select GTX Mode C, GTX Mode S, or GTX Mode S+ based upon the interfaced transponder type. If the
type of transponder connected to the cross-side navigator is GTX w/TIS or GTX w/TIS+, select GTX
Mode S or GTX Mode S+, respectively. Note that if the correct data format is selected on the RS-232
Configuration page, this is filled in and grayed out. Verify the correct transponder type is displayed. Also,
the transponder should be configured as present even if it is connected to the other installed GTN Xi. This
setting enables the user interface in Normal mode.
GSR 56
Select either Present or Not Present. In installations with multiple GTN Xi units, this selection must be the
same on all GTN Xi units.
GWX (GTN 7XX Xi Only)

Select either Present or Not Present. If Present, select GWX 68, GWX 70, or GWX 75/8000, based upon the
installed radar. The GWX must be configured in accordance with Table C-23.
NOTE
If an ARINC 708 weather radar is configured, the Present key will not be available for
selection for the GWX weather radar.

Rev. 11 Page 5-26
5.4.3.5 Main Indicator (Analog)
Configuration Page
Select the Main Indicator (Analog) Configuration
page from the GTN Setup page. This page allows you
to calibrate the OBS resolver, configure the CDI key,
selected course for GPS and VLOC, as well as the
V-Flag state. Configurable fields are described
below.
OBS Resolver Calibration

To calibrate the OBS resolver, touch the Calibrate
key from the Main Indicator Configuration page.
Next, select 150˚ on the External CDI/HSI, then
touch the OK key as prompted on the display. After
the OBS resolver is finished calibrating, the GTN Xi
will display “OBS Resolver Calibration Complete!”.
Touch OK after the calibration is complete. Verify
OBS operation by checking the selected course
displayed at the top of the page is within 2° of the
selected course.
Figure 5-13 Main Indicator (Analog)
CDI Key Configuration Page
To enable or disable the CDI key, touch the key to the right of CDI key to toggle between enabling and
disabling the CDI key. Disabling the CDI key causes the CDI source to always display as GPS and
removes the CDI key. This may be necessary for certain EFIS systems where navigation sensor selection
must be accomplished on the EFIS or its control panel.
Table 5-7 GPS Selected Course

Select if it is desired to allow a selected course input from the analog resolver
Allowed (Default)
or ARINC 429 for GPS operation in OBS mode.
Select to cause the GTN Xi to ignore a selected course input (either analog
Ignored
resolver or ARINC 429) for GPS operation in OBS mode.
Table 5-8 VLOC Selected Course

Select if it is desired to allow a selected course input from the analog resolver
Allowed (Default)
or ARINC 429 for VLOC operation in OBS mode.
Select if it is desired to ignore a selected course input so the VOR valid flag is
Ignored dependent only on a valid VOR signal, with lateral deviation calculated by
another display device.

Rev. 11 Page 5-27
Table 5-9 V-Flag State
Whenever vertical deviation is invalid, the vertical deviation bar is parked in
the maximum UP position and the vertical flag is removed from view, except in
the following cases: (i) the CDI is in VLOC mode and an ILS frequency is
Declutter tuned, or (ii) the CDI is in GPS mode and a GPS approach with vertical
guidance is active. In these cases, whenever the vertical deviation is invalid,
the vertical deviation bar parks in the centered position and the vertical flag is
shown.
Whenever vertical deviation is invalid, the vertical deviation bar parks in the
Normal (Default)
centered position and the vertical flag is shown.
NOTE
The V-Flag declutter setting should only be set for indicators in which 300 mVDC is
sufficient to drive the vertical deviation bar out of view.
5.4.3.6 Lighting Configuration Page
CAUTION
Verify the Backlight Manual Offset value is set to
0% before lighting is configured. This Normal mode
setting is on the Backlight page of the System
group.
This section outlines the preferred method for configuring

the GTN Xi lighting in an aircraft.
For those installations that have a day/night switch that
meets the requirements specified in the switch interconnect
(Figure B-21), it is recommended to utilize the enhanced
lighting configuration to better integrate GTN Xi with the
cockpit lighting scheme.
While only one lighting source (e.g., lighting bus or
photocell) may be configured to control the display, through
proper configuration it is possible to have the GTN Xi
controlled by the dimmer bus for night operations and the Figure 5-14 Lighting Configuration
photocell for day operations. This configuration provides Page
the pilot with easily accessible control of the display brightness with fine resolution.
Configure the Day Lighting Curve

For the day lighting curve (refer to Section 5.4.3.6.1), set the photocell transition point to any value
between 5% and 50%. The objective is to have the display brightness controlled by the photocell when the
dimmer switch is in the OFF or lowest position so the input voltage has fallen below the photocell
transition level. To configure the day lighting curve set the dimmer to the OFF position or lowest level and
ensure the input level is below the transition level. Set the first vertex while exposing the panel to bright
lights or sunlight and set the remainder of the vertices while progressively shading the interior of the
aircraft. This can be achieved by shadowing the cockpit with blankets or moving the aircraft into the
hangar in stages. It is recommended to configure the photocell curve to ensure the display reaches 100%
output prior to 100% input. A linear curve for the photocell typically works well.

Rev. 11 Page 5-28
The following criteria must be met:
• The display must be viewable under all anticipated lighting conditions, including:
◦ The display must be viewable when in direct sunlight.
◦ The display must be sufficiently bright during conditions where the photocell is in heavy
shadow but cockpit is bright (e.g., flight into a setting sun).
Configure the Night Lighting Curve

To configure Night mode, cover the windows of the aircraft with blankets or other window covering and
turn off as many lights in the hangar as needed to ensure the cockpit is not exposed to any external lighting.
For best results, the installer should remain in the dark environment for up to 30 minutes to allow their eyes
to adjust before configuring the avionics lighting.
For Night mode, it is recommended to set the photocell transition point to the minimum value of 5% and to
set the maximum brightness value to a value of 75% or below.
Vary the dimmer switch through its range and adjust the lighting curve match the brightness of the GTN Xi
display as closely to the lighting levels of other avionics/lights in the cockpit as possible. It is
recommended most of the vertices be used to provide precision adjustment of the display at the lowest
lighting levels.
Next, turn the dimmer switch to the off position to configure the photocell.
• For any anticipated lighting condition, the GTN Xi display is viewable when the dimmer is set to a
level that results in other equipment on the same lighting bus being viewable.
• In full dark conditions, the transition from the dimmer control to the photocell does not result in
sudden increase in brightness.
• The maximum brightness setting on the dimmer switch will result in a display brightness sufficient
to be seen in sunlight.
Photocell Only Control

If an installation has no dimmer control and the photocell is to be used for control of display brightness
under all conditions (i.e., no dimmer input), the following procedure is recommended to set the lighting
curve:
To configure Night mode, cover the windows of the aircraft with blankets or other window covering and
turn off as many lights in the hangar as needed to ensure the cockpit is not exposed to any external lighting.
For best results, the installer should remain in the dark environment for up to 30 minutes to allow their eyes
to adjust before configuring the avionics lighting. Begin configuring the unit starting with the left-most
vertex, configure the required brightness for the current input value (indicated by a vertical white line)
under full dark conditions. Repeat this step for the remaining vertices by removing the window coverings
in increments; exposing the cockpit to additional external lighting and finally full sunlight on the display.
Typical acceptable lighting curves have a fairly flat slope at the lowest levels then become linear as input
levels increase.
Refer to Section 5.4.3.6 for normal lighting configuration and Section 5.4.3.7 for enhanced lighting
configuration for detailed information on lighting controls. From the GTN Setup page shown in Figure 5-
8, select the Lighting Configuration page, shown in Figure 5-14. This page sets display parameters that
affect the display backlight and key lighting brightness. Fields listed in Table 5-10 are adjusted separately
for both the Display and Key lighting features. The display source can only be configured to track the
Photocell or Lighting Bus 1. The display source cannot be configured to track Lighting Bus 2.

Rev. 11 Page 5-29
Table 5-10 Display and Key Lighting Adjustable Fields
Field Description
Backlight or key lighting level is determined by the ambient light level as
Photocell
measured by the photocell on the GTN Xi.
Lighting Bus 1 Backlight or key levels track the Lighting Bus 1 levels.
Lighting Bus 2 Key lighting levels track the Lighting Bus 2 levels.
Minimum Level
This sets the minimum brightness of the keys or display. Touch the Minimum Level key corresponding to
either the Keys or the Display to adjust the minimum brightness. The minimum brightness level can be
adjusted in a range from 0.05% to 100.00% when tracking the lighting bus, and from 0.14% to 100.00%
when tracking the photocell, with 100.00% being the maximum brightness level. The default minimum
display brightness level when tracking the lighting bus is 0.05%. The default minimum display brightness
level when tracking the photocell is 0.14%. The default minimum bezel key brightness level is 0.00%.
5.4.3.6.1 Photocell Configuration Page

The Photocell Configuration page, shown in Figure 5-15,
is reached by touching Configure Photocell on the
Lighting Configuration page, shown in Figure 5-14. This
page allows configuration of the photocell parameters
listed below.
Response Time
This sets the speed that the key or display brightness
responds to the input level (bus voltage or ambient light)
changes. The higher the number, the slower the display
responds. This field has a range of 0 to 7 seconds, and is
set to 2 seconds as a default value.
Slope
This sets the sensitivity the brightness of the display or
keys has to changes in the input level. Adjusting the slope
higher will result in a brighter display for a given increase
in the input level. This field has a range of 0 to 100, and is
set to 50 as the default setting. Figure 5-15 Photocell Configuration
Page
Offset
This adjusts the lighting level up or down for any given input level. This field has a range of 0 to 99, and is
set to 50 as a default value. This may also be used to match lighting curves with other equipment in the
panel.

Rev. 11 Page 5-30
5.4.3.6.1.1 Photocell Override Options
Key Backlight Cutoff
This configures the point at which key backlighting is switched off in bright light. For example, a value of
70% results in the key backlights being turned off at photocell source input levels above 70%. This field
has a range of 0 to 100%, and is set to 80% as the default setting.
Photocell Transition
This sets the lighting bus input level below which the lighting bus input is ignored and the photocell is used
to control the GTN Xi display backlight. The photocell transition is a percentage of the maximum lighting
bus input level. This field has a range of 5 to 50, and is set to 25 as the default setting.
5.4.3.6.2 Lighting Bus Configuration Page

The Lighting Bus Configuration page offers the same Response Time, Slope, and Offset adjustments as
described in Section 5.4.3.6.1.
Lighting Bus Source

To configure the lighting bus source voltage, touch the Lighting Bus 1 or Lighting Bus 2 key. Select
14 VDC, 28 VDC, 5 VDC, or 5 VAC, depending on the lighting bus voltage source.
5.4.3.7 Enhanced Lighting Configuration Page
CAUTION
Verify the Backlight Manual Offset Value is set to
0% before lighting is configured. This Normal
mode setting is on the Backlight page of the
System group.
NOTE
The Enhanced Lighting Configuration page is
displayed in place of the Lighting Configuration
page only if Enhanced Lighting is enabled on the
Main System Configuration page (refer to
Section 5.4.3.10).
NOTE
Minimum Lighting Level must be configured on
the normal Lighting Configuration page before
enabling Enhanced Lighting and continuing the
configuration on the Enhanced Lighting Figure 5-16 Enhanced Lighting
Configuration page. Failure to configure Configuration Page
Minimum Lighting Level on the Lighting Configuration page before enabling Enhanced
Lighting will result in the Enhanced Lighting Minimum Lighting Level being ignored for
the level set on the normal Lighting Configuration page.
From the GTN Setup page, select the Enhanced Lighting Configuration page, shown in Figure 5-16. This
page allows you to set display parameters that affect the display backlight and key lighting brightness.
Enhanced lighting allows customized lighting curve slopes to be configured for both display and key

Rev. 11 Page 5-31
lighting to improve the ability to match the GTN Xi lighting levels with other light sources in the cockpit.
Fields listed under the menus described in Table 5-11 are adjusted separately for both the display and key
lighting features.
The Enhanced Lighting Configuration page provides an alternative method to configure lighting for the
GTN Xi. Enhanced lighting provides the installer the ability to configure customized day and night
lighting curves. These custom curves provide improved resolution for the installer to match the GTN Xi
lighting to other avionics in the cockpit.
From the GTN Setup page, select the Enhanced Lighting Configuration page, shown in Figure 5-16. This
page allows you to set display parameters that affect the display backlight and key lighting brightness.
Fields listed under the menus described in Table 5-11 are adjusted separately for both the display and key
lighting features. The display source can only be configured to track the photocell or Lighting Bus 1. The
display source cannot be configured to track Lighting Bus 2.
Table 5-11 Enhanced Lighting Configuration Subpages

Field Description
Source Settings This selection contains display and key lighting source configuration items.
Day Mode Operation Contains day mode display and backlight curve configuration items.
Night Mode Operation Contains night mode display and backlight curve configuration items.
5.4.3.7.1 Source Setting Pages

The Source Settings Configuration page is reached by
touching Source Settings on the Enhanced Lighting
Configuration page, shown in Figure 5-16. This page
allows configuration of the lighting bus and photocell
parameters listed below.
Display Source
This sets the source input for the display backlight. This
may be set to Photocell or Lighting Bus 1. If configured
for Photocell, the photocell sensor is used to provide the
lighting input level for day and night curves. The
display source may alternatively be configured for a
dimmer lighting bus.
Keys Source
This sets the source input for the keys backlight. This
may be set to Photocell, Lighting Bus 1, or Lighting Bus
2 (if display source is configured for Lighting Bus 1). If
configured for photocell, the photocell sensor is used to Figure 5-17 Source Settings
provide the lighting input level for day and night curves. Configuration Page
The keys source may alternatively be configured for a
dimmer lighting bus.
Response Time
This sets the speed that the key or display brightness responds to the input level (bus voltage or ambient
light) changes. The higher the number, the slower the display responds. This field has a range of
0-7 seconds, and is set to 2 seconds as a default value.

Rev. 11 Page 5-32
Lighting Bus 1/2
These fields are configurable when either the display or the keys source is set to Lighting Bus 1 or 2. This
field sets the input type for each lighting bus source (5 VDC, 5 VAC, 14 VDC, or 28 VDC).
5.4.3.7.2 Day/Night Mode Operation Page

The Day or Night Mode Operation Configuration page
is reached by touching Day Mode Operation on the
Enhanced Lighting Configuration page, shown in
Figure 5-16. This page allows configuration of the
Photocell Transition, Key Backlight Cutoff, and Curve
parameters listed below.
Photocell Transition
This sets the lighting bus input level below which the
lighting bus input is ignored and the photocell is used to
control the GTN Xi display backlight. The photocell
transition is a percentage of the maximum lighting bus
input level. The field has a range of 5 to 50, and is set to
25 as the default setting. The transition point is depicted
as a purple vertical line on the Display Curve
Configuration page.
Key Backlight Cutoff

This parameter configures the point at which key Figure 5-18 Day Mode Operation
backlighting is switched off in bright light. For Configuration Page
example, a value of 70% results in the key backlights
being turned off at photocell source input levels above 70%. This field has a range of 0 to 100% and is set
to 80% as the default setting. The key backlight cutoff is depicted as a purple vertical line on the Keys
Curve Configuration page.
Minimum Level
This sets the minimum brightness of the keys or display. Touch the Minimum Level key corresponding to
either the Keys or the Display to adjust the minimum brightness. The minimum brightness level can be
adjusted in a range from 0.05% to 100.00% when tracking the lighting bus, and from 0.14% to 100.00%
when tracking the photocell, with 100.00% being the maximum brightness level. The default minimum
display brightness level when tracking the lighting bus is 0.05%. The default minimum display brightness
level when tracking the photocell is 0.14%. The default minimum bezel key brightness level is 0.00%.
Maximum Level
This sets the maximum brightness level for the lighting curve. Values may be between 20 and 100.
Configure Curve Page

Display or key lighting curves may be customized on the Configure Curve pages, an example of which is
shown in Figure 5-19.
Vertices: Each of the four curve vertices may be adjusted by touching and dragging the vertex’s
corresponding key and adjusting axis values incrementally, as shown in Figure 5-20. A vertex may not be
adjusted beyond the positions of its adjacent vertices on either axis or beyond the limits of either axis.

Rev. 11 Page 5-33
Swap Curves: This selection item is only available when the lighting source is configured for Lighting Bus
1 or 2. This selection transitions between the source curve and the photocell curve.
Source Curve
This curve may be either a curve for photocell or lighting bus, depending on the main source configuration.
If display or key source is configured for lighting bus, then the source curve is for the lighting bus curve.
Photocell Curve
This curve is only available if a lighting bus is configured as the main source input. The curve must be
configured across the entire input range. The photocell curve will take over when the lighting bus input
drops below the photocell transition percentage.
Figure 5-19 Configuration Curve Page Figure 5-20 Vertex Incremental Adjustment
(Day Mode Source Curve Shown)

Rev. 11 Page 5-34
5.4.3.8 Audio Configuration Page
The Audio Configuration page allows the adjustment
of alert audio volume.
Adjust alert volume by touching the arrows to increase
or decrease the volume. Volume is displayed as a
percentage of maximum volume, with 0% being muted
and 100% being maximum volume. The selected
volume can be checked by selecting Altitude, Terrain,
or Test Tone beneath the volume adjustment and then
touching the triangle to the right of the key. Refer to
Section 6.1.7 for the TAWS audio check procedure.
Voice command configuration options are accessed
from this page.
Figure 5-21 Audio Configuration Page
5.4.3.8.1 Voice Command Configuration
NOTE
Mute Tone is not enabled per this STC.
NOTE
A limitation exists for voice commands in
certain aircraft types. For more details, refer to
Section 2.2.8.
To enable Telligence Voice Commands, touch the

Voice Commands key. To enable “Say...” commands,
touch the “Say...” Commands key.
Figure 5-22 Voice Command

Configuration Page

Rev. 11 Page 5-35
5.4.3.9 Traffic Configuration Page
Access the Traffic Configuration page from the GTN
Setup page. The Traffic Configuration page allows the
external control to be configured for each specific
installation.
Configure the traffic intruder symbol color. If the
GTN Xi is installed with other traffic displays, choose
the applicable symbol color (white or cyan) to maintain
cockpit consistency.
Configure the GTN Xi control of the traffic system. If
the GTN Xi is used to control the traffic system, select
Yes. If a separate display device is used to control the
traffic system, select No. The default selection is No.
If the GTN Xi is interfaced to the Avidyne TAS (Ryan
9900BX) and configured to ARINC 429 Traffic Format
5, this setting must be configured to No. The Avidyne
TAS does not include provisions for the necessary
discrete signals to be controlled by the GTN Xi.
If the GTN Xi is connected to a GDL 88 that is Figure 5-23 Traffic Configuration Page
interfaced with a TCAD system, the option to
configure the GTN Xi control of the TCAD system is available. If the GTN Xi is used to control the traffic
system, select Yes. If a separate display device is used to control the traffic system, select No.
5.4.3.10 Main System Configuration Page

Select Main System from the GTN Setup page. This
page displays miscellaneous configuration options as
described below.
Airframe Type
This setting configures the airframe type of the aircraft.
The default for this setting is Fixed Wing. This setting
must be set to Fixed Wing for this STC.
Air/Ground Threshold
This setting sets the groundspeed at which the GTN Xi
transitions from a ground state to an airborne state, and
vice versa. To adjust the Air/Ground Threshold, touch
the key to the right and enter a value. This field has a
range of 0 to 99 knots and is set to 30 knots as a default
value.
Figure 5-24 Main System Configuration

Page

Rev. 11 Page 5-36
Air/Ground Discrete
This discrete is Active-Low and can be configured to interpret if the aircraft is airborne or on the ground
based upon whether the input is grounded or open. If it is desired for the air/ground state to be airborne
when the squat switch input is grounded, then toggle the AIR/GROUND discrete key to Active for
Airborne. If it is desired for the air/ground state to be airborne when the squat switch input is open, then
toggle the air/ground discrete key to Active for Ground. For installations in which no input is provided for
the air/ground discrete, this setting must be set to Active for Airborne.
The default configuration is Active for Airborne.
Table 5-12 Air/Ground Discrete Selections

AIR/GROUND Discrete
AIR/GROUND input state GTN Xi Air/Ground Status
Configuration
Open Airborne
Configured Active for Ground
Grounded On-Ground
Open On-Ground
Configured Active for Airborne
Grounded Airborne
GPS Antenna Height Above Ground

This setting configures the height of the GPS antenna above ground level while the aircraft is sitting on the
ground. Before proceeding, measure the GPS antenna vertical offset (to the nearest tenth of a foot). Enter
the measured value by touching the key and typing the measured value into the keypad on the display. This
field has a range of 0.0 to 99.9 feet.
GPS Antenna
Vertical Offset (ft)
Figure 5-25 Measurement of GPS Antenna Vertical Offset
Fuel Type
This setting configures the fuel type of the aircraft. Select AV Gas, Jet A, or Jet B as applicable. The default
is AV Gas.
Synchro Heading Input (GTN 7XX Xi Only)

This setting configures whether a synchro heading source is connected to the GTN Xi. Select Connected if
a synchro heading source is connected to the GTN 7XX Xi. Not Connected is the default setting.
Table 5-13 Synchro Heading Input Selections

Connected A synchro heading source is connected to the GTN 7XX Xi.
Not Connected (Default) A synchro heading source is not connected to the GTN 7XX Xi.

Rev. 11 Page 5-37
GPS Select
NOTE
In a dual GTN Xi or GTN Xi/GTN 6XX/7XX installation, both units must be configured for
the same GPS Select setting for the unit to function properly. If Auto is selected on one
unit, Auto must be selected on the other.
Table 5-14 GPS Select Selections

When in GPS mode, the GPS Select discrete is unasserted (open) whenever a GPS
approach mode is active – no associated messages appear and no pilot action is
Auto (Default)
required. The pilot is also allowed to select automatic or manual GPS to ILS CDI
transitions on the AUX CDI/ALARMS page.
When in GPS mode, the GPS Select discrete is unasserted (open) whenever a GPS
approach mode is active and the pilot has enabled the A/P APR Outputs (an
associated message is displayed telling the pilot to enable the A/P APR Outputs).
Prompt This setting will not allow the pilot to select automatic GPS to ILS CDI transitions on
the AUX CDI/ALARMS page (only manual transitions are permitted).
For Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 225 and KAP 140 autopilots.
Heading Source Input
NOTE
This setting in not applicable to synchro heading input.
This setting configures whether a heading source is connected to the GTN Xi. If no heading source is
present, set to Not Connected. The default is Connected.
Table 5-15 Heading Source Input Selections

Connected (Default) A heading source is connected to the GTN Xi.
Not Connected A heading source is not connected to the GTN Xi.
Radio Altimeter Input
Table 5-16 Radio Altimeter Input Selections

Connected A radar altimeter source is connected to the GTN Xi
Not Connected (Default) A radar altimeter source is not connected to the GTN Xi.
Altitude Source Input

This setting configures whether a pressure altitude source is connected to the GTN Xi. If no pressure
altitude source is present, set to Not Connected. The default is Connected.
Table 5-17 Altitude Source Input Selections

Connected (Default) A pressure altitude source is connected to the GTN Xi.
Not Connected A pressure altitude source is not connected to the GTN Xi.

Rev. 11 Page 5-38
Enhanced Lighting Mode
This setting enables the Enhanced Lighting page from the GTN Setup page in place of the Lighting page.
Enhanced Lighting allows the configuration of separate Day/Night curves for the backlight and keys. The
default is Disabled.
Table 5-18 Enhanced Lighting Mode Selections

Disabled (Default) Basic lighting configuration options are enabled.
Customizable lighting curves and day/night curve configuration is allowed.
Enabled Lighting Configuration is replaced with Enhanced Lighting Configuration
under GTN Setup page.
Pilot Position (GTN 7XX Xi Only)

This setting allows the pilot seating position in the cockpit to be configured for the purposes of 3D audio.
Table 5-19 Pilot Position Selections

Right This configuration is not approved under this STC.
Left (Default) For aircraft in which the pilot sits in the left seat, this selection is applicable.
Crossfill Status Alert

This setting, when enabled, configures the GTN Xi to provide a message when crossfill is not selected in
Normal mode. This setting defaults to Disabled.
Table 5-20 Crossfill Status Alert Selections

A message will not be provided when crossfill is disabled. Crossfill Status
Disabled (Default)
Alert must be set to Disabled.
A message is provided when crossfill is disabled. A setting of Enabled is not
Enabled
approved by this STC.
System ID
This setting is used to identify GTN Xi #2 in an installation with more than one GTN Xi. This input must
be set to GTN 2 on a second GTN Xi. This setting defaults to GTN 1.
NOTE
When replacing a GTN 6XX/7XX with software earlier than v5.00 with a GTN Xi, this
setting must be configured. This setting replaces the SYSTEM ID PROGRAM discrete.

Rev. 11 Page 5-39
Database SYNC
This setting controls the ability of the GTN Xi to synchronize databases with other LRUs when a suitable
data card is inserted.
Table 5-21 Database SYNC Selections

Database SYNC is disabled and databases will not be sent or received from this
Disabled
GTN Xi.
Database SYNC is enabled and databases are sent and received from this GTN Xi
Enabled
when a data card is inserted that supports Database SYNC.
Pilot Control Database SYNC is controlled by a pilot configurable setting.
Airspace Labels
This setting, when enabled, will display airspace labels on the Map page. The default is Enabled.
Checklist Page Title

This sets the title of the Checklist page to the default Checklist or the alternate Task List.
Blackout Mode
This setting enables the Blackout Mode page shortcut option for pilot selection in Normal mode. Blackout
mode allows the pilot to blackout the map. The Blackout Mode is not approved under this STC. Select
Disabled. The default is Disabled.
Table 5-22 Blackout Mode Selections

Enabled Blackout mode user field shortcut is available for pilot selection.
Disabled (Default) Blackout mode is not available.
External Flight Plan

This setting, when enabled, allows the active flight plan to be edited by an external touchscreen display.
The External Flight Plan setting is not approved under this STC. Select Disabled.
Table 5-23 External Flight Plan Selections

Enabled An external touchscreen display can make changes to the active flight plan.
Disabled (Default) External flight plan modification is disabled.

Rev. 11 Page 5-40
Remote Database Confirmation
This setting enables the confirmation of the remote side GTN Xi databases. Select Disabled when a GDL
60 is installed or a Flight Stream 510 is installed in a GTN Xi.
Table 5-24 Remote Database Confirmation Selections

Enabled Allows the confirmation of remote side GTN Xi databases on startup.

The confirmation of remote side GTN Xi databases cannot be performed from the
Disabled (Default)
primary GTN Xi.
Remote Radio Control (Software v20.10 and Later)

When installed in tandem cockpits, the Remote Radio Control setting will allow the pilot to send COM/
NAV frequencies from one GTN Xi to the other GTN Xi.
Table 5-25 Remote Radio Control Selections

None (Default) No cross-side control of COM 1/2 and NAV 1/2.

COM Allows tuning of COM 1/2 from another GTN Xi.
COM/NAV Allows tuning of COM 1/2 and NAV 1/2 from another GTN Xi.
Self-Test Page (Software v20.30 or Later)

This setting, when enabled, shows the Self-Test page upon startup of the unit. The options are Enabled
(default) or Disabled.
100Mb Ethernet (Software v20.30 or Later)

This setting, when enabled, allows fast syncing of databases between GTN Xi and a G500/G600 TXi (SW
v3.50 or later) or GI 275 (SW v2.60 or later) while on-ground. It is automatically disabled while airborne.
The options are Enabled (default) and Disabled.

Rev. 11 Page 5-41
5.4.3.11 COM Configuration Page (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only)
Touch the COM Configuration key from the GTN
Setup page. These values are set at the factory and
rarely require calibration.
To enable or disable the COM radio, touch the key to
toggle between Enabled and Disabled. The COM radio
defaults to the enabled state.
The GTN Xi COM receiver squelch is intended to
silence the received audio when no signal above a
specific power threshold is detected. Two methods of
measuring the signal power are used: RX Squelch and
Carrier Squelch
COM RX Squelch
RX Squelch is the primary squelch and is the most
sensitive. It functions by calculating the ratio of the
signal power to the background noise power, and
comparing this to the set threshold.
If other aircraft equipment is generating noise that
consists of pure tones, those may be interpreted as Figure 5-26 COM Configuration Page
signals for this calculation, and result in squelch breaks
when the corresponding channel is selected. In this case the RX Squelch adjust percentage should be
increased or the noise source should be isolated until the squelch breaks no longer occur.
Table 5-26 RX Squelch Mode Selections

Basic Applies a COM RX squelch value to all frequencies.
The COM RX Squelch values can be set for low, mid, and high frequencies
Advanced
independently for 25 kHz and 8.33 kHz spacing.
Basic COM RX Squelch Mode configures the RX squelch threshold for all frequencies. The default setting
is 57%. 0% is the most sensitive (i.e., the weakest signal level necessary to break squelch). Decreasing the
value will allow the squelch to be broken with low signal levels. Increasing the value will require higher
signal levels to break squelch.
For Advanced COM Squelch Mode, touch the Configure key to open the Advanced Com RX Squelch
page. The squelch threshold values can be set for Low, Mid, and High frequencies. The squelch thresholds
are adjustable in the range of 0 to 100. Decreasing the value will allow the squelch to be broken with low
signal levels. Increasing the value will require higher signal levels to break squelch. The squelch threshold
value is linearly interpolated for frequencies between the Low (118.000 MHz), Mid (127.000 MHz), and
High (136.975 MHz for 25 kHZ spacing or 136.990 MHz for 8.33 kHz spacing) frequency values. The
COM RX squelch values are adjusted separately for 25 kHz and 8.33 kHz spacing.
Table 5-27 lists approximate levels when the auto squelch opens and closes for various RX Squelch
settings. GTN Xi installations will generally use a setting of 57 or higher.

Rev. 11 Page 5-42
Table 5-27 COM RX Squelch Levels
COM RF Squelch Carrier Squelch Open
Setting [1] Approximation
0 -107.0 dBm
25 -103.5 dBm
50 -99.0 dBm [2]
75 -96.5 dBm
100 -93.0 dBm
Notes:
[1] The COM RX Squelch range (0-100) is a linear response.
[2] Auto squelch opens at approximately -99 dBm is a typical value for many installations.
COM Carrier Squelch

Carrier Squelch is the secondary squelch and is much less sensitive. It functions by calculating the signal
power only, and comparing this to the set threshold.
If other aircraft equipment is generating noise of a more random nature (wideband), the combined power
may cause squelch breaks on many channels. In this case the Carrier Squelch adjust percentage should be
increased or the noise source should be isolated until the squelch breaks no longer occur.
Table 5-28 Carrier Squelch Selections

Basic Applies a COM carrier squelch value of 0 to 25 kHz and 8.33 kHz spacing.
Advanced Allows the adjustment of COM carrier squelch values.
Allows the adjustment of COM carrier squelch values for 25 kHz and 8.33 kHz
Spacing
spacing separately.
The COM carrier squelch is adjustable in the range of -100 to 100. The default value
is 0. Decreasing the value allows the carrier squelch to be broken with low signal
Squelch levels. Increasing the value requires higher signal levels to break carrier squelch.
Negative COM carrier squelch configuration requires GTN Xi Main software v20.42
or later and COM software v2.11 or later.

Rev. 11 Page 5-43
Table 5-29 lists approximate levels when the carrier squelch opens for various carrier squelch settings.
Table 5-29 COM Carrier Squelch Levels

COM RF Squelch Carrier Squelch Open
Setting [1] Approximation
-100 [2] -97.0 dBm
-75 [2] -94.5 dBm
-50 [2] -92.0 dBm
-25 [2] -89.5 dBm
0 -87.0 dBm
25 -84.5 dBm
50 -82.0 dBm
75 -79.5 dBm
100 -77.0 dBm
Notes:
[1] The COM carrier squelch range (-100-100) is a linear response.
[2] Requires GTN Xi Main software v20.42 or later and COM software v2.11 or later.
Mic 1 Gain
The MIC 1 Gain can be adjusted from -12 dB to +30 dB in 6 dB increments. The default is +12 dB. For
microphones with low signal levels, this can be adjusted up to increase the signal strength. For
microphones with high signal levels, this can be adjusted down to decrease the signal strength.
Sidetone Source
NOTE
The COM sidetone settings are only applicable when the audio panel is not generating the
sidetone audio.
The Sidetone Source setting is used to select the source of the sidetone audio that the crew hears while
transmitting on the COM.
Table 5-30 COM Sidetone Source Selections

The COM sidetone audio that the pilot hears is the demodulated audio signal
External (Default)
that is actually going to the antenna to be transmitted.
The COM sidetone audio that the pilot hears is the audio signal from the
Internal
headset microphone before it is filtered for transmission.
Sidetone Volume
This parameter sets the audio sidetone output level. Sidetone refers to the audio spoken into the COM
microphone. This setting only affects the volume of the sidetone for the GTN XI COM during PTT. This
value may be set to values between 0.0 dB and 26.0 dB in 0.5 dB increments. The default is 22.0 dB. The
higher the setting, the louder the sidetone will be. The sidetone is only generated in the COM headset (low
level) audio output.

Rev. 11 Page 5-44
Sidetone Pilot Control
The Sidetone Pilot Control setting is used to enable pilot adjustment of the sidetone audio volume. If
enabled, the pilot can also link the COM and sidetone volumes.
Table 5-31 Sidetone Pilot Control Settings

Settings Description
Enabled (Default) The pilot can adjust the sidetone audio volume or link it to the COM volume.
Disabled The sidetone audio volume is fixed based on the Sidetone Volume setting.
Headphone Volume (Software v20.30 or Later)

This parameter sets the audio headphone output level.
5.4.3.12 VOR/LOC/GS Configuration Page

(GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)
Select the VOR/LOC/GS key from the GTN Setup
page by touching the key on the display shown in
Figure 5-8. This page provides calibration and
configuration options necessary to interface with
external indicators and DME equipment through the
P1004 connector.
NAV Radio
To enable or disable the NAV radio, touch the key to
toggle between Enabled and Disabled. The NAV radio
defaults to the enabled state.
Calibrate OBS Resolver

To calibrate the OBS resolver, touch the Calibrate key
from the VOR/LOC/GS Configuration page. Next,
select 150˚ on the external CDI/HSI, then touch the OK
key when prompted by the display. Touch OK after
calibration is complete. Verify OBS operation is correct
Figure 5-27 VOR/LOC/GS Configuration
by checking the selected course displayed at the top of
Page
the page is within 2° of the selected course.
Table 5-32 ARINC 429 Configuration Speed (TX)

Low Standard low-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 12.5 kilobits per second)
High High-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 100 kilobits per second)
Table 5-33 SDI

Common Generates all 429 outputs with SDI = 0.
VOR/ILS 1 Number 1 (Pilot) VOR/ILS Receiver TX: Generates 429 outputs with SDI = 1
VOR/ILS 2 Number 2 (Copilot) VOR/ILS Receiver TX: Generates 429 outputs with SDI = 2

Rev. 11 Page 5-45
Table 5-34 DME Mode
If the GTN Xi is connected to a multi-channel ARINC 429 DME, channel 1 of
Directed freq 1 the DME is tuned. “Directed freq 1” should be selected if a single-channel
ARINC 429 DME is to be tuned.
If the GTN Xi is connected to a multi-channel ARINC 429 DME, channel 2 of
Directed freq 2
the DME is tuned.
DME Channel Mode

This configuration setting allows you to set the format for DME tuning data output.
Table 5-35 DME Channel Mode

King serial King Serial DME tuning data
Parallel 2x5 2 of 5 parallel DME tuning
Parallel BCD Shifted BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) parallel DME tuning
Parallel slip Slip-code parallel DME tuning
2 of 5 parallel DME tuning, compatible with the following DME units:
Narco 890/891 • Narco DME 890
• Narco DME 891
Filtered LOC/GS
This setting is not approved under this STC.
NAV Radio Display Timeout

This setting must be set to the default Enabled per this STC. When enabled, selection of the NAV radio on
a GTN 650Xi/750Xi will revert to the COM radio after 10 seconds.

Rev. 11 Page 5-46
5.4.3.13 ARINC 708 Configuration Page (GTN 7XX Xi Only)
This page allows the ARINC 453/708 port to be configured for a compatible weather radar. Refer to
Section 5.4.4.4.1 for information on ARINC 708 weather radar enablement and Section 5.4.6.10.2 for
information on ARINC 708 weather radar configuration.
5.4.3.14 Discrete Configuration Page

The Discrete Configuration page, shown in Figure 5-28,
allows for customized pin assignment of discrete inputs/
outputs on the P1001 and P1002 connectors. Access the
Discretes Configuration page from the GTN Setup page.
To reassign a new discrete function to a particular pin,
select the label and choose the desired function from the
drop-down menu. A discrete function is only available in
the drop-down if it is not currently assigned to a pin. To
reassign a pin function to another pin, first select the
desired function and select Off. Next, select the
Function key next to desired configurable discrete pin
and select the function to be assigned to the pin. To
return to the default discrete pin configuration, select Set
to Default, which is found on the menu bar. The user is
prompted with a message stating the configuration will
be overwritten with the default settings. Select OK and
the settings will be returned to the default configuration
values; otherwise, select Cancel.
Discrete inputs are listed in Table 5-36 and discrete Figure 5-28 Discrete Configuration Page
outputs are listed in Table 5-37.

Rev. 11 Page 5-47
Table 5-36 Discrete Inputs
This discrete input is used to toggle between GPS OBS and GPS AUTO
OBS Mode Select [1] modes of operation. A momentary low on this pin performs the same function
as tapping OBS on the GTN display.
This discrete input is used to suppress TAWS and touchscreen feedback
TAWS Audio Inhibit [1]
audio from the GTN.
This discrete input, when toggled momentarily low, is used to inhibit TAWS
TAWS Inhibit [1]
alerts from the GTN.
This discrete is an Active-Low, and is configured to interpret if the aircraft is
Air/Ground [1] [3]
airborne or on the ground based upon whether the input is grounded or open.
GTN 650Xi/750Xi only. This discrete input is used to toggle between display
of GPS and VOR/LOC/Glideslope information on the MAIN external CDI/HSI.
CDI Source Select [1]
A momentary low on this pin performs the same function as tapping CDI on
the GTN display.
GSR Status [1] This active-low discrete input is used to receive the status of the GSR 56.
GTN 725Xi/750Xi only. Unless active, the GTN Xi will consider the synchro
heading input to be invalid. This input is active when either the voltage to
Synchro Valid - Low [1] [2]
ground is <1.9 V or the resistance to ground is <375 ohm. This input is
inactive when the voltage to ground is 11-33 VDC.
GTN 725Xi/750Xi only. Unless active, the GTN Xi will consider the synchro
Synchro Valid - High[1] [2] heading input to be invalid. This input is active when the voltage on this input
is 6.5-33 VDC. If the voltage is ≤3.5 VDC, the input is inactive.
RP Mode HTAWS (This function not approved under this STC).
Alert Acknowledge HTAWS (This function not approved under this STC).
This discrete input is used to switch between the Day and Night lighting
Day/Night
curves when using the Enhanced Lighting configuration.
This momentary discrete input may be used to create a target waypoint at the
Mark on Target
user’s current latitude/longitude (This function not approved under this STC).
Missed Approach: This momentary discrete input may be used to activate the
missed approach prior to the Missed Approach Waypoint (MAWP); similarly
Remote Go Around
this discrete may be used to activate the missed approach following the
MAWP popup.
GPWS Inhibit Class A TAWS. This discrete input is used to inhibit GPWS alerts.
Flap Override Class A TAWS. This discrete input is used to inhibit flap position alerts.
Class A TAWS. This discrete input is used to inhibits Glideslope Deviation
Glideslope Inhibit
alerts for a single approach.
Class A TAWS. This discrete input is used to indicate if the aircraft flaps are
Flap Position [3]
in the landing configuration.
Class A TAWS. This discrete input is used to indicate if the aircraft landing
Landing Gear Position [3]
gear is in the landing configuration.
This discrete allows an external switch to engage/disengage Smart Glide. If
Engage/Disengage
this discrete is not configured but Smart Glide is configured, a placard must
Smart Glide
be installed in accordance with Section 3.6.7.1.
Notes:
[1] Configured by defalut.
[2] Not configurable.
[3] These discrete functions must not be configured for use on P1002-10 or P1001-39.

Rev. 11 Page 5-48
Table 5-37 Discrete Outputs
This output is driven to indicate GPS OBS mode of operation. It is
OBS Annunciate [1]
active when the OBS annunciation is on the display
This output is driven when the unit is configured with a single CDI/
GPS Annunciate [1] [2] HSI and the GPS data is being displayed on the CDI/HSI. This
output parallels the GPS annunciation on the display.
This output is driven, in the manner described, when:
• The aircraft is within 10 seconds of reaching the turning point for a
course change, the waypoint annunciator flashes.
• The aircraft is in a turn, the waypoint annunciator illuminates and
remains illuminated until the turn is completed.
Waypoint Annunciate [1] • A user arrival alarm is set and the aircraft is within the circle
defined by the arrival alarm radius at the arrival waypoint, the
waypoint annunciator flashes for 10 seconds.
• A user arrival alarm is not set and the aircraft is within 10 seconds
of reaching the arrival waypoint, the waypoint annunciator
flashes.
When performing approach navigation, this output is active when
Terminal Annunciate [1] operating within 30 nautical miles of the departure or arrival airport
and the CDI scale is the equivalent or 1.0 nm or less.
This output is active when the GTN is issuing a TAWS audio alert. It
TAWS Audio Active
can be connected to the Audio Inhibit input of other units with audio
Annunciate [1]
that is lower priority than TAWS.
GTN 650Xi/750Xi only. This output is driven when the unit is
configured with a single CDI/HSI and the VOR/ILS data is being
VLOC Annunciate [1] [2]
displayed on the CDI/HSI. This output parallels the VLOC
annunciator on the display.
This output is active when the GPS receiver detects a position error,
LOI Annunciate [1]
or is unable to calculate the integrity of the position.
When a new status message is available, this output is active and
Message Annunciate [1] the message annunciator flashes. When status messages remain
effective, the message annunciator illuminates continuously.
When performing approach navigation, this output is active while an
Approach Annunciate [1]
approach is active.
This output may be connected to the ILS Engage input of an
autopilot or flight director to provide higher autopilot gain while the
GTN is operating in the ILS or GPS Approach modes of operation.
The ILS/GPS APPROACH ANNUNCIATE* output is active in either
of the following cases:
ILS/GPS Approach
Annunciate [1] [2] • GPS navigation is selected and either a GPS approach mode is
active and, when configured, the Enable APR Output prompt is
acknowledged, or 0.3 nm is selected for the CDI full scale
deflection.
• VLOC navigation is selected and an ILS channel has been
selected.
TAWS/Terrain Inhibit
This output is active when TAWS is inhibited on the GTN Xi.
Annunciate [1]

Rev. 11 Page 5-49
TAWS Warning
This output is active when a TAWS warning is active on the GTN Xi.
Annunciate [1]
This output is inactive when TAWS is not available. This output
should be connected to a TAWS N/A annunciator that is illuminated
Terrain Not Available when the input is inactive. When the GTN is off, the output will be
Annunciate [1] inactive, and the annunciator should be illuminated. If not integrated
within a TAWS annunciator unit, a relay may be required to correctly
annunciate the availability of the TAWS system.
This output is active when a TAWS caution is active on the GTN Xi.
TAWS Caution
TAWS CAUTION ANNUNCIATE* is not activated when a glideslope
Annunciate [1]
caution occurs in TAWS-A installations.
This output is active when GPS data is being displayed on the CDI/
HSI and the ILS/GPS Approach Output is not active. It is intended
GPS Select Annunciate
for use with autopilots having a GPS SELECT* input (such as the
[1]
Bendix/King KAP 140 and KFC 225), so the autopilot can capture
vertical guidance while GPS data is being displayed on the CDI/HSI.
Traffic Test Annunciate This output is used to command compatible traffic systems into test
[1] mode.
Traffic Standby/Operate This output is used to command compatible traffic systems into
[1] standby or operate mode.
This output is driven to indicate GPS suspend mode of operation.
Suspend Annunciate [1]
This output is active when the SUSP annunciation is on the display.
GSR Remote Power [1] This output commands the GSR to be on when the discrete is active.
GTN 725Xi/750Xi only. This output commands the weather radar to
Radar On [1]
be on when the discrete is active.
This discrete interfaces to the GSR 56 to attenuate the telephone
ringer volume until a call is answered using the GTN Xi. It is
GSR 56 Audio Attenuate
recommended to use this discrete when the GTN Xi interfaces to the
GSR 56.
RP Mode Annunciate HTAWS (This function not approved under this STC).
Class A TAWS. This discrete output annunciates when GPWS is
GPWS Inhibit Annunciate
inhibited.
Class A TAWS. This discrete output annunciates when Flap
Flap Override Annunciate
Override mode is active.
Glideslope Inhibit Class A TAWS. This discrete output annunciates when Glideslope
Annunciate Deviation is inhibited.
Glideslope Caution Class A TAWS. This discrete output is active when a Glideslope
Annunciate caution is active on the GTN Xi.
GPWS Not Available Class A TAWS. This discrete output annunciates when GPWS is not
Annunciate available.
Smart Glide Active This discrete output annunciates when Smart Glide is active on the
Annunciate GTN Xi.
Notes:
[1] Configured by defalut.
[2] Not configurable.

Rev. 11 Page 5-50
5.4.3.15 Navigation Features
Mark On Target
Mark On Target is not approved under this STC.
RF Procedure Legs
NOTE
This setting should not be enabled when
interfaced to a GMX 200 or MX20 MFD.
NOTE
This STC does not grant operational approval
for RF leg navigation. Additional FAA approval
is required for those operators intending to use
the GTN Xi as a means to provide RNP 1.0
navigation in accordance with FAA AC 90-105.
This setting enables or disables Radius to Fix leg types

on the GTN Xi. With this setting enabled, the GTN Xi
will provide display and guidance for these leg types.
The GTN Xi supports RF legs up to Required Figure 5-29 Navigation Features Page
Navigation Performance 1.0 (RNP 1.0). Refer to
Section 6.4.1.1.1 to determine if the aircraft is properly equipped to use this setting.
Visual Approaches
The Visual Approaches feature is enabled by default and is available to load when available. Visual
approaches are for reference only.
LAT ACCEL Compensation

Lateral acceleration is used in roll steering calculations. This setting is applicable to installation issues
when the autopilot is unable to maintain lateral course resulting in overshoot or sustained cross-track error.
It is recommended to enable this if the GTN Xi is interfaced with a GFC 500. Do not enable if the GTN Xi
is interfaced with a GFC 600. Do not enable if the GTN Xi is interfaced with a rate-based autopilot.
Path-Based Fly-By Turn DTK

Path-Based Fly-By Turn DTK enables the selected course to smoothly transition between straight legs
while following a fly-by turn. Enable only if there is no autopilot interfaced to the system or a Garmin
autopilot is interfaced to the system.
When enabled, the selected course (as displayed on the HSI) will smoothly transition between the inbound
and outbound legs while following the course of a fly-by turn. When disabled, selected course will
instantaneously change between from the inbound straight leg course to the outbound straight leg course at
the start of the turn. This behavior is expected for non-Garmin autopilots that require selected course or
course error as an input.

Rev. 11 Page 5-51
Vertical Navigation
Access the Vertical Navigation Configuration page (Figure 5-30) by touching the Options key in the
Vertical Navigation row.
Figure 5-30 Vertical Navigation Configuration Page

Table 5-38 Vertical Navigation Type
VCALC The Vertical Calculator (VCALC) function will be enabled. VCALC provides advisory
(default) messages and vertical speed required to achieve a simple descent profile.
The vertical navigation (VNAV) function will be enabled. The VNAV function provides
vertical profile guidance during the en route and terminal phases of flight. Guidance based
on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a direct-to waypoint is
VNAV provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. VNAV requires a baro-corrected altitude input and
connection to an unswitched and unmuted input on an audio panel (refer to Figure B-14). If
VNAV is enabled, then the Transition to Approach feature can be enabled.
Table 5-39 Transition To Approach

Vertical navigation will automatically adjust the descent path to compensate for
Enabled
temperature changes and provide a continuous descent onto the approach. The Transition
(default)
to Approach function requires a static air temperature input.
Vertical navigation will end at the waypoint preceding the final approach fix (FAF) in the
Disabled
flight plan. Select this option when using a GFC 500 or non-Garmin autopilot.
NOTE
The Transition To Approach feature must be disabled when the GTN Xi is interfaced to a
GFC 500 or third-party (non-Garmin) autopilot system.
The Transition Altitude will set the altitude at which the GTN Xi will transition to displaying altitudes in
flight levels instead of feet. The default is FL180 (18,000ft). The VDI Scale sets the scale for the VNAV
vertical deviation output. The default VDI Scale is 500 feet. The VS Max Descent sets the maximum
vertical speed descent. The default is -4000 fpm.

Rev. 11 Page 5-52
Glide Range Ring (Software v20.10 through v20.12)
NOTE
The Range Ring key is available after entry of configuration items.
Touch Settings to configure the Glide Range Ring. Refer to the POH for the values of the following:
• Glide Ratio
• Wing Area
• Best Glide Speed
• Aircraft Max Weight
Touch Range Ring to enable or disable the display of range rings.
Figure 5-31 Glide Range Ring Settings Page
Touch Advanced Settings to configure additional parameters.
Figure 5-32 Glide Range Ring Advanced Settings Page
Table 5-40 Glide Range Ring Advanced Settings

Enter value of minimum desired runway length. The range is 0 to 25000 ft and
Desired Effective
default is 2500 ft. Runways shorter than the default setting are considered, but
RWY Length
are given a lower priority when calculating the best glide runway.
Enter allowable surface type of Hard, Soft, Water, or Amphibious. Default is
Supported RWY
Soft. Runways that do not meet the default setting are not considered in
Surface
determining the best glide runway destination.

Rev. 11 Page 5-53
Smart Glide (Software v20.20 or Later)
NOTE
Range Ring is available after entry of configuration items. Smart Glide is available after
enabling Range Ring.
NOTE
The GTN will command the autopilot to target the best glide speed when Smart Glide is
active.
Figure 5-33 Smart Glide Configuration Page
Table 5-41 Smart Glide Configuration Settings

Configure Glide Ratio per published value in AFM/POH. This number will be the
amount of distance covered divided by the amount of altitude lost. Refer to
Figure 5-34, Table 5-42, and Table 5-43 for guidance in converting a Glide table
Glide Ratio to a Glide Ratio value.
Refer to Figure 5-35, Table 5-44, and Table 5-45 for guidance in converting
written glide values to a Glide Ratio value.
Configure Best Glide Speed per published value in AFM/POH. If there are
Best Glide Speed different speeds published for various aircraft gross weight values, you must use
the best glide speed value for the maximum aircraft gross weight.
Enables or disables Glide Range Ring and Best Glide Airports list and map
Range Ring [1]
indication.
Smart Glide Enables or disables Smart Glide.
Notes:
[1] Required for Smart Glide.

Rev. 11 Page 5-54
Figure 5-34 Example Glide Table from AFM/POH
Figure 5-34 is an example glide ratio graph from a Cessna 172N POH. The Glide Ratio is linear and can
therefore be calculated by looking at any single point on the line. To make it easier to determine a Glide
Ratio, choose a point on the line where it crosses an intersection of the grid. Once a point has been
selected, refer to Table 5-42 or Table 5-43 depending on the units of measurement to determine the Glide
Ratio.
For example, below are the steps used to calculate the Glide Ratio based on the red dot in Figure 5-34:
1. From the selected point (depicted as a red dot), move down the corresponding vertical grid line
until you can read the value at the bottom of the table for Ground Distance. In this example, the
value will be 6 Nautical Miles.
2. From the selected point (depicted as a red dot), move horizontally to the left along the grid line
until you can determine the corresponding value on the side of the table for Height Above Terrain.
In this example, the value is 4,000 Feet.
3. Refer to the appropriate table for the units of measure depicted in the POH table. In this example,
the table is in nautical miles and feet; therefore, Table 5-42 is used.
4. The value corresponding to 6 Nautical Miles and 4,000 Feet produces a Glide Ratio of 9.10.

Rev. 11 Page 5-55
Table 5-42 Glide Table Conversion (Nautical Miles and Feet)
Nautical Miles
Feet 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1,000 6.07 12.13 18.20 24.27 30.34 36.40 42.47 48.54 54.60 60.67 66.74 72.80 78.87 84.94
2,000 3.03 6.07 9.10 12.13 15.17 18.20 21.23 24.27 27.30 30.34 33.37 36.40 39.44 42.47
3,000 2.02 4.04 6.07 8.09 10.11 12.13 14.16 16.18 18.20 20.22 22.25 24.27 26.29 28.31
4,000 1.52 3.03 4.55 6.07 7.58 9.10 10.62 12.13 13.65 15.17 16.68 18.20 19.72 21.23
5,000 1.21 2.43 3.64 4.85 6.07 7.28 8.49 9.71 10.92 12.13 13.35 14.56 15.77 16.99
6,000 1.01 2.02 3.03 4.04 5.06 6.07 7.08 8.09 9.10 10.11 11.12 12.13 13.15 14.16
7,000 0.87 1.73 2.60 3.47 4.33 5.20 6.07 6.93 7.80 8.67 9.53 10.40 11.27 12.13
8,000 0.76 1.52 2.28 3.03 3.79 4.55 5.31 6.07 6.83 7.58 8.34 9.10 9.86 10.62
9,000 0.67 1.35 2.02 2.70 3.37 4.04 4.72 5.39 6.07 6.74 7.42 8.09 8.76 9.44
10,000 0.61 1.21 1.82 2.43 3.03 3.64 4.25 4.85 5.46 6.07 6.67 7.28 7.89 8.49
11,000 0.55 1.10 1.65 2.21 2.76 3.31 3.86 4.41 4.96 5.52 6.07 6.62 7.17 7.72
12,000 0.51 1.01 1.52 2.02 2.53 3.03 3.54 4.04 4.55 5.06 5.56 6.07 6.57 7.08
Table 5-43 Glide Table Conversion (Statute Miles and Feet)

Statute Miles
Feet 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1,000 5.28 10.56 15.84 21.12 26.40 31.68 36.96 42.24 47.52 52.80 58.08 63.36 68.64 73.92
2,000 2.64 5.28 7.92 10.56 13.20 15.84 18.48 21.12 23.76 26.40 29.04 31.68 34.32 36.96
3,000 1.76 3.52 5.28 7.04 8.80 10.56 12.32 14.08 15.84 17.60 19.36 21.12 22.88 24.64
4,000 1.32 2.64 3.96 5.28 6.60 7.92 9.24 10.56 11.88 13.20 14.52 15.84 17.16 18.48
5,000 1.06 2.11 3.17 4.22 5.28 6.34 7.39 8.45 9.50 10.56 11.62 12.67 13.73 14.78
6,000 0.88 1.76 2.64 3.52 4.40 5.28 6.16 7.04 7.92 8.80 9.68 10.56 11.44 12.32
7,000 0.75 1.51 2.26 3.02 3.77 4.53 5.28 6.03 6.79 7.54 8.30 9.05 9.81 10.56
8,000 0.66 1.32 1.98 2.64 3.30 3.96 4.62 5.28 5.94 6.60 7.26 7.92 8.58 9.24
9,000 0.59 1.17 1.76 2.35 2.93 3.52 4.11 4.69 5.28 5.87 6.45 7.04 7.63 8.21
10,000 0.53 1.06 1.58 2.11 2.64 3.17 3.70 4.22 4.75 5.28 5.81 6.34 6.86 7.39
11,000 0.48 0.96 1.44 1.92 2.40 2.88 3.36 3.84 4.32 4.80 5.28 5.76 6.24 6.72
12,000 0.44 0.88 1.32 1.76 2.20 2.64 3.08 3.52 3.96 4.40 4.84 5.28 5.72 6.16

Rev. 11 Page 5-56
Figure 5-35 Example Glide Distance from AFM/POH
Figure 5-35 is an example Glide Distance from the Bonanza A36 AFM/POH. Using the value for the
correct unit of measure in Table 5-44 or Table 5-45, this value can be converted to a Glide Ratio. In this
example, the stated value for an A36 is 1.7NM per 1000ft. Using the corresponding NM per 1000ft value
in Table 5-44, it can be determined that the Glide Ratio value for 1.7NM per 1000ft is 10.33.
Table 5-44 Glide Distance Conversion (Nautical Miles per 1000ft Altitude)
NM per Glide NM per Glide NM per Glide NM per Glide
1000ft Ratio 1000ft Ratio 1000ft Ratio 1000ft Ratio
0.8 4.86 1.4 8.51 2.0 12.15 2.6 15.80
0.9 5.47 1.5 9.11 2.1 12.76 2.7 16.41
1.0 6.08 1.6 9.72 2.2 13.37 2.8 17.01
1.1 6.68 1.7 10.33 2.3 13.97 2.9 17.62
1.2 7.29 1.8 10.94 2.4 14.58 3.0 18.23
1.3 7.90 1.9 11.54 2.5 15.19
The stated glide value in the example POH in Figure 5-35 in statute miles is given as 2SM per 1000ft.
Using the corresponding SM per 1000ft value in Table 5-45, it can be determined that the Glide Ratio
value for 2SM per 1000ft is 10.56. The difference in Glide Ratios between the units given in Figure 5-34
can be attributed to rounding that occurs while converting between different units of measurement. If a
calculated Glide Ratio falls between two values, the lower number should be used.
Table 5-45 Glide Distance Conversion (Statute Miles per 1000ft Altitude)
SM per Glide SM per Glide SM per Glide SM per Glide
1000ft Ratio 1000ft Ratio 1000ft Ratio 1000ft Ratio
0.8 4.22 1.4 7.39 2.0 10.56 2.6 13.73
0.9 4.75 1.5 7.92 2.1 11.09 2.7 14.26
1.0 5.28 1.6 8.45 2.2 11.62 2.8 14.78
1.1 5.81 1.7 8.98 2.3 12.14 2.9 15.31
1.2 6.34 1.8 9.50 2.4 12.67 3.0 15.84
1.3 6.86 1.9 10.03 2.5 13.20

Rev. 11 Page 5-57
Touch Advanced Settings to configure additional parameters.
Figure 5-36 Smart Glide Advanced Settings Page
Table 5-46 Smart Glide Advanced Settings

Enter value of the maximum desired wind gust speed at destination airport. The
MAX Desired Gust range is 0 to 99 kts and default is 20 kts.
Speed This setting does not exclude airports from the Smart Glide function; it simply
de-prioritizes airports that exceed the desired gust speed.
Enter value of minimum desired runway length. The range is 0 to 25000 ft and
default is 2500 ft.
Desired Effective This setting does not exclude airports from the Smart Glide function; it simply
RWY Length prioritizes airports that are longer than this value.
This value cannot be shorter than the published short field landing distance at
ISA values.
Enter allowable surface type of Hard Only, Water Only, Hard and Soft, or
Amphibious (Any). Default is Hard and Soft.
Supported RWY
Surface Hard and Soft should be set for all land-planes. Amphibious should only be set
for seaplanes/floatplanes with landing gear. Water Only should only be set for
aircraft with straight floats.
NOTE
Smart Glide configuration settings will be automatically cross-filled to a second GTN Xi if
a GTN Xi is configured as the cross-side navigator per Section 5.4.3.4. Smart Glide
configuration settings should be verified to have properly cross-filled to both navigators, if
present.

Rev. 11 Page 5-58
5.4.3.16 Ownship
This configuration page allows the installer to choose
the ownship to be displayed on the moving map display.
The default ownship for fixed-wing installations is a
Low-Wing Prop ownship.
Configuration of the ownship color to magenta is not
approved under this STC.
Figure 5-37 Ownship Configuration Page
5.4.3.17 Connext
Tap GTN Setup > Connext to set controls for the transfer of flight logs to portable applications. When
interfaced to G500/G600 TXi, GI 275, or GDL 60, the GTN Xi and Flight Stream streams and transfers
flight logs, including engine data, to a PED.
Figure 5-38 Connext Configuration Page
Stream Active Flight Data
Table 5-47 Stream Active Flight Data Selections

Flight data logs from the current flight will be sent to connected portable
Enabled (Default)
devices.
Flight data logs from the current flight will not be sent to connected to
Disabled
portable devices.

Rev. 11 Page 5-59
Transfer Past Flight Data Logs
Table 5-48 Transfer Past Flight Data Logs Selections

Flight data logs from past flights will be sent to connected portable devices.
Enabled (Default) This feature will help keep an electronic log book up to date by sending flight
data logs from previous flights when a portable was not connected.
Flight data logs from past flights will not be sent to connected portable
Disabled devices. It is recommended to disable this feature for aircraft flown by
different pilots.
5.4.3.18 Update Config Module

Once all setup items have been configured, touch the Update Config Module button and touch Yes to save
all configuration settings to the configuration module.
5.4.4 GTN Options Page

Access the GTN Options page, shown in Figure 5-39, by touching the GTN Options key on the
Configuration Mode home page. This page allows optional purchased features to be enabled. All optional
features are activated using the GTN Options page.
Figure 5-39 GTN Options Page
NOTE
All feature enablement cards should be provided to the customer after the GTN Xi
installation.

Rev. 11 Page 5-60
5.4.4.1 Terrain
Access the Terrain Configuration page, shown in
Figure 5-40, by touching the Terrain key on the GTN
Options page.
5.4.4.1.1 Terrain Proximity

Garmin Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system
that allows relative terrain layers to be displayed on the
Map and Terrain pages. It does not provide aural
alerting of terrain. Refer to GTN Xi Series Pilot’s Guide
for additional information regarding this feature.
5.4.4.1.2 Terrain Alerting

Terrain Alerting will provide a subset of the TAWS B
alerting functionality in addition to the Terrain
Proximity features already provided as a standard
feature of the GTN Xi. It does not replace full TAWS
capabilities or meet the requirements of TSO-151c. Figure 5-40 Terrain Configuration Page
Refer to GTN Xi Series Pilot’s Guide for additional
information regarding this feature.
NOTE
If enabling Terrain Alerting on the GTN Xi, the audio output from the GTN Xi must be
connected to an unswitched and unmuted input on the audio panel. Refer to Figure B-14.
NOTE
Terrain Alerting should only be enabled on one GTN Xi in dual GTN Xi installations to
prevent conflicting audio messages.
NOTE
In a GTN Xi-GTN 6XX/7XX installation with Smart Glide configured, TAWS-A, TAWS-B
or Terrain Alerting should be enabled on the GTN Xi and Terrain Proximity should be
enabled on GTN 6XX/7XX.
5.4.4.1.3 TAWS Enablement

When the optional TAWS feature is enabled, the GTN Xi will provide Class A or Class B TAWS
functionality. This section describes how to activate the TAWS feature in the GTN Xi.
1. Power off the GTN Xi.
2. Remove the database SD card from the data card slot and insert a TAWS-B Enablement Card (P/N
010-00878-01) or a TAWS-A Enablement Card (P/N 010-00878-05)..
3. Enter Configuration mode by applying power
(i.e., closing the circuit breaker) to the GTN Xi while holding the HOME key.
4. Enter the Terrain Configuration page, shown in Figure 5-40, by touching the Terrain key on the
GTN Options page. Touch the TAWS B or TAWS A key under Terrain Mode.
5. A window will appear with “Enable TAWS-( )? This will consume a feature unlock key when
selected.”
6. Touch Yes to enable TAWS-B or TAWS-A.

Rev. 11 Page 5-61
When the TAWS feature is activated, the TAWS ( ) key is lit green.
NOTE
If enabling TAWS on the GTN Xi, the audio output from the GTN Xi must be connected to
an unswitched and unmuted input on the audio panel. Refer to Figure B-14.
NOTE
For TAWS-A installations, the following settings must also be configured in addition to the
TAWS settings on the Terrain Configuration page:
• Radio Altimeter format configured for an ARINC 429 input port.
• Radio Altimeter configured as “Connected” on the Main System Configuration page (refer to
Section 5.4.3.10).
• Landing Gear Position and Flap Position discrete inputs configured on the Discrete
Configuration page (refer to Section 5.4.3.14).
• Garmin GDU configured as Present
OR
TSO-C106 compliant ADC Airdata
OR
EFIS Format 2 configured for an ARINC 429 input port
OR
GDU Format 2 configured for an ARINC 429 input port
5.4.4.1.4 Shared Enablement for Dual GTN Xi Installation (Software v20.40 or Later)
NOTE
Both GTN Xi units must be configured for the same TAWS mode and alert settings.
After the optional TAWS feature has been unlocked on one GTN Xi, it may be shared with a second
GTN Xi to allow both GTN Xi units to display TAWS information.
1. Power on the second GTN Xi unit in Configuration mode.
2. Touch GTN Options → Terrain and select the TAWS option that matches the other GTN Xi.
3. Touch Yes to enable the feature.
For redundant TAWS audio alerts, connect both GTN Xi units to the audio panel. To provide redundant
TAWS-A for dual GTN Xi installations, all TAWS-A configuration requirements must be met on both
GTN Xi units.

Rev. 11 Page 5-62
5.4.4.1.5 Audio Clips (Only if Terrain Alerting or TAWS Enabled)
From the Terrain Configuration page in the GTN Options page group, touch the Audio Clips key. This
page, shown in Figure 5-41, allows configuration of the Terrain Alerting and TAWS audio messages for
cautions and warnings. For each audio alert, select the desired audio text, as described in Table 5-50
through Table 5-69.
Figure 5-41 Audio Clips Page
Table 5-49 GSD CAUTION Field

Sets the Glideslope Deviation (GSD) cautionary alert to the specified text.
“Glideslope”
Only available in TAWS-A installations.
Table 5-50 NCR CAUTION Field

Sets the Negative Climb Rate (NCR) cautionary alert to the specified text
“Don’t Sink”
(Default). Only available in TAWS-A or TAWS-B installations.
“Too Low Terrain” Sets the Negative Climb Rate (NCR) cautionary alert to the specified text.
Table 5-51 ECR CAUTION Field

Sets the Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) cautionary alert to the specified text.
“Terrain, Terrain”
Table 5-52 EDR CAUTION Field

Sets the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) cautionary alert to the specified text.
“Sink Rate”
Only available in TAWS-A or TAWS-B installations.

Rev. 11 Page 5-63
Table 5-53 FIT Flap CAUTION Field
Sets the Flight Into Terrain Flap cautionary alert to the specified text. Only
“Too Low Flaps”
available in TAWS-A installations.
Table 5-54 FIT Gear CAUTION Field

Sets the Flight Into Terrain Gear cautionary alert to the specified text. Only
“Too Low Gear”
Table 5-55 PDA CAUTION Field

“Too Low - Terrain” Sets the Premature Descent Alert (PDA) cautionary alert to the specified text.
Table 5-56 FIT Speed CAUTION Field

Sets the Flight Into Terrain Speed cautionary alert to the specified text. Only
“Too Low Terrain”
Table 5-57 FIT Takeoff CAUTION Field

Sets the Flight Into Terrain Takeoff cautionary alert to the specified text. Only
“Too Low Terrain”
Table 5-58 IOI CAUTION Field

Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Obstacle
“Obstacle Ahead” x2
Impact (IOI) cautionary alert to the specified text. (Default)
Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Obstacle
“Caution Obstacle” x2
Impact (IOI) cautionary alert to the specified text.
Table 5-59 ROC CAUTION Field

Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Reduced Required
“Obstacle Ahead” x2
Obstacle Clearance (ROC) cautionary alert to the specified text. (Default)
“Caution Obstacle” x2
Obstacle Clearance (ROC) cautionary alert to the specified text.
Table 5-60 ILI CAUTION Field

Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Line Impact
“Wire Ahead” x2
(ILI) cautionary alert to the specified text. (Default)
“Caution Wire” x2
(ILI) cautionary alert to the specified text.

Rev. 11 Page 5-64
Table 5-61 RLC CAUTION Field
Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Reduced Required Line
“Wire Ahead” x2
Clearance (RLC) warning alert to the specified text. (Default)
“Caution Wire” x2
Clearance (RLC) warning alert to the specified text.
Table 5-62 ITI CAUTION Field

Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Terrain Impact
“Terrain Ahead” x2
(ITI) cautionary alert to the specified text. (Default)
Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Terrain Impact
“Caution Terrain” x2
(ITI) cautionary alert to the specified text.
Table 5-63 RTC CAUTION Field

Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FTLA) Reduced Required
“Terrain Ahead” x2
Terrain Clearance (RTC) cautionary alert to the specified text. (Default)
“Caution Terrain” x2
Terrain Clearance (RTC) cautionary alert to the specified text.
Table 5-64 IOI WARNING Field

“Obstacle Ahead Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Obstacle
Pull-Up” x2 Impact (IOI) warning alert to the specified text. (Default)
“Obstacle” x2 Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Obstacle
“Pull Up” x2 Impact (IOI) warning alert to the specified text.
Table 5-65 ROC WARNING Field

“Obstacle Ahead Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Reduced Required
Pull Up” x2 Obstacle Clearance (ROC) warning alert to the specified text. (Default)
“Obstacle” x2 Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Reduced Required
“Pull Up” x2 Obstacle Clearance (ROC) warning alert to the specified text.
Table 5-66 ILI WARNING Field

“Wire Ahead Pull Up” Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Line Impact
x2 (ILI) warning alert to the specified text. (Default)
“Wire x2, Pull Up” x2
(ILI) warning alert to the specified text.
Table 5-67 RLC WARNING Field

“Wire Ahead Pull Up” Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Reduced Required Line
x2 Clearance (RLC) warning alert to the specified text. (Default)
“Wire” x2 “Pull Up” x2
Clearance (RLC) warning alert to the specified text.

Rev. 11 Page 5-65
Table 5-68 ITI WARNING Field
“Terrain Ahead Pull Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Terrain Impact
Up” x2 (ITI) warning alert to the specified text. (Default)
“Terrain” x2 Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Terrain Impact
“Pull Up” x2 (ITI) warning alert to the specified text.
Table 5-69 RTC WARNING Field

“Terrain Ahead Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Reduced Required
Pull Up” x2 Terrain Clearance (RTC) warning alert to the specified text. (Default)
“Terrain” x2 Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Reduced Required
“Pull Up” x2 Terrain Clearance (RTC) warning alert to the specified text.
Table 5-70 ECR WARNING Field

Sets the Excessive Closure Rate warning alert to the specified text. Only
“Tone Tone Pull Up”
Table 5-71 EDR WARNING Field

Sets the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) warning alert to the specified text.
“Pull Up”
Only available in TAWS-B installations.
Sets the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) warning alert to the specified text.
“Tone Tone Pull Up”
Table 5-72 VCO Field

“Five Hundred” Sets the Voice Callout (VCO) advisory alert to the specified text.
“Four Hundred”
“Three Hundred”
“Two Hundred”
“One Hundred”
Sets the Voice Callout (VCO) advisory alert to the specified text. Only
“Fifty”
“Forty”
“Thirty”
“Twenty”
“Ten”

Rev. 11 Page 5-66
5.4.4.1.6 Alert Settings (Only if Terrain
Alerting or TAWS Enabled)
For installations with Terrain Alerting, TAWS-A, or
TAWS-B enabled, the GTN Xi provides aural and
visual terrain alerts. The alerting algorithm adapts the
terrain alerting criteria based on nearby airports. The
GTN Xi must be configured to specify the minimum
criteria which an airport must meet to be considered as a
nearby airport for the purpose of TAWS/Terrain
Alerting. For installations with Terrain Alerting or
TAWS enabled, obtain the information listed in
Table 5-73.
Configure the Alert Settings as follows: Figure 5-42 Alert Settings Page
1. Access the Alert Settings page from the Terrain
Configuration page, as shown in Figure 5-42.
2. Configure the settings per Table 5-73 and the AFM/POH, if applicable.
Table 5-73 Airframe-Specific Runway Configuration Data

Item Description Notes
Type of surfaces the runway must Set to type of runway surface the
Runway Surface
have for the aircraft to land. aircraft will typically use.
Set to the shortest ground roll distance
Minimum length the runway must have required for takeoff/landing operations
Minimum Runway
before being considered a runway by (typically the distance given for sea
Length [2]
TAWS alerting. level using the coldest temperature
given in the POH/AFM).
Approach Airspeed
Approach airspeed for the aircraft.
[1] [2]
MAX Flap Extension The maximum airspeed at which the
Speed [1] [2] flaps can be safely deployed in flight.
The maximum airspeed at which the
MAX Gear Extension
landing gear can be safely deployed in
Speed [1] [2]
flight.
The FLAP POSITION* discrete can be
configured for “Active for Landing” or
Flap Position Discrete
“Active for Non-Landing” depending on
[1]
the electrical characteristics of the flap
position switch.
The LANDING GEAR POSITION*
discrete can be configured for “Active
Landing Gear Position for Landing” or “Active for Non-
Discrete [1] Landing” depending on the electrical
characteristics of the landing gear
switch.
Alert Voice Determines voice for annunciations.
Notes:
[1] Only available in TAWS-A installations.
[2] Refer to the AFM/POH for appropriate setting.

Rev. 11 Page 5-67
5.4.4.2 Charts (GTN 7XX Xi Only)
NOTE
For dual GTN 7XX Xi installations with charts
installed, both GTN Xi units must have the same
chart source enabled. For example, if
FliteCharts is used, both GTN Xi units must
have FliteCharts. If ChartView is used, both
GTN Xi units must have ChartView.
NOTE
The ChartView Enablement Card can only be
used on one GTN Xi (for dual GTN Xi
installations, a separate ChartView Enablement
Card must be used on each GTN Xi).
NOTE
Navigation or chart data must not be
programmed on the ChartView Enablement
Card. Figure 5-43 Chart Configuration Page
The GTN 7XX Xi can display Jeppesen charts using the optional ChartView feature, which must be
activated. To configure which charts to display, touch either None, FliteCharts, or ChartView. If
ChartView is selected, it must be enabled as described below:
1. Power off the GTN Xi by pulling the circuit breaker.
2. Remove the database SD card from the data card slot and insert a ChartView Enablement Card
(P/N 010-00878-40).
3. Enter Configuration mode on the GTN Xi by applying power to the GTN Xi (closing the circuit
breaker) while holding the HOME key.
4. Navigate to the Charts page from the GTN Options page. Touch the ChartView key.
5. When prompted, touch Yes to enable ChartView.
6. When the ChartView feature is activated, the ChartView key is lit green.

Rev. 11 Page 5-68
5.4.4.3 COM Transmit Power (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only)
When the optional 16W COM power is configured, the
GTN Xi COM will transmit with 16 watts rather than
the standard 10 watts. 16W COM transmit power
should be enabled for aircraft certified to fly above
FL180. This section describes how to enable the 16W
COM transmit power.
NOTE
The 16W COM Enablement Card can only be
used on one GTN Xi (for dual GTN Xi
installations, a separate Enablement Card must
be used on each GTN Xi). A new 16W COM
Enablement Card must be used for each
GTN Xi that has the 16W COM feature
activated.
1. Turn the GTN Xi off by pulling the circuit

breaker.
2. Remove the database SD card from the data
card slot and insert a 16W Enablement Card
Figure 5-44 COM Transmit Power
(P/N 010-00878-04).
Configuration Page
3. Enter Configuration mode by applying power
to the GTN Xi (closing the circuit breaker) while holding the HOME key.
4. Navigate to the COM Transmit Power page from the GTN Options page. Touch the 16W key.
5. A window will appear with “Enable 16W COM? This will consume a feature unlock key when
selected.”
6. Touch Yes to enable 16W COM.
7. When the 16W COM feature is activated, the 16W key is lit green.

Rev. 11 Page 5-69
5.4.4.4 Weather Radar
5.4.4.4.1 Digital Radar (GTN 7XX Xi Only)
This section describes how to enable the Digital Radar
feature, which allows approved ARINC 708 Weather
Radars to be interfaced with the GTN 7XX Xi.
NOTE
The Digital Radar Enablement Card can only
be used on one GTN Xi (for dual GTN Xi
installations, a separate Digital Radar
Enablement Card must be used on each
GTN Xi).
1. Power off GTN Xi by pulling the circuit

breaker.
2. Remove the database SD card from the data
card slot and insert a Digital Radar Enablement
Card (P/N 010-00878-42).
3. Enter Configuration mode on the GTN Xi by
applying power to the GTN Xi (closing the
circuit breaker) while holding the HOME key.
4. Navigate to the Weather Radar page from the Figure 5-45 Weather Radar Page
GTN Options page.
5. Touch the Digital Radar key.
6. When prompted, touch Yes to enable ARINC 708 Weather Radars. When the feature is activated,
the Digital Radar key is lit green.
5.4.4.4.2 GWX Advanced Features (GTN 7XX Xi Only)

The GTN 7XX Xi can enable two Doppler radar features for the GWX 70/75/8000. A Radar Turbulence
Detection Card (P/N 010-01477-4U) is needed for Turbulence Detection, and a Radar Automatic Ground
Clutter Suppression Enablement Card (P/N 010-01477-4T) is needed for Ground Clutter Suppression.
NOTE
Unlocking these features on a single GTN 7XX Xi or G500/G600 TXi will unlock them for
both GTN Xi units.
To enable Radar Turbulence Detection or Ground Clutter Suppression:
2. Remove the database SD card from the data card slot and insert a Radar AGCS Enablement Card
(P/N 010-011477-4T) or Radar Turbulence Detection Enablement Card (P/N 010-011477-4U).
4. Navigate to the Weather Radar page from the GTN Options page.
5. Touch the Turbulence Detection or Ground Clutter Suppression key.
6. When prompted, touch Yes to enable the selected GWX advanced feature. When the feature is
activated, the selected GWX Advanced Feature key will be lit green.

Rev. 11 Page 5-70
GWX 8000 (Software v20.40 or later)
NOTE
A GWX 8000 Enablement Card is needed for GWX 8000 Auto Mode. Unlocking this feature
on a single GTN 7XX Xi or G500/G600 TXi will unlock them for both GTN Xi units.
To enable GWX 8000 Auto Mode:
2. Remove the database SD card from the data card slot and insert a GWX 8000 Enablement Card
(P/N 010-011477-4S).
4. Navigate to the Weather Radar page from the GTN Options page.
5. Touch the GWX 8000 key.
6. When prompted, touch Yes to enable the selected GWX advanced feature. When the feature is
activated, the selected GWX Advanced Feature key will be lit green.
5.4.4.5 Search and Rescue

This option enables up to four unique search and rescue
flight plan patterns. Enabling this functionality provides
a means for the crew to easily create Orbit, Expanding
Square, Parallel Track, and/or Sector Search flight plan
patterns via the Flight Plan page or Direct-to pop-up
menu.
Access the Search and Rescue page by touching the
Search and Rescue key on the GTN Options page.
NOTE
A GTN 6XX/7XX Search and Rescue
Enablement Card is needed for Search and
Rescue.
The GTN 6XX/7XX Search and Rescue Enablement

Card is only used on one GTN Xi. In a dual GTN Xi
installation or GTN Xi/GTN 6XX/7XX installation,
when Search and Rescue is enabled on one GTN 6XX/
7XX or GTN Xi, the enablement is automatically
transferred to the other unit. The SAR status will
Figure 5-46 Search and Rescue Page
display “Unlocked Remotely.” If the originally enabled
unit is disconnected from the second unit, then Search
and Rescue is disabled on the unit that was remotely unlocked. The SAR status displays, “Unavailable –
Remote Unlock Missing.”
To enable the Search and Rescue feature on the GTN Xi:
1. Power off the GTN Xi.
2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot.

Rev. 11 Page 5-71
3. Insert a GTN 6XX/7XX Search and Rescue Enablement Card.
4. Power on the GTN Xi in Configuration mode.
5. Touch the Search and Rescue key on GTN Options page.
6. Touch the Search and Rescue key on Search and Rescue Configuration page.
7. When prompted, touch Yes to enable Search and Rescue. When this feature is activated, the
Search and Rescue key appears green and the SAR status displays “Unlocked On This Unit.”
8. Select the SAR Patterns to be used in Normal mode. Selections are Parallel Track, Sector Search,
Expanding Square, and Orbit.
5.4.5 GTN Diagnostics Page

The GTN Diagnostics page, shown in Figure 5-47, is
accessed from the Configuration mode home page and is
a useful diagnostic and troubleshooting tool. Ground
checks are also performed using the tools in this page.
The following sections describe pages that are accessed
from the GTN Diagnostics page.
5.4.5.1 ARINC Inputs

The ARINC Inputs diagnostics page allows the display
of ARINC 429 data being received over each ARINC
429 port. Each port can be chosen for display by
touching the Port key and toggling between the input
ports. Select a port to display. The GTN Xi will then
display the label, SSM, Data, and SDI for each ARINC
429 input port. This is useful for determining if the
expected labels are being received and also for
troubleshooting incorrect or swapped wiring to the input
ports. The data log can be paused by toggling the Pause
key. Clear the data log by touching Clear Log. Figure 5-47 GTN Diagnostics Page
5.4.5.2 Serial Inputs

The Serial Inputs page allows the display of serial data being received and is useful for determining if the
GTN Xi is receiving data on each connected port. Select the desired port by touching the Port key and
selecting the RS-232 channel from the list. The data log can be paused by toggling the Pause key. Clear
the data log by touching Clear Log.
5.4.5.3 Discrete Inputs

The Discrete Inputs page displays the state of each of the discrete input pins on the GTN Xi. This page is
useful for troubleshooting discrete wiring. Refer to Section 6.1.3 for the discrete input checkout procedure.

Rev. 11 Page 5-72
5.4.5.4 Discrete Outputs
The Discrete Outputs page allows the state of each of the discrete outputs to be toggled between active and
inactive. This is useful for ensuring annunciator and signal outputs are properly connected to annunciator
lights or third-party LRUs and they are receiving the signal. Refer to Section 6.1.4 for the discrete output
checkout procedure.
5.4.5.5 HSDB (Ethernet)

The HSDB Diagnostics page allows the status of each HSDB port to be displayed. This page displays
whether each port is connected or not connected and whether or not it is receiving data. The configuration
status of each installed HSDB LRU is also displayed. Refer to Section 5.4.3.3 for HSDB port configuration
instructions.
5.4.5.6 Main Indicator (Analog)

The Main Indicator Diagnostics page allows the CDI connected to the main board (P1001) to be ground
checked and allows the interface to be verified. Refer to Section 6.1.1 for the main indicator checkout
procedure.
5.4.5.7 Analog Inputs

The Analog Inputs page displays the bus voltage setting for Lighting Bus 1 and Lighting Bus 2, as well as
the input voltage setting for each bus. It also displays synchro heading input diagnostics information, such
as heading angle, heading valid status, AC voltage, and AC frequency.
5.4.5.8 Power Stats

The Power Statistics page displays the number of times the GTN Xi has powered up, as well as the total
elapsed operating hours for the GTN Xi.
5.4.5.9 WAAS
The WAAS Diagnostics page displays the WAAS engine status, including UTC date and time, current
latitude and longitude, overall navigation status, oscillator temperature, and AGC voltage. This page also
allows the GPS/SBAS engine to be reset.
5.4.5.10 Temps
The Temperatures page displays the current, minimum, maximum, and average board temperatures for the
LED Board, Main Board, Display Interface Board, GPS/SBAS Board, COM Board, and COM Oscillator.
5.4.5.11 Logs
The Logs page allows the error, connection, WAAS diagnostic, and flight data logs to be written to the SD
card in the front slot. It also allows the error and WAAS diagnostics logs to be cleared.
5.4.5.12 Main Data Inputs

The Main Data Inputs page allows the data on ARINC 429, RS-232, and other electrical inputs to be
monitored during installation and troubleshooting. Information that is not being received by the GTN Xi is
dashed out. The data displayed is prioritized according to the scheme outlined in Section 3.6.3, if the data
is being received on multiple inputs. Refer to Section 6.1.10 for checkout procedure utilizing this page.

Rev. 11 Page 5-73
5.4.5.13 VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog) (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)
The VOR/ILS Indicator Diagnostics page allows the CDI connected to the NAV board (P1004) to be
ground checked and allows the NAV indicator interface to be verified. Refer to Section 6.1.2 for the
ground check.
5.4.5.14 Com Board (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only)

The Com Board Diagnostics page allows the com board interfaces to be verified. Information that is not
being received by the GTN Xi is dashed out.
5.4.5.15 Clear Config Settings
CAUTION
This key should only be touched if the intent is to clear all configuration settings. Touching
the Clear Config Settings key opens a confirmation window to reset all of the settings
stored in the configuration module to their defaults.
5.4.6 External Systems

The following section contains procedures for
configuring remote mount units that are connected to
the GTN Xi. To configure external systems using the
GTN Xi, touch the External Systems key from the
Configuration mode home page.
5.4.6.1 GDL 69
If installed, the GDL 69/69A must be configured to
match the installation. Follow the steps below:
1. Navigate to the GDL 69/69A Configuration
page. This can be accessed from the External
Systems page, shown in Figure 5-48.
2. Adjust the Antenna Gain and Cable Loss to
match the installation. Refer to GDL 69/69A
Installation Manual to determine the correct
values.
3. Enable any GDL 69/69A HSDB ports as
required by the installation. Figure 5-48 External Systems Page
NOTE
The GDL 69/69A XM must be activated before use. Refer to GDL 69/69A Installation Manual or
GDL 69 Series TSO Manual and GDL 69/69A XM Activation Instructions for details.

Rev. 11 Page 5-74
5.4.6.2 Stormscope
NOTE
The Stormscope pages are only available if the
WX-500 is connected to the RS-232 channel,
which is configured for the WX-500.
Select the Stormscope page, shown in Figure 5-49,
from the External Systems page. The WX-500
Stormscope configuration is reported by the WX-500
through RS-232 data.
5.4.6.2.1 Stormscope Configuration

To display the Stormscope Configuration information,
touch the Configure key on the Stormscope page,
shown in Figure 5-49. Verify the Status field indicates
“OK” and the other displayed parameters are correct
based upon the installation. Refer to the configuration
information in the WX-500 Installation Manual to
determine the correct configuration.
Figure 5-49 Stormscope Page
When a GTN Xi is interfaced with a WX-500
Stormscope, the “Synchro” or “Serial” heading formats
may be used. If another heading format is used,
lightning strike information is visible on the Weather
page, but not the Map page.
Figure 5-50 Stormscope Configuration

Page

Rev. 11 Page 5-75
5.4.6.2.2 Stormscope Test Page
To access the Stormscope Test page, shown in
Figure 5-51, select the Stormscope Test key from the
Stormscope page. This page shows current strike
activity, WX-500 status, and the heading supplied by
the WX-500. The WX-500 mode may be changed to
Cell, Strike, Noise, Strike Test, Self Test, and Demo.
The strikes can be cleared from the display by touching
the Clear Strikes key. The view can be changed by
touching either the 360˚ key or the Arc key.
Verify the WX-500 mode can be changed. Refer to the
WX-500 manual for specific installation test procedures
for the WX-500, using this page to view strike data,
change the WX-500 mode, view WX-500 status, trigger
count, and heading.
5.4.6.2.3 Stormscope Download Data Page

Select the Download Data key from the Stormscope
page. This page shows raw data downloadable from the Figure 5-51 Stormscope Test Page
WX-500. Optional sets of data include WX-500
software version, configuration data, environment data, and fault log data.
Verify the configuration data is correct as intended. To request which packet of data to display, touch the
key underneath “Data to Display” and select a data type from the menu.
5.4.6.3 Traffic Test Page

NOTE
The following pages are only available if one of
the ARINC 429 or RS-232 inputs is configured
for a traffic format.
The Traffic Test page displays the traffic system modes

of operation and current traffic situation.
Depending on the type of traffic system installed, the
information displayed on the Traffic Test page can
vary.
Figure 5-52 Traffic Test Page

Rev. 11 Page 5-76
5.4.6.3.1 Ryan TCAD
For Ryan TCAD, the Traffic Test page displays the following data:
 Current shield mode
 Altitude filter-Normal
 Above, Below, and Unrestricted
 Barometric pressure
By touching Menu, the traffic menu can be displayed. Under Traffic Audio, the mute duration (9900B
only) and traffic audio volume can be set, and the TCAD can be toggled between voice and tone alerts.
Under Shield Setup, the shield settings can be configured for the various shield types. Also, Ground Mode
(9900BX only) and APPR mode can be toggled.
5.4.6.3.2 Other Traffic Systems

For traffic systems other than Ryan TCAD, the Traffic Test page displays the following data:
 Altitude filter—Normal, Above, Below, and Unrestricted
 Operating mode—Standby, Operate, or TAS Fail
 Altitude
 Heading
 BARO Alt and RAD Alt status
5.4.6.4 GAD 42 Configuration

The GAD 42 can be configured by the GTN Xi if an
ARINC 429 input is connected to the GAD 42. To
configure the GAD 42, select the External Systems
page group and then touch the GAD 42 key.
The GAD 42 Configuration page allows remote
configuration of the GAD 42 Interface Adapter. For
details on how to configure the unit, refer to Section 5
of GAD 42 Installation Manual (P/N 190-00159-00).
Figure 5-53 GAD 42 Configuration Page

Rev. 11 Page 5-77
5.4.6.5 XPDR
A remote transponder (GTX 32/33) can be configured
by the GTN Xi via RS-232 if it is configured for one of
the RS-232 ports. To configure the transponder, it must
first be selected as present and the type of transponder
installed must be specified. To do this, refer to the
Transponder #1 and Transponder #2 subsection of
Section 5.4.3.4. Next, navigate to the External Systems
page and touch the XPDR key. This displays the page
shown in Figure 5-54, which allows the remote
transponder to be configured.
NOTE
The GTX 335R/345R must be configured via the
GTX 3X5 Install Tool. Refer to GTX 3X5 TSO
Installation Manual for more information.
NOTE
If the GTN Xi controls any transponder
(GTX 32/33/327/328/330/335/335R/345/345R), Figure 5-54 XPDR Configuration Page
the transponder will boot into the same mode
(Normal or Configuration) as the GTN Xi.
NOTE
If the GTN Xi is not communicating with the GTX transponder, all of the editable fields for
the setup items shown in the following sections will be dashed out. If the fields are dashed
out, check the wiring and pin connections from the GTN Xi to the transponder.
NOTE
The GTN Xi can interface to the GTX 327/328/330/330 ES; however, configuration of the
panel-mounted GTX 327/328/330/330 ES/335/345 is not supported. These transponders
should be configured per their installation manuals rather than through the GTN Xi.

Rev. 11 Page 5-78
5.4.6.5.1 XPDR Inputs and Outputs
Access the XPDR( ) Inputs/Outputs page, shown in Figure 5-55, by touching the Inputs and Outputs key
from the XPDR Configuration page. The transponder RS-232 channel inputs can be configured by the
GTN Xi. RS-232 channel 1 input for the transponder can only be set to Remote and is the default for
channel 1 input. RS-232 channel 1 is used for control and remote configuring of the transponder.
Figure 5-55 XPDR Inputs/Outputs Page
5.4.6.5.1.1 XPDR RS-232 Configuration

The following outlines RS-232 channel settings and describes what each setting is used for. Select the
correct input/output setting based upon the installed interfaced equipment. It is not necessary to select the
baud rate for the transponder port to which the GTN Xi is connected.
Table 5-74 RS-232 Channel 1 Inputs

Remote The RS-232 port is configured for remote control by the GTN Xi.
Table 5-75 RS-232 Channel 1 Outputs

Remote RS-232 serial output remote data.
Remote + TIS RS-232 serial output remote data with TIS.

Rev. 11 Page 5-79
Table 5-76 RS-232 Channel 2 Inputs
OFF DEFAULT. The altitude code input is not from an RS-232 source.
RS-232 serial air data information from Shadin ADC 200, 200+, 2000 plus
Airdata Format 1
altitude data. This input is the same as ADC W/ALT in the GTX 330.
RS-232 serial air data information from Shadin ADC 200, 200+, 2000. This
Airdata Format 2
input is the same as ADC no ALT in the GTX 330.
RS-232 serial altitude from an Icarus Instruments 3000. This input is the
Altitude Format 1
same as ICARUS ALT in the GTX 330.
Reports Icarus Instruments 3000 altitude in 25-foot increments. This input is
Altitude Format 2
the same as ICARUS ALT 25 FT in the GTX 330.
RS-232 serial altitude from Shadin 8800T, 9000T, 9200T. This input is the
Altitude Format 3
same as SHADIN ALT in the GTX 330.
Reports Shadin 8800T, 9000T, 9200T altitude in 25-foot increments. This is
Altitude Format 4
the same as SHADIN ALT 25 Ft in the GTX 330.
RS-232 serial air data from Shadin 9628XX-X family of Air Data Computers
FADC Format 1 and Fuel/Air Data Computers plus altitude data. This input is the same as
FADC w/ ALT in the GTX 330.
RS-232 serial air data from Shadin 9628XX-X family of Air Data Computers
FADC Format 2 and Fuel/Air Data Computers. This input is the same as FADC NO ALT in the
GTX 330.
GPS RS-232 groundspeed from a GPS device.
REMOTE RS-232 serial input remote data.
GNS RS-232 serial output to a Garmin GNS.
Table 5-77 RS-232 Channel 2 Outputs

OFF Default for channel 2. No unit is connected to the output of this channel.
Altitude Format 1 RS-232 serial altitude from an Icarus Instruments 3000.
REMOTE RS-232 serial output remote data.
REMOTE w/TIS RS-232 serial output remote data with TIS.
GNS RS-232 serial input from a Garmin GNS.

Rev. 11 Page 5-80
Baud Rate Selection
Select the baud rate for each RS-232 channel.
NOTE
The GTX will force the RS-232 configuration to 38400 baud, no parity for the GNS format.
All other formats use 9600 baud, no parity. The other baud rate and parity options are not
valid.
Table 5-78 RS-232 Baud Rate Selections

9600 Sets the baud rate to 9600 Bd.
Parity Selections
Select the parity for RS-232 channel 2.
Table 5-79 RS-232 Parity Selections

Even Parity Sets the Parity to Even.
No Parity Sets the Parity to None.
Odd Parity Sets the Parity to Odd.
5.4.6.5.1.2 XPDR ARINC 429 Configuration (GTX 33 Only)

Refer to the GTX 330/330D Installation Manual (Garmin P/N 190-00207-02) for a list of labels supported
by each format. Configure the four ARINC 429 input ports and the two ARINC 429 output ports. Select
the correct speed for each port depending upon the installed interfaced equipment by touching the Speed
key and toggling High or Low. Each port can be configured independently for the desired functions by
selecting the desired data format from the menu.

Low Standard low-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 12.5 Kb per second)
High High-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 100 Kb per second)

Rev. 11 Page 5-81
ARINC 429 Input Selections
Select the correct Data In and Data Out settings for each port. The data selections are described below.
Table 5-81 ARINC 429 Input Selections

Channel Selection Description
All OFF No unit connected to this ARINC 429 input.
Selected waypoint information and GPS
GPS
groundspeed recognition.
ADC NO ALT Temperature and speed information.
ADC W/ALT Altitude, temperature, and speed information.
AHRS Attitude and heading information.
Selected course, heading, temperature, joystick
EFIS/ADC NO ALT
waypoint, and speed information.
1 Through 3 Selected course, heading, temperature, joystick
EFIS/ADC W/ALT
waypoint, and speed information plus altitude data.
Same as GPS with added ability of receiving phase
GARMIN DISPLAY
of flight data.
GARMIN TAS Traffic Advisory System discretes.
Standard GNSS output. Includes position, velocity,
GARMIN 743A
and integrity data.
AFCS Selected altitude, baro setting, and pitch discretes.
Airborne Data Link Processor. ADLP is available
4 [1] ADLP
only on channel 4.
Notes:
[1] This format not available for GTX v8.00 or later.
ARINC 429 Output Selections

ARINC 429 Channel 1 defaults to Off. ARINC 429 Channel 2 defaults to Garmin w/ TIS. The GTX 33 can
be configured to include GPS, Airdata, AHRS, EFIS/Airdata, and ADLP ARINC 429 input, functioning as
an ARINC 429 data concentrator. Each output port can be configured independently for the desired
function. Both ARINC 429 outputs send high speed ARINC 429 data.
• DATA SOURCE: OFF, ADLP, GARMIN, GARMIN TAS, or GARMIN W/TIS.
• DEFAULTS to OFF.
CHANNEL 1 (DATA)
• ARINC 429 input channel 4 sets the ARINC 429 output channel 1 to the
same selection.
• DATA SOURCE: OFF, GARMIN, GARMIN TAS, or GARMIN W/TIS.
• DEFAULTS to GARMIN W/TIS.
CHANNEL 2 (DATA)
• Do not select GARMIN W/TIS if the aircraft contains another traffic
detection system.

Rev. 11 Page 5-82
5.4.6.5.2 XPDR Installation Settings Page
VFR Button Code
Input a VFR transponder code by touching the key and
typing the selected code into the keypad. This field has
a range of 0000-7777.
NOTE
Exercise care when making routine code
changes. Enter only valid VFR codes. Avoid
using code 7500 and codes in the 7600-7777
range, as these codes trigger special indicators
in automated facilities.
Figure 5-56 XPDR Installation Settings

Page
Aircraft Weight
Select the weight of the aircraft in which the transponder is installed.
Table 5-82 Aircraft Weight

Selection ADS-B Emitter Category Description
Configures the aircraft weight to less than
<15,500 LBS Set A, Light Airplane
15,500 lbs.
Configures the aircraft weight to equal to or
>=15,500 LBS Set A, Small Airplane
greater than 15,500 lbs.
ROTORCRAFT Set A, Rotorcraft Configures to rotorcraft use.
UNKNOWN Set A, No Emitter Category Aircraft weight is unknown.
Auto Standby Delay (GTX software v7.04 and earlier)

This is the number of seconds the aircraft must be on the ground before the transponder automatically
switches to GND mode when it has a means of determining the aircraft is on the ground. It has a range of
0 seconds to 99 seconds. The default value of 24 seconds is a nominal value for most aircraft. This value
can be changed depending on the types of operations the aircraft is expected to perform.
Vertical Speed (VS) Rate

This is the vertical speed climb rate required in order to transition from ground to airborne state. This field
is adjustable from 100 fpm to 9999 fpm. This field should be set to the typical vertical speed climb rate of
the aircraft. The VS climb rate is necessary for the GTX to assume liftoff for detecting an airborne state.
Refer to the Pilot’s Operation Handbook (POH) to determine this value. If the POH does not include
aircraft climb rate information, use the default value of 300 fpm.

Rev. 11 Page 5-83
Air/Ground Logic
Select the source for the air/ground logic.
Table 5-83 Air/Ground Logic

Auto Airborne Off This is not a valid setting.
Squat Switch The transponder is connected to a squat switch to determine airborne state.
Select this setting if a squat switch is not installed and any GTX input port is
GPS Data
configured for GPS.
Select this setting if a squat switch is not installed and no GTX input ports are
Altitude Data
configured for GPS.
Squat Switch Sense

The squat switch sense field may be set to either High or Low. If the air/ground logic field is set to squat
switch, the squat switch sense field is used to define the state of the squat switch input. If the squat sense
field is set to High, then when the squat switch input is high, the aircraft is considered to be on the ground.
If the squat sense field is set to Low, then when the squat switch input is low, the aircraft is considered to
be on the ground.
Maximum Airspeed (GTX 33 only)

Select the maximum true airspeed for the aircraft. The default is <= 150 KTS.
Table 5-84 Maximum Airspeed (GTX 33 Only)

<= 75 KTS Max aircraft operating speeds less than or equal to 75 knots TAS.
<= 150 KTS Max aircraft operating speeds less than or equal to 150 knots TAS.
<=300 KTS Max aircraft operating speeds less than or equal to 300 knots TAS.
>1200 KTS Max aircraft operating speeds greater than 1200 knots TAS.
UNKNOWN Max aircraft speed is unknown.
Address Type (GTX 33 only)

Select the method of entry of the aircraft address.
Table 5-85 Address Type (GTX 33 Only)

US Tail N-Registration Number.
Allows technician to enter the aircraft registration number in hexadecimal
HEX ID
code format.

Rev. 11 Page 5-84
Flight ID Type (GTX 33 only)
Select the flight ID type. For operation requiring the flight crew to enter an aircraft identification
designator, select the page identified as PILOT ENTRY. When this choice is selected and the crew enters
the flight ID type correctly, the flight number call sign for radio contact with ATC is the same flight
identification the GTX 33 Mode S transponder replies to ATC radar interrogations.
Table 5-86 Flight ID Type

CONFIG ENTRY Allows technician to enter flight ID while in Configuration mode only.
PILOT ENTRY Allows pilot/technician to enter flight ID in the GTN Xi in Normal mode.
SAME AS TAIL If Address Type is US Tail, allows flight ID to use the same number.
Selecting PILOT ENTRY allows the flight ID to remain the same as entered during the previous flight
until it is updated, the crew is not prompted to update the flight ID. The selections SAME AS TAIL and
CONFIG ENTRY are fixed Mode S addresses.
Flight ID (GTX 33 only)

Enter the flight ID number of the aircraft. This field allows eight alphanumeric characters.
Aircraft Length (GTX 33 only)

This field sets the length of the aircraft to less than or equal to 15 meters (49 feet), less than or equal to
25 meters (82 feet), less than or equal to 35 meters (115 feet), less than or equal to 45 meters (148 feet),
less than or equal to 55 meters (180 feet), less than or equal to 65 meters (213 feet), less than or equal to
75 meters (246 feet), less than or equal to 85 meters (279 feet), or more than 85 meters (279 feet). Enter the
aircraft’s minimum length category.
Aircraft Width (GTX 33 only)

This field sets the wingspan of the aircraft to less than or equal to 11.5 meters (38 feet), less than or equal
to 23.0 meters (75 feet), less than or equal to 28.5 meters (94 feet), less than or equal to 33.0 meters
(108 feet), less than or equal to 34.0 meters (112 feet), less than or equal to 38.0 meters (125 feet), less than
or equal to 39.5 meters (130 feet), less than or equal to 45.0 meters (148 feet), less than or equal to
52.0 meters (171 feet), less than or equal to 59.5 meters (195 feet), less than or equal to 67.0 meters
(220 feet), less than or equal to 72.5 meters (238 feet), less than or equal to 80.0 meters (262 feet), or more
then 80.0 meters (262 feet). Enter the aircraft’s minimum width category.
Enhanced Surveillance (GTX 33 only)

This field sets Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) to DISABLE or ENABLE. When EHS is set to DISABLE, the
enhanced surveillance function is not available.
Source Integrity Level (GTX 33 only)

This field sets the correct GPS Integrity for the GTX interface when it is used for AC 20-165( ) compliant
ADS-B Out. When a GTX 33 is interfaced to the GTN Xi, the GPS Integrity must be set to 10^-5 for GTX
software v7.01 and earlier, and 10^-7 for GTX software v7.02 or later when the GTN Xi “+” RS-232
formats (e.g., GTX Mode S+, ADS-B+, etc.) are configured (refer to Section 5.4.3.4). If the GTX 33 is not
being used for ADS-B Out, the GPS Integrity setting is not important.

Rev. 11 Page 5-85
Temperature Switch Installed (GTX 33 only)
This field determines if a temperature switch is connected to the GTX 33. Select Yes if a temperature
switch is connected to the transponder. Select No otherwise.
1090 Input (GTX 33 only)

The 1090 input setting may be set to either Enabled or Disabled. This setting controls bits in the ADS-B
Out message that indicates whether the aircraft is equipped with the capability to receive ADS-B
1090 MHz messages. If the aircraft has this capability, this should be set to Enabled; otherwise, this setting
should be set to Disabled.
ADS-B Out (GTX 33ES only)

This field controls the ADS-B Out function of the transponder. The options are: Enable, Disable, and Pilot
Set. This setting enables or disables the ADS-B Out function from transponders that are capable of ADS-B
Out.
UAT Input (GTX 33 only)

The UAT Input setting may be set to either Enabled or Disabled. This setting controls bits in the ADS-B
Out message that indicate if the aircraft is capable of receiving ADS-B and Ground Uplink UAT messages.
If the aircraft has this capability, this should be set to Enabled; otherwise, this setting should be set to
Disabled.
GPS Antenna Longitudinal Offset (GTX 33 only)

This field sets the longitudinal offset of the GPS antenna measured from the nose of the aircraft. The valid
input range for this setting is from 2 to 60 meters.
GPS Antenna Lateral Offset (GTX 33 only)

This field sets the lateral offset of the GPS antenna measured from the centerline of the aircraft. The valid
input range for this setting is from 0 to 6 meters (left or right, looking forward).
Auto ALT
This setting determines whether the GTX will automatically transition to ALT mode when it detects a
takeoff.
Aircraft Stall Speed

Sets the stall speed of the aircraft to either DEFAULT or a fixed speed between 30 and 200 knots. Enter the
aircraft’s minimum stall speed based on the speed documented in the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH)
or Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM).

Rev. 11 Page 5-86
5.4.6.5.3 XPDR Audio Configuration
Select the Audio Config key from the Transponder
Configuration menu. The XPDR Audio Configuration
page, shown in Figure 5-57, will display the following
information:
Altitude Monitor
This configuration is not used for remote-mounted
transponders.
Countdown Timer
This configuration is not used for remote-mounted
transponders.
TIS Alert
Select the desired audio type for TIS alerts. The choices
are Off, Tone, or Message.
Voice Setting
Set the voice type to Male or Female.
Figure 5-57 XPDR Audio Configuration
Volume Page
Adjust the desired volume level for transponder audio.
Volume is adjusted from 0 to +63 dB. Verify the volume level is sufficient for all anticipated cockpit noise
environments.
Test Tone
Select the desired test tone. Options are 500Hz Tone or Tone. Touching the play key (triangle) will play the
selected test tone.
Test Audio
Select the desired audio test message. Touching the play key (triangle) will play the selected test audio.
5.4.6.5.4 XPDR Emergency Mode

The default Disabled must be selected per this STC.
When the volume knob is held down in Normal mode, the GTN Xi will automatically change the COM
frequency to the emergency frequency. When XPDR Emergency Mode is enabled, holding the knob will
simultaneously change the transponder code to the designated code if the GTN Xi is configured for control
of a transponder. The default transponder code is 7700.

Rev. 11 Page 5-87
5.4.6.5.5 Force Airborne Test (GTX Software v8.XX or Later)
The Force Airborne Test key allows the installer to
place the transponder in Airborne mode while on the
ground. This functionality allows the installer to
perform the GTX checkout procedures, which require
the unit to be in Airborne mode. Once Force Airborne
Test is touched, the installer will be notified the GTX
unit will be forced into Airborne mode following the
next GTN Xi power cycle. At this time, power may be
removed and reapplied to the GTN Xi to force the
In-Air state.
NOTE
When the GTN Xi is rebooted, the unit will force
all connected transponders into the airborne
state.
For additional details, refer to Table 1-5 for the part

number of the applicable GTX installation manual.
Figure 5-58 XPDR1 Configuration Page -

Force Airborne Test
5.4.6.6 Audio Panel (GMA 35/35c)

If a GMA 35/35c Audio Panel is configured to a GTN 7XX Xi via RS-232, then the page shown in
Figure 5-59 will be available. To configure the port, it must first be set to Present and then GMA Format 1
selected. Next, navigate to the External Systems page and touch the Audio Panel key.
Figure 5-59 Audio Panel Page

Rev. 11 Page 5-88
5.4.6.6.1 Audio Terminology
The following terms will be used throughout the audio panel configuration sections and are defined here:
• ALERT - Unswitched inputs. These inputs are typically warnings, and there is no way for the user
to de-select the audio.
• COPILOT - The second crewmember is considered the COPILOT. The copilot is typically the
front-right seat for airplanes.
• CREW - Refers to aircraft occupants who can transmit on radios (i.e., PILOT and COPILOT). In
certain installations, each crewmember may be able to individually select radios.
• ICS - Intercom Communication System - This refers to the distribution of microphone audio for
each occupant in the aircraft.
• PA - Passenger Address - This refers to a crewmember broadcasting audio to the passengers, either
through headsets or speakers, outside of the ICS distribution.
• PASSENGERS - Occupants considered passengers are not able to transmit or select individual
radios and are treated as a group in which each PASSENGER hears the same audio.
• PILOT - The first crewmember is considered the PILOT. The pilot is typically the front-left seat
for airplanes. This crew position will always hear Selected Audio (SA).
• PTT - Push-To-Talk - This refers to keyed microphone transmissions. An input must be activated
before the microphone audio is transmitted.
• PRIMARY RADIO - For a crewmember, the Primary Radio is the radio selected for
transmission. A Push-to-talk (PTT) by a crewmember will transmit over the PRIMARY RADIO.
• SA - Selected Audio - This refers to the combination of audio sources selected by the
crewmember. Note Alerts are separate from Selected Audio.
• SECONDARY RADIOS - For a crewmember, any radio selected for monitoring, which is not
selected for transmission, is considered a SECONDARY RADIO.
• SOFT MUTE - When music audio is muted due to an audio interruption, such as ICS or alerts,
SOFT MUTE allows music audio to fade in gradually to the original volume setting after muting.
• SIDETONE - Refers to the audio spoken into the microphone by occupants. Many half-duplex
radios provide sidetone audio to the radio's received audio output. When transmitting on these
radios, it is not desired for the audio panel to provide the sidetone to the headset (this is
provided by the transceiver). For PA and telephone audio, sidetone distribution may be adjusted.

Rev. 11 Page 5-89
5.4.6.6.2 Audio Panel Configuration
NOTE
When configuring volumes and squelches, keys can be touched and held to quickly scroll
through the values.
To configure the audio panel, navigate to the External Systems page and touch the Audio Panel key. On
the main Audio Panel Configuration page, touch the Configure key to access configuration settings for
audio routing, volume, and miscellaneous options.
5.4.6.6.2.1 General Configuration Settings

Mute PASS to CREW intercom during alerts
This option mutes the passenger ICS audio to the crew
during system alerts. Select True to mute passenger
audio during alerts or select False to allow passenger
audio to be audible to the crew during alerts. False is the
default selection.
Mute PASS to CREW intercom during selected

audio
This option mutes the passenger ICS audio to the crew
during selected audio. Select True to mute passenger
audio during selected audio or select False to allow
passenger audio to be audible to the crew during
selected audio. False is the default selection.
Passengers hear selected audio

Select True to allow passengers to hear selected audio.
Select False to disable selected audio routing to the
passengers. False is the default selection. Figure 5-60 Audio Panel Configuration
Page (Intercom)
Receiver 5 is Passenger
Select True to allow a fifth passenger MIC input to be configured on the Receiver 5 input. This setting is
only available when there is no source configured on Receiver 5. Refer to Section 5.4.6.6.4.
Disable PA functionality
Select True to disable the passenger address function. Select False to enable the PA functionality. False is
the default selection.
Mute PASS music during intercom

Select True if it is desired for passenger music to be muted while the passengers are hearing microphone
audio from an occupant. Select False if it is desired for passenger music to continue playing during ICS
audio. False is the default selection.

Rev. 11 Page 5-90
Passengers hear alerts
Select True to allow passengers to hear alert audio. Select False to disable alert audio routing to the
passengers. False is the default selection.
Mute secondary radios on primary radio reception (monitor mute)

If True is selected, all secondary COM audio is muted upon receiving primary COM audio. If False is
selected, secondary COM audio will be allowed to play simultaneously with primary COM audio
reception. False is the default selection.
NOTE
It is recommended to set the internal sidetone settings to True for better audio quality. For
GMA 35 software prior to v2.20, if Internal Sidetone is set to True, the COM radio
Sidetone Volume must be set to 0. Refer to Section 5.4.3.11.
Audio Processor generates COM1 internal sidetone

Selecting True causes the audio panel to provide COM 1
sidetone. Selecting False allows the COM 1 radio to
generate its own sidetone. False is the default selection.
Audio Processor generates COM2 internal

sidetone
Audio Processor generates COM3 internal

sidetone
COM 1 is connected as COM 2

Select True if COM 1 is connected as COM 2. Select
False if COM 1 is connected as COM 1. False is the
default selection. A setting of True allows the GTN 7XX Figure 5-61 Audio Panel Configuration
Xi to be connected to the COM 2 port, but appear to the Page (Sidetone/COM Connections)
pilot as COM 1. Refer to Section 3.6.17 for more
information and wiring instructions for this setting.
Ambient Noise Mic On

This setting enables or disables the ambient noise sensor that is built in to the GMA 35c. The ambient
noise sensor adjusts the volume of the speaker based upon the ambient noise environment. The ambient
noise sensor is mounted internal to the GMA 35c with no external wiring. False is the default selection.
The headset ambient noise MIC setting must be set to False.

Rev. 11 Page 5-91
5.4.6.6.2.2 Volume Configuration Settings
Use the following procedure when adjusting volumes in the GMA 35c to provide the best audio results.
This procedure allows the signal levels in the audio wires to be large so they are more resistant to noise
interference. When audio levels can be controlled at the audio source, and the GMA 35c has an input gain
control for the audio source, perform the following procedure:
1. Adjust the source audio level to the minimum and audio panel input gain control to the minimum.
2. Adjust the volume settings on the audio panel for normal operation.
3. Increase the audio source level until the desired audio level is reached or the audio source is close
to the maximum specified input level for the audio panel input.
4. If the audio from the source is not loud enough, increase the input gain until the desired audio level
is reached. Repeat this setup for each audio source and audio panel input with adjustable gains.
5. If the audio source does not have adjustable gain, then adjust the gain for the audio panel input
until the desired audio level is reached. For volume adjustments on the GMA 35c, increasing the
gain to +96 will increase the volume, and decreasing the gain to -96 will decrease the volume.
6. If the audio panel input does not have adjustable gain, then adjust the audio source gain until the
desired audio level is reached. Refer to the audio source manufacturer’s installation documentation
for volume adjustment instructions.
NOTE
For the volume settings described below, higher gain values increase volume, and lower
gain values decrease volume.
NOTE
All non-pilot controllable volumes are to be adjusted to ensure that each volume is at an
appropriate level in relation to other aircraft audio volumes. Priority should be given to aircraft
system and alert aurals over entertainment, TTS, or audio panel aural response volumes.
Alert 1 thru 4 input audio volume

These settings allow the unswitched alert input audio to
the GMA 35c to be adjusted. This setting is
configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Failsafe Warn input audio volume

This setting allows the failsafe warn audio input to the
GMA 35c to be adjusted. This setting is configurable
from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Marker volume
This adjusts the marker beacon volume output to the
crew headsets. This setting is configurable from -96 to
+96. The default is 0. This setting adjusts the maximum
allowable volume range in GTN Xi Normal mode.
Music 1 and Music 2

This adjusts the volume of the two music inputs to the
GMA 35c. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96.
The default is 0. This setting adjusts the maximum Figure 5-62 Audio Panel Configuration
allowable volume range in GTN Xi Normal mode. Page (Input Volume)

Rev. 11 Page 5-92
Telephone
This adjusts the telephone input volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Text to Speech (TTS)

This adjusts the text-to-speech volumes used by ASR in the GMA 35. This setting is configurable from
-96 to +96. The default is 0.
Bluetooth Audio
This adjusts the Bluetooth volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Bluetooth Telephone
This adjusts the Bluetooth telephone volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Audio Clips
This adjusts the GMA audio clip volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Pilot PA
This setting adjusts the pilot passenger address to cabin
speaker volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to
+96. The default is 0.
Copilot PA
This setting adjusts the copilot passenger address to
cabin speaker volume. This setting is configurable from
-96 to +96. The default is 0.
Crew Audio
This setting adjusts the crew audio to cabin speaker
volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96.
The default is 0.
Alert Audio Sum

This setting adjusts the alert audio to cabin speaker
volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96.
The default is 0.
Figure 5-63 Audio Panel Configuration
COM 1-3 Page (Speaker Volume)
These settings adjust the signal strength required to
break squelch for each input. These are configurable from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default value is -48 dB. A
value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow
squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
NAV 1 and NAV 2

These settings adjust the signal strength required to break squelch on the NAV 1 and NAV 2 inputs. These
are configurable from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default value is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal
levels to break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal
levels.

Rev. 11 Page 5-93
RCVR 3
This setting adjusts the signal strength required to break squelch on the RCVR 3 input. This is configurable
from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to break
squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
RCVR 4
from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to break
squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
RCVR 5
from -96 dB to 0dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to break squelch.
Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
WARN 1 (or Failsafe Warn)

This setting adjusts the signal strength required to break squelch on the Failsafe Warn input. This is
configurable from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to
break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
ALERT 1-4
These settings adjust the signal strength required to break squelch on the ALERT 1-4 inputs. These are
configurable from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default value is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal
levels to break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal
levels.
Marker Beacon high sense threshold
The marker high sensitivity threshold configures the
marker beacon signal strength required to activate the
marker beacon signal in marker high sense mode. This
is adjustable from -31 to +31. The default value is 0. A
value of -31 will cause the marker beacon signal to
activate at lower signal strength; therefore, the beacon
signal will remain active for a longer period of time
while on approach. A value of +31 will require the
marker beacon signal strength to be much stronger to
activate, which results in the marker beacon activating
for a very short duration while flying directly over the
marker beacon. When configuring the high sense
threshold, a value lower than the low sense threshold
should be used.
Figure 5-64 Audio Panel Configuration

Page (Other)

Rev. 11 Page 5-94
Marker Beacon low sense threshold
The marker beacon low sensitivity threshold configures the signal strength required to activate the low
sense mode. This is adjustable from -31 to +31. The default value is 0. A value of -31 will cause the marker
beacon signal to activate at lower strength, remaining active for a longer period of time during approach. A
value of +31 requires the marker beacon signal to activate at a much higher strength, which results in the
signal activating for a very short duration while flying directly over the marker beacon.
Marker external lamp lighting offset

When external marker lamps are connected to the GMA 35c, this setting allows the lighting level to be
adjusted up or down. It applies an offset to the lighting input that the marker lamps are tracking. If the
lamps are too bright, adjust this number down; if the lamps are too dim, adjust this number up. This setting
is configurable from -31 to +31. The default is 0.
5.4.6.6.3 Audio Panel Discrete Configuration

Configuration to alternate discrete functions is not covered by this STC.
5.4.6.6.4 Connected Radios

From the Audio Panel page, touch the Connected
Radios key to configure which radios or systems are
connected to the GMA 35c. Compare the interfaced
radios in the aircraft to the GMA 35c pin function list in
Appendix Section A.2 to determine which radios are
connected to the applicable pins in the GMA 35c. The
following radios can be configured as Present or Not
Present:
 COM 2
 COM 3
 NAV 1
 NAV 2
 RCVR 3
 RCVR 4
 RCVR 5
 TEL
 Music 1
 Music 2 Figure 5-65 Audio Panel Connected
 Marker Beacon Radios Page

Rev. 11 Page 5-95
For RCVR 3, RCVR 4, and RCVR 5, the type of radio must also be configured. For each connected RCVR
source, select the type of radio listed in Table 5-87.
Table 5-87 RCVR Radio Types

ADF 1 An Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) is connected to the RCVR input.
ADF 2 A second Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) is connected to the RCVR input.
DME 1 Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) is connected to the RCVR input.
DME 2 A second Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) is connected to the RCVR input.
AUX An Auxiliary radio is connected to the RCVR input.
When RCVR 5 is configured as a passenger input under the Audio Panel
PASSENGER
Configuration page, the RCVR 5 input will be configured for passenger MIC audio.
5.4.6.7 Audio Panel (GMA 350)

If a GMA 350 Audio Panel is configured to the GTN Xi via RS-232, then the page shown in Figure 5-66
will be available. To configure the port, it must first be set to Present and then GMA Format 2 selected.
Next, navigate to the External Systems page and touch the Audio Panel key. Select the Marker Beacon
Display key to enable this functionality.
Figure 5-66 Audio Panel - Marker Beacon Display

Rev. 11 Page 5-96
5.4.6.8 GDL 88
NOTE
This STC does not cover the installation of the GDL 88; refer to GDL 88 Part 23 AML
STC Installation Manual. The following instructions are provided for reference only.
5.4.6.8.1 GDL 88 Diagnostics

The GDL 88 Diagnostics page is a useful tool for
diagnosing issues and troubleshooting problems that
arise during installation. These pages are also used for
the GDL 88 checkout procedures in GDL 88 Part 23
AML STC Installation Manual, which must be
followed.
5.4.6.8.1.1 System Information

This page is the same as the Unit Information page in
the GDL 88 Install Tool. The System Information page
displays device information, including the serial
number and software versions along with system
statistics.
5.4.6.8.1.2 Error Log

This page is the same as the Unit Assert Log page in the
GDL 88 Install Tool. The Error Log page allows the
GDL 88 assert log to be saved to an SD card or cleared.
Figure 5-67 GDL 88 Diagnostics Page
5.4.6.8.1.3 System Status

This page contains a list of GDL 88 system faults and ADS-B faults. A description of each fault and
troubleshooting procedures can be found in GDL 88 AML STC Installation Manual (P/N 190-01310-00).
5.4.6.8.1.4 Discrete Inputs

The Discrete Inputs diagnostics page displays the state of each of the discrete input pins on the GDL 88.
5.4.6.8.1.5 Discrete Outputs

The Discrete Outputs diagnostics page allows the state of each of the discrete outputs to be toggled
between active and inactive.
5.4.6.8.1.6 GPS/SBAS Data

The GPS/SBAS Data page displays the WAAS engine information and PPS status information. For
GDL 88 units with an internal WAAS engine, this page allows the GDL 88 internal WAAS engine to be
reset.

Rev. 11 Page 5-97
5.4.6.8.1.7 External Data
This page is the same as the Data Inputs page in the GDL 88 Install Tool. The External Data page
displays the data received on the GDL 88 from the other connected avionics.
5.4.6.8.1.8 ARINC 429 Inputs

The ARINC Inputs diagnostics page allows the display of ARINC 429 data that is being received over
each GDL 88 ARINC 429 port. Each port can be chosen for display by touching the Port key and toggling
between the input ports. Select a port to display. The GTN Xi will then display the label, SSM, Data, and
SDI for each GDL 88 ARINC 429 input port. This is useful for determining if the expected labels are being
received and also for troubleshooting incorrect or swapped wiring to the input ports. The data log can be
paused by toggling the Pause key. Clear the data log by touching Clear Log.
5.4.6.8.1.9 Serial Inputs

The RS-232 Inputs diagnostics page allows the display of serial data that is being received and is useful
for determining if the GDL 88 is receiving data on each connected port. Select the desired port by touching
the Port key and selecting the RS-232 channel from the list. The data log can be paused by toggling the
Pause key. Clear the data log by touching Clear Log.
5.4.6.8.1.10 HSDB (Ethernet)

The HSDB Diagnosis page allows the status of each HSDB port to be displayed. This page displays
whether or not each port is receiving data and displays whether the port is connected or not connected. The
configuration status of each installed HSDB LRU is also displayed.
5.4.6.8.2 GDL 88 Configuration

The GDL 88 Configuration page can be accessed by
touching the GDL 88 button on the External Systems
page and then touching the Configuration button.
Pressing the Set to Default Config key will reset the
GDL 88 to factory default settings.
The GDL 88 Install Tool is used to configure GDL 88
settings for a specific installation. Changes made in the
configuration pages are immediately committed to the
GDL 88.
Before configuring the GDL 88, ensure the
Configuration mode status is “PASS” under the External
Systems → GDL 88 → Diagnostics → System Status
page.
Figure 5-68 GDL 88 Configuration Page

Rev. 11 Page 5-98
5.4.6.8.2.1 Aircraft
The Aircraft Configuration page allows configuration of aircraft information and settings. To access this
page, touch External Systems → GDL 88 → Configuration → Aircraft.
Figure 5-69 GDL 88 Aircraft Configuration Page
ICAO Address
Enter the aircraft assigned ICAO address code, eight octal digits. This code can be found in either of the
following locations:
 The aircraft registration certificate.
 The N-number inquiry page of registry.faa.gov/aircraftinquiry.
NOTE
Correct entry of the assigned aircraft ICAO address in the GDL 88 is critical.
Aircraft Call Sign

This allows the entry of the aircraft call sign (Tail Number). Typically, this is the US registration number
(N-number). Selections: A-Z, 0-9, #, and trailing space. # should be entered if the call sign is not available.
Mode 3/A VFR Code

Enter the VFR transponder code. This field has a range of 0000-7777.
This setting is used for the UAT anonymous mode feature (if enabled), where the transponder must be
tuned to this code before the GDL 88 is capable of transmitting a temporary address and a call sign of
“VFR.”
NOTE
The code must match the VFR code configured on the transponder. This is typically 1200
for US-registered aircraft.

Rev. 11 Page 5-99
Aircraft Category
This setting selects the aircraft emitter category for which the GDL 88 is installed. Select Light for aircraft
with maximum gross weight less than 15,500 lbs.
Aircraft Length
Enter the length of the aircraft. This field has a range of 1 to 300 feet.
Aircraft Width
Enter the width (wingspan) of the aircraft. This field has a range of 1 to 300 feet.
Stall Speed
The stall speed setting is used in the GDL 88 air/ground determination for “Light” category aircraft
(aircraft weight is less than 15,500 lbs).
Enter the aircraft stall speed. This field has a range of 30 to 100 knots. Use the aircraft landing
configuration stall speed (Vso) as specified in the aircraft Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) or aircraft
Approved Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS).
ADS-B Transmit
This setting enables or disables the GDL 88 UAT transmitter. If it is desired for the GDL 88 to transmit,
select Enabled; otherwise, select Disabled (default).
NOTE
The GDL 88 is capable of transmitting ADS-B messages while in Configuration mode.
Verify the aircraft-assigned ICAO 24-bit address is entered prior to enabling the GDL 88
UAT transmitter.
FIS-B Processing
This setting enables or disables the processing of Flight Information Service Broadcast (FIS-B). If it is
desired for the GDL 88 to process FIS-B, select Enabled (default); otherwise, select Disabled.
Internal GPS/SBAS
If the GDL 88 unit has an internal GPS/SBAS present, this setting enables or disables the internal GPS/
SBAS receiver (GDL 88/D with internal GPS/SBAS only). If it is desired to utilize the internal GPS/SBAS
receiver as a GPS source, select Enabled (default); otherwise, select Disabled.
Transponder Interrogation
This setting enables or disables the transponder interrogation control panel interface. If it is desired for the
GDL 88 to communicate with the transponder wirelessly, select Enabled; otherwise, select Disabled. Refer
to GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual for more information.
UAT Call Sign ID Logic

This setting configures whether the Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code) is transmitted in the UAT ADS-B Out
message. This setting must be set to Enabled (default), allowing the GDL 88 to transmit the pilot-entered
Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code) to FAA ground stations.

Rev. 11 Page 5-100
Equipment Status Annunciators
The equipment status annunciator setting allows the user to select whether single or dual annunciators have
been installed as part of the GDL 88 system.
Air/Ground Discrete
The GDL 88 Air/Ground discrete input is Active-Low and can be configured to interpret whether the
aircraft is airborne or on the ground based upon whether the input is grounded or open.
If the GDL 88 Air/Ground discrete is not connected, then select Not Installed (default). If the GDL 88 Air/
Ground discrete is connected, and the aircraft air/ground state is On-Ground when the input is grounded,
then select Active for Ground. If the Air/Ground discrete is connected, and the aircraft air/ground state is
airborne when the input is grounded, then select Active for Airborne.
Table 5-88 GDL 88 Air/Ground Discrete Configurations

Air/Ground Discrete Input
Air/Ground Discrete GDL 88 Air/Ground State
State
Not Installed N/A N/A
Open Airborne
Active for Ground
Grounded On-Ground
Open On-Ground
Active for Airborne
Grounded Airborne
Pressure Altitude Broadcast Inhibit Switch

This setting configures whether the GDL 88 is interfaced with an external switch for controlling pressure
altitude reporting. If an altitude reporting selection switch is installed and interfaced to the Pressure ALT
Broadcast Inhibit discrete, select Installed; otherwise, select Not Installed.
Anonymous Mode
NOTE
If a Mode S Transponder is installed with the GDL 88, the UAT anonymity feature must be
disabled as to prevent two different aircraft addresses from being transmitted
(Transponder Mode S address and the GDL 88 temporary address).
This setting controls whether the UAT anonymity feature is available. Consult the aircraft operator for
guidance on whether this feature should be enabled. When enabled, and the flight crew selects the
anonymous mode with the transponder tuned to the VFR Code, the GDL 88 transmits a temporary address
instead of the aircraft assigned ICAO 24-bit address, and a call sign of “VFR.”
If it is desired to disable the UAT anonymity feature, select Unavailable (default). If it is desired to enable
the UAT anonymity feature controlled by an interfaced display, select Display Available. If it is desired to
enable the UAT anonymity feature controlled by an anonymous selection switch interfaced to the
Anonymous Mode discrete input, select Switch Available.

Rev. 11 Page 5-101
5.4.6.8.3 Antenna
The antenna page allows configuration of antenna
settings. To access this page, touch External Systems
→ GDL 88 → Configuration → Antenna.
5.4.6.8.3.1 UAT/1090 Antenna

These settings control antenna utilization and self-tests.
The top antenna setting determines utilization of the top
antenna for GDL 88D units. A GDL 88D with the top
antenna disabled will perform like a single antenna unit.
The top antenna will not be used for transmission or
reception and will not be self-tested. It is recommended
that GDL 88D owners enable the top antenna unless
there is reason to do a single antenna installation. These
settings control whether the GDL 88 antenna self-tests
are performed.
If the top UAT/1090 antenna (GDL 88D models only)
is of the DC grounded type, select Enabled; otherwise,
select Disabled. If the bottom UAT/1090 antenna is of
the DC grounded type, select Enabled; otherwise, select Figure 5-70 GDL 88 Antenna
Disabled. Refer to GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Configuration Page
Installation Manual for UAT/1090 antenna
information.
5.4.6.8.3.2 GDL 88 GPS/SBAS Antenna (GDL 88/88D with GPS/SBAS Only)

These settings indicate the horizontal placement of the GDL 88 GPS/WAAS antenna on the aircraft.
Enter the GDL 88 GPS/SBAS antenna longitudinal offset distance, rounded to the nearest foot, from the
nose of the aircraft. Then enter the lateral offset, as measured in feet (left or right, looking forward), from
the centerline of the aircraft.
5.4.6.8.3.3 External GPS/SBAS Source Antenna

These settings indicate the horizontal placement of the external GPS source(s) GPS/SBAS antenna(s).
If external GPS #1 is connected to the GDL 88 Time Mark 1, enter the external source’s GPS/SBAS
antenna longitudinal offset distance, rounded to the nearest foot, from the nose of the aircraft . Then enter
the lateral offset, as measured in feet (left or right, looking forward), from the centerline of the aircraft.
If external GPS #2 is connected to the GDL 88 Time Mark 2, enter the external source’s GPS/SBAS
antenna longitudinal offset, as measured in feet, from the nose of the aircraft. Then enter the lateral offset,
as measured in feet (left or right, looking forward), from the centerline of the aircraft.

Rev. 11 Page 5-102
5.4.6.8.4 Audio
This page configures the GDL 88 analog audio output
volume level and voice type.
1. Set the audio volume to an acceptable level as
described in GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC
Installation Manual.
2. Select the desired voice gender as Male or
Female.
3. Touch Run Audio Test to check the audio
volume level.
Figure 5-71 GDL 88 Audio Configuration

Page
5.4.6.8.5 Ports
This page allows configuration of RS-232 and ARINC 429 input and output ports and HSDB connections.
Select the applicable interface with the key at the top of the screen to display the list of available and
configured ports.
Figure 5-72 GDL 88 Port Configuration Figure 5-73 GDL 88 Port Selection
Page

Rev. 11 Page 5-103
5.4.6.8.5.1 RS-232 Configuration
This page allows configuration of the RS-232 input ports and the RS-232 output ports. Refer to GDL 88
Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual for approved third-party equipment interfaces to the GDL 88.
Select the inputs and outputs to match the equipment that is interfaced to each channel. Refer to Table 5-89
(inputs) and Table 5-90 (outputs). Refer to GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual for the correct
selections for each piece of interfaced equipment.
Table 5-89 RS-232 Input Selections

Disabled No unit connected to this RS-232 input.
ADS-B+ Format 2 #1 Select this format for GNS 480. Provides GPS data. [1] [2]
ADS-B+ Format 2 #2 Select this format for GNS 480. Provides GPS data. [1] [2]
Airdata Format 1 Provides altitude, airspeed, and altitude rate information. [3]
Altitude Format 1 Provides altitude information.
Provides GPS data and FIS-B requests. Same as GNS Series #1 in
GNS Series #1
the GDL 88 Install Tool.
Provides GPS data and FIS-B requests. Same as GNS Series #2 in
GNS Series #2
the GDL 88 Install Tool.
Provides Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code), Ident Status, Transponder
GTX Mode C #1
Mode, and Parallel Gray Code Altitude.
GTX Mode C #2
Mode, and Parallel Gray Code Altitude.
GTX Mode S #1
Mode, Flight ID, and Parallel Gray Code Altitude.
GTX Mode S #2
Mode, Flight ID, and Parallel Gray Code Altitude.
Select this format for the GTX 3000 transponder #1 in a dual
transponder installation. Provides Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code),
GTX 3000 Format 1 #1 Ident Status, Transponder Mode, Flight ID, Pressure Altitude,
Barometric Vertical Rate, Magnetic Heading, UAT Transmit Control,
and Air/Ground Status. [1]
Select this format for the GTX 3000 transponder #2 in a dual
transponder installation. Provides Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code),
GTX 3000 Format 1 #2 Ident Status, Transponder Mode, Flight ID, Pressure Altitude,
Barometric Vertical Rate, Magnetic Heading, UAT Transmit Control,
and Air/Ground Status. [1]
SL Mode C Format 1 #1
Mode, and Altitude.
Mode, and Altitude.
Mode, and Altitude.
Traffic Format 4 Provides traffic system status information. [1]
Select this format for Legacy G1000 systems. Provides pressure
Legacy Traffic w/Alt
altitude from GIAs. [1]

Rev. 11 Page 5-104
Notes:
[1] GDL 88 only.
[2] If ADS-B+ is selected for the RS-232 output, it can not be selected for the RS-232 input.
[3] Devices that convert Gillham (Gray) coded altitude data to serial data are not authorized when
using this port setting.
Table 5-90 RS-232 Output Selections

Disabled No unit connected to this RS-232 output.
Select this format for the GTX 33/330 or any other LRU that accepts
ADS-B+ Format 1 #1
ADS-B+. [1] [2] [3]
Select this format for the GTX 33/330 or any other LRU that accepts
ADS-B+ Format 1 #2
ADS-B+. [1] [2] [3]
ADS-B+ Format 2 #1 Reserved. [1] [2] [3]
ADS-B+ Format 2 #2 Reserved. [1] [2] [3]
Provides FIS-B and GDL 88 product information. Same as GNS
GNS Series #1
Series #1 in the GDL 88 Install Tool. [1]
Provides FIS-B and GDL 88 product information. Same as GNS
GNS Series #2
Series #2 in the GDL 88 Install Tool. [1]
GTX Mode C #1 Provides transponder #1 control commands.
GTX Mode C #2 Provides transponder #2 control commands.
GTX Mode S #1 Provides transponder #1 control commands.
GTX Mode S #2 Provides transponder #2 control commands.
Traffic Format 4 Traffic system control commands. [1]
Select this format for Legacy G1000 systems. Provides traffic to
Legacy Traffic w/Alt
GDU. [1]
Notes:
[1] GDL 88 only.
[2] If ARINC 743A transmit is selected, ADS-B+ Formats can not be used for the RS-232 out.
[3] If ADS-B+ is selected for the RS-232 input, it can not be selected for the RS-232 output.

Rev. 11 Page 5-105
5.4.6.8.5.2 ARINC 429 Configuration
This page allows configuration of the ARINC 429 input ports and the ARINC 429 output ports. Select the
correct Format and Speed settings for each port. The correct setting is dependent upon the interfaced
equipment. Refer to Table 5-91 (inputs), Table 5-92 (outputs), and Table 5-93 (speed). Refer to GDL 88
Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual for the correct selections for each piece of interfaced equipment.
Table 5-91 ARINC 429 Input Selections

Format Description
No unit connected to the ARINC 429 input. Same as Disabled in the GDL 88
Off
Install Tool.
Select this format for the Air Data system, or the Air Data system #1 in a dual
Airdata #1 Air Data system installation. Provides altitude, airspeed, and altitude rate
information.
Select this format for the Air Data system #2 in a dual Air Data system
Airdata #2
installation. Provides altitude, airspeed, and altitude rate information.
Airdata/
Airspeed, altitude rate, and heading information.
Heading No Alt
Airdata/Heading w/Alt Pressure altitude, airspeed, altitude rate, and heading information.
Heading Select this format for heading information.
Radio Altimeter Select this format for radio altimeter information.
Provides ARINC 429 labels 270 (Vertical RA) and 274 (Transponder Control)
from ACAS or TCAS II systems complying with ARINC 735A.
TCAS II TA/RA
Used for determining “TCAS/ACAS Operational” and “TCAS/ACAS
Resolution Advisory” flags in the UAT ADS-B Out message.
Traffic Format 1 Select this format for traffic information. [1]
Traffic Format 2 Select this format for traffic information. [2]
Traffic Format 3 Select this format for traffic information.
Traffic Format 5 Reserved for future use.
A Rockwell Collins TTR-4000 traffic system will use this data to receive
Traffic Format 6 information from the TCAS/ACAS and set the correct data in the ADS-B Out
message.
Notes:
[1] Traffic Format 1 configures DISCRETE OUT 1* and DISCRETE OUT 2* to function as traffic
system standby/operate and test control discretes.
[2] Traffic Format 2 configures DISCRETE OUT 1* and DISCRETE OUT 2* to function as traffic
system standby/operate and test control discretes.
Table 5-92 ARINC 429 Output Selections

Format Description
Disabled No unit connected to this ARINC 429 output.
Traffic Out Traffic and equipment status output.
ARINC 743A #1 GPS out for ARINC 743A devices. [1]
ARINC 743A #2 GPS out for ARINC 743A devices. [1]
Notes:
[1] ARINC 743A transmit is unavailable for selection if ADS-B+ formats are selected for the
RS-232 output.

Rev. 11 Page 5-106
Speed Description
Low Standard low-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 12.5 kb per second)
High High-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 100 kb per second)
5.4.6.8.5.3 HSDB Configuration

This page configures which LRUs are installed on the GDL 88 HSDB network. From the available list of
LRUs, select either Enabled or Disabled.
GTN 6XX/7XX
Select Enabled if a single GTN Xi unit or dual GTN Xi and/or GTN 6XX/7XX units are installed.
GTS 8XX
Select Disabled if no GTS 8XX is installed or if a GTS 8XX is installed but the installation is not using the
HSDB interface for traffic correlation. Select Enabled if a GTS 8XX is installed and the HSDB interface is
being used for traffic correlation.
NOTE
GTS 8XX selection of Enabled configures DISCRETE OUT 1* and DISCRETE OUT 2* to
function as traffic system standby/operate and test control discretes.
NOTE
This setting should only be set to Enabled if the GTS 8XX is interfaced to the GDL 88 via
HSDB instead of ARINC 429 for traffic correlation. If the GTX 8XX is interfaced to the
GDL 88 using ARINC 429, select Disabled.
5.4.6.8.5.4 RS-422 Configuration

This page allows configuration of the RS-422 input ports and the RS-422 output ports. Refer to GDL 88
Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual for approved third-party equipment interfaces to the GDL 88.
Select the inputs and outputs to match the equipment that is interfaced to each channel. Refer to Table 5-94
(inputs) and Table 5-95 (outputs). Refer to GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual for the correct
selections for each piece of interfaced equipment.
Table 5-94 RS-422 Input Selections

Format Description
Disabled No unit connected to this RS-422 input.
Connext Format 1 Select this format for the Flight Stream series units.
Legacy ADS-B Select this format for Legacy G1000, MX20, and GMX 200.
Select this format for MX20 or GMX 200 when a transponder is not
Legacy ADS-B w/ Control
present in the aircraft. [1]
Notes:
[1] This provides controls for Anonymous Mode, Flight ID, Pressure Altitude Broadcast Inhibit,
Mode 3/A Squawk Code, and IDENT.

Rev. 11 Page 5-107
Table 5-95 RS-422 Output Selections
Format Description
Disabled No unit connected to this RS-422 output.
Connext Format 1 Select this format for the Flight Stream series units.
Legacy ADS-B Select this format for Legacy G1000, MX20, and GMX 200.
Select this format for MX20 or GMX 200 when a transponder is not
Legacy ADS-B w/ Control
present in the aircraft. [1]
Notes:
[1] This provides controls for Anonymous Mode, Flight ID, Pressure Altitude Broadcast Inhibit,
Mode 3/A Squawk Code, and IDENT.
5.4.6.9 GSR 56 Configuration

If the GSR 56 Iridium transceiver is installed and
connected to the GTN Xi, the GSR 56 features that will
be used must be enabled.
1. Navigate to the GSR 56 Configuration page in
the External Systems page group.
2. Touch each feature to activate it. When active,
the key for the feature will be lit green.
3. Verify the RUDICS Number setting is
0088160000576. If the RUDICS Number setting
is incorrect, touch Restore Defaults.
4. Verify the SMS SCA setting is 881662900005.
If the SMS SCA setting is incorrect, touch
Restore Defaults.
Figure 5-74 GSR 56 Configuration Page

Rev. 11 Page 5-108
5.4.6.10 Weather Radar (GTN 7XX Xi Only)
5.4.6.10.1 GWX 68/70/75/8000 Configuration
To configure the GWX 68/70/75/8000, it must first be selected as Present and the model of GWX installed
must be specified. To do this, refer to Section 5.4.3.4. Next, navigate to the External Systems page and
touch the Weather Radar key.
Pitch Trim
This setting specifies the offset angle being used by the GWX for the pitch axis. Selections: -4.00° to
+4.00° in 0.01° increments.
Roll Trim
This setting specifies the offset angle being used by the
GWX for the roll axis. Selections: -4.00° to +4.00° in
0.01° increments.
Use the following procedure to configure weather radar
roll trim while flying:
1. Power on the GTN Xi in Normal mode.
2. Touch Radar on the Weather page to bring up
the radar display.
3. Touch the distance labels on the radar display,
one at a time in ascending order (i.e., 1-2-3-4), to
bring up the roll trim setting.
4. Once the proper roll trim is set, touch the Enter
key to save the setting.
Return Bins
This setting specifies the number of range bins used to
encode the data for one radar spoke. The default for this
Figure 5-75 Roll Trim Configuration in
value is 600.
Normal Mode
Model (GWX 75/8000) (Software v20.40 or Later)
Specifies the communication protocol with the GWX 75/8000 radar.

Rev. 11 Page 5-109
5.4.6.10.2 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Configuration
NOTE
If a GWX weather radar is already configured, the key to configure an ARINC 708
weather radar will be disabled and vice-versa because the radar types are mutually
exclusive.
NOTE
The Digital Radar option must be enabled before an ARINC 708 weather radar can be
configured. Refer to Section 5.4.4.4.1.
As part of the wiring installation, the GTN 7XX Xi will

be connected to the weather radar as display #1 or #2,
and the GTN 7XX Xi must be configured accordingly.
Follow the steps below to perform ARINC 708 weather
radar configuration:
1. Power on the GTN Xi in Configuration mode.
2. Navigate to the ARINC 708 page from the GTN
Setup page.
3. For External Weather Radar, choose the
applicable ARINC 708 weather radar type by
selecting the correct device from the drop-down
list.
NOTE
When configuring an RDR-2100 (ART 2100),
select “ART 2000” from the drop-down. Refer to
Table C-23 for more information.
NOTE
When an ARINC 708 weather radar is Figure 5-76 A708 Weather Radar Page
configured, the ARINC 429 Out 3 format will automatically be set to Radar Format 1,
which is the format used to control the weather radar.
4. Navigate to the Weather Radar page in the External Systems page group.
5. Choose the applicable display number to match the connections to the weather radar.
6. The ARINC 708 weather radar system may also require additional calibration. Refer to
Section 5.4.6.10.2.1 and Section 5.4.6.10.2.2.

Rev. 11 Page 5-110
5.4.6.10.2.1 Honeywell (Bendix/King) 2XXX Series Radars
This section describes post-installation system configuration and calibration of the Bendix/King
RDR-2000 (ART 2000) and RDR-2100 (ART 2100) Radar Systems using the GTN 7XX Xi. The
CM 2000 Configuration Module for the WXR must be configured using the Honeywell (Bendix/King)
KPA 900 Configuration Module Programmer Kit (P/N 050-03311-0000) in conjunction with a personal
computer. Refer to the configuration module programmer operator’s guide for detailed setup instructions.
Follow the instructions for the programmer and any required weather radar settings contained in Appendix
Section C.1.17.
Weather Radar Calibration Mode

Place the weather radar in Calibration mode as follows:
2. Set the Radar Mode to Test.
3. Touch the Calibration key and wait for the weather radar to enter Calibration mode – all status
indicators will flash briefly to indicate the radar is in Calibration mode.
Antenna Clearance Check

Perform the antenna clearance check as follows:
1. Ensure the weather radar is in Calibration mode.
2. Set the Gain field to a value of -26.5 to -28.0, and set the Tilt Settings field to 14.75°U. This will
initiate the antenna clearance scan. The antenna will move to each of the extreme positions to
determine there is no interference with antenna movement and all scan motors are working.
Stabilization Calibration
Perform the weather radar stabilization calibration as follows:
2. Note the Roll Trim value for re-entry following the stabilization calibration procedure. Adjust the
Roll Trim field to 0.000.
3. Beginning with the 400 Hz REF GAIN procedure, follow the instructions in Section 2.4.4.1 of
RDR 2000 Installation Manual (Honeywell P/N 006-00643-0007) or RDR 2100 Installation
Manual (Honeywell P/N 006-00648-0002).
4. If the roll trim value was recorded from the previous WXR indicator, or noted in step 2, set the
Roll Trim field on the GTN 7XX Xi to this value.
5.4.6.10.2.2 Honeywell (Bendix/King) RDS 8X Series Radars

This section describes post-installation system configuration and calibration of the Bendix/King RDS-81
(RS 811A) and RDS-82 (RS 181A) systems using the GTN 7XX Xi.
Weather Radar Calibration Mode

Place the weather radar in Calibration mode as follows:
2. Set the Radar Mode to Test.
3. Touch the Calibration key and wait for the weather radar to enter Calibration mode. The RX TX
box will turn red when the radar enters Calibration mode.

Rev. 11 Page 5-111
Stabilization Calibration
Perform the weather radar stabilization calibration as follows:
2. Note the Roll Trim value for re-entry following the stabilization calibration procedure. Adjust the
Roll Trim field to 0.000.
3. Beginning with the step C in Section 2.3.6.3 of RDS 81 Installation Manual (Honeywell
P/N 006-00954-0001) or RDS 82 Installation Manual (Honeywell P/N 006-00955-0006), perform
the stabilization alignment in the aircraft.
4. If the roll trim value was recorded from the previous WXR indicator, or noted in step 2, set the
Roll Trim field on the GTN 7XX Xi to this value.
5.4.6.11 GDL 60 Configuration

Refer to GDL 60 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual (P/N 190-02525-10) for configuration
instructions.

Rev. 11 Page 5-112
6 SYSTEM CHECKOUT
6.1 Ground Checks (Configuration Mode) ............................................................................................6-2

6.1.1 Main Indicator Check (Analog Only) ....................................................................................6-2
6.1.2 VOR/LOC/GS Indicator (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only) .............................................................6-2
6.1.3 Discrete Inputs Checkout .......................................................................................................6-3
6.1.4 Discrete Outputs Checkout ....................................................................................................6-3
6.1.5 HSDB Wiring Checkout ........................................................................................................6-4
6.1.6 Crossfill Check .......................................................................................................................6-4
6.1.7 Terrain Audio Check (For Units with Terrain Alerting or TAWS Only) ..............................6-5
6.1.8 GAD 42 Interface Check ........................................................................................................6-5
6.1.9 Lighting Bus Interface Check ................................................................................................6-6
6.1.10 Air/Fuel Data Interface Check ...............................................................................................6-7
6.1.11 AHRS/IRU Interface Check ...................................................................................................6-7
6.2 Ground Checks (Normal Mode) ......................................................................................................6-8
6.2.1 Display of Self-Test Data .......................................................................................................6-8
6.2.2 Signal Acquisition Check .......................................................................................................6-9
6.2.3 VHF COM Interference Check ..............................................................................................6-9
6.2.4 VHF NAV Checkout (GTN 650Xi/750Xi) ..........................................................................6-10
6.2.5 VHF COM Checkout (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only) .....................................................6-11
6.2.6 GMA 35c Audio Panel Checkout (GTN 7XX Xi Only) ......................................................6-11
6.2.7 Terrain System Check (For Units with Terrain Alerting/TAWS Only) ..............................6-15
6.2.8 Interface Checks ...................................................................................................................6-16
6.2.9 GDL 88 Interface Check ......................................................................................................6-25
6.2.10 Flight Stream 210/510 Interface Check ...............................................................................6-25
6.2.11 Magnetic Compass Check ....................................................................................................6-27
6.2.12 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Check .....................................................................6-27
6.2.13 Engine Run-Up Vibration Test ............................................................................................6-29
6.2.14 Database Check ....................................................................................................................6-29
6.3 Flight Checks .................................................................................................................................6-30
6.3.1 GPS Flight Check .................................................................................................................6-30
6.3.2 VHF COM Flight Check (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi) .........................................................6-30
6.3.3 VOR Flight Check (GTN 650Xi/750Xi) .............................................................................6-30
6.3.4 ILS Flight Check (GTN 650Xi/750Xi) ................................................................................6-31
6.3.5 Autopilot Flight Check .........................................................................................................6-31
6.3.6 Terrain Audio Flight Check (For Units with Terrain Alerting or TAWS Only) .................6-32
6.3.7 Marker Beacon Receiver Flight Check (GMA 35) ..............................................................6-32
6.4 Documentation Checks ..................................................................................................................6-33
6.4.1 Airplane Flight Manual Supplement ....................................................................................6-33
6.4.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA) .................................................................6-40
6.4.3 Checkout Log .......................................................................................................................6-40

Rev. 11 Page 6-1
6.1 Ground Checks (Configuration Mode)
The following checks are done in Configuration mode. For instructions on entering Configuration mode,
refer to Section .
6.1.1 Main Indicator Check (Analog Only)
NOTE
If the GTN Xi is interfaced to an electronic HSI/EFIS and the main indicator analog
output is not used, this check is not required.
If the GTN Xi is interfaced to an analog indicator on the main CDI/OBS (P1001), perform the following
steps:
1. Navigate to the GTN Diagnostics page. Refer to Section 5.4.5.
2. Navigate to the Main Indicator (Analog) page.
3. Verify the correct operation of the lateral deviation, flag, and TO/FROM flag using the
corresponding selections.
4. Verify the correct operation of the vertical deviation and flag using the corresponding selections.
5. Verify the correct operation of the OBS knob using the OBS Resolver Setting display. At 30°
increments around the OBS card, verify the indicated value is within 2° of the value set on the
indicator. If the resolver is not within 2°, calibrate the resolver as described in Section 5.4.3.5.
6.1.2 VOR/LOC/GS Indicator (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)

If the GTN Xi is interfaced to an analog indicator on the VOR/ILS Indicator output (P1004), perform the
following steps:
1. Navigate to the GTN Diagnostics page.
2. Navigate to the VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog) Diagnostics page.
3. Verify the correct operation of the lateral deviation, flag, and TO/FROM flag using the
corresponding selections.
4. Verify the correct operation of the vertical deviation and flag using the corresponding selections.
5. Verify the correct operation of the OBS knob using the Selected Course display. At 30° increments
around the OBS card, verify the indicated value is within 2° of the value set on the indicator. If the
resolver is not within 2°, calibrate the resolver as described in Section 5.4.3.11.

Rev. 11 Page 6-2
6.1.3 Discrete Inputs Checkout
If the GTN Xi is connected to any external switches,
perform the following steps:
2. Navigate to the Discrete Inputs page, shown in
Figure 6-1.
3. For each external switch that is connected,
exercise the switch source and check the
ACTIVE or INACTIVE indication on the screen
correlating to the applicable input to ensure it is
displayed correctly.
4. If the state of the switch/LRU is not displayed
correctly, check the wiring to the discrete input
and ensure it is not shorted to ground. Also
ensure the correct type of switch/discrete is
connected to the GTN Xi.
Figure 6-1 Discrete Input Page
6.1.4 Discrete Outputs Checkout

If the GTN Xi is connected to any external
annunciators/systems, perform the following steps:
2. Navigate to the Discrete Outputs page, shown
in
Figure 6-2.
3. For each annunciator output that is connected to
an external system or annunciator, toggle the
output ACTIVE (corresponding box is filled
green and displays “ACTIVE”) and INACTIVE
(corresponding box is not filled green and
displays “INACTIVE”) by touching the key
corresponding to the output. Verify the
applicable external annunciator comes on when
the output is set to ACTIVE and extinguishes
when the output is set to INACTIVE. If the
output is not connected to an annunciator but
provides an input to another system, ensure the
other system receives the signal. Figure 6-2 Discrete Output Page
4. If the annunciator and/or other system does not
receive the signal, ensure the wiring is connected properly and not shorted to ground.

Rev. 11 Page 6-3
6.1.5 HSDB Wiring Checkout
If HSDB wiring has been installed for interface to other
Garmin LRUs, follow the procedure below to verify it
has been installed and configured correctly:
1. Access the GTN Diagnostics page from the
Configuration mode home page.
2. Touch the HSDB (Ethernet) key. The HSDB
Diagnostics page, shown in Figure 6-3, will be
displayed.
3. Ensure that any LRUs connected via HSDB are
powered on and properly configured.
4. For each HSDB port that has HSDB wiring
connected to it, verify the port status displays
“Connected” and “Receiving”.
5. If the previous step did not perform correctly,
check the electrical connections and
configuration setup.
Figure 6-3 HSDB Diagnostics Page
6.1.6 Crossfill Check

1. Power on the GTN Xi and the cross-side navigator in Configuration mode.
2. On each GTN Xi and GTN 6XX/7XX, touch GTN Diagnostics → HSDB (Ethernet) page,
shown in Figure 6-3. On a GPS 175, GNX 375, or GNC 355, touch Diagnostics → HSDB
Ethernet.
3. On each GTN Xi or GTN 6XX/7XX, for the port connected to the cross-side navigator, check the
HSDB Port Status and verify “Connected” is displayed under Connection and “Receiving” is
displayed under Data. On a GPS 175, GNX 375, or GNC 355, for the port connected to the GTN
Xi, verify “Receiving” is displayed.If the previous steps do not perform correctly, check the
electrical connections and configuration setup. The connected ports must be configured as
“Connected” for each GTN Xi and/or GTN 6XX/7XX. Also, under the Interfaced Equipment
page, the cross-side navigator must be set to Present.

Rev. 11 Page 6-4
6.1.7 Terrain Audio Check (For Units with Terrain Alerting or TAWS Only)
NOTE
The audio panel must also be powered on for the audio check.
The audio volume has an initial default of 80% of the

maximum value. The Terrain/TAWS volume needs to
be set to verify aural alerts are audible under all
anticipated noise environmental conditions.
1. Navigate to the Audio Configuration page
from the main GTN Setup page.
2. Under Alert Volume, increase or decrease the
volume by touching the Volume Up or Volume
Down keys.
3. Evaluate the Terrain/TAWS audio messages for
acceptable volume and intelligibility during
both low and high cockpit noise levels (e.g.,
idle descent at low speed and high power at
Vmo). Refer to Section 6.3.6 for the flight
check procedure.
4. Re-adjust the volume as needed to ensure the
Terrain/TAWS audio messages will be heard in
all anticipated cockpit noise conditions.
Figure 6-4 Audio Configuration Page

6.1.8 GAD 42 Interface Check
This check verifies the interface between the GTN Xi
and the GAD 42.
1. Navigate to the GAD 42 Configuration page
from the External Systems page. Touch
External Systems, then touch GAD 42.
2. Verify Status is ACTIVE.
3. Change any of the options to a different
number.
4. Verify that after changing one of the options,
the Status field changes to SENDING, then
changes back to ACTIVE. If the entry reverts to
the previous number when “ACTIVE” is
displayed, then check the wiring connections to
the GAD 42. Refer to GAD 42 Installation
Manual for details on how to configure the
GAD 42.
Figure 6-5 GAD 42 Configuration Page

Rev. 11 Page 6-5
6.1.9 Lighting Bus Interface Check
The display and key backlighting on the GTN Xi can track an external lighting/dimmer bus input and use it
to vary the display and key backlight levels accordingly. This check verifies the interface is connected
correctly.
CAUTION
When 14 VDC or 28 VDC lighting buses are connected to the GTN Xi, connection of the
aircraft lighting bus to the incorrect input pins can cause damage to the GTN Xi. Always
start this test with the dimming bus at the lowest setting, and slowly increase the
brightness. If the LIGHTING level displayed on the GTN Xi does not increase as the
lighting is increased in brightness, ensure the wiring is correct before proceeding.
1. Ensure the lighting bus is set to its minimum

setting.
2. Navigate to the Lighting Bus Configuration
page.
3. Slowly vary the lighting bus level that is
connected to the GTN Xi.
4. Verify the Source Input Level value displayed
on the configuration screen tracks the lighting
bus setting.
5. Continue to maximum brightness and ensure it
properly tracks.
Figure 6-6 Lighting Bus Configuration

Page

Rev. 11 Page 6-6
6.1.10 Air/Fuel Data Interface Check
The GTN Xi can receive fuel and altitude data from an external source. This check verifies the GTN Xi is
receiving data from these sources. Ensure the GTN Xi is powered on and in Configuration mode. If the
following steps do not perform correctly, check the electrical connections (refer to Appendix B) and
configuration setup (refer to Section 5.4.3.2) for the interfaced data source.
1. Navigate to the GTN Diagnostics page from
the Configuration mode home page.
2. Touch the Main Data Inputs key.
3. If there are multiple sources providing data to
the GTN Xi, remove power from all but one
source.
4. Ensure the applicable data is displayed and
agrees with the active source.
NOTE
After applying power to an altitude source, it
may take several minutes to warm up. During
the warm-up period, the Pressure Altitude
display on the GTN Xi will be dashed out.
5. If there are multiple sources, remove power

from the currently active source and apply
power to another source that has not been
checked.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all available sources Figure 6-7 Main Data Inputs Page
have been checked.
6.1.11 AHRS/IRU Interface Check

The GTN Xi can receive heading data from an external source. This check verifies the GTN Xi is receiving
data from these sources. Ensure the GTN Xi is powered on and in Configuration mode. If the following
steps do not perform correctly, check the electrical connections and configuration setup for the interfaced
AHRS/IRU.
1. Navigate to the GTN Diagnostics page from the Configuration mode home page.
2. Touch the Main Data Inputs key.
3. Scroll to the Heading data display.
NOTE
If a Sandel EHSI or an ARINC 429 EFIS is also installed, ensure it is turned off so it does not
supply heading to the GTN Xi. Ensure the HDG field displays valid heading data.
4. Remove power from the heading source and verify the magnetic heading field is dashed out.

Rev. 11 Page 6-7
6.2 Ground Checks (Normal Mode)
For the following checks, cycle power on the GTN Xi and power it up in Normal mode.
6.2.1 Display of Self-Test Data

Following normal power-up, the Database pages are displayed, followed by the Instrument Panel Self-
Test page. Touching Continue displays the Instrument Panel Self-Test page. During this time, the
electrical outputs are activated and set to the values listed below. Touch Continue to acknowledge the
Instrument Panel Self-Test page. This is not a required check, although this page can be useful for
troubleshooting installation problems.
Table 6-1 Self-Test Values

Parameter Self-Test Value
Course Deviation Half-scale left deviation, TO indication, flag pulled
Glideslope/Vert. Deviation Half-scale up deviation, flag pulled
Annunciators All On
The GTN Xi displays the OBS value (149.5° if interfaced to an HSI with
Selected Course (OBS)
driven course pointer)
Desired Track 149.5° (displayed as 150°)
ITEMS BELOW ARE NOT DISPLAYED ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL SELF-TEST PAGE
Distance to Go 10.0 nautical miles
Time to Go 4 minutes
Bearing to Waypoint (RMI) 135°
Active Waypoint GARMN
Groundspeed 150 knots
Present Position N 39°04.05’, W 94°53.86’
Waypoint Alert Active
Phase of Flight En Route
Message Alert Active
Leg/OBS Mode Leg Mode
GPS Integrity Invalid
Flight Director commands 0° bank (level flight) for 5 seconds;
commands increasing right bank at 1°/second for 5 seconds;
Roll Steering (if applicable) commands 5° right bank for 5 seconds; commands decreasing right
bank at 1°/second for 5 seconds, until command is 0° bank again. This
cycle repeats continuously.

Rev. 11 Page 6-8
6.2.2 Signal Acquisition Check
NOTE
All other avionics should be turned off at the start of this test, with the GTN Xi powered
on.
Verify the GTN Xi is able to acquire sufficient satellites to compute a GPS position. From the home page,
touch the System key and then touch the GPS Status key. Under GPS Solution, verify a “3D Fix” or “3D
Diff Fix” is obtained. If the unit is unable to acquire satellites, move the aircraft away from obstructions
that might be shading GPS reception. If the GPS solution does not improve, check the GPS antenna
installation.
NOTE
After installation, the initial acquisition of position can take up to 20 minutes. Subsequent
acquisitions will not take as long.
Once GPS position information is available, perform the following steps:

1. On the GPS Status page, verify the LAT/LON agree with a known reference position.
2. While monitoring the GPS Status page, turn on other avionics one at a time and check the GPS
signal reception to verify it is not affected (no significant signal degradation).
3. Before proceeding with the VHF COM interference check, verify that any connected equipment is
transmitting and/or receiving data from the GTN Xi and is functioning properly.
6.2.3 VHF COM Interference Check
NOTE
Interference checks must be completed on all IFR installations.
When installing GTN Xi equipment, it is the responsibility of the installer to verify the GTN Xi
modification is compatible with all previous aircraft modifications. Garmin recommends whenever a
GTN Xi is installed in an aircraft that has been modified with non-aviation radios, particular care should be
exercised to ensure these do not interfere with proper function of the GTN Xi. Certain non-aviation radios
can interfere with civil aviation navigation and surveillance equipment, including the Garmin GTN Xi.
When testing a transmitter from a non-aviation device, each frequency must be verified by transmitting for
at least 30 seconds on each channel.
Once the Signal Acquisition Test has been completed successfully, perform the following steps:
1. View the Satellite Status page and verify at least seven satellites have been acquired by the
GTN Xi.
2. Verify the GPS “LOI” flag is out of view.
3. Select 121.150 MHz on the COM transceiver to be tested.
4. Transmit for a period of 35 seconds.
5. Verify the GPS “LOI” flag does not come into view.

Rev. 11 Page 6-9
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the following frequencies:
a. 25 kHz COM Channel Spacing:
121.15 MHz 131.22 MHz
121.17 MHz 131.25 MHz
121.20 MHz 131.27 MHz
121.22 MHz 131.30 MHz
121.25 MHz 131.32 MHz
131.20 MHz 131.35 MHz
b. For VHF radios with 8.33 kHz channel spacing, include the following frequencies in
addition to those listed above:
121.185 MHz 130.285 MHz
121.190 MHz 131.290 MHz
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for all remaining COM transceivers installed in the aircraft.
8. If the aircraft is TCAS-equipped, turn on the TCAS system and verify the GPS position remains
valid. If position is lost, the status on the GPS Status page will change to “ACQUIRING”.
9. If aircraft is SATCOM-equipped, use the SATCOM system and verify the GPS position remains
valid. If position is lost, the status on the GPS Status page will change to “ACQUIRING”.
10. If the GPS “LOI” flag comes into view, refer to Section 3.6.5.7 for options to improve
performance.
6.2.3.1 Interference of GPS

On some installations, VHF COM transceivers, Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) antennas, and
Direction Finder (DF) receiver antennas can re-radiate harmonics that can potentially interfere with the
GPS antenna. The GTN Xi COM does not interfere with its own GPS section.
If a COM antenna is found to be the problem, a 1.57542 GHz notch filter (Garmin P/N 330-00067-00) may
be installed in the VHF COM coax as close to the COM as possible. This filter is not required for the
GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi transmitter.
If a VHF COM is found to be radiating, the following can be done:
1. Replace or clean the VHF COM rack connector to ensure a good coaxial ground is made.
2. Place a grounding brace between the GTN Xi unit, VHF COM, and ground.
3. Shield the VHF COM wiring harness.
6.2.4 VHF NAV Checkout (GTN 650Xi/750Xi)

1. Touch the CDI key to select VLOC mode, which is indicated by a green “VLOC” annunciation on
the bottom-center of the display.
2. Check the VOR reception with ground equipment, operating VOT or VOR.
3. Verify the audio and Morse code ID functions (if possible).
4. Tune a localizer frequency and verify the CDI needle and NAV flag, and VDI needle and GS flag
properly operate.

Rev. 11 Page 6-10
6.2.4.1 NAV Audio Check (For non-GMA 35c Installations)
1. Ensure the audio panel is powered on.
2. Plug in a headset at pilot and co-pilot position.
3. Tune the GTN Xi NAV receiver to a local VOR station.
4. Verify the Morse code identifier is being received over the crew headsets.
5. If the audio is not heard, verify the wiring connections to the audio panel are correct.
6. Verify the audio volume is sufficient for all anticipated cockpit noise conditions.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each installed GTN Xi NAV receiver.
6.2.5 VHF COM Checkout (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only)

6.2.5.1 Antenna Check
If desired, the antenna VSWR can be checked using an inline wattmeter in the antenna coaxial cable using
frequencies near both ends of the band. The VSWR should be < 2:1. A VSWR of 2:1 will cause a drop in
output power of approximately 12%.
6.2.5.2 Receiver/Transmitter Operation

Tune the unit to a local VHF frequency and verify the receiver output produces a clear and understandable
audio output. Verify the transmitter properly functions by contacting another station and getting a report of
reliable communications.
6.2.6 GMA 35c Audio Panel Checkout (GTN 7XX Xi Only)

6.2.6.1 GMA 35c Interface Check (GTN 7XX Xi Only)
1. With the GTN Xi and the GMA 35c Audio Panel powered on, touch the Audio Panel key.
2. Verify a red “X” is not displayed over the Audio Panel key.
After configuring the audio panel, an in-aircraft checkout may be performed with a good microphone,
headset, speaker, and avionics receivers. For testing the marker beacon, use a ramp tester that transmits a
75 MHz marker beacon test signal or perform the flight check outlined in Section 6.3.7.
For instructions on how to operate the GMA 35c in Normal mode during the installation checkout
procedures, refer to GTN Xi Series Pilot’s Guide. Ensure every function of the GMA 35c correctly
operates.
NOTE
In the procedural steps outlined below, allow for variation in the configuration settings for
the particular installation under test.

Rev. 11 Page 6-11
6.2.6.2 Failsafe Operation Check
1. Power off the GMA 35c by pulling the GMA 35c circuit breaker.
2. Check the failsafe operation by exercising the COM 1 microphone, microphone key, and audio
over the pilot’s headphones.
NOTE
If utilizing the Failsafe Warn input, this audio channel should also be verified by causing the
audio source to provide audio and making sure the alert is heard over the pilot's headset.
NOTE
Use of a true mono headset is required for this test (not a stereo headset with a mono/stereo
switch) to verify of proper wiring even if a stereo jack is provided in the installation. Wiring
the left channel (tip contact) and right channel (ring contact) backwards will cause failsafe
mode not to function with mono headsets. This will guarantee the right channel (ring terminal)
being shorted to the return (sleeve terminal) by the mono headset’s plug. During power-on
operation, this short will not damage the audio panel.
3. Verify COM 1 can key and transmit the pilot’s mic audio by checking reception of the transmission
with another radio tuned to receive this transmission (i.e., verify Pilot PTT and mic operation is
delivered to this transceiver).
4. Turn the unit back on to continue testing.
NOTE
If the configuration setting COM 1 is connected as COM 2 is set to True (described in
Section 5.4.6.6.2), then the COM 2 radio should be exercised rather than COM 1.
6.2.6.3 COM Transceiver Operational Check

1. Connect a headset to the pilot’s headset output and mic input jack.
2. Verify each installed transceiver (COM) can be heard when selected.
NOTE
Depending on configuration settings, the mic selected COM may mute audio from other
COMs.
3. Verify each installed transceiver transmits clear audio from the pilot’s mic when the Pilot PTT key
is pressed.
NOTE
Depending on configuration settings, other transceivers may be muted during transmit.
Also, the audio panel may mute the speaker during PTT.
4. Move the headset to the copilot’s headset jacks and verify any one of the installed transceivers
(testing each is not necessary) receives and transmits copilot mic properly as above.

Rev. 11 Page 6-12
6.2.6.4 NAV Audio Check
1. Power on the GMA 35c and each installed NAV receiver.
2. Tune the NAV receiver to a local VOR station.
3. Verify the Morse code identifier is being received over the crew headsets.
4. If the audio is not heard, verify the wiring to the audio panel is correct.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each installed NAV receiver.
6.2.6.5 Alert Audio Check

If there is an alert audio source connected to the GMA 35c, the interface should be verified as described
below:
1. Cause the alert audio source to produce audio (e.g., if a traffic system is installed, command the
traffic system into self-test mode; if a TAWS system is installed, command the TAWS system into
self-test mode).
2. Verify the alert audio source is heard in the pilot and co-pilot headsets and the audio volume is
sufficient for all anticipated cockpit noise conditions. Adjust the audio volume level as needed,
following the instructions in Section 5.4.6.6.2.2.
3. If the alert audio source is not heard in the crew headsets, check the wiring from the source to the
GMA 35c alert audio inputs.
4. Repeat this procedure for each alert audio source connected to the GMA 35c.
6.2.6.6 Receiver Audio Check

If there are receiver audio sources connected to the GMA 35c, the interface should be verified as described
below. Ensure the GMA 35c and the interfaced receiver (e.g., DME, ADF, etc.) are powered on.
1. Plug in a headset at pilot and co-pilot position.
2. Tune the installed receiver to a valid station.
3. Verify the audio is being received over the crew headsets.
5. Adjust the audio output level as needed at the receiver.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each installed receiver.
6.2.6.7 Intercom System (ICS) Check
NOTE
If a monaural headset is plugged into any stereo phone jack position, no damage will
occur to the GMA 35c. In the case of plugging a monaural headset into any passenger
position, any stereo listener will lose one channel when another passenger plugs in a
monaural headset.
1. Place the audio panel into ALL ICS mode (refer to GTN Xi Series Pilot’s Guide) so all ICS
positions hear all others.
2. De-select or turn off other audio sources (e.g., MKR, transceivers, receivers, alerts). Some
configurations may mute passenger intercom audio to crew when aircraft audio is present.

Rev. 11 Page 6-13
3. From the pilot headset position, verify the pilot, co-pilot, and all passenger mic inputs can be heard
in the pilot’s headset when speaking into the mic input under test.
4. Adjust the pilot ICS volume, if necessary.
5. Speak into the pilot’s mic and verify co-pilot mic audio is heard in the co-pilot headset.
6. Adjust the co-pilot ICS volume, if necessary.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each passenger headset.
6.2.6.8 Aircraft Receivers Check

1. Select the audio source for each avionics unit installed in the aircraft and check for audio over the
headsets.
2. Touch the Cabin Speaker key and verify any selected audio is heard over the speaker.
6.2.6.9 Music System Check (If Installed)
NOTE
Music should mute as a result of GTN Xi audio output. If music fails to mute as a result of
GTN Xi key click audio or TAWS audio, adjust the alert audio squelch level to verify the
GMA input for GTN Xi and other alerting inputs is sensitive enough to cause the music to
mute.
1. Distribute the music to each position (e.g., pilot, co-pilot, passenger).

2. Verify the music source is turned up and is not muted.
3. Connect a stereo audio source to MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2.
4. Verify the stereo audio is heard over each headset position.
5. Tune a station on COM 1 and monitor the COM. Verify the music audio is muted by active COM 1
audio (break squelch on COM 1, if necessary). Repeat this check for both the pilot and
co-pilot headset positions. If music fails to mute, it is possible the squelch level for one of the
unswitched alert audio inputs is set too low.
6.2.6.10 Bluetooth Audio Check

While on the ground, turn on the GTN Xi and GMA 35c. A compatible Android or iOS PED is required.
NOTE
To verify telephone audio is available, a Bluetooth-compatible phone is needed.
1. Navigate to the GMA 35c page by touching System → Connext Setup → GMA 35c.
2. Verify Bluetooth is enabled.
3. On the PED, view the list of available Bluetooth devices.
4. Select the device that matches the Bluetooth name shown on the GTN Xi screen.
5. Verify the PED is paired with the GTN Xi. A green check mark is displayed by the paired device.
6. Touch Intercom on the GTN 725Xi/750Xi.
7. Touch Bluetooth Audio and set distribution to Pilot, Co-pilot, and Passenger.
8. Touch Radio to mute Bluetooth during radio transmissions.

Rev. 11 Page 6-14
9. Touch Intercom to mute Bluetooth during intercom transmissions.
10. Verify the audio from PED is distributed to the selected positions.
11. Tune and monitor a COM frequency to verify the communications over the radio are easily heard
over the audio.
NOTE
If different values are used for the telephone and audio volume settings, repeat this
procedure while making a call from a Bluetooth compatible phone.
12. Adjust the Bluetooth volume as necessary.
6.2.7 Terrain System Check (For Units with Terrain Alerting/TAWS Only)
While on the ground, turn on the GTN Xi following normal power-up procedures. Also turn on the audio
panel.
NOTE
A 3D GPS position fix is required to conduct this check.
1. Select the Terrain page from the Normal mode home page.
2. Touch the MENU key.
3. Touch the Test Terrain or Test TAWS key.
4. Wait until the Terrain Alerting/TAWS self-test completes (10-15 seconds) to hear the Terrain/
TAWS system status aural message:
 The aural message “Terrain System Test OK” or “TAWS System Test OK” will be annunciated
if the Terrain/TAWS system is properly functioning.
 The aural message “Terrain System Failure” or “TAWS System Failure” will be annunciated if
the Terrain/TAWS system is not properly functioning. Also, “Terrain Fail” or “TAWS FAIL”
will appear in amber on the screen.
If no audio message is heard, then a fault exists within the audio system or associated wiring and the
Terrain/TAWS capability must be considered non-functional. Verify the wiring to the audio panel is
installed in accordance with Appendix Section B.2.

Rev. 11 Page 6-15
6.2.8 Interface Checks
6.2.8.1 Weather Radar Interface Check
6.2.8.1.1 GWX 68/70/75 Weather Radar Interface Check
This section makes sure the heading interface between the GTN 7XX Xi and the GWX 68/70/75 weather
radar is functional.
2. On the home page, touch Weather and then Radar.
3. Touch the Mode key and select Standby mode and wait for the warm-up to complete.
4. Touch the Mode key again and select Test mode.
5. Verify the GWX 68/70/75 begins sweeping and the test pattern is shown.
6. If supported by the installation, verify stabilization is on (“STAB On” is displayed in the upper-
right corner of the radar display).
7. Using the Mode key, set the mode to Off.
8. If a second GTN Xi is installed, repeat steps 2 through 7.
6.2.8.1.2 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Interface Check

This section makes sure the interface between the GTN 7XX Xi and ARINC 708 weather radar is
functional.
WARNING
Aircraft should be outdoors and personnel should not be in front of the weather radar
when it is radiating (i.e., when Weather or Ground mode is selected on the GTN Xi).
1. Power on the GTN Xi in Normal mode. In a dual GTN 7XX Xi installation, power on both in
Normal mode.
2. On each GTN Xi, navigate to the home page, touch Weather and then Radar.
3. On one GTN Xi, touch the Mode key and select Standby mode and wait for the warm-up to
complete.
4. Touch the Mode key again and select Test Mode.
5. Verify the radar begins sweeping and the test pattern is shown.
6. If stabilization is supplied to the radar, turn the radar to Weather mode and turn stabilization on in
the weather menu.
7. Verify “STAB On” is displayed in the upper-right corner or the radar display. If “STAB INOP” is
displayed, verify stabilization is being supplied to the weather radar R/T.
8. Using the Mode key, set the mode to Off.
NOTE
If only one GTN 7XX Xi is installed, the following steps do not have to be carried out.
9. Repeat steps 3 through 7 for the second GTN 7XX Xi.

10. On each GTN Xi, touch the Mode key and select Standby and wait for the warm-up to complete.
11. On each GTN Xi, touch the Mode key again and select Test Mode.
12. On GTN Xi #1, touch the Zoom Out key to increase the range of the radar display.
13. Verify the range on GTN Xi #1 changes and the range on GTN Xi #2 does not change.

Rev. 11 Page 6-16
14. On GTN Xi #2, touch the Zoom Out key to increase the range of the radar display. Select a
different zoom level than GTN Xi #1.
15. Verify the range on GTN Xi #2 changes and the range on GTN Xi #1 does not change.
16. On each GTN Xi, using the Mode key, set the mode to Off.
6.2.8.2 GSR 56 Iridium® Check
NOTE
When testing the GSR 56, the aircraft must be located outside and have an unobstructed
view of the sky.
NOTE
For additional information on using the GSR 56 features, refer to GTN Xi Series Pilot’s
Guide.
NOTE
To use the position reporting feature of the GSR 56, a short burst data (SBD) Iridium
account is required. To use the phone feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium voice account is
required. To use the SMS feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium SMS account is required. To
use the weather feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium RUDICS account is required. For more
information on how to subscribe to the services offered by the GSR 56, refer to the GSR 56
installation manual.
If the GSR 56 Iridium transceiver is installed and connected to the GTN Xi, check the operation as follows:
2. If position reporting is enabled, navigate to the Iridium page in the Utilities page group and touch
Position Reporting.
3. Verify the reporting status is not “Unavailable”.
4. If the Iridium phone is enabled, navigate to the Iridium Phone page in the Iridium page group.
5. Verify the phone status is not “Unavailable”.
6. Verify a phone call can be placed.
NOTE
The following steps should only be completed if CONNEXT Weather is enabled. In order
to receive weather updates, the GSR 56 being tested must be registered and the
registration access code must be entered into the GSR 56 using the GTN Xi.
7. Navigate to the Connext page in the Weather page group.

8. Verify the Connext settings can be found by touching Menu.
9. If the GSR 56 is registered, touch the Menu key and select the “CONNEXT Data Request” option
under CONNEXT settings. Verify weather is displayed on the map. Refer to GTN Xi Series Pilot’s
Guide for information on requesting Connext data.

Rev. 11 Page 6-17
6.2.8.3 Honeywell (Bendix/King) EFS 40/50 Interface Check
If a Honeywell EFS40/50 has been connected to the GTN Xi, the interface should be verified as described
in this section.
1. Cycle power to the first GTN Xi and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument
Panel Self-Test page (refer to Section 6.2.1).
2. Verify GPS1 data is displayed by pressing the 1-2 key on the EFS40/50 control panel.
3. While the GTN Xi is displaying the Instrument Panel Self-Test page, verify the EFS40/50 is
displaying data from the GPS source. Refer to Section 5.4.3.1 for configuration information.
 Course Deviation: Half-scale left deviation, TO indication, flag pulled
 Active Waypoint: GARMN
 Vertical Deviation: Half-scale up deviation (only if installation is setup to display GPS
vertical deviation)
4. On the GTN Xi, verify an OBS value is displayed (and not dashed out).
5. Using a VOR test set, verify the CDI deviation on the EFS40/50 is correctly displayed.
6. Cycle power to the second GTN Xi and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument
Panel Self-Test page.
7. Switch to GPS2 data by pressing the 1-2 key on the EFS40/50 control panel and repeat steps 3-5
with GTN Xi #2.
6.2.8.4 Sandel SN 3308 Interface Check

If a Sandel EHSI has been connected to the GTN Xi, the interface should be verified as described in one of
the following sections, as applicable for the installation.
6.2.8.4.1 Single GTN Xi/Single SN 3308

1. Cycle power to the GTN Xi and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument Panel
Self-Test page (refer to Section 6.2.1).
2. Verify the SN3308 is receiving valid heading.
NOTE
The Vertical Deviation Indication will not be displayed unless the SN3308 is receiving
valid heading.
3. While the GTN Xi is displaying the Instrument Panel Self-Test page, verify the SN3308 is
displaying the following data from the GPS source:
 Vertical Deviation: Half-scale up deviation, flag pulled
5. Acknowledge the self-test on the GTN Xi by touching the Continue key.
6. Select VLOC on the GTN Xi and verify the SN3308 displays “NAV 1” or “NAV 2” (depending on
the GTN Xi navigation source configuration).
7. Using a VOR test set, verify the CDI deviation on the SN3308 is correctly displayed.

Rev. 11 Page 6-18
6.2.8.4.2 Dual GTN Xi Units/Single SN3308
1. Remove power from GTN Xi #2.
2. Cycle power to GTN Xi #1 and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument Panel
3. Select GPS1 as the navigation source by pressing the NAV key on the SN3308.
4. Verify GPS1 is displayed on the SN3308.
NOTE
valid heading.
6. While GTN Xi #1 is displaying the Instrument Panel Self-Test page, verify the SN3308 is
displaying the following data from GPS1:
7. On GTN Xi #1, verify an OBS value is displayed (and not dashed out).
8. Acknowledge the self-test on GTN Xi #1 by touching the Continue key.
9. Select VLOC on GTN Xi #1 and verify the SN3308 displays “NAV 1” or “NAV 2” (depending on
which navigation source the GTN Xi is).
11. Remove power from GTN Xi #1 and apply power to GTN Xi #2.
12. Acknowledge the prompts until the Instrument Panel Self-Test page is displayed. Refer to
Section 6.2.1.
13. Select GPS2 by pressing the NAV key on the SN3308.
14. Repeat steps 5-10 with GTN Xi #2.
6.2.8.4.3 Dual GTN Xi Units/Dual SN3308s

2. Cycle power to GTN Xi #1 and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument Panel
Self-Test page (refer to Section 6.2.1). Select GPS1 as the navigation source by pressing the NAV
key on the SN3308.
3. Verify GPS1 is displayed on the SN3308.
NOTE
valid heading.

Rev. 11 Page 6-19
5. While GTN Xi #1 is displaying the Instrument Panel Self-Test page, verify the SN3308 is
displaying the following data from GPS1:
6. Verify an OBS value displays on GTN Xi #1.
7. Touch the Continue key to acknowledge the self-test on GTN Xi #1.
8. Select VLOC on GTN Xi #1.
9. Verify the SN3308 displays “NAV 1” or “NAV 2” (depending on which navigation source the
GTN Xi is).
12. Apply power to GTN Xi #2.
13. Acknowledge the prompts until the Instrument Panel Self-Test page displays (refer to
Section 6.2.1).
14. Press the NAV key on the SN3308 to select GPS2.
15. Repeat steps 4-10 with GTN Xi #2.
16. Perform the same procedure for the second SN3308.
6.2.8.5 Sandel SN3500/4500 Interface Check

If a Sandel SN3500/4500 EHSI has been connected to the GTN Xi, the interface should be verified as
described in this section.
2. Verify the SN3500/4500 is receiving valid heading.
NOTE
The Vertical Deviation Indication will not be displayed unless the SN 3500/4500 is
receiving valid heading.
3. While the GTN Xi is displaying the Instrument Panel Self-Test page, verify the
SN3500/4500 is displaying data from the GPS source.
5. Acknowledge the self-test on the GTN Xi by touching the Continue key.
6. Select VLOC on the GTN Xi and verify the SN3500/4500 displays “NAV 1” or
“NAV 2” (depending on what navigation source the GTN Xi is).
7. Verify the NAV 1 (or NAV2) indication does not have a red line through it.
8. Repeat steps 3-7 for GTN Xi #2, if installed.

Rev. 11 Page 6-20
6.2.8.6 Ryan TCAD Traffic System Interface Check
If a Ryan TCAD has been connected to the GTN Xi, the traffic interface should be verified as described in
this section.
1. Navigate to the Traffic page on the GTN Xi.
2. Verify “NO DATA” is not displayed in yellow on the center of the Traffic page.
3. Using the SHIELD SETUP under the Traffic menu, verify the shield mode can be changed.
6.2.8.7 EHSI Deviation Scaling for HSI/CDI Driven by GTN Xi via ARINC 429 Data
If the GTN Xi has a ARINC 429 connection to an EFIS display, proper scaling of the EFIS CDI and VDI
must be verified.
2. With the Instrument Panel Self-Test page displayed on the GTN Xi, look on the EHSI/EFIS and
verify the lateral deviation is half-scale left and not flagged.
3. With the Instrument Panel Self-Test page displayed on the GTN Xi, look on the EHSI/EFIS and
verify the vertical deviation is half-scale up and not flagged.
NOTE
If the deviations are not as described, the EHSI/EFIS does not scale the GTN Xi deviations
properly and this installation cannot be certified for GPS-based guidance. Contact
Garmin for further assistance.
6.2.8.8 ARINC 429 Traffic System Interface Check

If a Garmin GTS 8XX Traffic system, L-3 Communications SKY497/SKY899 SkyWatch sensor, or a
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KTA 810 TAS/KMH 820 IHAS has been connected to the GTN Xi via
ARINC 429, the traffic interface should be verified as described in this section.
1. Navigate to the Traffic page on the GTN Xi from the home page.
2. Verify “NO DATA” is not displayed in yellow on the center of the Traffic page.
3. If the GTN Xi is configured to control the traffic system (Section 5.4.3.9), verify the traffic system
mode can be changed from STBY to OPER.
4. Switch the traffic system mode to STBY, and then run the traffic self-test from the menu.
5. Verify the traffic system executes a self-test and a self-test pattern is displayed on the GTN Xi
traffic display.
6. Restart the GTN Xi in Configuration mode.
7. On the Traffic page in the External Systems page group, verify there is data displayed in the
Altitude field.

Rev. 11 Page 6-21
6.2.8.9 Stormscope® Interface Check
If an L-3 Communications WX-500 Stormscope has been connected to the GTN Xi, the Stormscope
interface should be verified as described in this section.
1. Navigate to the Lightning page on the GTN Xi.
2. Verify “STORMSCOPE FAILED” is not displayed in yellow on the center of the Lightning page.
3. Verify the Stormscope mode can be changed from Strike to Cell, and vice versa.
6.2.8.10 GMX 200/MX20 Interface Check

If a Garmin GMX 200 or MX20 has been connected to the GTN Xi, the interface should be verified as
described in this section.
1. Verify the GTN Xi has a 3-D position fix.
2. Create and activate a flight plan on the GTN Xi by touching the Direct-To key and entering a
waypoint.
3. Verify the RTE and POS data flags are not displayed on the GMX 200/MX20.
4. Verify the flight plan is displayed on the GMX 200/MX20 using the flight plan (FPL) function.
6.2.8.11 GDL 69/69A Interface Check

If a Garmin GDL 69 has been connected to the GTN Xi, the interface should be verified as described in
Section 6.2.8.11.1. If a Garmin GDL 69A has been connected to the GTN Xi, the interface should be
verified as described Sections 6.2.8.11.1 and 6.2.8.11.2. Each of these procedures involves making sure the
satellite signal is acquired and tracked. Locate the aircraft where there is a clear view of the southeastern or
southwestern sky. XM Satellite Radio satellites are located above the equator over the eastern and western
coasts of the continental United States.
NOTE
The following sections only check that the interface between the GTN Xi and GDL 69/69A
correctly operates. It does not activate the GDL 69 Sirius XM data link radio. Complete
instructions for activating the Sirius XM data link radio can be found in GDL 69/69A XM
Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (P/N 190-00355-04).
6.2.8.11.1 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Weather Checkout Procedure

1. With the GTN Xi in Normal mode, navigate to the External LRUs page (in the System page
group) then touch the More Info key next to “GDL69.”
2. Verify the Data Radio ID field has a valid ID. For a GDL 69A, the Audio Radio ID field should
also display a valid ID.
3. Verify at least one subscribed weather product turns green on the GDL 69 Status page. This may
take several minutes. This will indicate the weather products are being received.
4. During SiriusXM activation, “Detecting Activation” will be displayed in the Subscription Level
field on the SiriusXM Information page. The subscription level will be displayed once the
SiriusXM signal is detected.

Rev. 11 Page 6-22
6.2.8.11.2 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Audio Checkout Procedure
The following steps only need to be completed for GDL 69A installations:
1. Navigate to the Music page from the home page.
NOTE
If the SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio subscription has not been activated, audio is
available only on Channel 1. If the audio subscription has been activated, audio should be
available on multiple channels.
2. Verify the GDL 69A audio is not muted.

3. Verify audio can be heard over the headsets.
4. Adjust the volume to verify the data path is working and the volume is at an satisfactory level.
6.2.8.12 External RMI/OBI Interface Check (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)

The GTN Xi VOR RMI/OBI output can be used to drive an RMI (or OBI) navigation indicator. This check
verifies the RMI/OBI is receiving data from the GTN Xi. If the following steps do not perform correctly,
check the electrical connections and configuration setup.
NOTE
The aircraft heading system must be operating properly in order for the RMI needle to
point correctly.
6.2.8.12.1 VOR OBI Output

If the VOR OBI output from the GTN 650Xi/750Xi is connected to an RMI navigation indicator, verify the
interface is correctly operating.
1. Power on the equipment.
2. If installed, set the RMI select switch to the VLOC position.
3. Tune a local VOR station, or use a simulated signal from an approved VOR Test System.
4. Verify the RMI needle swings and points toward the VOR station.
6.2.8.13 DME Tuning Check (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)

If the GTN Xi is set up to remotely channel a DME, verify the interface is correctly operating.
1. Select a VOR/ILS channel that corresponds to (1) a DME station within a 40 nautical mile range,
or (2) the frequency of a DME ground tester.
2. Verify the DME locks on to the signal and a valid distance is displayed.
3. Tune an invalid VOR station.
4. Verify the DME data is flagged.
5. If two GTN Xi units are set up to remotely channel a DME, repeat steps 1-4 using the other
GTN Xi.

Rev. 11 Page 6-23
6.2.8.14 TIS (Garmin GTX 33/330/335/335R) Interface Test
If a Garmin GTX 33/330/335/335R transponder has been connected to the GTN Xi, the traffic interface
should be verified as described in this section.
1. Select the Traffic Map on the GTN Xi.
2. Verify “TIS FAIL” is not displayed in the upper-left corner under Traffic Status, and “NO DATA”
(yellow) is not displayed over the ownship symbol.
3. On the upper-left corner of the Traffic Map page, verify the status of the traffic system is either
“TIS Standby” or “TIS Operating/Unavailable” (i.e., “TAS” should not be displayed).
The following additional steps should only be completed if the GTN Xi is controlling the traffic system:
1. Pull the transponder circuit breaker and verify the air data fields do not contain a red “X”.
2. If a squat switch (or airspeed switch) is connected to the GTX, verify it is in AIR mode.
3. Alternately, touch the Standby key and Operate key to change the mode of the traffic system. It
may take several seconds for the traffic system to change modes.
4. Verify the mode of the traffic system can be changed.
6.2.8.15 Transponder Interface Check

If the GTN Xi is interfaced to a GTX 32/33/335R/345R remote transponder or a GTX 327/328/330/335/
345 configured as a remote transponder, the following checks must be completed:
1. With the GTN Xi in Normal mode and the transponder powered on, verify there is no red “X” over
the transponder data field on the top right of the screen of the home page.
2. Enter a code into the Code field using the keypad.
3. Touch the Enter key
4. Verify the code that was entered is displayed in the Transponder Data field.
5. If dual transponders are installed, select Transponder 2 and perform steps 1 through 4 for the
second transponder.
6. Pull the Transponder #1 circuit breaker and verify the transponder 1 data field contains a red “X”
rather than the transponder 2 data field to verify the wiring is not crossed (i.e., transponder 1 is
incorrectly connected to transponder 2 circuit breaker).
7. Repeat the preceding steps for the second GTN Xi.
6.2.8.16 Fan Interface Check
NOTE
The fan may take a few minutes to power on if the unit is below normal operating
temperature.
With the GTN Xi in Normal mode and the fan on:

1. Touch the Message Queue key on the home page.
2. Verify the “COOLING FAN- the cooling fan has failed” message is not displayed.

Rev. 11 Page 6-24
6.2.8.17 GTX 345/345R Interface Check
When testing the GTX 345/345R, the aircraft must be located outside and have an unobstructed view of the
sky. If the GTX is installed and connected to the GTN Xi as the ADS-B In Source, check the operation as
follows:
2. Power on the transponder.
3. Touch the System key.
4. Touch the External LRUs key.
5. Verify that the status for the GTX is a green checkmark.
6. Touch the More Info key for the GTX.
7. Verify that the GPS status and software versions are reported.
8. Repeat the preceding steps for the second GTN Xi, if applicable.
If TAWS is configured on the GTN Xi in addition to the interface to the GTX 345/345R, check the
operation as follows:
9. Monitor the Audio Inhibit discrete input on the Discrete Diagnostics page for the GTX using the
bezel controls in Configuration mode on the GTX or the GTX 3X5 Install Tool.
10. Verify the Audio Inhibit discrete input indicates active when the TAWS system is playing audio
and inactive otherwise. Refer to Section 6.1.7.
6.2.9 GDL 88 Interface Check

When testing the GDL 88, the aircraft must be located outside and have an unobstructed view of the sky. If
the GDL 88 is installed and connected to the GTN Xi, check the operation as follows:
1. Power on all GTN Xi units into Configuration mode. Refer to Section .
2. Navigate to the GDL 88 page in the External Systems page group.
3. Touch the Diagnostics key.
4. Touch the GPS/SBAS Data key.
5. Verify the GDL 88 is receiving valid position source data.
6. Verify the status of the External GPS connection(s) is valid.
If a TAWS system is installed in addition to the GDL 88, check the operation as follows:
7. Navigate to the GDL 88 Discrete Input page under GDL 88 Diagnostics page group.
8. Verify the Audio Inhibit #1* discrete input indicates active when the TAWS system is playing
audio, and inactive otherwise. Refer to Section 6.1.7.
6.2.10 Flight Stream 210/510 Interface Check

For this checkout, the Flight Stream 210/510, GTN Xi, GDL 69 (if installed), and GDL 88 (if installed)
need to be powered on.
NOTE
A compatible PED with the Garmin Pilot application is required to perform the ground
checks. Visit Garmin’s website for a list of compatible devices.

Rev. 11 Page 6-25
6.2.10.1 Bluetooth Setup
When the Flight Stream 210/510 device is powered on, Pairing mode will not be enabled until the Connext
Setup page is opened on the GTN Xi.
1. Enable Bluetooth connectivity on the PED. Once enabled, Flight Stream 210/510 will be viewable
in the list of available devices.
2. Select the Flight Stream 210/510 from the list of available Bluetooth devices on the PED.
The default Flight Stream 210/510 Bluetooth name is “Flight Stream” followed by the three-digit model
number (210 or 510) and then the last four digits of the MAC address (e.g., Flight Stream 210 4000).
A pop-up will appear on the GTN Xi screen to confirm the new Bluetooth pairing. Select Yes to finish
pairing the device.
Bluetooth setup only needs to be run when pairing with a device for the first time. Once a connection is
established with a Bluetooth device, the Flight Stream 210/510 will automatically connect to the Bluetooth
device upon power-up. The Flight Stream may be connected to up to four Bluetooth devices
simultaneously. The Flight Stream 210/510 will also save up to thirteen Bluetooth device pairings.
NOTE
If issues occur when making a Bluetooth connection, cycle power on the Flight Stream
device and retry making a Bluetooth connection.
6.2.10.2 Interface Checks

After pairing the Flight Stream 210/510 with the PED, verify the device is communicating with the GTN
Xi, GDL 88 (if installed), and GDL 69A (if installed). This test should be performed outside, away from
buildings and large obstructions. If any of the tests below are unsuccessful, refer to GTN Xi Part 23 AML
STC Maintenance Manual and ICA (P/N 190-01007-C1) for trouble-shooting information.
6.2.10.2.1 GTN Xi Interface Check

1. On the Garmin Pilot application, navigate to the Flight Plan page and create a flight plan.
2. Select the Connext icon at the top of the page.
3. Select the option to send the flight plan to the GTN Xi. If successful, a message will be available
on the GTN Xi.
6.2.10.2.2 GDL 88 Interface Check (If Installed)

1. Navigate to the Traffic page on the GTN Xi.
2. Navigate to the Traffic page on the Garmin Pilot application.
3. On the GTN Traffic page, touch the Menu key.
4. Touch the Test key. If the Test key is unavailable, ADS-B Status must be turned off.
5. Verify the traffic targets are displayed on the PED.
6.2.10.2.3 GDL 69/69A Interface Check (If Installed)

1. On the Garmin Pilot application, navigate to the Connext page.
2. Select SiriusXM under Status and verify that weather data is available.

Rev. 11 Page 6-26
6.2.11 Magnetic Compass Check
A compass swing should be carried out at completion of installation in accordance with AC 43.13-1B,
Chapter 12, Section 3, paragraph 12-37.
6.2.12 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Check
NOTE
The Flight Stream 110/210 EMC check does not show compliance for 14 CFR 91.21,
121.306, or 125.204. It is the responsibility of the aircraft operator to comply with
regulations governing the use of PEDs on an aircraft.
Wait for the current system start-up sequence to finish before applying power to the next system. An EMC
check must be conducted once the GTN Xi/GMA 35/Flight Stream is installed and all interfaces to external
equipment are verified to be correctly working. The EMC check verifies that the equipment is not
producing unacceptable interference in other avionics systems and that other avionics systems are not
producing unacceptable interference in the GTN Xi. An example EMC Source/Victim matrix is shown in
Figure 6-8.
Perform the following procedure:
1. Enter equipment installed in the aircraft into the Source row and Victim column of the form.
2. Apply power to all avionics systems, except the equipment installed under this STC.
3. Verify that all existing avionics systems are properly functioning.
4. Apply power to the GTN Xi, GMA 35, GDL 60, and Flight Stream.
5. Remove power from all other avionics systems.
6. Apply power and/or operate the systems listed on the form, one system at a time.
7. Verify that the GTN Xi properly functions.
8. Verify that each radio properly functions.
a. For VHF COM radio, monitor one local frequency, one remote (far field) frequency, and one
unused frequency.
b. Verify that there are no unintended squelch breaks or audio tones that interfere with
communications.
c. For each VHF NAV radio, monitor one local frequency, one remote (far field) frequency, and
one unused frequency.
d. Verify that there are no guidance errors.
e. Verify that there are no audio tones that interfere with the station ID.
9. Verify that all other avionics properly function.

Rev. 11 Page 6-27
‫‪VICTIM‬‬
‫)‪Communication Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Power Plant Instruments‬‬
‫‪Turn and Bank Indicator‬‬
‫‪Vertical Speed Indicator‬‬
‫‪GMA 35 or GMA 35c‬‬

‫‪Gov RPM Incr / Decr‬‬
‫)‪Navigation Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Magnetic Compass‬‬
‫‪Airspeed Indicator‬‬
‫‪Heading Indicator‬‬
‫‪Attitude Indicator‬‬
‫‪Traffic Sensor 1‬‬

‫‪Traffic Sensor 2‬‬
‫‪Radar Altimeter‬‬
‫‪Autopilot / SAS‬‬
‫‪Engine Relight‬‬
‫‪OAT Indicator‬‬
‫‪)OLJKW6WUHDP‬‬
‫‪Transponder‬‬
‫‪Audio Panel‬‬
‫‪Eng Deicing‬‬
‫‪Hyd System‬‬
‫‪Pulse Light‬‬
‫‪TAS/TCAS‬‬
‫‪Anti Coll Lt‬‬
‫‪Fuel Valve‬‬
‫‪Generator‬‬
‫‪Pitot Heat‬‬
‫‪Altimeter‬‬
‫‪*'/‬‬
‫‪Ldg Lts‬‬
‫‪GTN;L‬‬
‫‪Pos Lt‬‬
‫‪Clock‬‬
‫‪Attitude Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Airspeed Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Altimeter‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Vertical Speed‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Indicator‬‬
‫‪Turn and Bank‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Indicator‬‬
‫‪Heading Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Magnetic‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Compass‬‬
‫‪Clock‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪OAT Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Power Plant‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Instruments‬‬
‫‪SOURCE‬‬
‫‪Autopilot / SAS‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Navigation‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫)‪Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Communication‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫)‪Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Engine Relight‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Fuel Valve‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Pitot Heat‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Pulse Light‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Generator‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Pos Lt‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Anti Coll Lt‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Ldg Lts‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Gov RPM Incr /‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Decr‬‬
‫‪Eng Deicing‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Hyd System‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Radar Altimeter‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪TAS/TCAS‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Transponder‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Audio Panel‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪GTN;L‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Flight Stream‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪GMA 35 or 35c‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪*'/‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Traffic Sensor1‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Traffic Sensor 2‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Figure 6-8 Example EMC Source/Victim Matrix‬‬
‫‪190-01007-C0‬‬ ‫‪GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual‬‬

‫‪Rev. 11‬‬ ‫‪Page 6-28‬‬
6.2.13 Engine Run-Up Vibration Test
NOTE
The Flight Stream 210 includes an attitude sensor. Performing this test will validate the
vibration characteristics of the installation.
Initiate the Flight Stream 210 Attitude Sensor engine run-up vibration test procedure by performing the
following steps:
1. If a G500/G600 is present in the aircraft, pull the circuit breaker to the AHRS before performing
this test. If a G500/G600 TXi is present in the aircraft, pull the circuit breaker to the AHRS or PFD
(for integrated ADAHRS systems) before performing this test.
2. For this test, a Flight Stream 210 compatible iOS or Android device with the Garmin Pilot
application will be required. Open the application to the Attitude Indicator screen and observe the
reading throughout the test.
3. Prior to running the test, place the aircraft on a level surface and zero the Flight Stream 210
attitude sensor by pressing Reset Pitch/Roll on the application. This setting is located under the
Flight Stream 210 device settings.
4. Start the engine and gradually increase power from idle to full throttle and back to idle over the
course of about 90 seconds.
5. If the reading deviates more than 5° during the test, a new mounting location should be chosen for
the Flight Stream 210.
The following are potential causes for failure of the Engine Run-up Test:
 Excessive flexibility of Flight Stream 210 mechanical mounting with respect to airframe.
 Vibrational motion of Flight Stream 210 caused by neighboring equipment and/or supports.
 Mounting of Flight Stream 210 at a location that is subject to severe vibrations.
 Mounting screws or other hardware for Flight Stream 210 not firmly attached.
 Absence of mounting supports recommended by the aircraft manufacturer.
 Cabling leading to Flight Stream 210 not firmly secured to supporting structure.
 An engine/propeller combination that is significantly out of balance.
6.2.14 Database Check

Check the navigation database to verify it is current. The database information is displayed during the unit
display start-up sequence. To check the database:
1. Cycle power on the GTN Xi. The GTN Xi will go through its normal start-up sequence.
2. Wait for the Database Verification page to be displayed.
3. Verify the expiration dates displayed have not passed for each database.
4. The database expiration date can also be viewed in the System Status page, which is accessed from
the System page in Normal mode. If the database has expired, then update the database per
Section 1.6.

Rev. 11 Page 6-29
6.3 Flight Checks
A flight check is required as final installation verification. Verify the system operates as described in the
following sections.
The analog deviation (LEFT/RIGHT and UP/DOWN), TO/FROM, and FLAG (lateral and vertical)
outputs to a CDI or HSI should be verified in flight with potential sources of electrical noise, such as
autopilot, flaps, gear, heater blowers, etc., operating. Lateral deviation and flags may be checked with
either GPS or VOR/ILS, and vertical deviation and flags must be checked with glideslope. Verify the flags
are hidden at the correct times, and the flag is in view at the correct times. Verify, during flight, any
placards and labels added as part of the GTN Xi installation are readable in all anticipated cockpit lighting
conditions.
6.3.1 GPS Flight Check

1. Verify GPS position is not lost during normal aircraft maneuvering (e.g., bank angles up to 30° and
pitch angles associated with take-off, departures, approaches, landings, and missed approaches, as
applicable). If GPS position is lost, a “Loss of GPS Navigation” message will be displayed.
2. Enter and activate a flight plan on the GTN Xi by touching the Direct-To key and entering a
waypoint. Fly the flight plan and verify the display of flight plan data is consistent with the CDI
indication (e.g., deviation, TO/FROM, etc.) in the pilot’s primary field-of-view.
6.3.2 VHF COM Flight Check (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi)

After the installation is complete, a flight check is required to ensure performance is satisfactory. To check
the communications transceiver:
1. Maintain an appropriate altitude and contact a ground station facility at a range of at least
50 nautical miles.
2. Contact a ground station in close proximity.
3. Press the COM volume knob to select manual squelch and listen for any unusual electrical noise,
which would increase the squelch threshold. If possible, verify the communications capability on
the high, low, and mid bands of the VHF COM band. It may be required by the governing
regulatory agency to verify operation of the COM transmitter and receiver at the extent of a ground
facility’s service volume (e.g., FAA AC 23-8C).
4. Verify that the COM sidetone volume is sufficiently loud to be heard without causing feedback or
distortion.
5. Verify that airframe warnings are audible when the headset is in use. If the warnings are not
audible, then the GTN Xi volume must be adjusted.
6.3.3 VOR Flight Check (GTN 650Xi/750Xi)

1. Tune a local VOR station within 50 miles.
2. Verify the audio IDENT and voice quality are satisfactory.
3. Verify there is no objectionable electrical interference, such as magneto noise.
4. Verify the Morse code decoder IDs the station (95% probability).
5. Fly to and from the station.
6. Verify NAV flag, TO/FROM flag, and CDI are operational.

Rev. 11 Page 6-30
6.3.4 ILS Flight Check (GTN 650Xi/750Xi)
1. Tune an ILS at a local airport.
2. Verify the audio IDENT and audio quality are satisfactory.
3. Verify there is no objectionable electrical interference, such as magneto noise.
4. Verify the Morse code decoder IDs the station (95% probability).
5. Fly the approach.
6. Verify NAV flag, GS flag, and CDI and VDI are operational.
6.3.5 Autopilot Flight Check

1. Enter and activate a flight plan on the GTN Xi. For the GTN 650Xi/750Xi, verify that GPS is
selected on the CDI. Engage the autopilot in the GPSS mode, if available.
2. Verify the autopilot flies the course.
3. Disengage the autopilot and fly off course.
4. Re-engage the autopilot (in GPSS mode) and verify it correctly intercepts the course and continues
to fly it.
5. Turn off the autopilot GPSS but leave the autopilot engaged in NAV mode.
6. Verify it maintains the current course.
GTN 650Xi/750Xi only

7. Re-select the GPSS mode on the autopilot.
8. Touch the CDI key to select VLOC on the GTN 650Xi/750Xi.
9. Verify the GPSS mode disengages.
10. For autopilots that provide vertical guidance, fly a vertically coupled LPV approach.
11. Verify the autopilot correctly flies the approach.
12. Deviate from the glideslope by using control wheel steering, or by disengaging the autopilot.
13. Verify the autopilot correctly follows the approach guidance once re-engaged.
RNP 1.0 installations only
NOTE
This check is not necessary for aircraft with a Vne/Vmo of 180 KIAS or less.
NOTE
Calibrate the autopilot if it is unable to command a bank of 20°.
Calibrated autopilots approved for RF leg coupling using G500/G600 or G500/G600 TXi GPSS roll
steering function must be capable of providing a bank command of a minimum 20°.
It is required that the autopilot can command a minimum 20° bank for installations that claim RNP 1.0
capability for RF leg navigation with an autopilot.
14. Program a flight plan on the GTN Xi with a minimum of 90° transition between the two legs.
15. Engage autopilot in GPSS/NAV/HDG mode (Roll Steering mode).
16. Establish a minimum ground speed of 180 knots.
17. During the turn, verify the attitude indicator on the GDU reaches a minimum of 20° of bank.

Rev. 11 Page 6-31
6.3.6 Terrain Audio Flight Check (For Units with Terrain Alerting or TAWS Only)
NOTE
The Terrain Alerting/TAWS volume should be loud enough to verify aural alerts are
audible under all anticipated noise environmental conditions. This check makes sure
Terrain Alerting/TAWS aurals can be heard during flight.
1. Take-off and ascend to altitude. During the ascent, in a high ambient noise condition with full
power, eject the SD card from the slot. A Terrain Alerting or TAWS fail audio message should be
generated.
2. Evaluate the volume of the audio message. Verify the Terrain Alerting/TAWS audio can be clearly
heard during high power, high noise flight. If the volume is too low, adjust as described in Section
6.1.7.
3. After re-inserting the SD card into the slot, reboot the GTN Xi by pulling the GTN Xi circuit
breaker and pushing it back in.
4. After this test, during the approach, at approximately 500 ft AGL, the “five hundred” callout will
occur. Verify “five hundred” can be easily heard and understood.
6.3.7 Marker Beacon Receiver Flight Check (GMA 35)

1. Set up for an approach to the airport, with the marker beacon set to low sensitivity.
2. During the approach, verify the marker beacon annunciator light ( , , or
) illuminates for a ground distance of 2,000 to 3,000 feet when flying at an altitude of
1,000 ft AGL on the localizer centerline in all flap and gear configurations.
An acceptable means to determine ground distances of 2,000 to 3,000 feet is to fly at a specified
groundspeed and time the duration the marker beacon light is illuminated. The values listed in Table 6-2
can be used.
Table 6-2 Marker Beacon Annunciator Light Duration

Light Time (seconds)
Groundspeed (Knots)
2000 ft 3000 ft
90 13 20
110 11 16
130 9 14
150 8 12
If the marker beacon annunciator lights do not remain illuminated for the required time, adjust the marker
beacon low sensitivity threshold as described in Section 5.4.6.6.2.2, and then repeat steps 1 and 2.

Rev. 11 Page 6-32
6.4 Documentation Checks
6.4.1 Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
Verify the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) is completed and inserted in the Airplane Flight
Manual (AFM) or Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH).
1. Fill in the required airplane information in Section 1.7 of the AFMS.
NOTE
The GPS SELECT setting will determine if the transition into approach mode is automatic
or requires pilot acknowledgment of a message prompt. Refer to Section 5.4.3.10 for more
information about this configuration setting.
2. Insert the completed AFMS into the AFM or POH.

Rev. 11 Page 6-33
6.4.1.1 AFMS Completion
6.4.1.1.1 Autopilot Listed in GTN AML STC
For all autopilots listed in Appendix Section C.1.4, the applicable limitations for that autopilot are
identified in Table 6-3 and described in the paragraphs following the table.
Table 6-3 Autopilot Coupling Limitations
Capabilities Limitations
Vertical
Section
Lateral
1.7.2.3
AFMS
GPSS
Manufacturer Model Notes
KAP 100 X (iii) [3]

KAP 150 X X (iii) [2]
Honeywell KAP 140 X X (iii) [1]
(Bendix/King) KFC 150/200/250/300 X X (iii) [2]
KFC 225 X X X [1] ARINC 429 roll steering
KFC 275/325 X X X [2] ARINC 429 roll steering
I/II X (iii) [2]
III/IV X X (iii) [2]
21 X (ii) (iii) [3]
Century
31/41 X X (ii) (iii) [2]
2000 X X (ii) (iii) [2]
Trident X X (ii) (iii) [2]
Sperry SPZ-200A/500 X X (iii) [2]
System 20/30/40/50 X (i) (iii) [3]
System 55 X X (i) (iii) [2]
System 55X X X X [2]
S-TEC
System 60-1 X (i) (iii) [3]
System 60-2/65 X X (i) (iii) [2]
System 60 PSS X (iii) [2]
300B/400B/800B X X (iii) [2]
Cessna 300 IFCS/400 IFCS/800
X X (iii) [2]
IFCS/1000 IFCS
Bendix M4C/M4D X X (iii) [2]
Collins APS 65 ( ) X X (iii) [2]
See AFMS Section -
GFC 500 X X X [2]
Autopilot
Garmin
See AFMS Section -
GFC 600 X X X [2]
Autopilot
(i) Roll steering may be provided through the ST-901 GPSS converter.
(ii) Roll steering may be provided through the AK 1081 GPSS converter.
(iii) Roll steering may be provided using the Garmin G3X, G500/G600, or G500/G600 TXi roll
steering converter function. Refer to instructions below for AFMS Section 1.7.3 selections [1] and
[2].

Rev. 11 Page 6-34
AFMS Section - Heading
This section of the AFMS contains two selections that are listed in Section 1.7.2.1 of AFMS or SAFM for
Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS Navigation System (P/N 190-01007-C2) and Section 1.7.2.1 of AFMS or
SAFM for the Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS Navigation System, GPS Functions Approved for VFR
Navigation Only (P/N 190-01007-C3):
[1] This installation has a heading source. The GTN Xi will provide heading leg steering for the
autopilot.
[2] This installation does not have a heading source. The crew cannot use the GTN Xi steering to
fly heading legs with the autopilot.
Check box [1] for installations where the following conditions have been met:
 GTN Xi receives heading from one of the roll steering approved heading sources listed in
Section 3.6.3.3.
 Autopilot is provided GPSS roll steering by one of the accepted methods listed in Table 6-3.
Check box [2] for all other installations.
AFMS Section - Altitude

This section of the AFMS contains two selections that are listed in Section 1.7.2.2 of AFMS or SAFM for
[1] This installation has a barometric corrected altitude source. The GTN Xi will automatically
sequence altitude legs.
[2] This installation does not have a barometric corrected altitude source. The flight crew will be
prompted to manually sequence altitude legs.
Check the applicable box in the AFMS depending on whether or not a barometric corrected altitude source
is interfaced to the GTN Xi.
AFMS Section - Autopilot

This section of the AFMS contains seven selections that are listed in Section 1.7.2.3 of AFMS or SAFM for
Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS Navigation System (P/N 190-01007-C2) and four selections that are listed in
Section 1.7.2.3 of AFMS or SAFM for the Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS Navigation System, GPS Functions
Approved for VFR Navigation Only (P/N 190-01007-C3):
[1] This installation prompts the flight crew and requires the pilot to enable the approach outputs
just prior to engaging the autopilot in APR mode.
[2] This installation supports coupling to the autopilot in approach mode once vertical guidance is
available.
[3] The installation does not support any vertical capture or tracking.
[4] This installation is equipped and configured to provide VNAV display and autopilot coupling.
[5] This installation is equipped and configured to provide VNAV display only.
[6] This installation does not support VNAV display or coupling.
[7] This installation is configured with VNAV Transition to Approach.

Rev. 11 Page 6-35
For all autopilots listed in the GTN AML STC, the applicable check box for [1], [2], or [3] is identified in
Table 6-3. The corresponding limitation, if any, should be checked in the AFMS. Limitations [1], [2], or
[3] are not applicable for installations when the autopilot is wired to an EFIS/EHSI rather than directly to
the GTN Xi.
Check box [4] if the installation is equipped with a Garmin GFC 500 or GFC 600 and configured to
provide EDO VNAV display and autopilot coupling.
Check box [5] if the installation is not equipped with a Garmin GFC 500 or GFC 600 and configured to
provide EDO VNAV display without autopilot coupling.
Check box [6] if the Vertical Navigation type is configured for VCALC per Table 5-38.
Check box [7] if the Transition to Approach setting is enabled per Table 5-39.
AFMS Section - Traffic System (Optional)

This section of the AFMS contains six selections that are listed in Section 1.7.2.4 of AFMS or SAFM for
[1] No traffic system is interfaced to the GTN Xi.
[2] A TAS/TCAS I traffic system is interfaced to the GTN Xi.
[3] A TIS traffic system is interfaced to the GTN Xi.
[4] A TCAD traffic system is interfaced to the GTN Xi.
[5] A Garmin ADS-B traffic system is interfaced to the GTN Xi.
[6] A Garmin ADS-B traffic system is interfaced to the GTN Xi. The ADS-B traffic system is also
interfaced to an on board traffic system.
Check the applicable box in the AFMS depending on the traffic system that is connected to the GTN Xi.
AFMS Section - Navigation Capabilities
NOTE
This STC does not grant operational approval for RF leg navigation. Additional FAA
approval is required for those aircraft intending to use the GTN Xi as a means to provide
RNP 1 navigation in accordance with FAA AC 90-105.
NOTE
Currently uncoupled RF leg navigation is not permitted per FAA AC 90-105. Installations
used to aid in AC 90-105 approval may need to be installed with a compatible autopilot
with native roll steering. Refer to Table 6-3 for a list of autopilots that are approved for
coupled RF leg navigation when interfaced with the GTN Xi.
This section of the AFMS contains four selections that are listed in Section 1.7.3 of AFMS or SAFM for
Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS Navigation System (P/N 190-01007-C2) and Section 1.7.3 of AFMS or SAFM
for the Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS Navigation System, GPS Functions Approved for VFR Navigation Only
(P/N 190-01007-C3). Select only those that apply to the installation.
[1] This installation is equipped to support autopilot coupled RF leg navigation up to RNP 1.0.
[2] This installation is equipped to support hand-flown RF leg navigation up to RNP 1.0.

Rev. 11 Page 6-36
[3] This installation is equipped to support autopilot coupled RF leg navigation at RNP 0.3 and
has received installer approval for such procedures.
[4] This installation does not support RF leg navigation.
Check box [1] if the following conditions are met:
 The GPSS roll steering is provided to the autopilot or flight director by the G3X, G500/G600, or
G500/G600 TXi (GDU 4X0, GDU 620, or GDU 700/1060) system. Ensure the GDU 620 or
GDU 700/1060 is configured to provide GPSS roll steering to the autopilot before selecting this
option. Refer to STC SA1899WI for installation requirements related to the G3X system. Refer to
STC SA02153LA-D for installation requirements related to the G500/G600 system. Refer to STC
SA02571SE for installation requirements related to the G500/G600 TXi system.
 The criteria for option [2] have been met.
Check box [2] if the following conditions are met:
 The GTN Xi is interfaced to one of the following EFIS/EHSI:
◦ Avidyne EXP 5000
◦ GDU 4X0
◦ Garmin GDU 620
◦ Garmin GDU 700/1060
◦ Sandel SN3308
◦ Sandel SN3500/4500
 Navigation Feature “RF Procedure Leg” setting is set to Enabled.
Other EFIS/EHSI may be able to be approved for non-coupled RF leg navigation, but they must support
auto-slewing desired track.
Checking box [3] is not approved per this STC. Installers must seek separate approval for autopilot
coupled RF leg navigation at RNP 0.3.
Check box [4] for installations where option [1], [2], or [3] are not met.
AFMS Section - Cold Weather Compensation

This section of the AFMS contains three selections that are listed in Section 1.7.4 of AFMS or SAFM for
Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS Navigation System (P/N 190-01007-C2). Check the applicable box in the
AFMS depending on if a G500/G600 TXi system is installed with the GTN Xi.
[1] This installation supports cold weather compensated intermediate approach and minimum
altitudes.
[2] This installation supports cold weather compensated intermediate approach altitudes and
missed approach altitudes only.
[3] This installation does not support cold weather compensation.
Check box [1] if a G500/G600 TXi is installed.
Chck box [2] in all other installations with VNAV enabled.
Check box [3] if VNAV is disabled.

Rev. 11 Page 6-37
AFMS Section - Terrain Awareness
This section of the AFMS contains five selections that are listed in Section 1.7.5 of AFMS or SAFM for
(P/N 190-01007-C3):
[1] This installation supports Terrain Proximity. No aural or visual alerts for terrain or obstacles
are provided. Terrain Proximity does not satisfy the TAWS requirement of 91.223.
[2] This installation supports Terrain Alerting. Aural and visual alerts are provided. This
installation does not satisfy the TAWS requirement of 91.223.
[3] This installation supports TAWS B. Aural and visual alerts will be provided. This installation
does support the TAWS requirement of 91.223.
[4] This installation supports TAWS A on GTN 1. Aural and visual alerts will be provided. This
installation does support the TAWS requirement of 91.223.
[5] This installation supports TAWS A on GTN 1 and GTN 2. Aural and visual alerts will be
provided. This installation does support the TAWS requirement of 91.223.
Check the applicable box in the AFMS depending on whether or not the TAWS feature is enabled.
AFMS Section - Go-Around Functionality

This section of the AFMS contains two selections that are listed in Section 1.7.6 of AFMS or SAFM for
Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS Navigation System (P/N 190-01007-C2):
[1] This installation will autoswitch from VLOC to GPS when the Activate GPS Missed
Approach button is touched.
[2] This installation will not autoswitch from VLOC to GPS when the Activate GPS Missed
Approach button is touched. The pilot must manually switch from VLOC to GPS if GPS
guidance is desired after the missed approach point.
This limitation depends on the configuration of the CDI Key. If the CDI Key is set to “Disabled” then the
GTN Xi will not autoswitch from VLOC to GPS when the Activate GPS Missed Approach key is
touched. The pilot must manually switch from VLOC to GPS if GPS guidance is desired after the missed
approach point.
AFMS Section - Smart Glide (Optional)

This section of the AFMS contains two selections that are listed in Section 1.7.7 of AFMS or SAFM for
(P/N 190-01007-C3):
[1] Smart Glide is configured in this installation with the following parameters listed below.
[2] Smart Glide is not configured in this installation.
Check box [1] for installations where the GTN Xi has been configured for Smart Glide functionality per
Section 5.4.3.15. The following values must be recorded in the AFMS:
 MAX Desired Gust Speed (in KTs) per Table 5-46.
 Desired Effective Runway Length (in ft) per Table 5-46.
 Supported Runway Surface Type (select option) per Table 5-46.
Check box [2] if the GTN Xi has not been configured for Smart Glide functionality.

Rev. 11 Page 6-38
6.4.1.1.2 Autopilot Not Listed in GTN AML STC
If an installation has an autopilot interface that is not listed in the GTN AML STC, additional FAA
approval is required for installations not adhering to the criteria discussed in Appendix Section C.1.4.
However, the AFMS provided with the AML STC should still be used, with the applicable limitations
specified as described below.
AFMS Section - Autopilot

This section of the AFMS contains seven selections that are listed in Section 1.7.2.3 of AFMS or SAFM for
Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS Navigation System (P/N 190-01007-C2) and four selections that are listed in
Section 1.7.2.3 of AFMS or SAFM for the Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS Navigation System, GPS Functions
Approved for VFR Navigation Only (P/N 190-01007-C3):
[1] This installation prompts the flight crew and requires the pilot to enable the approach outputs
just prior to engaging the autopilot in APR mode.
[2] This installation supports coupling to the autopilot in approach mode once vertical guidance is
available.
[3] The installation does not support any vertical capture or tracking.
[4] This installation is equipped and configured to provide VNAV display and autopilot coupling.
[5] This installation is equipped and configured to provide VNAV display only.
[6] This installation does not support VNAV display or coupling.
[7] This installation is configured with VNAV Transition to Approach.
Check box [4] if the installation is equipped with a Garmin GFC 500 or GFC 600 and configured to
provide EDO VNAV display and autopilot coupling.
Check box [5] if the installation is not equipped with a Garmin GFC 500 or GFC 600 and configured to
provide EDO VNAV display without autopilot coupling.
Check box [6] if the Vertical Navigation type is configured for VCALC per Table 5-38.
Check box [7] if the Transition to Approach setting is enabled per Table 5-39.

Rev. 11 Page 6-39
6.4.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA)
Verify the applicable aircraft information is filled in on the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA)
in Maintenance Manual and ICA, GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC (P/N 190-01007-C1), and ensure it is inserted
in the aircraft permanent records.
1. Fill in the aircraft make, model, registration number, and serial number information in Table A-1
in Appendix A of the maintenance manual.
2. Fill in the GTN Xi, GDL 60, and GMA (if installed) unit data in Table A-1 in Appendix A of the
maintenance manual.
3. Fill in the configuration log in Appendix A of the maintenance manual.
4. Fill in the applicable wire routing and installed unit locations in Appendix A of the maintenance
manual.
5. Create new wiring diagrams or markup the interconnect diagrams from the STC Installation
Manual detailing which equipment was installed and how it was connected.
6. Insert the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (Section 4) and the completed Appendix A of
the maintenance manual into the aircraft permanent records.
6.4.3 Checkout Log

The following completed checkout log sheet should be performed for each installation, but does not need
to be maintained with the aircraft permanent records.
NOTE
If a dual GTN Xi installation is being performed, a checkout log for each unit should be
completed.

Rev. 11 Page 6-40
GTN Xi Post-Installation Checkout Log
By: Date: ____ /____ /____
Aircraft Model: Aircraft Serial #:

INSTALLATION Unit P/N: Mod Level:
INFORMATION: Unit Model: Serial#:
GPS Antenna P/N: GPS Ant Model:
CONNECTOR ENGAGEMENT (Refer to Section 5.3)

CONNECTOR ENGAGEMENT CHECK
Connector engagement checked
BONDING REQUIREMENT (Refer Section 3.6.6)

 Metal/Tube-and-Fabric: Resistance less than or equal to 2.5 milliohms.
 Composite: Resistance less than or equal to 5.0 milliohms.
 Flight Stream 210: Resistance less than or equal to 10.0 milliohms.
NOTES/COMMENTS:

Rev. 11 Page 6-41
SYSTEM CHECKOUT
Ground Checks (Configuration Mode)
DISCRETE OUTPUTS DISCRETE INPUTS

 [ N/A] OBS Annunciate  [ N/A] OBS Mode Select
 [ N/A] GPS Annunciate  [ N/A] TAWS Audio Inhibit
 [ N/A] Waypoint Annunciate  [ N/A] TAWS Inhibit
 [ N/A] Terminal Annunciate  [ N/A] Air/Ground
 [ N/A] TAWS Audio Active Annunciate  [ N/A] CDI Source Select
 [ N/A] VLOC Annunciate  [ N/A] GSR Status
 [ N/A] LOI Annunciate  [ N/A] Day/Night
 [ N/A] Message Annunciate  [ N/A] Remote Go Around
 [ N/A] Approach Annunciate  [ N/A] GPWS Inhibit
 [ N/A] ILS/GPS Approach Annunciate  [ N/A] Flap Override
 [ N/A] TAWS/Terrain Inhibit Annunciate  [ N/A] Glideslope Inhibit
 [ N/A] TAWS Warning Annunciate  [ N/A] Synchro Valid-High (GTN 7XX Xi)
 [ N/A] Terrain Not Available Annunciate  [ N/A] Synchro Valid-Low (GTN 7XX Xi)
 [ N/A] TAWS Caution Annunciate  [ N/A] Flap Position
 [ N/A] GPS Select Annunciate  [ N/A] Landing Gear Position
 [ N/A] Traffic Test Annunciate  [ N/A] TCAS Auto Display
 [ N/A] Traffic Standby/Operate  [ N/A] ENG/DISENG Smart Glide
 [ N/A] Suspend Annunciate  [ N/A] Transmit Interlock
 [ N/A] GSR Remote Power  [ N/A] COM Mic 1 Key
 [ N/A] Radar On  [ N/A] COM Remote Transfer
 [ N/A] GSR Audio Attenuate  [ N/A] COM Remote Tune Up
 [ N/A] GPWS Inhibit Annunciate  [ N/A] COM Remote Tune Down
 [ N/A] Flap Override Annunciate  [ N/A] VLOC Remote Transfer
 [ N/A] Glideslope Inhibit Annunciate
 [ N/A] Glideslope Caution Annunciate VOR/ILS INDICATOR: [ N/A]
 [ N/A] GPWS Not Available Annunciate  CDI (left, centered, right)
 [ N/A] Smart Glide Active Annunciate  VDI (down, centered, up)
MAIN ANALOG INDICATOR: [ N/A]  TO/FROM flag (OFF, TO, FROM)
 CDI (left, centered, right)  Valid flags
 VDI (down, centered, up)
 TO/FROM flag (OFF, TO, FROM) AHRS/IRU/ADC:
 Valid flags [ N/A] Air Data Computer
 OBS (Selected Course) [ N/A] AHRS/IRU
LIGHTING BUS: TAWS AUDIO: [ N/A]

 [ N/A] Aircraft Lighting Bus Audio checked
HSDB WIRING: Audio level adjusted
 [ N/A] HSDB checked per Section 6.1.5 ADC / ENCODER / FUEL / F/ADC:
[ N/A] Air Data Computer
GTN CROSSFILL: [ N/A]
 Crossfill checked in accordance with Section 6.1.6 [ N/A] Altitude Encoder (serial)
GAD 42: [ N/A] Fuel Sensor

[ N/A] GAD 42 Interface Adapter [ N/A] Fuel / Air Data Computer

Rev. 11 Page 6-42
SYSTEM CHECKOUT (Continued)
GROUND CHECKS (NORMAL MODE)

SIGNAL ACQUISITION CHECK: ICA CHECKS
 Position checked. Aircraft Make, Model, Reg # & Serial # filled in.
 Signal reception checked. GTN, GMA, and Flight Stream unit data filled in.
 Interference from other avionics checked. Configuration log filled in.
Wire routing and unit location information filled in.
Interconnect wiring diagrams created or marked
up for actual installation.
VHF COM INTERFERENCE [ N/A] ICA and completed Appendix A of system
 VHF COM interference checked. maintenance manual inserted into aircraft records.
INTERFACE CHECKS
VHF NAV CHECKOUT (GTN 650Xi/750Xi) [ N/A] [ N/A] Honeywell EFS 40/50
 VOR reception checked. [ N/A] Sandel SN3308
 Localizer reception checked. [ N/A] Sandel SN3500/4500
 Deviation needle and flag checked. [ N/A] Ryan TCAD
[ N/A] EHSI Deviation Scaling
GMA 35 CHECKOUT (GTN 7XX Xi ONLY) [N/A [ N/A] ARINC 429 Traffic System
 COM Transceiver check [ N/A] L-3 Communications Stormscope
 Alert audio check [ N/A] Garmin GMX 200/MX20
 Intercom system check [ N/A] Garmin GDL 69/69A
 Music system check [ N/A] External RMI/OBI
 Failsafe operation check [ N/A] DME Tuning
 NAV audio check [ N/A] TIS (GTX 33/330)
 Receiver audio check [ N/A] Transponder
 Aircraft receivers check [ N/A] Fan wiring
 Bluetooth check [ N/A] Weather Radar
[ N/A] Garmin GSR 56
TVS ASSEMBLY CHECKS [ N/A] [ N/A] Garmin GDL 88
 TVSs checked in accordance with Section 4.6.3 [ N/A] Autopilot
[ N/A] Garmin Flight Stream 210
AFMS COMPLETION CHECKS  [ N/A] Garmin GDL 60
 [ N/A] Autopilot coupling limitations checked.
 Autopilot operation checked. VHF COM CHECKOUT (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi)[N/A]
 Coupling the autopilot during approaches checked. Receiver/Transmitter operation checked
 Leg Sequencing checked. Antenna checked VSWR __________
 Activate GPS missed approach checked.
 Terrain Proximity/Terrain Alerting/TAWS checked. MAGNETIC COMPASS CHECK
 Traffic system (optional) checked. Compass swing performed
 EMI/RFI CHECK TERRAIN/TAWS SYSTEM: [ N/A]
FLIGHT CHECKS Terrain/TAWS System Test OK
 GPS checked SOFTWARE CHECKS

 [ N/A] COM checked (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only)
 [ N/A] VOR checked (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only) Software versions verified to match Equipment
 [ N/A] ILS checked (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only) List, GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC
 [ N/A] Autopilot checked
 [ N/A] Terrain/TAWS audio level checked
 [ N/A] Marker beacon receiver checked
 [ N/A] RNP 1.0 RF leg installation checked

Rev. 11 Page 6-43
COMMENTS:

Rev. 11 Page 6-44
APPENDIX A CONNECTORS AND PINOUT FUNCTION
A.1 GTN Xi ...........................................................................................................................................A-2

A.1.1 P1001 Connector ...................................................................................................................A-3
A.1.2 P1002 Connector ...................................................................................................................A-4
A.1.3 P1003 GTN Xi COM Connector (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only) ....................................A-5
A.1.4 P1004 GTN Xi NAV Connector (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only) ................................................A-6
A.1.5 P1005 Connector (GTN 7XX Xi Only) ................................................................................A-7
A.2 GMA 35 ..........................................................................................................................................A-8
A.2.1 P3501 Connector ...................................................................................................................A-8
A.2.2 P3502 Connector ...................................................................................................................A-9
A.3 Flight Stream 210 Connector ........................................................................................................A-10

Rev. 11 Page A-1
A.1 GTN Xi
Figure A-1 GTN 6XX Xi Connector Layout Detail - Rear View
Figure A-2 GTN 7XX Xi Connector Layout Detail - Rear View

Rev. 11 Page A-2
A.1.1 P1001 Connector
1 9 10 11 12 13
VIEW LOOKING
FROM COCKPIT
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 INTO GTN Xi
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 MOUNTING TRAY
Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Pin Name I/O

1 MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) -- 40 MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) --
2 MAIN OBS ROTOR C OUT 41 MAIN OBS STATOR F IN
3 TIME MARK OUT A OUT 42 LIGHTING BUS 2 LO IN
4 AUDIO OUT HI OUT 43 FAN GROUND --
5 RS-232 OUT 4 OUT 44 RS-232 GND 3/4 --
6 RS-232 OUT 3 OUT 45 RS-232 GND 2 --
7 RS-232 OUT 2 OUT 46 RS-232 GND 1 --
8 RS-232 OUT 1 OUT 47 ARINC 429 IN 2A IN
9 ARINC 429 OUT 2A OUT 48 ARINC 429 IN 1A IN
10 ARINC 429 OUT 1A OUT 49 MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT OUT
11 MAIN +TO OUT OUT 50 MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT OUT
12 MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT OUT 51 MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT OUT
13 MAIN LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT OUT 52 VLOC ANNUNCIATE* OUT
14 OBS ANNUNCIATE* [1] OUT 53 LOI ANNUNCIATE* [1] OUT
15 GPS ANNUNCIATE* OUT 54 MESSAGE ANNUNCIATE* [1] OUT
16 OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT* [1] IN 55 APPROACH ANNUNCIATE* [1] OUT
17 LIGHTING BUS 1 LO IN 56 ILS/GPS APPROACH* OUT
18 LIGHTING BUS 1 HI IN 57 TERRAIN/TAWS INHIBIT ANNUN* [1] OUT
19 AIRCRAFT POWER IN 58 FAN TACH IN IN
20 AIRCRAFT POWER IN 59 FAN POWER OUT (12 VDC) OUT
21 MAIN OBS STATOR D IN 60 MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) --
22 TIME MARK OUT B OUT 61 LIGHTING BUS 2 HI IN
23 AUDIO OUT LO OUT 62 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
24 RS-232 IN 4 IN 63 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK OUT
25 RS-232 IN 3 IN 64 CONFIG MODULE GND OUT
26 RS-232 IN 2 IN 65 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT
27 RS-232 IN 1 IN 66 ARINC 429 IN 2B IN
28 ARINC 429 OUT 2B OUT 67 ARINC 429 IN 1B IN
29 ARINC 429 OUT 1B OUT 68 MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT OUT
30 MAIN +FROM OUT OUT 69 MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT OUT
31 MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT OUT 70 MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT OUT
MAIN VERTICAL SUPERFLAG
32 OUT 71 TERRAIN/TAWS WARNING ANNUN* [1] OUT
OUT
TERRAIN/TAWS NOT AVAILABLE
33 WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATE* [1] OUT 72 OUT
ANNUNCIATE* [1]
34 TERMINAL ANNUNCIATE* [1] OUT 73 TERRAIN/TAWS CAUTION ANNUN* [1] OUT
35 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* [1] OUT 74 GPS SELECT* [1] OUT
36 AUDIO INHIBIT IN* [1] IN 75 TRAFFIC TEST* [1] OUT
37 TERRAIN/TAWS INHIBIT IN* [1] IN 76 TRAFFIC STANDBY* [1] OUT
38 AIR/GROUND* [1] IN 77 AIRCRAFT GND --
39 CDI SOURCE SELECT* [1] IN 78 AIRCRAFT GND --
* Indicates an Active-Low
Notes:
[1] This discrete may be configured to perform another function. Refer to Section 5.4.3.14 for
details on how to configure discretes.

Rev. 11 Page A-3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 VIEW LOOKING FROM COCKPIT INTO

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 GTN Xi MOUNTING TRAY

1 DEMO MODE SELECT* IN 14 ETHERNET IN 4B IN
2 RESERVED IN 15 ETHERNET IN 2A IN
3 SUSPEND ANNUNCIATE* [1] OUT 16 ETHERNET IN 2B IN
4 ETHERNET OUT 4A OUT 17 ETHERNET OUT 2A OUT
5 ETHERNET OUT 4B OUT 18 ETHERNET OUT 2B OUT
6 ETHERNET IN 1A IN 19 RS-422 IN A IN
7 ETHERNET IN 1B IN 20 RS-422 IN B IN
8 ETHERNET OUT 1A OUT 21 RS-422 OUT A OUT
9 ETHERNET OUT 1B OUT 22 RS-422 OUT B OUT
10 SPARE INPUT [1] IN 23 ETHERNET IN 3A IN
11 GSR STATUS IN* [1] IN 24 ETHERNET IN 3B IN
12 GSR REMOTE POWER OUT* [1] OUT 25 ETHERNET OUT 3A OUT
13 ETHERNET IN 4A IN 26 ETHERNET OUT 3B OUT
Notes:

Rev. 11 Page A-4
A.1.3 P1003 GTN Xi COM Connector (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
28 29 30
VIEW LOOKING FROM COCKPIT INTO
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
GTN Xi MOUNTING TRAY
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

1 RESERVED OUT 23 RESERVED OUT
2 RESERVED IN 24 RESERVED OUT
3 RESERVED -- 25 RESERVED OUT
4 RESERVED -- 26 RESERVED --
5 COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI IN 27 COM REMOTE TRANSFER* IN
6 RESERVED -- 28 COM REMOTE TUNE UP* IN
7 500 Ω COM AUDIO HI OUT 29 COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN* IN
8 RESERVED IN 30 AIRCRAFT POWER IN
9 TRANSMIT INTERLOCK* IN 31 RESERVED --
10 RESERVED IN 32 RESERVED --
11 COM MIC 1 KEY* IN 33 RESERVED --
15 RESERVED OUT 37 AIRCRAFT GND --
16 RESERVED IN 38 AIRCRAFT GND --
18 500 Ω COM AUDIO LO -- 40 AIRCRAFT GND --
19 RESERVED -- 41 RESERVED IN
20 MIC AUDIO IN LO IN 42 RESERVED IN
21 RESERVED -- 43 AIRCRAFT POWER IN
22 RESERVED IN 44 AIRCRAFT POWER IN

Rev. 11 Page A-5
A.1.4 P1004 GTN Xi NAV Connector (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43
VIEW LOOKING
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 FROM COCKPIT
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 INTO GTN Xi
MOUNTING TRAY

1 VOR/LOC +TO OUT PAR DME 1MHZ-D/
33 OUT
2 VOR/LOC +FROM OUT SERIAL DME ON
3 VOR/LOC +FLAG OUT 34 GLIDESLOPE +UP OUT
4 VOR/LOC -FLAG OUT 35 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 IN B IN
5 VOR/LOC +LEFT OUT 36 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 IN A IN
6 VOR/LOC +RIGHT OUT PAR DME 100KHZ-A/
37 OUT
7 RESERVED --- SERIAL DME HOLD
8 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT OUT 38 GLIDESLOPE SUPERFLAG OUT
9 VOR OBS ROTOR C OUT 39 PAR DME 100KHZ-B OUT
10 VOR OBS ROTOR H (GND) --- 40 PAR DME 100KHZ-C OUT
11 VOR OBS STATOR E (GND) --- 41 DME COMMON IN
12 VOR OBS STATOR F IN 42 PAR DME 100KHZ-D OUT
13 VOR OBS STATOR D IN 43 PAR DME 50KHZ OUT
14 VOR OBS STATOR G (GND) --- 44 SERIAL DME – DME REQUEST I/O
15 VOR/LOC SUPERFLAG OUT 45 PAR DME 1MHZ-A OUT
16 500 Ω VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI OUT 46 PAR DME 1MHZ-B OUT
17 500 Ω VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO OUT 47 PAR DME 1MHZ-C OUT
18 SERIAL DME – CLOCK I/O 48 RESERVED --
19 SERIAL DME – DATA I/O 49 AIRCRAFT GND --
20 SERIAL DME – RNAV/CH REQ IN 50 RESERVED --
21 SERIAL DME – RNAV MODE IN 51 AIRCRAFT POWER IN
22 AIRCRAFT GND -- 52 AIRCRAFT POWER IN
23 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B OUT 53 GLIDESLOPE -FLAG OUT
24 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A OUT 54 PAR DME 100KHZ-E OUT
25 VOR OBI CLOCK OUT 55 GLIDESLOPE +DOWN OUT
26 VOR OBI SYNC OUT 56 PAR DME 1MHZ-E OUT
27 VOR OBI DATA OUT 57 RESERVED --
28 VLOC REMOTE TRANSFER IN 58 RESERVED OUT
29 ILS ENERGIZE OUT 59 RESERVED OUT
30 RESERVED -- 60 AIRCRAFT GND --
31 RESERVED -- 61 AIRCRAFT GND --
32 GLIDESLOPE +FLAG OUT 62 AIRCRAFT GND --

Rev. 11 Page A-6
A.1.5 P1005 Connector (GTN 7XX Xi Only)
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 VIEW LOOKING
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 FROM COCKPIT
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 INTO GTN Xi
MOUNTING TRAY

2 RESERVED -- 33 SYNCHRO VALID INPUT (ACTIVE LO) IN
3 RESERVED -- 34 SPARE OUTPUT C* [1] OUT
4 RESERVED -- 35 SYNCHRO X IN
5 RESERVED -- 36 SYNCHRO REF HIGH IN
6 RESERVED -- 37 ARINC 429 IN 3A IN
7 ARINC 429 OUT 3B OUT 38 ARINC 429 IN 4A IN
8 RS-232 OUT 5 OUT 39 RESERVED --
9 RS-232 OUT 6 OUT 40 ARINC 453/708 TERM 1A --
11 RESERVED -- 42 ARINC 453/708 TERM 2A --
13 RADAR ON* [1] [2] OUT 44 RESERVED --
14 SYNCHRO Y IN 45 RESERVED --
15 SYNCHRO REF LO IN 46 RESERVED --
16 ARINC 429 IN 3B IN 47 RESERVED --
17 ARINC 429 IN 4B IN 48 RESERVED --
18 ARINC 453/708 IN 1A IN 49 RS-232 GND 5 --
19 ARINC 453/708 TERM 1B -- 50 RS-232 GND 6 --
20 ARINC 453/708 IN 2A IN 51 RESERVED --
21 ARINC 453/708 TERM 2B -- 52 RESERVED --
22 RESERVED -- 53 SPARE [1] --
23 RESERVED -- 54 SYNCHRO VALID INPUT (ACTIVE-HI) IN
25 RESERVED -- 56 SYNCHRO Z IN
28 ARINC 429 OUT 3A OUT 59 RESERVED --
29 RS-232 IN 5 IN 60 ARINC 453/708 IN 1B IN
30 RS-232 IN 6 IN 61 RESERVED --
31 RESERVED -- 62 ARINC 453/708 IN 2B IN
Notes:
[2] The RADAR ON* discrete output is allowed only on to be input on P1005 Pin 13.

Rev. 11 Page A-7
A.2 GMA 35
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 VIEW LOOKING FROM COCKPIT

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 INTO GMA MOUNTING TRAY
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 MARKER ANTENNA IN HI IN 23 RCVR 5 AUDIO IN HI IN
2 MARKER ANTENNA IN LO IN 24 COM ACTIVE* OUT OUT
3 COM 3 AUDIO IN HI IN 25 TEL 4 AUDIO IN HI IN
4 COM 3 AUDIO LO -- 26 TEL 4 AUDIO IN LO IN
5 COM 3 MIC AUDIO OUT HI OUT 27 TEL 4 MIC OUT HI OUT
6 COM 3 MIC KEY* OUT OUT 28 TEL 4 MIC OUT LO OUT
7 RCVR 4 AUDIO IN HI IN 29 ALERT 3 AUDIO IN HI IN
8 RCVR 4 AUDIO IN LO IN 30 COM 2 MIC KEY* OUT OUT
9 COM 1 AUDIO IN HI IN 31 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN HI IN
10 COM 1 AUDIO LO -- 32 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN LO IN
11 COM 1 MIC AUDIO OUT HI OUT 33 PILOT MIC AUDIO IN HI IN
12 COM 1 MIC KEY* OUT OUT 34 PILOT MIC KEY* IN IN
13 COM 2 AUDIO IN HI IN 35 PILOT MIC AUDIO IN LO IN
14 COM 2 AUDIO LO -- 36 INNER MARKER LAMP OUT OUT
15 COM 2 MIC AUDIO OUT HI OUT 37 OUTER MARKER LAMP OUT OUT
PILOT PUSH-TO-COMMAND KEY*
16 IN 38 MIDDLE MARKER LAMP OUT OUT
IN
17 NAV 1 AUDIO IN HI IN 39 MIDDLE MARKER SENSE OUT OUT
18 NAV 1 AUDIO IN LO IN 40 PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT LEFT OUT
19 NAV 2 AUDIO IN HI IN 41 PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT RIGHT OUT
20 NAV 2 AUDIO IN LO IN 42 PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO OUT
21 RCVR 3 AUDIO IN HI IN 43 ALERT 2,3,4 AUDIO IN LO IN
22 RCVR 3 AUDIO IN LO IN 44 ALERT 4 (TEL RING) AUDIO IN HI IN

Rev. 11 Page A-8
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 VIEW LOOKING FROM COCKPIT

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 INTO GMA MOUNTING TRAY
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO OUT 23 MUSIC 1 IN LEFT IN
2 COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO OUT 24 MUSIC 1 IN RIGHT IN
COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT
3 OUT 25 MUSIC 1 IN LO IN
LEFT
COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT
4 OUT 26 MUSIC 2 IN LEFT IN
RIGHT
5 RESERVED IN 27 MUSIC 2 IN RIGHT IN
6 RESERVED -- 28 MUSIC 2 IN LO IN
7 RESERVED IN 29 FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI IN
COPILOT PUSH-TO-COMMAND
8 AIRCRAFT POWER IN 30 IN
KEY* IN
PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT
9 AIRCRAFT POWER IN 31 OUT
RIGHT
10 AIRCRAFT GROUND -- 32 COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN HI IN
11 AIRCRAFT GROUND -- 33 COPILOT MIC KEY* IN IN
PASSENGER ADDRESS MUTE*
12 OUT 34 COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN LO IN
OUT
13 MARKER HI SENSE* IN IN 35 PASS 1 MIC AUDIO IN HI IN
14 PASS ICS KEY* IN IN 36 PASS 1 MIC AUDIO IN LO IN
15 ALERT 2 AUDIO IN HI IN 37 PASS 2 MIC AUDIO IN HI IN
16 PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LEFT OUT 38 PASS 2 MIC AUDIO IN LO OUT
17 RS-232 IN IN 39 PASS 3 MIC AUDIO IN HI IN
18 RS-232 OUT OUT 40 PASS 3 MIC AUDIO IN LO IN
19 PA MODE SELECTED* OUT OUT 41 PASS 4 MIC AUDIO IN HI IN
20 COM CYCLE* IN IN 42 PASS 4 MIC AUDIO IN LO IN
21 RESERVED** -- 43 SPEAKER AUDIO OUT LO IN
CLEARANCE RECORDER
22 IN 44 SPEAKER AUDIO OUT HI OUT
PLAYBACK* IN
** This is an Active-Low output, always asserted to ground.

Rev. 11 Page A-9
A.3 Flight Stream 210 Connector
11 12 13 14 15
LOOKING AT UNIT
6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 VOLUME LOCK DISCRETE INPUT* IN
2 ARINC 429 IN A IN
3 ARINC 429 IN B IN
4 RS-422 IN A IN
5 POWER INPUT IN
6 RS-232 OUT 3 OUT
7 RS-232 IN 3 IN
8 RS-232 OUT 2 OUT
9 RS-232 IN 2 IN
10 RS-422 IN B IN
11 RS-232 OUT 1 OUT
12 RS-232 IN 1 IN
13 RS-422 OUT A OUT
14 RS-422 OUT B OUT
15 GROUND --

Rev. 11 Page A-10
APPENDIX B INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS
B.1 GTN Xi Interconnects...................................................................................................................... B-3

Figure B-1 GTN Xi System Interface Diagram.............................................................................. B-3
Figure B-2 GTN 650Xi/750Xi Typical Installation Interconnect .................................................. B-4
Figure B-3 GTN 625Xi/725Xi Typical Installation Interconnect .................................................. B-6
Figure B-4 GTN Xi Power Lighting Configuration Interconnect .................................................. B-8
Figure B-5 GTN Xi - PFD/MFD Interconnect ............................................................................. B-11
Figure B-6 GTN Xi - ARINC 429 EFIS Interconnect.................................................................. B-13
Figure B-7 GTN Xi - External NAVSource Selection Annunciator Interconnect ....................... B-16
Figure B-8 GTN Xi - CDI Interconnect ....................................................................................... B-20
Figure B-9 GTN Xi - Bendix King KI 209A Interconnect........................................................... B-23
Figure B-10 GTN Xi - Bendix King KI 208A Interconnect........................................................... B-25
Figure B-11 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - VOR-ILS Indicator Interconnect .............................................. B-27
Figure B-12 GTN Xi - Transponder Interconnect .......................................................................... B-29
Figure B-13 GTN Xi - Traffic Source Interconnect ....................................................................... B-35
Figure B-14 GTN Xi - Audio Panel Interconnect .......................................................................... B-38
Figure B-15 GTN Xi - Weather Terrain Interconnect .................................................................... B-41
Figure B-16 GTN Xi - Weather Radar Interconnect ...................................................................... B-43
Figure B-17 GTN Xi - GDL 69/69A Interconnect ......................................................................... B-46
Figure B-18 GTN Xi - Antenna Interconnect................................................................................. B-47
Figure B-19 GTN Xi - Terrain/TAWS Annunciators Interconnect ............................................... B-52
Figure B-20 GTN Xi - Switch Interconnect (Optional) ................................................................. B-54
Figure B-21 GTN Xi - RS-232 Interconnect .................................................................................. B-57
Figure B-22 GTN Xi - GAD 42 Interconnect................................................................................. B-59
Figure B-23 GTN Xi - Air Data/AHRS Computer Interconnect.................................................... B-60
Figure B-24 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - RMI Interconnect...................................................................... B-61
Figure B-25 GTN Xi - Sandel SN3500/4500 Interconnect ............................................................ B-62
Figure B-26 GTN Xi - Sandel SN3308 Interconnect ..................................................................... B-64
Figure B-27 GTN Xi - SN3308 - Two GTN Xi Units Interconnect............................................... B-66
Figure B-28 GTN Xi - SN3308 - Two GTN Xi Units and Two SN3308s Interconnect................ B-69
Figure B-29 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - Bendix King DME Interconnect............................................... B-72
Figure B-30 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - DME Interconnect .................................................................... B-74
Figure B-31 GTN Xi - Bendix King Autopilot Interconnect ......................................................... B-76
Figure B-32 GTN Xi - Century Autopilot Interconnect ................................................................. B-79
Figure B-33 GTN Xi - Cessna Autopilot Interconnect................................................................... B-81
Figure B-34 GTN Xi - Collins Autopilot Interconnect .................................................................. B-83
Figure B-35 GTN Xi - S-TEC Interconnect ................................................................................... B-85
Figure B-36 GTN 7XX Xi - Heading Synchro Interconnect.......................................................... B-89
Figure B-37 GTN Xi - GTN Xi or GTN 6XX/7XX Crossfill Interconnect ................................... B-91
Figure B-38 GTN Xi - GSR 56 Interconnect ................................................................................. B-92
Figure B-39 GTN Xi - GDU 620 Interconnect............................................................................... B-93
Figure B-40 GTN Xi - GDL 88/88D Interconnect ......................................................................... B-95
Figure B-41 GTN Xi - Sperry Autopilot Interconnect ................................................................... B-97
Figure B-42 GTN Xi - Flight Stream 210 Interconnect ................................................................. B-98
Figure B-43 GTN Xi - GDU 700/1060 Interconnect ..................................................................... B-99
Figure B-44 GTN Xi - G5 Interconnect ....................................................................................... B-100
Figure B-45 GTN Xi - GFC 600 Interconnect ............................................................................. B-102
Figure B-46 GTN Xi - G3X Interconnect .................................................................................... B-104

Rev. 11 Page B-1
Figure B-47 GTN Xi - GI 275 Interconnect ................................................................................. B-108
Figure B-48 GTN Xi - GPS 175/GNC 355/GNX 375 Interconnect............................................. B-109
Figure B-49 GTN Xi - Radio Altimeter Interconnect .................................................................. B-110
B.2 GMA 35 Interconnects................................................................................................................. B-111
Figure B-50 GMA 35/35c - COM/NAV Interconnect ................................................................. B-111
Figure B-51 GMA 35 - Power/RS-232/Marker Beacon Interconnect.......................................... B-113
Figure B-52 GMA 35 - Headset Interconnect .............................................................................. B-115
Figure B-53 GMA 35/35c - Other Audio Sources Interconnect .................................................. B-117
Figure B-54 GMA 35/35c - Discrete Connect (Optional) ............................................................ B-119

Rev. 11 Page B-2
B.1 GTN Xi Interconnects
GTN Xi
CONNECTOR P1001
AIRCRAFT POWER & GROUND POWER & GROUND LAT DEVIATION & FLAGS
AIRCRAFT LIGHTING BUS LIGHTING BUS TO/FROM
VERT DEVIATION & FLAGS
MAIN CDI/HSI
EXTERNAL INSTRUMENTATION TIME MARK OUT (GPS/VOR/ILS)
SUPERFLAGS
RS-232 IN MAIN OBS
STORMSCOPE
RS-232 OUT
ARINC 429 IN
TRAFFIC
FUEL/AIR DATA DISCRETES
OR RS-232 IN
SERIALIZER SWITCHES SWITCHES/
ARINC 429 IN ANNUNCIATORS
ANNUNCIATORS
ARINC 429 OUT
EXTERNAL MAP
ILS/GPS APPROACH RS-232 OUT
DISPLAY
FLIGHT CONTROL LAT DEVIATION & FLAGS
SYSTEM VERT DEVIATION & FLAGS
SUPERFLAGS RS-232 IN
TRANSPONDER
RS-232 IN RS-232 OUT
RS-232 OUT
GNS 400W/500W RS-232 IN RS-232 IN
SERIES CROSSFILL RS-232 OUT RS-232 OUT GSR 56
(INTERFACE
COVERED BY GNS
STC SA01933LA-D) GTN Xi
CONNECTOR P1002
GARMIN
ETHERNET IN DISCRETES
GTN 6XX/7XX ETHERNET OUT
(CROSSFILL)
GARMIN
WEATHER RADAR ETHERNET IN ETHERNET IN OTHER GARMIN
ETHERNET OUT ETHERNET OUT LRUs
(GTN 7XX ONLY)
CONNECTOR P1003
AIRCRAFT POWER & GROUND POWER & GROUND
COM MIC AUDIO MICROPHONE

COM MIC KEY
COM REMOTE TRANSFER COM REMOTE TRANSFER SWITCH
COM MIC AUDIO
COM AUDIO
COM REMOTE TUNE UP COM REMOTE TUNE
COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN SWITCHES
ANALOG AUDIO
AUDIO PANEL
GTN 650Xi/750Xi
CONNECTOR P1004
VLOC AUDIO
LAT DEVIATION & FLAGS

TO/FROM
VERT DEVIATION & FLAGS CDI/HSI
RMI VOR OBI SUPERFLAGS (VOR/ILS ONLY)
VOR OBS
AIRCRAFT POWER & GROUND POWER & GROUND
VLOC COMPOSITE OUT
NAV ILS ENERGIZE
ARINC 429
EFIS/EHSI NAV ARINC 429 IN SERIAL DME CLOCK/DATA KING SERIAL
NAV ARINC 429 OUT DME REQUEST COMMON TUNED DME
PARALLEL TUNED PARALLEL DME TUNING NAV REMOTE TRANSFER NAV REMOTE TRANSFER SWITCH
DME NAV DME COMMON
GPS/SBAS ANTENNA
GTN Xi
CONNECTOR P1006
COM ANTENNA
CONNECTOR P1007
NAV ANTENNA
GTN 650Xi/750Xi
CONNECTOR P1008
Figure B-1 GTN Xi System Interface Diagram

Rev. 11 Page B-3
GTN 650Xi/750Xi TYPICAL INSTALLATION—SEE DETAIL DRAWINGS FOR WIRING
GTN 650Xi/750Xi NAVIGATION
P1001 INDICATOR
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 CDI+ R
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 +TO FLAG
MAIN +FROM OUT 30 +FROM FLAG
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 NAV+ FLAG
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 NAV- FLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 + UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 + DOWN
s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 G/S+ FLAG
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 G/S- FLAG
s
MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 OBS RESOLVER {H/A}
MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 OBS RESOLVER {C}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 OBS RESOLVER {D}
MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 OBS RESOLVER {E}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 OBS RESOLVER {F}
MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 OBS RESOLVER {G}
s FAN
FAN POWER OUT (12 VDC) 59 RED
FAN GROUND 43 BLACK
FAN TACH IN 58 YELLOW
CONFIG MODULE POWER 65 RED 4

CONFIG MODULE GND 64 BLK 1 CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE DATA 62 3 MODULE
YEL
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 63 WHT 2 NAV/GPS
AIRCRAFT POWER 19 AVIONICS BUS GARMIN

AIRCRAFT POWER 20 AIRCRAFT 5A (28 VDC) GTX 33
AIRCRAFT GND 77
GROUND 7.5A (14 VDC) TRANSPONDER
AIRCRAFT GND 78 P3301
RS-232 IN 1 27 23 RS232 OUT 1

RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 RS232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 1 46 51 SIGNAL GROUND
s
P1003 COMM
AIRCRAFT POWER 30 AVIONICS BUS
AIRCRAFT POWER 43 5A (28 VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 44 10A (14 VDC) GARMIN
GMA 35 4
AIRCRAFT GND 37 AIRCRAFT AUDIO PANEL
AIRCRAFT GND 38 GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 40 P3501 (GTN 7XX Xi ONLY)
500 Ω COM AUDIO HI 7 9 COM 1 AUDIO IN HI
500 Ω COM AUDIO LO 18 10 COM 1 AUDIO LO
MIC AUDIO IN LO 20
s
COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI 5 11 COM 1 MIC AUDIO OUT HI
COM MIC 1 KEY* 11 22 AWG - 12 COM 1 MIC KEY* OUT
s
P1001
AUDIO OUT LO 23 43 ALERT 2 AUDIO IN LO 5
5 AUDIO OUT HI 4
s P3502
RS-232 OUT 2 7 17 RS-232 IN
RS-232 IN 2 26 18 RS-232 OUT
RS-232 GND 2 45 15 ALERT 2 AUDIO IN HI 5
s
P1004 s P3501
500 Ω VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI 16 17 NAV 1 AUDIO IN HI
500 Ω VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO 17 18 NAV 1 AUDIO IN LO
s
AIRCRAFT GND 61 AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT POWER 51 AIRCRAFT
10 GROUND
AIRCRAFT POWER 52 GPS/SBAS ANTENNA
P1006
GPS/SBAS ANTENNA COM ANTENNA
P1007
COM ANTENNA
NAV ANTENNA
P1008
NAV ANTENNA
AIRCRAFT
GROUND
Figure B-2 GTN 650Xi/750Xi Typical Installation Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-4
NOTES
1 REFER TO THE DETAIL DRAWINGS FOR WIRE GAUGE INFO.
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: S SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
AT GTN Xi, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD TERMINATION
LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE
3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR
THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0 INCHES.
REFER TO SECTION 3.6.12.3.
THE GMA 35 CAN ONLY BE INTERFACED AND CONTROLLED WITH THE GTN 7XX Xi. FOR GTN 6XX Xi
4 INSTALLATIONS, USE AN ALTERNATE AUDIO PANEL.
IN INSTALLATIONS WITH A G3X SYSTEM, CAP AND STOW OR REMOVE AUDIO ALERT WIRING FROM
5 AIRCRAFT.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-5
GTN 625Xi/725Xi TYPICAL INSTALLATION—SEE DETAIL DRAWINGS FOR WIRING
GTN 625Xi/725Xi P1001 NAVIGATION
INDICATOR
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 CDI+ R
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 +TO FLAG
MAIN +FROM OUT 30 +FROM FLAG
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 NAV+ FLAG
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 NAV- FLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 + UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 + DOWN
s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 G/S+ FLAG
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 G/S- FLAG
s
MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 OBS RESOLVER {H/A}
MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 OBS RESOLVER {C}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 OBS RESOLVER {D}
MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 OBS RESOLVER {E}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 OBS RESOLVER {F}
MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 OBS RESOLVER {G}
s
GPS
AIRCRAFT POWER 20 5A
AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 78

GARMIN
CONFIG MODULE GND 64 BLK 1 CONFIG GTX 33
CONFIG MODULE DATA 62 YEL 3 MODULE TRANSPONDER
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 63 WHT 2 P3301
RS-232 IN 1 27 23 RS-232 OUT 1

RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 1 46 51 GROUND
s
FAN
FAN POWER OUT (12 VDC) 59 RED GARMIN
FAN GROUND 43 BLACK GMA 340
FAN TACH IN 58 YELLOW AUDIO PANEL
J1
AUDIO OUT HI 4 31 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN HI 4
4 32 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN LO
AUDIO OUT LO 23
GPS/SBAS ANTENNA
P1006
GPS/SBAS ANTENNA
AIRCRAFT
3 GROUND

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-6
NOTES
1 REFER TO THE DETAIL DRAWINGS FOR WIRE GAUGE INFO.
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: S SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
4 AIRCRAFT.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-7
GTN Xi
P1001 8
NAV/GPS
22 AWG (5A C/B) AVIONICS BUS 11
AIRCRAFT POWER 19 20 AWG (7.5A C/B)
14 7.5A (14 VDC)
3 22 AWG (5A C/B, 28VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 77 AIRCRAFT
20 AWG (7.5A C/B, 14 VDC)
5
CONFIG MODULE GND 64 BLK 1 CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE DATA 62 YEL 3 MODULE
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 63 WHT 2
4
LIGHTING BUS 1 HI 18 TO DISPLAY

LIGHTING BUS 1 LO 17 DIMMER
LIGHTING BUS 2 HI 61 TO KEYPAD 6
10
9 FAN
FAN POWER OUT (12 VDC) 59 RED
FAN GROUND 43 BLACK
12
P1004
AIRCRAFT POWER 51
AIRCRAFT POWER 52
3 AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 61 20 AWG GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 62
7
P1003 13
COMM 11
20 AWG (5A C/B, 28VDC) AVIONICS BUS
AIRCRAFT POWER 30
18 AWG (10A C/B, 14 VDC) 5A (28 VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 43
3
20 AWG (5A C/B, 28VDC) AIRCRAFT
18 AWG (10A C/B, 14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 38
AIRCRAFT GND 40
AIRCRAFT
2 GROUND
Figure B-4 GTN Xi Power Lighting Configuration Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-8
NON-METAL AIRCRAFT
(VFR-ONLY INSTALLATIONS EXCLUDED)
GTN Xi
8
P1001 NAV/GPS
6" (MAX)
11
AIRCRAFT POWER 19 20 AWG AVIONICS BUS
F1 5A (28 VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 20
STRIPE ON TVS 7.5A (14 VDC) 15
TVS1 INDICATES TVS
3 s CATHODE SIDE 14 ASSY
15 (TVS2)
12" F2
AIRCRAFT GND 77 20 AWG (MAX)
AIRCRAFT GND 78 AIRCRAFT 4-PIN CONNECTOR
GROUND
TVS (qty 4)
5
CONFIG MODULE GND 64 STRIPE ON TVS
BLK 1 CONFIG
MUST BE TOWARD
CONFIG MODULE DATA 62 YEL 3 MODULE
CONNECTOR
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 63 WHT 2
4
LIGHTING BUS 1 HI 18 TO DISPLAY

LIGHTING BUS 2 HI 61 TO KEYPAD 6
9 FAN
FAN POWER OUT 59 RED
10
FAN GROUND 43 BLACK
P1004
12
AIRCRAFT POWER 51
AIRCRAFT POWER 52
AIRCRAFT GND 61 20 AWG

AIRCRAFT
7
P1003 13
COMM
11
20 AWG (5A C/B, 28VDC)
18 AWG (10A C/B, 14 VDC) 5A (28 VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 43
3 20 AWG (5A C/B, 28VDC)

AIRCRAFT GND 37
18 AWG (10A C/B, 14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 38
AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT
2 GROUND

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-9
NOTES
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
GROUND DESIGNATIONS: S SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

2
VERIFY THE AIRCRAFT GROUND MEETS BONDING REQUIREMENTS IN SECTION 3.6.6.
ALL POWER LEADS AND GROUND LEADS ARE REQUIRED. 22 AWG WIRE CAN BE USED FOR THE SPLICE.
3 USE HEAT-SHRINK TUBING TO PROVIDE SUFFICIENT INSULATION FROM SURROUNDING CONTACTS.
4 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED IN THE BACKSHELL OF THE P1001 CONNECTOR.
CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH CONFIGURATION
5 MODULE MUST BE USED FOR CONNECTING CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO P1001.
OPTIONAL CONNECTION. LIGHTING CAN BE CONTROLLED BY THE INTEGRATED PHOTOCELL, A SINGLE

6 LIGHTING BUS, OR DUAL LIGHTING BUSES. IF THE AIRCRAFT HAS A SINGLE LIGHTING BUS, ONLY
LIGHTING BUS 1 NEEDS TO BE WIRED. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.6 FOR CONFIGURATION DETAILS.
CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS “COM”, “COM1”, OR “COM2” DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE
7 CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST BE READILY ACCESSIBLE TO THE PILOT. ALTERNATE
SPELLINGS OF “COM” ARE ACCEPTABLE (E.G., “COMM”).
CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS: “GPS”, “GPS1”, OR “GPS 2” FOR THE GTN 625Xi/635Xi/725Xi,
8 AND “NAV/GPS”, “NAV/GPS1”, OR “NAV/GPS2” FOR THE GTN 650Xi/750Xi, DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE
CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST BE READILY ACCESSIBLE TO THE PILOT.
IF MODIFICATION OF THE HARNESS FROM THE FAN TO THE P1001 CONNECTOR IS NECESSARY, THE
9 MODIFIED LENGTH MUST NOT BE LONGER THAN 8 INCHES. THE FAN HARNESS (P/N 320-00600-00) IS
SUPPLIED AS PART OF THE GTN 6XX Xi OR 7XX Xi CONNECTOR KIT.
10 FAN SUPPLIED AS PART OF BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY.
REFER TO SECTION 3.6.8 FOR SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS ON POWER DISTRIBUTION TO THE GTN Xi FOR
11 SINGLE AND DUAL INSTALLATIONS.
12 GTN 650Xi AND GTN 750Xi ONLY.
13 GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi ONLY.
14 THE GTN 625Xi AND GTN 725Xi ONLY REQUIRE A 5 AMP C/B.
TVS PROTECTION IS ONLY REQUIRED ON ONE GTN Xi IN A DUAL NAV/COM, NON-METAL AIRCRAFT
15 INSTALLATION. FOR VFR-ONLY INSTALLATIONS, WIRE AS SHOWN ON SHEET 1. REFER TO SECTION 3.5.3
FOR PART NUMBERS AND SECTION 4.6.3 FOR ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-10
9 10 11
ARINC 429 PFD/MFD
GTN Xi #1 AVIDYNE
EX500 EX5000 EXP5000
MFD MFD PFD
P1001 12 8 P1 J732
13
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 - - 22 LNAV TRANSMITTER A
4
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 - - 21 LNAV TRANSMITTER B
s s s
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 5 5 41 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 25 25 40 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER B
s
48 48 43 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER A
6 P1004 68 68 42 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER B
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 - - 4 NAV 1 RECEIVER A

VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23 - - 3 NAV 1 RECEIVER B
s
- - 7 NAV 2 RECEIVER A
- - 6 NAV 2 RECEIVER B
GTN Xi #2
P1001
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48
4
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29
s
6 P1004
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23 14
s
GARMIN
MX20/
GMX 200
GTN Xi
P1001 37-PIN
RS-232 OUT 1 8 4
RS-232 GND 1 46 23
s
Figure B-5 GTN Xi - PFD/MFD Interconnect

Page 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-11
NOTES
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: S
SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
IF THE ARINC 429 IN 1 PORT (P1001 PINS -48 AND -67) IS ALREADY IN USE FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY
4 AVAILABLE ARINC 429 IN PORT MAY BE CONNECTED INSTEAD.
REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT

5 INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
6 THESE OUTPUTS ARE USED ON THE GTN 650Xi/750Xi ONLY.
7 REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3 FOR CONFIGURATION INFORMATION.
8 TERMINATE SHIELDS AT PFD/MFD IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION.
DISPLAY P/N 700-00007-( ) WITH SOFTWARE P/N 530-00193-( ) OR LATER IS REQUIRED FOR PROPER
9 OPERATION WITH THE GTN Xi UNIT. REFER TO APPENDIX SECTION C.1.14 FOR CONFIGURATION
SETTINGS.
DISPLAY P/N 700-00004-( ) OR P/N 700-00030-( ) WITH SOFTWARE P/N 530-00195-( ) OR LATER IS REQUIRED
10 FOR PROPER OPERATION WITH THE GTN Xi UNIT. REFER TO APPENDIX SECTION C.1.14 FOR
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
DISPLAY P/N 700-00006-( ) WITH SOFTWARE P/N 530-00194-( ) OR LATER IS REQUIRED FOR PROPER
11 OPERATION WITH THE GTN Xi UNIT. REFER TO APPENDIX SECTION C.1.14 FOR CONFIGURATION
SETTINGS.
ALL CONNECTIONS TO THE AVIDYNE EXP 5000 PFD MUST BE OVERBRAIDED PER THE AVIDYNE EXP
12 5000 INSTALLATION MANUAL. USE OVERBRAID P/N AND METHOD OUTLINED IN THE AVIDYNE EXP 5000
INSTALLATION MANUAL. CONNECTIONS TO THE EX 500/5000 MFD DO NOT NEED TO BE OVERBRAIDED.
THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE GTN Xi CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:
GTN
P100X
13
s
s
MAPMX IS THE PREFERRED COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL FOR THE MX20/GMX 200. OTHER INPUT PORTS
14 ON THE MX20/GMX 200 MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF THE PORT SHOWN. REFER TO THE APPLICABLE
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
Figure B-5 GTN Xi - PFD/MFD Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-12
9
7 ARINC 429 EFIS
GTN Xi # 1 6
Bendix/King DISPLAY # 1
EFS 40/50
SG 465
P1001
P4652A P4652B
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 47 LNAV TRANSMITTER A
4
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 20 LNAV TRANSMITTER B
s
10
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 67 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 53 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER B
s
64 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER A
P1004 63 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER B
10
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 16 NAV 1 RECEIVER A
8
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23 29 NAV 1 RECEIVER B
s
38 NAV 2 RECEIVER A
25 NAV 2 RECEIVER B
7 ARINC 429 EFIS

GTN Xi # 2 6
EFS 40/50
SG 465
P1001
P4652A P4652B
4
s
53 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER B

s
10
16 NAV 1 RECEIVER A
P1004 29 NAV 1 RECEIVER B

8
s
10
Figure B-6 GTN Xi - ARINC 429 EFIS Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-13
9
7 ARINC 429 EFIS
GTN Xi # 1 6
EFS 40/50
SG 465
P1001
P4652A P4652B
10
4
s

s
P1004 63 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER B

8
s
38 NAV 2 RECEIVER A
25 NAV 2 RECEIVER B
GTN Xi # 2 6
P1001
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48
4
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10

ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29
s
P1004

8
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23
s

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-14
NOTES
IF THE ARINC 429 IN 1 PORT (P1001 PINS -48 AND -67) IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY
4 AVAILABLE ARINC 429 IN PORT MAY BE CONNECTED INSTEAD.

6 REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.1 FOR GTN Xi CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
7 REFER TO APPENDIX SECTION C.1.5 FOR CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
8 THESE OUTPUTS ARE USED ON THE GTN 650Xi/750Xi ONLY.
9 WIRE AS SHOWN FOR GTN Xi #1 IN A SINGLE GTN Xi INSTALLATION.
THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE REMOTE END CONNECTOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
MANUFACTURER’S EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MANUAL. SPLICE AS SHOWN:
LRU PXX
10

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-15
EXTERNAL NAVIGATION SOURCE 5
SELECTION ANNUNCIATORS
STACO INDICATOR CONNECTION 6

(WHITE) VLOC
GTN Xi (GREEN) GPS

P1001 P1 VLOC (W) P1 4
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 2 3
LAMP VOLTAGE FROM
N/C 9 6 DIMMER CIRCUIT 13
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 11 12
GPS (G)
NAV/GPS INDICATOR
VIVISUN INDICATOR CONNECTION 7

(WHITE) VLOC
GTN Xi (GREEN) GPS

P1001 P1 VLOC (W) P1 4
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 C B
LAMP VOLTAGE FROM
G DIMMER CIRCUIT 13
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 D A
GPS (G)
NAV/GPS INDICATOR
VIVISUN INDICATOR/SWITCH CONNECTION 8

(WHITE) VLOC
GTN Xi (GREEN) GPS

P1001 P1 VLOC (W) P1 4
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 C B
LAMP VOLTAGE FROM
G DIMMER CIRCUIT 13
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 D A
GPS (G)
CDI SOURCE SELECT* 39 1 3
NAV/GPS INDICATOR
SWITCH
Figure B-7 GTN Xi - External NAVSource Selection Annunciator Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. 11 Page B-16
MID-CONTINENT PREFERRED SOURCE
SELECTION ANNUNCIATOR (Pre-existing installations only)
GTN Xi MD41-151X
14 15 17 157X GPS ACU
P1001
J1
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 2 VLOC ANNC
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 1 GPS ANNC
WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATE* 33 8 WPT ANNC
TERMINAL ANNUNCIATE* 34 3 TERM ANNC
APPROACH ANNUNCIATE* 55 9 APR ANNC
MESSAGE ANNUNCIATE* 54 10 MSG ANNC
OBS ANNUNCIATE* 14 11 OBS INPUT
LOI ANNUNCIATE* 53 20 LOI ANNC
OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT* 16 12 OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT
CDI SOURCE SELECT* 39 4 CDI SOURCE SELECT
P1002
16 SUSPEND ANNUNCIATE* 3 24 SUSP ANNC
MID-CONTINENT ACU CONNECTIONS FOR

PRE-EXISTING ACUs ONLY
9 11 12 MD41-14xx
GPS ACU
GTN Xi MID-CONTINENT MD41-XXXX
-1484W -1404A/1408A -1464A/1474A
14 15 17 1470
-1488W -1414A/1418A -1468A/1478A
P1001
J1 J1 J1 J1
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 7 - 2 2 VLOC ANNC
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 8 - 1 1 GPS ANNC
WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATE* 33 2 8 8 8 WPT ANNC
TERMINAL ANNUNCIATE* 34 4 3 3 3 TERM ANNC
APPROACH ANNUNCIATE* 55 6 9 9 9 APR ANNC
MESSAGE ANNUNCIATE* 54 3 10 10 10 MSG ANNC
OBS ANNUNCIATE* 14 - 24 24 24 OBS ANNC
LOI ANNUNCIATE* 53 1 20 20 20 INTG ANNC
OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT* 16 - 12 12 12 OBS MODE SELECT
CDI SOURCE SELECT* 39 - - 4 - CDI SOURCE SELECT
10
P1002
16 SUSPEND ANNUNCIATE* 3

Sheet 2 of 4

Rev. 11 Page B-17
NOTES
IF A CDI/HSI SOURCE SELECTION ANNUNCIATOR IS REQUIRED, INDICATORS ON THIS PAGE ARE

3 SUITABLE TO MEET THE ANNUNCIATION REQUIREMENT.
4 LEGENDS ARE HIDDEN (BLACK) WHEN NOT ILLUMINATED.
5 THE PREFERRED ANNUNCIATION IS VLOC/GPS ALTHOUGH NAV/GPS IS ACCEPTABLE.
STACO SWITCH INDICATOR P/N 992561-1241762200 (14V SYSTEMS) AND P/N 992561-1241862200 (28V
6 SYSTEMS) SHOWN.
VIVISUN INDICATOR P/N 95-40-17-B6-E1YGN (28V SYSTEMS) SHOWN. INDICATOR MAY BE CONVERTED TO
7 14V OPERATION BY REPLACING 28V LAMPS WITH 14V LAMPS P/N 14-113.
VIVISUN INDICATOR WITH MOMENTARY SWITCH P/N 95-45-11-B6-E1EMK (28V SYSTEMS) SHOWN.
8 INDICATOR MAY BE CONVERTED TO 14V OPERATION BY REPLACING 28V LAMPS WITH 14V LAMPS
P/N 14-113.
THESE UNITS ALSO PROVIDE NAVIGATION SOURCE SELECTION ANNUNCIATION. MID-CONTINENT

9 ANNUNCIATION CONTROL UNITS FOR BOTH 14V AND 28V SYSTEMS SHOWN. REFER TO MID-CONTINENT
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
CDI SOURCE SELECTION AND ANNUNCIATION IS DONE WITH EXTERNAL RELAYS. REFER TO
10 MID-CONTINENT INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION INFORMATION.
THE MD41-14XX ANNUNCIATORS SHOWN DO NOT PROVIDE A “SUSP” ANNUNCIATION AND ARE ONLY TO
BE USED IF THEY ARE PRE-EXISTING IN THE AIRCRAFT. IF PERFORMING A NEW INSTALLATION AND
11 SOURCE SELECTION ANNUNCIATIONS ARE REQUIRED, USE THE MD41-151X SHOWN ON THIS PAGE.
REFER TO SECTION 3.6.10 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
SINCE MD41-14XX ANNUNCIATORS DO NOT PROVIDE A “SUSP” ANNUNCIATION, THEY MUST BE
PLACARDED DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE ACU: “GREEN OBS INDICATES OBS OR SUSP MODE--GTN Xi
12 ANNUNCIATOR BAR INDICATES WHICH IS ACTIVE. PUSH OBS KEY TO CHANGE OBS OR SUSP MODE". AS
AN ALTERNATIVE, THE MD41-151X MAY BE INSTALLED AS SHOWN ON THIS PAGE. REFER TO
SECTION 3.6.10 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
13 LAMPS SHOULD RECEIVE POWER FROM THE SAME POWER BUS TO WHICH THE GTN Xi IS CONNECTED.
FOR GTN 625Xi/635Xi/725Xi INSTALLATIONS, IF THE ACU CONTAINS A CDI SOURCE SELECT SWITCH,
THEN THE CDI SOURCE SELECT SWITCH (LABELED “CDI" OR “NAV GPS") WILL NOT BE USED AND MUST
14 BE PLACARDED DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE ACU: “CDI SWITCH UNUSED" OR “NAV GPS SWITCH
UNUSED" (DEPENDING ON THE LABEL OF THE INSTALLED SWITCH).

Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. 11 Page B-18
NOTES CONTINUED
FOR GTN 625Xi/635Xi/725Xi INSTALLATIONS, THE CONNECTIONS FROM THE ACU TO P1001-52, VLOC
15 ANNUNCIATE* AND P1001-39, CDI SOURCE SELECT*, ARE NOT NECESSARY
DEFAULT DISCRETE FUNCTION FOR THIS PIN IS SHOWN. THIS PIN FUNCTION IS CONFIGURABLE AS
16 DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.
DEFAULT DISCRETE FUNCTION FOR PINS P1001-33, -34, -55, -54, -14, -53, -16, AND -39 IS SHOWN. THESE
17 PIN FUNCTIONS ARE CONFIGURABLE AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.

Sheet 4 of 4

Rev. 11 Page B-19
NAVIGATION
INDICATOR
MID-CONTINENT GARMIN HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING)
KPI 552
KPI 552B
KPI 553 7
MD200- MD200- MD222- MD222- GI 102 GI 106
302/303 GI 106B KI 206 KI 525A KPI 553A
GTN Xi 306/307 402 406 GI 102A
KPI 553B
P1001 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P2061 P1 P2 P101
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 11 11 22 22 11 11 n V - i CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 12 12 23 23 12 12 j b - h CDI+ R
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 9 9 16 16 9 9 e Z - j +TO FLAG

MAIN +FROM OUT 30 10 10 17 17 10 10 S T - k +FROM FLAG
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 7 7 20 20 7 7 N K - f NAV+ FLAG

MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 8 8 21 21 8 8 F F - g NAV- FLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 13 - - 25 - 13 k - E JJ + UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 14 - - 24 - 14 m - B HH + DOWN
s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 15 - - 18 - 15 H - J FF G/S+ FLAG

MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 16 - - 19 - 16 J W - GG G/S- FLAG
s
MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 c - X W OBS RESOLVER {H/A}

MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Z - a N,V OBS RESOLVER {C}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 3 3 3 3 3 3 L - V Z OBS RESOLVER {D}

MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 5 5 5 5 5 5 P - Y a OBS RESOLVER {E}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 4 4 6 6 4 4 T - b Y OBS RESOLVER {F}
MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 6 6 4 4 6 6 W - e X OBS RESOLVER {G}
s
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 22 AWG 17 17 15 15 - 17 5 - - - -
GPS ANNC
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 22 AWG 24 24 8 8 - 18 5 - - - - NAV ANNC
Figure B-8 GTN Xi - CDI Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-20
NAVIGATION
INDICATOR
S-TEC SPERRY ROCKWELL COLLINS CENTURY
GTN Xi NSD 1000

ST 180 RD 444 RD 550A RD 650 331A-6P 331A-9G PN-101 IND 351D
NSD 360A
P1001 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P1 P2 P1 P1 CD132
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 27 - F - F - 4 29 - 4 j 11 17 CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 43 - E - E - 3 28 - 3 i 12 18 CDI+ R
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 26 - A - A - 1 26 - 1 n 9 33 +TO FLAG

MAIN +FROM OUT 30 42 - B - B - 2 27 - 2 p 10 34 +FROM FLAG
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 37 - - - - - - 31 - - k 7 31 NAV+ FLAG
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 38 - - - - - - 32 - - m 8 32 NAV- FLAG
s
MAIN LAT SUPERFLAG OUT 13 - - P - P 39 - - - 37 - - - NAV SUPERFLAG
- - S - S - 36 - - 38 - - - NAV SUPERFLAG LO
MAIN VERTICAL + UP OUT 12 44 - C - C - 5 33 - 5 r 13 27 + UP
MAIN VERT + DOWN OUT 31 28 - D - D - 6 34 - 6 q 14 28 + DOWN
s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 36 - - - - - - 35 - - s 15 30 GS+ FLAG

MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 35 - - - - - - 36 - - t 16 29 GS- FLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT 32 22 AWG - - U - U 38 - - - 7 - - - GS SUPERFLAG

- - W - W - 8 - - - - - - GS SUPERFLAG LO
MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 22 DD - DD - 6 - 1 1 - a 1 15 OBS RESOLVER {H/A}

MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 24 FF - FF - 8 - 3 3 - c 2 16 OBS RESOLVER {C}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 25 z - z - 9 - 4 4 - d 3 24 OBS RESOLVER {D}

MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 39 AA - AA - 10 - 5 5 - e 5 23 OBS RESOLVER {E}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 40 BB - BB - 11 - 6 6 - f 4 26 OBS RESOLVER {F}

MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 41 CC - CC - 12 - 7 7 - g 6 25 OBS RESOLVER {G}
s
4 ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 22 AWG - a - - - - 47 - - - - - - ILS ENERGIZE

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-21
NOTES
THE ILS/GPS APPROACH DISCRETE IS REQUIRED BY SOME CDIS/HSIS THAT ARE USED WITH THE M4C/D
4 AUTOPILOTS. IF REQUIRED, VERIFY THE SIGNAL SUPPLIED TO THE INDICATOR IS THE CORRECT
POLARITY (ACTIVE-HIGH OR ACTIVE-LOW).
5 THESE INPUTS ARE NOT USED ON THE GI 106.
6 NOT USED.
THE OBS INTERFACE TO THE GTN Xi WORKS ONLY FOR KPI 552/553/553A UNITS THAT HAVE A COURSE
7 KNOB.
IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE EXTERNAL CDIs IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE G500/G600 OR G500/G600
TXi SYSTEM. IF IT IS DESIRED TO UTILIZE ONE OR MORE EXTERNAL CDIs, THE CDI(s) CAN ONLY BE USED
8 TO DISPLAY VOR/ILS INFORMATION. REFER TO G500/G600 AML STC INSTALLATION MANUAL
(P/N 190-00601-06) OR G500/G600 TXi PART 23 AML STC INSTALLATION MANUAL (P/N 190-01717-B3) FOR
ADDITIONAL DETAILS REGARDING EXTERNAL CDI INTERFACES WHEN THIS SYSTEM IS INSTALLED.
THIS STC DOES NOT APPROVE THE USE OF EXTERNAL CDIs IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE G5 HSI EFI
9 INTERFACED TO THE SAME GTN Xi. REFER TO G5 STC INSTALLATION MANUAL (P/N 190-01112-10) FOR
DETAILS.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-22
NAVIGATION INDICATOR
BENDIX/
KING
KI 209A
GTN Xi P209A1
P1001
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 20 LNAV LATERAL DEV +LEFT IN
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 21 LNAV LATERAL DEV +RIGHT IN
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 43 LNAV +TO IN

MAIN +FROM OUT 30 42 LNAV +FROM IN
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 48 LNAV LATERAL +FLAG IN

MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 3 LNAV LATERAL -FLAG IN
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 27 LNAV VERTICAL +UP IN
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 26 LNAV VERTICAL +DOWN IN
s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 23 LNAV VERTICAL +FLAG IN

MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 22 LNAV VERTICAL -FLAG IN
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 9 LNAV FCS LOC ENGAGE IN

MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 50 OBS RETURN
MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 2 LNAV OBS EXCITATION IN
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 15 LNAV OBS SIN OUT

s
MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 N/C
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 14 LNAV OBS COS OUT
s
MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 N/C VOR/ILS
N/C 6
GPS
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 22 AWG 5 RELAY ENGAGE
P1004
VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT 8 6 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE
s
ILS ENERGIZE 29 10 NAV LOC ENGAGE IN
GLIDESLOPE +UP 34 29 NAV VERTICAL +UP IN
GLIDESLOPE +DOWN 55 28 NAV VERTICAL +DOWN IN
s
GLIDESLOPE +FLAG 32 25 NAV VERTICAL +FLAG IN
GLIDESLOPE -FLAG 53 24 NAV VERTICAL -FLAG IN
s
7
Figure B-9 GTN Xi - Bendix King KI 209A Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-23
NOTES

PROPER CONNECTION OF THE RELAY ENGAGE INPUT OF THE KI 209A IS DEPENDENT ON THE POWER
5 SUPPLY VOLTAGE. REFER TO KI 209A DOCUMENTATION FOR PROPER CONNECTION.
IF THE GTN 625Xi/635Xi/725Xi IS INSTALLED, AND ANOTHER VOR/ILS RECEIVER IS AVAILABLE TO DRIVE
THE NAVIGATION INDICATOR, AN EXTERNAL SOURCE SELECTION SWITCH MUST BE USED IN LIEU OF
6 THE GPS ANNUNCIATE OUTPUT. AN ACCEPTABLE SWITCH IS CARLING SWITCH (P/N 112-A-63). LABEL AS
SHOWN. REFER TO SECTION 3.6.9 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
7 THESE CONNECTIONS ARE USED ON THE GTN 650Xi/750Xi ONLY.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-24
NAVIGATION INDICATOR
BENDIX/KING
KI 208A
GTN Xi
P208A1
P1001
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 20 LNAV LATERAL DEV +LEFT IN
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 21 LNAV LATERAL DEV +RIGHT IN
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 43 LNAV +TO IN

MAIN +FROM OUT 30 42 LNAV +FROM IN
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 48 LNAV LATERAL +FLAG IN

MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 3 LNAV LATERAL -FLAG IN
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 22 AWG 9 LNAV FCS LOC ENGAGE IN

MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 50 OBS RETURN
MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 2 LNAV OBS EXCITATION IN
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 15 LNAV OBS SIN OUT

s
MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 N/C
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 14 LNAV OBS COS OUT
s
MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 N/C
VOR/ILS
N/C 6
GPS
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 22 AWG 5 RELAY ENGAGE
P1004
VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT 8 6 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE
s
ILS ENERGIZE 29 22 AWG 10 NAV LOC ENGAGE IN

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-25
NOTES

PROPER CONNECTION OF THE RELAY ENGAGE INPUT OF THE KI 208A IS DEPENDENT ON ITS POWER
5 SUPPLY VOLTAGE. REFER TO KI 208A DOCUMENTATION FOR PROPER CONNECTION.
IF THE GTN 625Xi/635Xi/725Xi IS INSTALLED, AND ANOTHER VOR/ILS RECEIVER IS AVAILABLE TO DRIVE
THE NAVIGATION INDICATOR, AN EXTERNAL SOURCE SELECTION SWITCH MUST BE USED IN LIEU OF
6 THE GPS ANNUNCIATE OUTPUT. AN ACCEPTABLE SWITCH IS CARLING SWITCH (P/N 112-A-63). LABEL AS
SHOWN. REFER TO SECTION 3.6.9 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
7 THESE CONNECTIONS ARE USED ON THE GTN 650Xi/750Xi ONLY.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-26
GTN 650Xi/750Xi NAVIGATION
GARMIN BENDIX/KING INDICATOR
GI 102/A GI 106/A KI 202 KI 203 KI 204 KI 206 KI 208 KI 209 KI 208A KI 209A
P1004 P1 P1 P2021 P2031 P2041 P2061 P2081 P2091 P208A1 P209A1
VOR/LOC +LEFT 5 11 11 n - - n - - - - +LEFT

VOR/LOC +RIGHT 6 12 12 j - - j - - - - +RIGHT
s
VOR/LOC +TO 1 9 9 e - - e - - - - +TO
VOR/LOC +FROM 2 10 10 S - - S - - - - +FROM
s
VOR/LOC +FLAG 3 7 7 N - - N - - - - NAV +FLAG
VOR/LOC -FLAG 4 8 8 F - - F - - - - NAV -FLAG
s
VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT 8 - - - Y Y - 2 2 6 6 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE
s
ILS ENERGIZE 29 22 AWG - - - K K - 4 4 10 10 ILS ENERGIZE
GLIDESLOPE +UP 34 - 13 - - k k - 3 - 29 +UP

GLIDESLOPE +DOWN 55 - 14 - - m m - 6 - 28 +DOWN
s
GLIDESLOPE +FLAG 32 - 15 - - H H - 9 - 25 GLIDESLOPE +FLAG

GLIDESLOPE -FLAG - 16 - - J J - 12 - 24 GLIDESLOPE -FLAG
s
VOR OBS ROTOR H (GND) 10 1 1 c - - c - - - - OBS A/H

VOR OBS ROTOR C 9 2 2 Z - - Z - - - - OBS C
s
VOR OBS STATOR D 13 3 3 L - - L - - - - OBS D (COS HI)

VOR OBS STATOR E (GND) 11 5 5 P - - P - - - - OBS E (COS LO)
s
VOR OBS STATOR F 12 4 4 T - - T - - - - OBS F (SIN HI)

VOR OBS STATOR G (GND) 14 6 6 W - - W - - - - OBS G (SIN LO)
s
Figure B-11 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - VOR-ILS Indicator Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-27
NOTES

THIS INTERCONNECT APPLIES ONLY WHEN IT IS DESIRED FOR A SEPARATE INDICATOR TO DISPLAY
5 GTN 650Xi/750Xi VOR/ILS INFORMATION REGARDLESS OF THE GTN Xi’S CDI SELECTION (GPS OR VLOC).
Figure B-11 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - VOR-ILS Indicator Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-28
SINGLE GTN Xi/SINGLE GTX WITH OR WITHOUT TIS
GARMIN GTX
GTX 32 GTX 33 TRANSPONDER
GTN Xi #1 GTX 327
GTX 328
GTX 330
GTX 335
6
P1001 P3271 P3281 P3301 P3251
4 RS-232 IN 1 27 20 23 23 9 RS232 TxD1
RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 22 22 31 RS232 RxD1
RS-232 GND 1 46 25 51 51 52 SIGNAL GROUND
s
SINGLE GTN Xi/DUAL GTXs WITH OR WITHOUT TIS

GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTN Xi #1 GTX 32
GTX 328
GTX 33
GTX 335 #1
GTX 327 GTX 330
P1001 6 P3271 P3281 P3301 P3251
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 23 23 9 RS232 TxD1
RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 22 22 31 RS232 RxD1
4
s
GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTX 32
GTX 328
GTX 33
GTX 335 #2
GTX 327 GTX 330
6 P3271 P3281 P3301 P3251
RS-232 IN 2 26 20 23 23 9 RS232 TxD1
RS-232 OUT 2 7 19 22 22 31 RS232 RxD1
4
s
Figure B-12 GTN Xi - Transponder Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 6

Rev. 11 Page B-29
DUAL GTN Xi/SINGLE GTX WITH OR WITHOUT TIS
GARMIN GTX
GTN Xi #1 GTX 32 GTX 33 TRANSPONDER
GTX 327 GTX 328 GTX 330 GTX 335
P1001 P3271 P3281 P3301 P3251

6
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 23 23 9 RS232 TxD1
7
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 22 22 31 RS232 RxD1

s 5
GTN Xi #2
P1001 6
RS-232 IN 1 27 24 25 25 8 RS232 TxD2
7
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 2 24 24 30 RS232 RxD2

s 5
DUAL GTN Xi/DUAL GTX WITHOUT TIS

GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTN Xi #1 GTX 32 GTX 33 #1
GTX 327 GTX 328 GTX 330 GTX 335
P3271 P3281 P3301 P3251
P1001 6 20 23 23 9 RS232 TxD1
RS-232 IN 1 27
19 22 22 31 RS232 RxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8
25 51 51 52 SIGNAL GROUND
RS-232 GND 1 46
s
GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTN Xi #2 GTX 32 GTX 33
#2
GTX 327 GTX 328 GTX 330 GTX 335
P1001 P3271 P3281 P3301 P3251

6
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 23 23 9 RS232 TxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 22 22 31 RS232 RxD1

s

Sheet 2 of 6

Rev. 11 Page B-30
DUAL GTN Xi/DUAL GTXs WITH TIS
GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTN Xi #1 GTX 33
GTX 335 #1
GTX 330
P1001 P3301 P3251
6
RS-232 IN 1 27 23 9 RS232 TxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 31 RS232 RxD1
RS-232 GND 1 46 51 52 SIGNAL GROUND

s 6
RS-232 IN 2 26
4 RS-232 OUT 2 7
RS-232 GND 2 45
s
GTN Xi #2
P1001
6
RS-232 IN 1 27 25 8 RS232 TxD2
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 24 30 RS232 RxD2

s
GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTX 33 #2
GTX 335
GTX 330
P3301 P3251
23 9 RS232 TxD1
22 31 RS232 RxD1
51 52 SIGNAL GROUND
6
RS-232 IN 2 26 25 8 RS232 TxD2
4 RS-232 OUT 2 7 24 30 RS232 RxD2

s

Sheet 3 of 6

Rev. 11 Page B-31
Single GTN Xi/Single GTX 345
GTN Xi #1 P1001 6 12 P3251 GTX 345
RS-232 IN 1 27 7 RS232 TxD3
4 10
RS-232 OUT 1 8 29 RS232 RxD3
s
TIME MARK A 3 GTX 345D/DR UNITS ONLY 4 TIME MARK A

TIME MARK B 22 26 TIME MARK B
s
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE 35 GTN TAWS UNITS ONLY 37 AUDIO INHIBIT
P1002 P3252
ETHERNET OUT 3A 25 7 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT 3B 26 2 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET IN 3A 23 6 ETHERNET OUT 1A
s
ETHERNET IN 3B 24 1 ETHERNET OUT 1B
s
Dual GTN Xi/Single GTX 345 GTX 345

GTN Xi #1
P1002 P3252
s s
P1001 6 12 P3251
RS-232 IN 1 27 7 RS232 TxD3

4 10
RS-232 OUT 1 8 29 RS232 RxD3
s
TIME MARK A 3 GTX 345D/DR UNITS ONLY 4 TIME MARK A

s
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE 35 GTN TAWS UNITS ONLY 37 AUDIO INHIBIT
P1002
ETHERNET OUT 1A 8
ETHERNET OUT 1B 9
ETHERNET IN 1A 6
ETHERNET IN 1B 7
s
GTN Xi #2 P1002
ETHERNET OUT 1B 9
ETHERNET OUT 1A 8
ETHERNET IN 1B 7
ETHERNET IN 1A 6
s

Sheet 4 of 6

Rev. 11 Page B-32
Single GTN Xi with GTX 345 and 335
GTN Xi P1002 P3252 GTX 345
s s
P1001 12 P3251
RS-232 OUT 1 8 29 RS-232 IN 3
RS-232 IN 1 27 7 RS-232 OUT 3 10
SIGNAL GROUND 46 50 RS-232 GND 3
s s
TIME MARK A 3 4 TIME MARK A

GTX 345D/DR UNITS ONLY
s
RS-232 OUT 2 7 37 AUDIO MUTE 11

RS-232 IN 2 26
RS-232 GND 2 45
s
P3251 GTX 335

29 RS-232 IN 3
7 RS-232 OUT 3 10
50 RS-232 GND 3
s
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE 35

Sheet 5 of 6

Rev. 11 Page B-33
NOTES
ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THESE PORTS. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR
4 RS-232 SETTINGS.
5 SPLICE BOTH RS-232 SIGNAL GROUND WIRES TOGETHER AND TERMINATE INTO PIN 25.
IF THIS INSTALLATION IS REPLACING A GNS 400W/500W SERIES UNIT, THE RS-232 DATA PATH REPLACES
6 THE ARINC 429 AND DISCRETE SIGNALS PREVIOUSLY USED TO INTERFACE THE TRANSPONDER TO THE
GNS 400W/500W SERIES.
CONNECTOR P3271 PIN 24 IS APPLICABLE TO THE GTX 32 ONLY. FOR THE GTX 327, SPLICE CONNECTOR
7 P3271 PIN 20 TO BOTH GTN Xi UNITS.
TIS TRAFFIC IS NOT AVAILABLE FROM THE GTX 32, 327, OR 328. REFER TO SECTION 1.4.3 FOR MORE
8 INFORMATION.
9 REFER TO APPENDIX SECTION C.1.8 FOR TRANSPONDER RS-232 PORT SETTINGS.
10 RS-232 PORTS 1 THROUGH 3 AVAILABLE.
11 ANY AUDIO MUTE CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE CAN BE USED.
12 RS-232 IS NOT NECESSARY IF GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 345 IS NOT DESIRED.

Sheet 6 of 6

Rev. 11 Page B-34
CONNECTIONS TO ARINC 429 TRAFFIC SOURCE
10 TRAFFIC ADVISORY
SYSTEM
6 L3 COMM HONEYWELL 8 RYAN
GTN Xi 4 KTA 870 KTA 970
TRC 497 TRC 899 TPU 66A 9900BX
KMH 880 KMH 980
P1001 P1 P1 J10 J10 P66A1A P66A1B P1
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 34 42 54 54 - 30 8 ARINC 429 OUT A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 33 43 55 55 - 16 9 ARINC 429 OUT B
s
TRAFFIC TEST* 75 22 AWG 85 19 2 2 20 - - TAS TEST IN

(OPTIONAL) 7 8
14 TRAFFIC STANDBY* 76 82 21 23 23 - - STANDBY / OPERATE
22 AWG 17
14 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 35 22 AWG 32 34 22 22 18 - - TA INHIBIT*

(TAWS UNITS ONLY)
CONNECTIONS TO TIS SOURCE

TIS SOURCE
GARMIN (TRANSPONDER)
GTN Xi 4 GTX 330
GTX 335 13
GTX 33
P1001 P3301 P3251
RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 31 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 IN 1 27 23 9 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 GND 1 46 51 52 SIGNAL GND
s
CONNECTIONS TO HSDB SOURCE

GTN Xi 4 GARMIN GTS 8XX
P1002 P8001
ETHERNET IN 4A 13 52 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET IN 4B 14 53 ETHERNET OUT B
ETHERNET OUT 4A 4 54 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET OUT 4B 5 55 ETHERNET IN B
s s
P1001
OR
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 14 ARINC 429 OUT A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 15 ARINC 429 OUT B
s s
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 9 16 GPS ARINC 429 IN 1A

15 ARINC 429 OUT 2B 28 17 GPS ARINC 429 IN 1B
s s
P8002
22 AWG 74 TAS TEST IN
TRAFFIC TEST* 75
(OPTIONAL) 7
14 TRAFFIC STANDBY* 76 22 AWG 75 STANDBY / OPERATE
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 35 22 AWG 11 TA INHIBIT*
(TAWS UNITS ONLY)
Figure B-13 GTN Xi - Traffic Source Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-35
CONNECTION TO RS-232 TRAFFIC SOURCE
GTN Xi RYAN 9900B/BX TCAD
PROCESSOR
P1001 P1
RS-232 IN 1 27 17 RS-232 OUT 2
12 RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 RS-232 IN 2
RS-232 GND 1 46 18 RS-232 GND 2

s
11 16 SWITCH
DUAL GTN CONNECTION TO RS-232 TRAFFIC SOURCE

GTN Xi #1 RYAN 9900B/BX TCAD
PROCESSOR
P1001 P1
RS-232 IN 1 27 17 RS-232 OUT 2
12 RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 RS-232 IN 2
RS-232 GND 1 46 18 RS-232 GND 2

s
GTN Xi #2
P1001
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 RS-232 OUT 3
12 RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 RS-232 IN 3
RS-232 GND 1 46 21 RS-232 GND 3

s
11 16 SWITCH

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-36
NOTES
3 LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS
WITH AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
ONLY ONE TRAFFIC SOURCE MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GTN Xi. IN DUAL GTN Xi INSTALLATIONS, THE
TRAFFIC SOURCE SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO EACH GTN Xi ON WHICH TRAFFIC IS TO BE DISPLAYED. IF
4 A GTX 345 IS INSTALLED WITH ANOTHER TRAFFIC SOURCE, REFER TO GTX 3XX PART 23 AML STC
INSTALLATION MANUAL (P/N 190-00734-10).
5 REFER TO SECTIONS 5.4.3.1 AND 5.4.3.2 FOR GTN Xi CONFIGURATION SETUP.
6 SOFTWARE VERSION 1.6 OR HIGHER REQUIRED FOR THE TRC 497.
THESE OPTIONAL DISCRETE CONNECTIONS ARE NOT REQUIRED IF THE GTN Xi IS CONFIGURED FOR
“GTN Xi CONTROL OF TRAFFIC SYSTEM=NO.” IN THIS CASE, THE GTN Xi WILL ONLY BE A TRAFFIC
7 DISPLAY AND WILL NOT CONTROL THE TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM OPERATION. REFER TO SECTION
5.4.3.9 FOR THIS SETTING.
FOR HONEYWELL TRAFFIC SYSTEMS, THE “FUNCTIONAL TEST" AND “STBY/OPERATE" DISCRETE INPUTS
8 TO THE TRAFFIC COMPUTER MUST BE CONNECTED TO ONE DISPLAY ONLY.

FOR NEW RYAN 9900BX INSTALLATIONS, IT IS RECOMMENDED TO USE THE RS-232 INTERFACE. WHEN
INTERFACING THE GTN Xi TO THE RYAN 9900BX VIA ARINC 429, THE “GTN Xi CONTROL OF TRAFFIC
10 SYSTEM” CONFIGURATION SETTING MUST BE SET TO “NO.” THE RYAN 9900BX DOES NOT INCLUDE THE
NECESSARY DISCRETE INPUTS TO CONTROL THE TRAFFIC SYSTEM MODE.
THE RYAN TCAD PROCESSOR SWITCH PIN (P1-16) SHOULD BE GROUNDED TO TURN THE PROCESSOR
UNIT ON, AND OPEN TO TURN THIS UNIT OFF. IF A RYAN TCAD DISPLAY UNIT IS NOT IN THE
11 INSTALLATION, A DEDICATED SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO TURN THE TCAD PROCESSOR UNIT ON
AND OFF. REFER TO 9900BX INSTALLATION MANUAL (P/N 32-2351) FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THESE PORTS. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR
12 RS-232 SETTINGS.
13 REFER TO FIGURE B-12 FOR ADDITIONAL TRANSPONDER CONNECTION INFORMATION.
DEFAULT DISCRETE FUNCTION FOR PINS P1001-75, -76, -35 IS SHOWN. THESE PIN FUNCTIONS ARE
14 CONFIGURABLE AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.
IF HSDB INTERFACE BETWEEN GTS AND GTN Xi IS CONNECTED, DO NOT CONNECT ARINC 429 AND
15 DISCRETE CONNECTIONS.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-37
AUDIO PANEL INTERCONNECT
GTN Xi 3 GARMIN 9 PS ENGINEERING BENDIX/KING AUDIO PANEL
SL 10 SERIES PMA 6000 KMA 24H
GMA 340 GMA 347 PMA 8000 KMA 24 KMA 26 KMA 28
SL 15 SERIES PMA 7000 -70/-71
P1003 BOTTOM J1 J3471 J1 (BOTTOM) BOTTOM P241 P261 J1 (BOTTOM) P241
5
3 500 Ω COM AUDIO HI 7 9/(10) 9/(13) 7/(12) 9/(13) 9/(10) 9/(10) 4/(5) 9/(10) T/(16) COM 1/(COM 2) AUDIO HI
500 Ω COM AUDIO LO 18 GND LUG 10/(14) 8/(13) 10/(14) GND LUG GND LUG 21/(22) GND LUG GND LUG COM 1/(COM 2) AUDIO LO
COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI 5 P/(H) 11/(15) 26/(32) 11/(15) P/(H) P/(H) 37/(39) P/(H) 3/(E) COM 1/(COM 2) MIC AUDIO
COM MIC 1 KEY* 11 22 R/(V) 12/(30) 27/(33) 12/(30) R/(V) R/(V) 38/(40) R/(V) C/(H)
6 COM 1/(COM 2) MIC KEY
MIC AUDIO IN LO 20 AWG GND LUG 10/(14) 8/(13) GND LUG GND LUG GND LUG GND LUG GND LUG GND LUG COM 1/(COM 2) MIC AUDIO LO
7 7
TRANSMIT INTERLOCK 9 V/(R) 30/(12) 33/(27) 30/(12) V/(R) V/(R) 40/(38) V/(R) H/(C) COM 2/(COM 1) MIC KEY
P1001
AUDIO OUT HI 4 T 31 54 31 T T 14 T 10/14 UNSWITCHED AUDIO IN HI
12 AUDIO OUT LO 23 GND LUG 32 55 32 GND LUG GND LUG 31 GND LUG GND LUG UNSWITCHED AUDIO IN LO
12
P1004
500 Ω VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI 16 12/(13) 17/(19) 6/(14) 17/(19) 12/(13) 12/(13) 7/(8) 12/(13) P/(13) NAV 1/(NAV 2) AUDIO HI
3
500 Ω VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO 17 GND LUG 18/(20) 25/(34) 18/(20) GND LUG GND LUG 24/(25) GND LUG GND LUG NAV 1/(NAV 2) AUDIO LO
MIXING AUDIO SIGNALS USING RESISTORS
BEFORE MODIFICATION AFTER MODIFICATION
EXISTING LRU AUDIO PANEL EXISTING LRU R AUDIO PANEL
AUDIO OUT HI UNSWITCHED AUDIO OUT HI UNSWITCHED

LO AUDIO IN LO AUDIO IN
R
GTN Xi
AUDIO OUT
Figure B-14 GTN Xi - Audio Panel Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-38
GMA 350/350H INTERCONNECT
GTN Xi GMA 350/350H
3
P1003 P3501
5
3 500 Ω COM AUDIO HI 7 9/(13) COM 1/(COM 2) AUDIO HI
500 Ω COM AUDIO LO 18 10/(14) COM 1/(COM 2) AUDIO LO 7
s
MIC AUDIO IN LO 20
6 COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI 5 11/(15) COM 1/(COM 2) MIC AUDIO
COM MIC 1 KEY* 11 22 AWG 12/(30) COM 1/(COM 2) MIC KEY
TRANSMIT INTERLOCK* 9 30/(12) COM 2/(COM 1) MIC KEY
s
P1004
500 Ω VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI 16 17/(19) NAV 1/(NAV 2) AUDIO HI

3
500 Ω VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO 17 18/(20) NAV 1/(NAV 2) AUDIO LO
s
P1001
AUDIO OUT HI 4 31 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN HI 8 12
12 AUDIO OUT LO 23 32 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN LO
s
P3502
RS-232 OUT 2 7 17 RS-232 IN
10 11 RS-232 IN 2 26 18 RS-232 OUT
RS-232 GND 2 45
s

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-39
NOTES
THE 500 OHM AUDIO OUTPUTS ARE BALANCED OUTPUTS, AND THE LO OUTPUTS MUST BE CONNECTED.
3 IF THE AUDIO PANEL DOES NOT HAVE A LO INPUT, THE LO OUTPUT SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO A
GROUND LUG AT THE AUDIO PANEL.

SHIELDS FOR AUDIO CABLES SHOULD BE GROUNDED AT ONE END (WITH LEADS LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES)
5 AND LEFT FLOATING AT THE OTHER END. IF SHIELDED AUDIO CABLE IS CARRIED THROUGH A
DISCONNECT, CARRY THE SHIELD GROUND THROUGH THE DISCONNECT ON A SEPARATE PIN.
CONNECTING TWO MICROPHONES TO MIC AUDIO HI/LO AT THE SAME TIME MAY RESULT IN WEAK OR
6 DISTORTED AUDIO. MIC ISOLATION RELAYS ARE RECOMMENDED SO ONLY ONE MIC IS ACTIVE AT A
TIME.
7 SPLICE 500 Ω COM AUDIO LO AND MIC AUDIO IN LO TOGETHER INTO THE SAME PIN ON AUDIO PANEL.
IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO USE OTHER AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED, UNMUTED INPUTS. IF AUDIO PANEL DOES
NOT HAVE AN AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED INPUT, AUDIO FROM THE GTN Xi MUST BE MIXED WITH AN
8 EXISTING AUDIO SOURCE USING RESISTORS TO ISOLATE THE AUDIO OUTPUT FROM EACH LRU. A
TYPICAL VALUE FOR MIXING RESISTORS IS 390 Ω ¼ W. THE AUDIO LEVELS OF EXISTING AUDIO SOURCES
WILL HAVE TO BE RE-EVALUATED AFTER MIXING RESISTORS ARE INSTALLED.
9 FOR GMA 35 INTERCONNECT WIRING, REFER TO APPENDIX SECTION B.2.
THIS CONNECTION CAN ONLY BE MADE TO ONE GTN Xi PER INSTALLATION. IT IS RECOMMENDED TO
10 MAKE THIS CONNECTION TO GTN Xi #1.
11 ANY AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT MAY BE USED. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR RS-232 CHANNEL SETTINGS.
12 AIRCRAFT.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-40
SINGLE GTN CONNECTION TO WX-500
GTN Xi L3 Communications
WX-500
P1001 P3 4
RS-232 OUT 4 5 8 RS-232 RX

5
RS-232 IN 4 24 20 RS-232 TX
RS-232 GND 3/4 44
s P2
5 RS-232 GROUND
DUAL GTN CONNECTIONS TO WX-500

GTN Xi #1 L3 Communications
WX-500
P1001 P3 4
RS-232 OUT 4 5 8 RS-232 RX

5
RS-232 IN 4 24 20 RS-232 TX
RS-232 GND 3/4 44
s P2
5 RS-232 GROUND
GTN Xi #2
7
P1001
RS-232 IN 4 24
5 RS-232 GND 3/4 44
s
GTN CONNECTION TO KGP 560

GTN Xi Bendix/King KGP 560
GA Enhanced GPWS
P1001 P1
RS-232 OUT 1 8 6 GPS_RXA
5
RS-232 GND 1 46 29 COMMON
s
Figure B-15 GTN Xi - Weather Terrain Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-41
NOTES
FOR WX-500 DATA TO BE DISPLAYED ON THE GTN Xi MAP PAGE, THE GTN Xi MUST HAVE A DIGITAL
4 HEADING SOURCE, OR THE WX-500 MUST HAVE A SYNCHRO OR SERIAL HEADING SOURCE. A STEPPER
HEADING SOURCE WILL NOT ALLOW WX-500 DATA TO BE DISPLAYED ON THE MAP PAGE.
ANY AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT MAY BE USED. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR RS-232 CHANNEL
5 SETTINGS.

WHEN CONNECTING TWO GTN Xi UNITS TO THE WX-500, CONFIGURE ONLY RS-232 TX/RX THAT ARE
7 ACTUALLY CONNECTED TO THE WX-500.
Figure B-15 GTN Xi - Weather Terrain Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-42
METAL AIRCRAFT ONLY
SINGLE GTN INSTALLATIONS
GARMIN WEATHER
RADAR
GWX 68 GWX 70 GWX 75
GTN Xi P1002 P400 P3271 P27000
4
ETHERNET OUT 2A 17 34 4 4 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 18 35 3 3 ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET IN 2A 15 36 23 23 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET IN 2B 16 37 22 22 ETHERNET OUT B
s s
5
44 56 56 RT ON/OFF
15 8 8 POWER GROUND
4 RED 17 24 24 CONFIG MODULE PWR
CONFIG 1 BLK 1 43 43 CONFIG MODULE GND
MODULE 3 YEL 16 61 61 CONFIG MODULE DATA
2 WHT 31 60 60 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK
6
DUAL GTN INSTALLATIONS

GARMIN WEATHER
GWX 68 GWX 70 GWX 75 RADAR
GTN Xi #1
P1002 P400 P3271 P27000
4
ETHERNET OUT 2A 17 34 4 4 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 18 35 3 3 ETHERNET IN B
ETHERNET IN 2A 15 36 23 23 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET IN 2B 16 37 22 22 ETHERNET OUT B
s s
5
44 56 56 RT ON/OFF
15 8 8 POWER GROUND
4 RED 17 24 24 CONFIG MODULE PWR

CONFIG 1 BLK 1 43 43 CONFIG MODULE GRND
MODULE 3 YEL 16 61 61 CONFIG MODULE DATA
2 WHT 31 60 60 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK
6
GTN Xi #2
5 P1002 P1002 5
4
s s
Figure B-16 GTN Xi - Weather Radar Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-43
ARINC 708 WXR – SINGLE GTN INSTALLATIONS
W E AT H ER R AD A R
HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING) R /T
11
RDS 81 RDS 82 RDR 2000 RDR 2100
RS 811A RS 181A ART 2000 ART 2100 15
GTN 7XX Xi 11
P1005 P1001 P1001 P5001 P5001
10
ARINC 453/708 IN 1A 18 8 8 42 42 ARINC 453 OUT A (WX)
8 ARINC 453/708 IN 1B 60 9 9 43 43 ARINC 453 OUT B (WX)
s
ARINC 429 OUT 3A 28 19 (18) 19 (18) 2 (4) 2 (4) ARINC 429 IN #1 (#2)
14
ARINC 429 OUT 3B 7 20 (5) 20 (5) 3 (5) 3 (5) (CONTROL)
s
16 WX RADAR ON* 13 22 AWG 24 (12) 24 (12) 31 (32) 31 (32) RT ON/OFF #1 (#2)

N/C - - 1 1 STRUT SWITCH IN
ARINC 453/708 IN 1A TERM 40 12 12
ARINC 453/708 IN 1B TERM 19 9 12
ARINC 708 WXR – DUAL GTN INSTALLATIONS

W E AT H ER R AD A R
HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING) R /T
RDS 81 RDS 82 RDR 2000 RDR 2100 15
11
RS 811A RS 181A ART 2000 ART 2100

GTN 7XX Xi #1 11
P1005 P1001 P1001 P5001 P5001
ARINC 453/708 IN 1A TERM 40
ARINC 453/708 IN 1B TERM 19 9
ARINC 429 OUT 3A 28 19 19 2 2 ARINC 429 IN #1A (CTL)

14
ARINC 429 OUT 3B 7 20 20 3 3 ARINC 429 IN #1B (CTL)
s
16 WX RADAR ON* 13 22 AWG 24 24 31 31 RT ON/OFF #1
ARINC 453/708 IN 1A 18
8
ARINC 453/708 IN 1B 60
s
10
GTN 7XX Xi #2 11
P1005 13
s
ARINC 453/708 IN 1A 18 8 8 42 42 ARINC 453 OUT A (WX)

8
ARINC 453/708 IN 1B 60 9 9 43 43 ARINC 453 OUT B (WX)
s
ARINC 429 OUT 3A 28 18 18 4 4 ARINC 429 IN #2A (CTL)

14
ARINC 429 OUT 3B 7 5 5 5 5 ARINC 429 IN #2B (CTL)
s
16 WX RADAR ON* 13 22 AWG 12 12 32 32 RT ON/OFF #2

N/C - - 1 1 STRUT SWITCH IN
ARINC 453/708 IN 1A TERM 40 N/C 8 12 12 12
ARINC 453/708 IN 1B TERM 19 N/C

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-44
NOTES
3 LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS
WITH AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
4 USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. REFER TO SECTION 3.5.2.2 FOR PART NUMBERS.
IF ETHERNET PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY ETHERNET PORT MAY BE
CONNECTED. REFER TO APPENDIX A FOR PINOUT INFORMATION. ONLY THE GTN 7XX Xi IS CAPABLE OF
5 DISPLAYING GWX DATA. IT IS RECOMMENDED TO CONNECT THE GTN 725Xi OR GTN 750Xi DIRECTLY TO
THE GWX. REFER TO SECTION 3.6.19 FOR MORE INFORMATION.
CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH CONFIGURATION
6 MODULE MUST BE USED FOR CONNECTING CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO P400/P3271.
7 NOT USED.
8 THE WXR ARINC 453/708 INPUT IS UNTERMINATED.
IF THE GTN Xi IS THE ONLY EQUIPMENT ON THE ARINC 453/708 OUTPUT BUS FROM THE WEATHER
RADAR, OR IF IT IS DESIRED TO UTILIZE THE GTN Xi INTERNAL TERMINATION RESISTOR, INSTALL THE
9 TERMINATION JUMPER SHOWN. THIS LENGTH OF THIS JUMPER SHOULD NOT EXCEED 3 INCHES. IF
MULTIPLE PIECES OF EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE ARINC 453/708 BUS, ONLY ONE TERMINATION RESISTOR
SHOULD BE UTILIZED, AT THE LAST LRU ON THE ARINC 453/708 BUS.
AT WEATHER RADAR UNIT, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH AS SHORT A
10 CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
THE GTN Xi MAY BE CONNECTED AS INDICATOR #1 OR INDICATOR #2. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.6.10.2 FOR
11 DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE GTN Xi DISPLAY HEAD #1/#2.
IF THE STRUT SWITCH INPUT IS CONNECTED TO THE WXR, DISCONNECT IT. THE GTN Xi WILL
12 AUTOMATICALLY COMMAND THE WXR TO STANDBY UPON LANDING. THIS ALSO ALLOWS THE PILOT TO
TURN THE WXR ON PRIOR TO TAKEOFF.
SPLICE MUST BE MADE WITHIN 6 INCHES OF CONNECTOR BACKSHELL (WITHIN CONNECTOR

13 BACKSHELL IS PREFERRED).
14 ARINC 429 OUTPUT PORT 3 MUST BE USED FOR CONTROLLING THE WEATHER RADAR.
THE ART 2100 IS SUPPORTED WHEN CONFIGURED TO EMULATE AN ART 2000. ONLY ART 2000
15 FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE. REFER TO APPENDIX C FOR REQUIRED ART 2100 CONFIGURATION
SETTINGS.
DEFAULT DISCRETE FUNCTION FOR PINS P1005-13 IS SHOWN. THESE PIN FUNCTIONS ARE
16 CONFIGURABLE AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-45
GTN Xi GDL 69/69A
P1002 P691
s s
GDL 69/69A BLK 1 CM GROUND

RED 21 CM POWER OUT
CONFIGURATION YEL 40 CM DATA
MODULE WHT 60 CM CLOCK
NOTES
AT THE GTN Xi, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST
3 BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GDL 69/69A TO ITS CONNECTOR
BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE GDL 69/69A INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
ANY ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF ETHERNET PORT 3. IF THERE ARE NO FREE PORTS ON
THE GTN Xi, THE OTHER LRU CAN BE DISCONNECTED FROM THE GTN Xi AND THE GDL 69/69A CAN BE
4 CONNECTED TO THE GTN Xi IN ITS PLACE. THE DISCONNECTED LRU CAN BE CONNECTED TO ETHERNET
PORT 2, 3, OR 4 ON THE GDL 69/69A.
ETHERNET PORTS 2, 3, OR 4 MAY BE USED LIEU OF PORT 1. THE PORT USED MUST BE ENABLED IN
6 CONFIGURATION MODE. REFER TO GDL 69/69A INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
7 IN DUAL GTN Xi INSTALLATIONS, GDL 69 DATA WILL BE FORWARDED TO THE OTHER GTN Xi VIA HSDB.
Figure B-17 GTN Xi - GDL 69/69A Interconnect

Rev. 11 Page B-46
SINGLE GTN INSTALLATION 1
VOR/LOC/GS Antenna
GTN Xi COM Antenna
P1008
NAV GPS/WAAS Antenna
2
P1007
COM
5 5
P1006
GPS/WAAS
s
DUAL GTN INSTALLATION 1
COM Antenna
GPS/WAAS Antenna 2
GTN Xi #1
P1007
COM
5 5
P1006
VOR/LOC/
GPS/WAAS
s GS Antenna
P1008
NAV 3
1
Splitter S
2
GTN Xi #2 COM Antenna
P1008
NAV GPS/WAAS Antenna 2
P1007
COM
P1006
GPS/WAAS
Figure B-18 GTN Xi - Antenna Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 5

Rev. 11 Page B-47
SINGLE GTN/DUAL NAV ANTENNA INSTALLATION 1
G/S Antenna
VOR/LOC Antenna
G/S
ANT Diplexer
VOR
GTN Xi COM Antenna

P1008
P1007
COM
P1006 5 5
GPS/WAAS
s
DUAL GTN/DUAL NAV ANTENNA INSTALLATION 1
COM Antenna
GPS/WAAS Antenna 2
GTN Xi #1
P1007
COM
P1006 5 5
GPS/WAAS
s
G/S Antenna
P1008
NAV
VOR/LOC
Antenna
3
1 G/S
Splitter S ANT Diplexer
2 VOR
GTN Xi #2 COM Antenna

P1008
P1007
COM
P1006 5 5
GPS/WAAS
s

Sheet 2 of 5

Rev. 11 Page B-48
SINGLE GTN, OTHER RADIO (SEPARATE G/S AND VOR/LOC ANTENNA
PORTS), AND SINGLE ANTENNA
GTN 650Xi/750Xi VOR/LOC/GS
Antenna
P1008
NAV 3
1
Splitter S
VHF NAV RADIO WITH 2
SEPARATE G/S AND
VOR/LOC ANTENNA
PORTS G/S
G/S
Diplexer ANT
VOR
VOR/LOC
REFERENCE ONLY
SINGLE GTN, OTHER RADIO (SEPARATE G/S AND VOR/LOC ANTENNA

PORTS), AND DUAL ANTENNAS
G/S Antenna
GTN 650Xi/750Xi 3
VOR/LOC
Antenna
P1008 G/S 1
ANT Diplexer Splitter S
NAV
VOR 2
VHF NAV RADIO WITH 1

SEPARATE G/S AND Splitter S
VOR/LOC ANTENNA 2
PORTS G/S
VOR/LOC
REFERENCE ONLY

Sheet 3 of 5

Rev. 11 Page B-49
SINGLE GTN, OTHER RADIO, AND SINGLE ANTENNA
GTN 650Xi/750Xi VOR/LOC/GS
Antenna
P1008
NAV 3
1
Splitter S
2
VHF NAV RADIO

WITH COMBINED
VOR/LOC/GS
ANTENNA PORTS
NAV
REFERENCE ONLY
SINGLE GTN, OTHER RADIO, AND DUAL ANTENNAS

GTN 650Xi/750Xi
G/S Antenna
P1008
NAV
VOR/LOC
Antenna
1 G/S
Splitter S ANT Diplexer
2 VOR
VHF NAV RADIO

WITH COMBINED
VOR/LOC/GS
ANTENNA PORTS
NAV
REFERENCE ONLY

Sheet 4 of 5

Rev. 11 Page B-50
NOTES
1 REFER TO SECTION 4.1.1, SECTION 4.1.2, AND SECTION 4.1.3 FOR ANTENNA CABLE SPECIFICATIONS.
THE GPS ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE MUST BE DOUBLE OR TRIPLE SHIELDED AND THE LOSS (INCLUDING
2 CONNECTORS) MUST USUALLY BE GREAT THAN 1.5 DB AND LESS THAN 6.5 Db. REFER TO FIGURE 3-21
FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
3 GARMIN P/N 013-00112-00 (MINI-CIRCUITS SPLITTER P/N ZFSC-2-1B+) MUST BE USED.
4 COMANT DIPLEXER P/N CI 507 MUST BE USED.
5 NOT USED.
REFER TO SECTION 4.1.3.1 AND SECTION 4.1.3.2 FOR SPLITTER AND DIPLEXER INSTALLATION
6 GUIDANCE.
THE DIPLEXER IS INSTALLED BACKWARDS FROM TRADITIONAL APPLICATIONS. WHEN A GS AND VOR/
7 LOC ANTENNA IS INSTALLED, IT IS REQUIRED TO JOIN THE SIGNALS OF BOTH ANTENNAS WITH THE
CI-507 DIPLEXER.

Sheet 5 of 5

Rev. 11 Page B-51
TERRAIN/TAWS
GTN Xi MID-CONTINENT ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
MD41-10XX
J1 5
P1001
10 TERR N/A ANNC IN
11 TERR PULL UP ANNC IN
5 TERR CAUTION ANNC IN
19 TAWS INHIBIT ANNC IN
20 TAWS INHIBIT OUT
21 AIRCRAFT GROUND
22 AIRCRAFT GROUND
23 AIRCRAFT GROUND
24 AIRCRAFT GROUND
25 AIRCRAFT GROUND
9
GARMIN PS Engineering
Bendix/King AUDIO PANEL
SL15 GMA 340 GMA 347 GMA 350 PMA6000 PMA8000 KMA 24 KMA 26
SL15M PMA7000 KMA 28 8
Bottom J1 J3471 J3501 Bottom J1 Bottom P261
24 AWG T 31 54 31 T 31 T 14 UNSWITCHED IN HI
24 AWG Gnd Lug 32 55 32 Gnd Lug 32 Gnd Lug 31 UNSWITCHED IN LO
s
Figure B-19 GTN Xi - Terrain/TAWS Annunciators Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-52
NOTES

5 REFER TO SECTION 3.6.11.1.4 TO DETERMINE IF EXTERNAL TAWS ANNUNCIATION IS REQUIRED.
6 RESERVED.
CONNECT TO THE AUDIO INHIBIT INPUTS OF OTHER SYSTEMS WITH LOWER PRIORITY AURALS THAN
7 TERRAIN ALERTING OR TAWS, SUCH AS TRAFFIC. REFER TO TRAFFIC INTERCONNECT DRAWING FOR
CONNECTIONS.
8 OTHER UNSWITCHED, UNMUTED INPUTS ON THE AUDIO PANEL MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF THOSE SHOWN.
9 FOR GMA 35 INTERCONNECT WIRING, REFER TO APPENDIX SECTION B.2.
DEFAULT DISCRETE FUNCTION FOR PINS P1001-72, -71, -73, -57, -37, AND -35 IS SHOWN. THESE PIN
10 FUNCTIONS ARE CONFIGURABLE AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.
A RELAY MUST BE USED ON THE TERRAIN/TAWS NOT AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATE DISCRETE IF USING A
11 CUSTOM LAMP OR ANY ANNUNCIATOR THAT DOES NOT CONTAIN AN INTERNAL RELAY. THE
MID-CONTINENT MD41-10XX HAS AN INTERNAL RELAY.
12 AIRCRAFT.
Figure B-19 GTN Xi - Terrain/TAWS Annunciators Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-53
GTN Xi CDI
P1001
9 CDI SOURCE SELECT* 39

10 GEAR POSITION -
OBS/SUSP
10 FLAP POSITION -
9 OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT* 16
9 AIR/GROUND* 38
DAY
10 REMOTE GO AROUND* -
10 DAY/NIGHT* -
NIGHT
COM RMT XFR

P1003
COM REMOTE TRANSFER* 27
COM CHAN UP
COM REMOTE TUNE UP* 28
COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN* 29

COM CHAN DN
NAV RMT XFR

P1004
VLOC REMOTE TRANSFER 28 24 AWG
Figure B-20 GTN Xi - Switch Interconnect (Optional)

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-54
Smart Glide Activation Switch 12
GARMIN SWITCH CONNECTION 13
SMART GLIDE
N/C 3 Normally Closed 6 N/C
GTN Xi #1 2 Normally Open 5 N/C

P100X
ENGAGE/DISENGAGE
- 1 COM 4 N/C
10 SMART GLIDE*
L- L+
N/C N/C
GTN Xi #2 P100X
ENGAGE/DISENGAGE
-
10 SMART GLIDE*
VIVISUN SWITCH CONNECTION 14
P1 P1
C B
LAMP VOLTAGE FROM
G DIMMER CIRCUIT 15
D A
GTN Xi #1
P100X
ENGAGE/DISENGAGE
- A1 A3
10 SMART GLIDE*
SMART GLIDE
ACTIVATION SWITCH
GTN Xi #2
P100X
ENGAGE/DISENGAGE
-
10 SMART GLIDE*

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-55
NOTES
THE CDI SOURCE SELECT INPUT MAY BE USED TO TOGGLE BETWEEN GPS AND VLOC COURSE
DEVIATION SOURCES. USE GRAYHILL SWITCH P/N 30-3. THE SWITCH MUST BE LABELED AS SHOWN
3 DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE SWITCH. REFER TO SECTION 3.6.9 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. THIS SWITCH MUST NOT BE INSTALLED IF A REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
PANEL WITH A CDI SWITCHING FUNCTION IS CONNECTED TO THE GTN Xi.
OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT* MAY BE USED TO REMOTELY TOGGLE BETWEEN GPS AUTO AND GPS OBS/
SUSP MODE. USE GRAYHILL SWITCH P/N 30-3. THE SWITCH MUST BE LABELED AS SHOWN DIRECTLY
4 ADJACENT TO THE SWITCH. REFER TO SECTION 3.6.9 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS. THIS SWITCH MUST NOT BE INSTALLED IF A REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL WITH AN
OBS/SUSP SWITCHING FUNCTION IS CONNECTED TO THE GTN Xi.
THE AIR/GROUND* INPUT IS USED TO CONTROL THE AIR/GROUND STATUS OF THE GTN Xi. THIS INPUT
5 MUST BE GROUNDED TO ACTIVATE. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.10 FOR CONFIGURATION INFORMATION.
COM REMOTE TRANSFER MAY BE USED TO TRANSFER THE STANDBY COM FREQUENCY TO THE ACTIVE
COM FREQUENCY VIA REMOTE SWITCH. USE GRAYHILL SWITCH P/N 30-3. THE SWITCH MUST BE
6 LABELED AS SHOWN DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE SWITCH. REFER TO SECTION 3.6.9 FOR ADDITIONAL
SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
COM REMOTE TUNE UP AND COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN MAY BE USED TO SCROLL THROUGH A LIST OF
PRESET COM FREQUENCIES. MAY USE TWO GRAYHILL SWITCHES P/N 30-3. THE SWITCHES MUST BE
7 LABELED AS SHOWN DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE SWITCH. ADDITIONALLY, AN ON-OFF-ON SWITCH,
CARLING SWITCH P/N 62012481-0-0 CAN BE USED. REFER TO SECTION 3.6.9 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
VLOC REMOTE TRANSFER MAY BE USED TO TRANSFER THE STANDBY NAV FREQUENCY TO THE ACTIVE
NAV FREQUENCY VIA REMOTE SWITCH. USE GRAYHILL SWITCH P/N 30-3. THE SWITCH MUST BE
8 LABELED AS SHOWN DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE SWITCH. REFER TO SECTION 3.6.9 FOR ADDITIONAL
SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
DEFAULT DISCRETE FUNCTION FOR THIS PIN IS SHOWN. THESE PIN FUNCTIONS ARE CONFIGURABLE AS
THERE IS NO DEFAULT PIN FOR THE THIS FUNCTION. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.14 FOR DETAILS ON
10 CONFIGURING AN INPUT FOR THIS FUNCTION. EITHER P1001 OR P1002 MAY BE USED.
11 CONNECT TO EXISTING SWTICH.
IF SMART GLIDE IS ENABLED AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.4.3.15, THERE MUST BE EITHER A GUARDED
DISCRETE ACTIVATION SWITCH INSTALLED OR A PLACARD PLACED ADJACENT TO THE #1 GTN Xi IN A
12 SINGLE OR DUAL GTN Xi INSTALLATION. FOR A GTN Xi-GTN 6XX/7XX INSTALLATION, THE PLACARD MUST
BE ADJACENT TO THE GTN XI AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 3.6.7.1.
THE RECOMMENDED GUARDED SWITCH IS GARMIN P/N 011-05930-00. MS27718-26-1 OR EQUIVALENT
TOGGLE SWITCH WITH A MS25224-3 GUARD IS AN ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVE. SINGLE POLE MODELS
13 DO NOT HAVE TERMINALS 4-6.
IF A SMART GLIDE ACTIVATION SWITCH IS INSTALLED, IT MUST BE CONNECTED TO ALL GTN Xi UNITS.
USE VIVISUN MOMENTARY SWITCH P/N LED-52-11-HAE-E2WE7 FOR 28V SYSTEMS AND P/N 95-52-11-H4-
14 E2WFN FOR 14 V SYSTEMS. VIVISUN MOMENTARY SWITCHES MUST BE INSTALLED WITH A RED OUTLINE
GUARD P/N 17-672.
15 LAMPS SHOULD RECEIVE POWER FROM THE SAME POWER BUS TO WHICH THE GTN XI IS CONNECTED.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-56
7 6 ALTITUDE
ACK Trans-Cal Shadin Icarus ENCODER
GTN Xi Technologies IA-RS232-X 8800T/9000T Instruments
Sandia
A-30 9200T 3000 SAE5-35
SSD-120
P1001
DB15 DB9 DB15 P3 (DB9) J5
4 RS-232 IN 2 26 7 (14) 4 (9) 7 2 1 (2) RS-232 OUT HI
RS-232 GND 2 45 SHELL 5 15 SHELL 5 RS-232 OUT LO
s s s
s
TO GTN #2 - 1 - - - CONFIG JUMPER

(IF INSTALLED) 9 - 2 - - - (RESOLUTION)
8 - 7 - - - CONFIG JUMPER
9 - 8 - - - (OUTPUT FORMAT)
FUEL/AIR
GARMIN ARNAV JP Instruments Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Electronics DATA
GTX 327 FC-10 EDM-700
Miniflo-L Digiflo-L Digiflo-L Digidata F/ADC-2000 F/ADC-200 AIS-380 International
FT-10 91204XT(38)D 91053XP 91053XT-D 912802-( ) 962830A-( ) F/ADC-2000 FFA FP-5L
P3271 J1 J2
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 2 1 6 5 J 5 39 6 20 15 RS-232 OUT HI
4
RS-232 GND 1 46 13 4 SHELL 2 2 D 2 23 9 SHELL SHELL RS-232 OUT LO
s
RS-232
RECEIVER
JP Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin
GARMIN
Instruments Miniflo-L Digiflo-L Digiflo-L Digidata F/ADC-2000 F/ADC-200
GTX 327
EDM-700 91204XT(38)D 91053XP 91053XT-D 91802-( ) 962830A-() F/ADC-2000
P3271 J1 J2
RS-232 OUT 1 8 2 2 9 12 H 12 21 5 RS-232 IN HI
4
13 SHELL 2 2 D 2 23 9 RS-232 IN LO
s
Figure B-21 GTN Xi - RS-232 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-57
NOTES
RS-232 CHANNEL PORTS 1 TO 3 ARE SHOWN. ANY AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT MAY BE USED. REFER TO
4 SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR PORT CONFIGURATION.

IF USING THE SERIAL PORT SOFTWARE METHOD TO CONFIGURE THE OUTPUT OF THE ENCODER,
6 VERIFY THE “TRIMBLE/GARMIN 9600 BPS" FORMAT IS SELECTED.
MOD LEVEL 8 (OR HIGHER) IS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT RS-232 INTERFACE. VERIFY THE JUMPERS ARE
7 SET FOR “TRIMBLE/GARMIN 9600 BPS" AND “10 FOOT RESOLUTION.”
IN A DUAL GTN Xi INSTALLATION, CONNECT THE ALTITUDE SOURCE TO BOTH GTN Xi #1 AND GTN Xi #2.
8 USE NEXT AVAILABLE RS-232 IN PORT. VERIFY BOTH PORTS ARE CONFIGURED TO THE CORRECT DATA
FORMAT SETTING AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.4.3.2.
THE LENGTH OF THE STRAPS MUST BE LIMITED TO THE LENGTH SPECIFIED IN THE MANUFACTURER’S
9 INSTALLATION MANUAL.
GTN P100X
10
s
s
CONNECT TO EXISTING SWTICH. SWITCH MUST BE LABELED AS SHOWN DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE
11 SWITCH.
Figure B-21 GTN Xi - RS-232 Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-58
GTN Xi GARMIN GAD 42
4 5
P1001 P421
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 1 GPS ARINC 429 IN A
7
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 2 GPS ARINC 429 IN B
s
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 13 ARINC 429 OUT A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 14 ARINC 429 OUT B
P1004
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 3 NAV ARINC 429 IN A

6 23 4
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B NAV ARINC 429 IN B
s
NOTES
3 LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE GAD 42
INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4 FOR GTN Xi CONFIGURATION SETTINGS, REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.1.
REFER TO THE GARMIN GAD 42 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT
5 INFORMATION. CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429 BUS SPEED TO MATCH THE GTN 650Xi/750Xi OUTPUT SPEED.
6 THESE CONNECTIONS ARE ONLY USED ON THE GTN 650Xi/750Xi.
IF THE ARINC 429 OUT 1 PORT (P1001 PINS -10 AND -29) IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY
7 ARINC 429 OUT PORT MAY BE CONNECTED INSTEAD. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.1 FOR ARINC 429
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS AND APPENDIX A FOR PINOUT.
Figure B-22 GTN Xi - GAD 42 Interconnect

Rev. 11 Page B-59
AIR DATA
GTN Xi COMPUTER
Shadin Shadin B&D Bendix/King Bendix/King
ADC 2000 ADC 2000 90004-003 KDC 281 KDC 481
P1001
J2 (DB 15) J1 (MS CONN) P2811 P4811
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 7 40 27 5 U TRANSMITTER A

5 8 22 9 6 i TRANSMITTER B
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67
s
IRU/AHRS
GTN Xi
Collins
AHC-85E
P1001
P1
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 16 IRU/AHRS TRANSMITTER A
5 ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 14 IRU/AHRS TRANSMITTER B
s
AIR DATA COMPUTER

GTN Xi
Insight
TAS 1000
P1001 DSUB-25 PLUG
RS-232 OUT 1 8 23 RS-232 RXD
4 27 10 RS-232 TXD
RS-232 IN 1
s
NOTES
REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR RS-232 CHANNEL SETTINGS. RS-232 CHANNEL 1 PORT IS SHOWN. ANY
4 AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT MAY BE USED.
REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.1 FOR ARINC 429 CHANNEL SETTINGS. IF ARINC 429 IN 1 PORT IS BEING USED
5 FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY AVAILABLE ARINC 429 IN PORT MAY BE CONNECTED INSTEAD.

Figure B-23 GTN Xi - Air Data/AHRS Computer Interconnect

Rev. 11 Page B-60
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS TO RMI
RADIO MAGNETIC
INDICATOR
BENDIX/KING
GTN 650Xi/
KNI 582 KNI 582
750Xi P1004
KI 229 KDA 692 Pointer #1 Pointer #2
P2291 P6921 P5821 P5821
VOR OBI CLOCK 25 12 11 8 7 OBI CLOCK
s
VOR OBI DATA 27 19 L 17 16 OBI DATA

s
VOR OBI SYNC 26 11 M 33 24 OBI SYNC

s
NOTES
REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT/

4 CONFIGURATION INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
Figure B-24 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - RMI Interconnect

Rev. 11 Page B-61
ARINC 429 EHSI
DISPLAY
P1004 P2
3/(35) NAV 429 IN PORT A 1/(2)

33/(21) NAV 429 IN PORT B 1/(2)
P1001
30 429 OUT A
15 429 OUT B
31/(2) GPS 429 IN PORT A 1/(2)

17/(32) GPS 429 IN PORT B 1/(2)
6 Autopilot
ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 22 AWG

LOCALIZER ENGAGE
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 +LEFT

MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 +RIGHT
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 LATERAL +FLAG

MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 LATERAL -FLAG
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 +UP

MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 +DOWN
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 VERTICAL +FLAG

MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 VERTICAL -FLAG
Figure B-25 GTN Xi - Sandel SN3500/4500 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-62
NOTES
IF THE ARINC 429 IN 1 PORT (P1001 -48 AND -67) IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY
4 AVAILABLE ARINC 429 IN PORT MAY BE CONNECTED INSTEAD. REFER TO APPENDIX A FOR PINOUT
INFORMATION.

AUTOPILOT SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. REFER TO THE APPLICABLE AUTOPILOT INTERCONNECT
6 DIAGRAM.
7 REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.1 FOR GTN Xi CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
Figure B-25 GTN Xi - Sandel SN3500/4500 Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-63
GTN Xi
Sandel
8 SN3308
9

s
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48
4
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11
MAIN +FROM OUT 30
s
22 AWG
22 AWG
s
s s s
s
s s s
s
s s s
s
s s s
Figure B-26 GTN Xi - Sandel SN3308 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-64
NOTES
IF THE ARINC 429 IN 1 PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY AVAILABLE ARINC 429 IN
4 PORT MAY BE CONNECTED INSTEAD.

6 DIAGRAM.
7 USE ILS ENERGIZE 2 (P1-8) IF GTN Xi UNIT IS BEING CONNECTED AS GPS2/NAV2.
8 REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.1 FOR ARINC 429 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
FOR SN3308 SOFTWARE VERSIONS PRIOR TO 2.30, ANALOG CONNECTIONS TO THE SN3308 ARE
10 REQUIRED TO ALLOW VERTICAL GUIDANCE TO BE DISPLAYED FOR GPS APPROACHES. FOR SOFTWARE
VERSION 2.30 AND LATER, THESE ANALOG CONNECTIONS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
GTN P100X
11
s
s
Figure B-26 GTN Xi - Sandel SN3308 Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-65
ARINC 429 EHSI
Sandel DISPLAY
VOR/ILS 1 SN3308
(RELAXED)
7
P1 P2 P3
GTN Xi #1 N/C
33 NAV 1/2 RELAY SENSE
P1004
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 9 429-2 RX-A

s 27 429-2 RX-B
VOR/ILS 2
(ENERGIZED)
5 VHF NAV 2 SWITCHING RELAY
AIRCRAFT POWER
P1001 21 GPS 2 SWITCHING RELAY
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 11 429-1 TX-A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 29 429-1 TX-B
s s s s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 10 429-1 RX-A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 28 429-1 RX-B
s
26 429-3 RX-A
7 429-3 RX-B
ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 27 ILS 1 ENERGIZE

MAIN +TO OUT 11 3 CDI SOURCE CONT ROL
MAIN +FROM OUT 30
s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 12 RCVR 1/2
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50
17 +TO (FLAG)
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69
s 35 +FROM (FLAG)
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12
37 CDI+L
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31
s 19 CDI+R
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51
18 NAV+ VALID (FLAG)
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70
s 36 NAV– VALID (FLAG)
16 GS+ UP
34 GS+ DOWN
15 GS+ VALID (FLAG)

GTN Xi #2
33 GS- VALID (FLAG)
P1004 8 ILS 2 ENERGIZE

s
P1001
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 NAV SYSTEM 1
s (RELAXED)
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 N/C
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 AUTOPILOT

MAIN +FROM OUT 30
s
LOCALIZER ENGAGE
ILS/GPS APPROACH 56
+LEFT
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49
+RIGHT
s
LATERAL +FLAG
LATERAL -FLAG
s
+UP
+DOWN
s
VERTICAL +FLAG
VERTICAL -FLAG
s
NAV SYSTEM 2
(ENERGIZED)
AIRCRAFT POWER
Figure B-27 GTN Xi - SN3308 - Two GTN Xi Units Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-66
NOTES
ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. SINGLE DISCRETE WIRES 22 AWG OR
1 LARGER.

AUTOPILOT SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. REFER TO THE APPLICABLE INSTALLED A/P INTERCONNECT
5 DIAGRAM.
6 REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.1 FOR GTN XI #1 AND #2 ARINC 429 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
FOR SANDEL SOFTWARE VERSIONS PRIOR TO 2.30, ANALOG CONNECTIONS TO THE SN3308 ARE
8 REQUIRED TO ALLOW VERTICAL GUIDANCE TO BE DISPLAYED FOR GPS APPROACHES. FOR SOFTWARE
VERSION 2.30 OR LATER, THESE ANALOG CONNECTIONS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
9 USE RELAY LEACH P/N WN-460-( )( )( ).
USE AN MD41-244 OR MD41-248 REMOTE RELAY OR EQUIVALENT PREVIOUSLY FAA-APPROVED REMOTE

10 RELAY.
THESE PINS ON THE SN3308 ARE CONFIGURABLE AND CAN BE CHANGED TO SUIT THE PARTICULAR
11 INSTALLATION.
IF IT IS DESIRED TO USE THE NAV RECEIVERS AS A SOURCE FOR THE SN3308 BEARING POINTERS, IT IS
RECOMMENDED THE GTN XI #1/#2 COMPOSITE OUTPUTS (P1004-8) BE CONNECTED TO THE SN3308
12 COMPOSITE INPUTS (P1-29 AND P1-10, #1 AND #2, RESPECTIVELY) AND THE SN3308 BRG NAV-1/NAV-2
BE SET TO “429+COMP.”

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-67
NOTES CONTINUED
13 USE DIODE P/N 1N4004 OR EQUIVALENT.
THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:
GTN LRU
P100X PXX
14
s
s
15 CONNECT TO SANDEL 3308 EFIS CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR AIRCRAFT POWER.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-68
ARINC 429 EHSI
Sandel DISPLAY #1
VOR/ILS 1 SN3308
(RELAXED) 7
GTN Xi #1 P2 P3
N/C
33 NAV 1/2 RELAY SENSE
P1004
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 9 429-2 RX-A

s s s 27 429-2 RX-B
s VOR/ILS 2
(ENERGIZED)
A/C PWR
P1001 21 GPS 2 SWITCHING RELAY
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 11 429-1 TX-A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 29 429-1 TX-B
s s s s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 10 429-1 RX-A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 28 429-1 RX-B
s s s
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 26 429-3 RX-A
7 429-3 RX-B
3 CDI SOURCE CONTROL
s
50 12 RCVR 1/2
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT
s PILOT
s ARINC 429 EHSI
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 Sandel DISPLAY #2
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 SN3308
s FCS
SWITCH P2 P3 7
VOR/ILS 1
(RELAXED)
GTN Xi #2
P1004 N/C 33 NAV 1/2 RELAY SENSE
COPILOT
9 429-2 RX-A
27 429-2 RX-B
s
VOR/ILS 2
P1001 (ENERGIZED)
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48
A/ C PWR
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 21 GPS 2 SWITCHING RELAY
s
11 429-1 TX-A
29 429-1 TX-B
10 429-1 RX-A
28 429-1 RX-B
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 26 429-3 RX-A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 7 429-3 RX-B
s s s
3 CDI SOURCE CONTROL
12 RCVR 1/2
NAV SYSTEM 1
(RELAXED)
AUTOPILOT
N/C
LOCALIZER ENGAGE
ILS/GPS APPROACH 56
+LEFT
+RIGHT
s
LATERAL +FLAG
LATERAL -FLAG
s
+UP
+DOWN
s
VERTICAL +FLAG
VERTICAL -FLAG
s
NAV SYSTEM 2
(ENERGIZED)
A/C PWR
Figure B-28 GTN Xi - SN3308 - Two GTN Xi Units and Two SN3308s Interconnect
Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-69
NOTES
ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. SINGLE DISCRETE WIRES 22 AWG OR
1 LARGER.

5 DIAGRAM.
6 REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.1 FOR GTN Xi #1 AND #2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
8 USE RELAY LEACH P/N WN-460-( )( )( ) OR EQUIVALENT.
USE AN MD41-244 OR MD41-248 REMOTE RELAY OR EQUIVALENT PREVIOUSLY FAA-APPROVED REMOTE

9 RELAY.
THESE PINS ON THE SN3308 ARE CONFIGURABLE AND CAN BE CHANGED TO SUIT THE PARTICULAR
10 INSTALLATION.
IF IT IS DESIRED TO USE THE NAV RECEIVERS AS A SOURCE FOR THE SN3308 BEARING POINTERS, IT IS
RECOMMENDED THE GTN Xi #1/#2 COMPOSITE OUTPUTS (P1004-8) BE CONNECTED TO THE SN3308
11 COMPOSITE INPUTS (P1-29 AND P1-10, #1 AND #2, RESPECTIVELY) AND THE SN3308 BRG NAV-1/NAV-2 BE
SET TO “429+COMP.”
12 USE DIODE P/N 1N4004 OR EQUIVALENT.
Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-70
NOTES CONTINUED
GTN LRU
P100X PXX
13
s
s
14 CONNECT TO SANDEL 3308 EFIS CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR AIRCRAFT POWER.
USE GRAYHILL SWITCH SERIES 34A-4P1. LABEL AS SHOWN. REFER TO SECTION 3.6.9 FOR ADDITIONAL
15 SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-71
KING SERIAL DME (PANEL-MOUNTED DME)
DME TRANSCEIVER
GTN 650Xi/750Xi #1 BENDIX/KING
5 P1004 KN62/62A KN64

7 P621/P62A1 P641
SERIAL DME-CLOCK 18 14 14 CLOCK BUS
s s s
s 7
SERIAL DME-DATA 19 13 13 DATA BUS
s s s
s 7
SERIAL DME-RNAV/CH REQ 20 L L RNAV/CHANNEL REQ
s s s
s NAV 1
DME COMMON 41 22 AWG

22 C C DME COMMON
AWG
NAV 2
GTN 650Xi/750Xi #2 NAV SELECTION SW 6
5 P1004
SERIAL DME-CLOCK 18
s 22 AWG
SERIAL DME-DATA 19
s
SERIAL DME-RNAV/CH REQ 20
s
DME COMMON 41
KING SERIAL DME (REMOTE-MOUNTED)

REMOTE DME
GTN 650Xi/750Xi #1 BENDIX/KING
P1004 KN63 KDM 706(A)
7 7 P631 P7061
SERIAL DME-CLOCK 18 F 8 CLOCK BUS
s s s s s
s s
SERIAL DME-DATA 19 6 9 DATA BUS
s s s s s
s 7 s 7
SERIAL DME-RNAV/CH REQ 20 D 24 DME REQUEST
s s s
s
7
NAV DME COMMON 41
DME INDICATOR
BENDIX/KING
GTN 650Xi/750Xi #2 KDI 572 KDI 574
P1004 P5721 P5741
15 15 DME REQUEST
SERIAL DME-CLOCK 18
s 11 11 DATA BUS
SERIAL DME-DATA 19
s 12 12 CLOCK BUS
SERIAL DME-RNAV/CH REQ 20
s 17 17 RNAV REQUEST
48 48 NAV 1 COMMON
NAV DME COMMON 41 49 49 NAV 2 COMMON
N/C 33 33 10 BIT/50 BIT SELECT
Figure B-29 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - Bendix King DME Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-72
NOTES
AT GTN 650Xi/750Xi, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD
TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE
3 REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT
EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED
3.0 INCHES. REFER TO SECTION 3.6.12.3.

THE GTN 650Xi/750Xi MUST BE CONFIGURED AT INSTALLATION TO OUTPUT KING SERIAL DME TUNING
5 DATA UNDER THE DME CHANNEL MODE. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.12 FOR CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
THE NAV SELECTION SWITCH IS ONLY REQUIRED IF TWO GTN 650Xi/750Xi ARE INSTALLED. FOR SINGLE
GTN Xi INSTALLATIONS, WIRE AS SHOWN FOR GTN Xi #1. AN ACCEPTABLE SWITCH IS CARLING SWITCH
6 P/N 112-A-63. LABEL AS SHOWN. REFER TO SECTION 3.6.9 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS.
GTN
7 P100X
s
s
Figure B-29 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - Bendix King DME Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-73
4 4 4 6 5 5
GTN 650Xi/750Xi DME
BENDIX/KING COLLINS COLLINS NARCO NARCO
KN 62A DME 40 DME 42 DME 890 IDME 891
P621 P1 P1 P301 P301
P1004
PAR DME 1MHZ-A 45 12 28 28 2 31 1 MHZ-A
PAR DME 1MHZ-B 46 - - - 3 12 1 MHZ-B
PAR DME 1MHZ-C 47 9 32 32 4 30 1 MHZ-C
PAR DME 1MHZ-D/SERIAL DME ON 33 8 43 43 5 11 1 MHZ-D
PAR DME 1MHZ-E 56 11 35 35 - - 1 MHZ-E
PAR DME 100KHZ-A/SERIAL DME HOLD 37 7 11 11 B 28 100 KHZ-A

PAR DME 100KHZ-B 39 - - - C 9 100 KHZ-B
PAR DME 100KHZ-C 40 4 19 19 D 27 100 KHZ-C
PAR DME 100KHZ-D 42 6 27 27 E 8 100 KHZ-D
PAR DME 100KHZ-E 54 H 12 12 - - 100 KHZ-E
PAR DME 50KHZ 43 5 44 44 H 32 50 KHZ
7 DME COMMON 41 C 42 8 42 8 1 35 DME COMMON
- 52 52 - - 10 MHZ-A
- 51 51 - - 10 MHZ-E
- 6 6 - - GROUND
J - 48/50 - - 2 X 5 CODE SELECT

N/C D - - - - SLIP CODE SELECT
N/C M - - - - BCD CODE SELECT
Figure B-30 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - DME Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-74
NOTES

3 INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. REFER TO SECTION FOR
GTN Xi CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
THE GTN 650Xi/750Xi MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR PARALLEL 2X5 DME CHANNELING MODE FOR PROPER
4 OPERATION WITH THIS MODEL OF DME TRANSCEIVER.
THE GTN 650Xi/750Xi MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR NARCO 890/891 DME CHANNELING MODE FOR PROPER
5 OPERATION WITH THIS MODEL OF DME TRANSCEIVER.
DME 42 MUST BE STRAPPED FOR 2X5 TUNING. REFER TO THE DME 42 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR
6 STRAPPING INFORMATION.
FOR DUAL GTN Xi INTERFACES TO THE DME, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO INSTALL A TOGGLE SWITCH FOR
7 THE “DME COMMON” INPUT. INSTALL SWITCH AS SHOWN FOR KING SERIAL PANEL DME INTERCONNECT.
P1-42 AND P3-46 ON THE HPU-74 NEED TO BE DISCONNECTED FROM GROUND IN ORDER TO ENTER DME
8 HOLD MODE.
Figure B-30 GTN 650Xi/750Xi - DME Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-75
TO MAIN CDI
VERTICAL +DOWN
LATERAL +FLAG
LATERAL -FLAG
VERTICAL +FLAG
VERTICAL -FLAG
VERTICAL +UP
LATERAL +LEFT
LATERAL +RIGHT
AUTOPILOT
BENDIX/KING
GTN Xi KFC 200
KAP 150 KFC 275
KAP 100 KAP 140 KFC 250 KFC 225 KFC 300
KFC 150 KFC 325
(KC 190) (KC 140) (KC 295) (KC 225) (KCP 320)
(KC 19X) (KCP 220)
(KCP 299)
P1001
P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 J1 J2TP P1 P2 P3
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 - - 22 - - - - - 23 - - 30 48 - - LAT DEV FLAG+
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 - - 23 - - - - - 24 - - 31 49 - - LAT DEV FLAG-
s
8 s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 U - 24 - U - - C 25 - 2 - 3 - - LAT DEV +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 17 - 25 - 17 - - A 26 - 1 - 2 - - LAT DEV +RT
s
8 s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 - - 31 - 21 C - - 14 - 24 - 27 - GS DEV FLAG+
-
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 - - - 12 - Y D - - 15 - 25 - 10 - GS DEV FLAG-
s
8 s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 - - - 9 - V M - - 12 3 - - 11 - GS DEV +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 - - - 10 - 19 K - - 52 4 - - 28 - GS DEV +DOWN
s
8
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 - - - - - - - - 46 - - - - - 48 ARINC 429 IN A
6 ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 - - - - - - - - 47 - - - - - 49 ARINC 429 IN B
s
7 GPS SELECT* 74 22 AWG - - - 26 - - - - - 34 - - - - - GPS SELECT (GND=GPS)
ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 22 AWG B - 7 - B - AA - 7 - - 29 22 - - ILS ENERGIZE (A/P IN)
5 5
Figure B-31 GTN Xi - Bendix King Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-76
TO MAIN CDI
VERTICAL +UP
VERTICAL +DOWN
ILS/GPS APPROACH*
LATERAL +FLAG
LATERAL +RIGHT
LATERAL -FLAG
VERTICAL +FLAG
VERTICAL -FLAG
LATERAL +LEFT
4
GTN Xi P1001 AUTOPILOT

BENDIX
M4C M4D
5536E-2 5536F
J1 J2 J1 J2
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 - - - - LAT DEV FLAG+
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 - - - - LAT DEV FLAG-
s 8 s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 1 - 1 - LAT DEV +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 5 - 5 - LAT DEV +RT
s 8 s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 - - - - GS DEV FLAG+
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 - - - - GS DEV FLAG-
s 8 s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 34 - 34 - GS DEV +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 35 - 35 - GS DEV +DOWN
s
8
22 AWG
4 ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 22 AWG - 51 - 51 NAV A+ ON LOC

NOT APPROACH MODE
(RELEASED)
APPROACH MODE
(ENERGIZED)
AIRCRAFT POWER
9
10

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-77
NOTES
3 BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT
A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
THE ILS/GPS APPROACH DISCRETE IS REQUIRED BY SOME CDIS/ HSIS THAT ARE USED WITH THE M4C/D
4 AUTOPILOTS. IF REQUIRED, VERIFY THE SIGNAL SUPPLIED TO THE INDICATOR IS THE CORRECT
POLARITY (ACTIVE-HIGH OR ACTIVE-LOW).
THE GPS SELECT OUTPUT MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE GPS SELECT INPUT OF THE AUTOPILOT. THIS
OUTPUT IS GROUNDED IN GPS MODE, UNLESS A GPS APPROACH IS ACTIVE AND THE PILOT HAS
5 ENABLED THE A/P APPROACH OUTPUTS. THIS WILL ALLOW THE AUTOPILOT TO CAPTURE THE GPS
GLIDEPATH WHILE THE CDI IS DISPLAYING GPS INFORMATION.
ALL GAMA 429 CONFIGURATIONS OF THE GPS ARINC 429 OUTPUT PROVIDE DATA REQUIRED BY THE
6 AUTOPILOT FOR GPSS. THE ARINC 429 CONFIGURATION CANNOT BE USED.
REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.10 FOR THE CORRECT GPS SELECT CONFIGURATION SETTINGS. FOR THE
7 BENDIX/KING KFC 225 AND KAP 140 AUTOPILOTS, THE GPS SELECT CONFIGURATION SETTING MUST BE
SET TO “PROMPT.”
LRU
PXX
8
s
s
9 CONNECT TO BENDIX AUTOPILOT CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR AIRCRAFT POWER.
10 AN ACCEPTABLE RELAY IS LEACH P/N WN460-( )( )( ).

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 11 Page B-78
TO MAIN CDI
VERTICAL +UP
VERTICAL +DOWN
LATERAL -FLAG
VERTICAL +FLAG
VERTICAL -FLAG
LATERAL +FLAG
LATERAL +RIGHT
LATERAL +LEFT
AUTOPILOT
CENTURY
Century Century Century Century Century Century Century Century
I II III IV 21 31/41 2000 Triden
CD92 CD34 CD34 CD58 CD66 CD194 CD191 CD191 CD191
GTN Xi P1001
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 - - - - - 2 7 7 7 LAT DEV FLAG +
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 - - - - - 3 8 8 8 LAT DEV FLAG -
s 8 s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 13 B B - 32 4 6 6 6 LAT DEV +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 14 A A - 31 5 5 5 5 LAT DEV +RT
s
8 s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 - - - - - - 2 2 2 GS DEV FLAG +
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 - - - - - - 1 1 1 GS DEV FLAG -
s
8 s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 - - - B 45 - 4 4 4 GS DEV +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 - - - A 46 - 3 3 3 GS DEV +DOWN
s
8
ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 22 AWG - - - - 44 1 9 9 9 LOC SWITCH
Figure B-32 GTN Xi - Century Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-79
NOTES
THE CENTURY IV REQUIRES AN ISOLATION DIODE TO BE INSTALLED ON THE LOCALIZER SWITCHING
INPUT AS SHOWN BELOW. THE ILS/GPS APPROACH OUTPUT MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE LOC SWITCH
INPUT OF THE AUTOPILOT. THIS OUTPUT IS GROUNDED IN GPS MODE, UNLESS A GPS APPROACH IS
ACTIVE AND THE PILOT HAS ENABLED THE A/P APPROACH OUTPUTS. THIS WILL ALLOW THE AUTOPILOT
TO CAPTURE THE GPS GLIDEPATH WHILE THE CDI IS DISPLAYING GPS INFORMATION.
AUTOPILOT
4
GTN Xi
CENTURY
IV
P1001
CD66
ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 44 LOC SWITCH
1N4444 OR
EQUIV.
INSTALL JUMPER AS REQUIRED TO SET AK 1081 ARINC 429 SPEED TO MATCH THE GTN Xi OUTPUT
SETTING. REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
Century AK 1081
GTN Xi GPSS converter
6 P1001
CD278
5 ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 1 ARINC 429 IN A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 2 ARINC 429 IN B
s 3 SHIELD GND
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 8 NAV SELECTED
4 ARINC 429 IN A SPD SELECT
5 5 ARINC 429 IN B SPD SELECT
THE GTN Xi CAN BE CONFIGURED TO ANY GPS ARINC 429 OUTPUT TO PROVIDE GPSS DATA. REFER TO
6 SECTION 5.4.3.1 FOR CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.

LRU
PXX
8
s
s
Figure B-32 GTN Xi - Century Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-80
To Main CDI
LATERAL +FLAG
LATERAL -FLAG
LATERAL +LEFT
LATERAL +RIGHT
VERTICAL +FLAG
VERTICAL -FLAG
VERTICAL +UP
VERTICAL +DOWN
AUTOPILOT
CESSNA
300B 400B 800B 300IFCS 400IFCS 800IFCS
CA550A/ CA550A/ CA550A/ 1000IFCS
FD FD FD CA530FD CA530FD CA530FD CA1050A
J1/P4 J2/P5 J1/P4 J2/P5 J1/P4 J2/P5 J1/P5 J1/P5 J1/P5 PK44 PK41
GTN Xi P1001
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 - - - - - - - - - - NAV FLAG +
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 - - - - - - - - - - NAV FLAG -
s
6 s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 - 5 - 5 - 5 A A A 5 L/R +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 - 2 - 2 - 2 B B B 3 L/R +RT
s
6 s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 - - - - - - - - - - G/S FLAG+
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 - - - - - - - - - - G/S FLAG-
s
6 s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 18 - 18 - 18 - C C C 24 G/S +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 17 - 17 - 17 - D D D 23 G/S +DOWN
s
6
ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 22 AWG - 9 - 9 - 9 5 5 5 4 LOC SWITCH
4 4 4
MAIN VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT 32 22 AWG - - - - - - - - - 16 G/S 1 SUPER_FLAG
MAIN LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT 13 22 AWG - - - - - - - - - 12 NAV 1 SUPER_FLAG
Figure B-33 GTN Xi - Cessna Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-81
NOTES
THE ILS/GPS APPROACH DISCRETE OUTPUT MUST ALSO BE CONNECTED TO THE BACK COURSE RELAY.
4 REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR CORRECT CONNECTION OF THE VOR/LOC RELAY

5 USING AN ACTIVE LOW INPUT.
LRU PXX
6
s
s
Figure B-33 GTN Xi - Cessna Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-82
TO MAIN CDI
VERTICAL SUPERFLAG
VERTICAL + UP
VERTICAL +DOWN
LATERAL +FLAG
LATERAL -FLAG
VERTICAL -FLAG
LATERAL SUPERFLAG
VERTICAL +FLAG
LATERAL +LEFT
LATERAL +RIGHT
GTN Xi AUTOPILOT
COLLINS COMPUTER
APC 65/65B/
65C/65E/65F/ FGC-65( ) APC 65A
FYD-65 APC 65G
65H/65J
P1001 J1 J3 J1 J3 J1 J3
s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 - 54 - 54 - 54 VOR/LOC DEV +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 - 53 - 53 - 53 VOR/LOC DEV +RT
s
5 s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 - 41 - 41 - 41 GS DEV +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 - 44 - 44 - 44 GS DEV +DOWN
s
5
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 - 4 - 4 - - NAV LL FLAG+
MAIN LATERAL –FLAG OUT 69 - 1 - 1 - - NAV LL FLAG-
s
5 s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 - 12 - 12 - - GS LL FLAG+
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 - 9 - 9 - - GS LL FLAG-
s
5
s
MAIN LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT 13 - 4 - 4 - 4 NAV HL FLAG
N/C - 1 - 1 - - NAV LL FLAG-
5
MAIN VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT 32 - 12 - 12 - 12 GS HL FLAG

N/C - 9 - 9 - - GS LL FLAG-
ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 22 AWG 35 - 35 - 35 - LOC FREQ GND
Figure B-34 GTN Xi - Collins Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-83
NOTES
CONNECT EITHER THE LOW-LEVEL FLAGS OR THE SUPERFLAGS. DO NOT CONNECT BOTH SETS OF
4 FLAGS IN A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION. IF ONE SET OF FLAGS IS ALREADY WIRED, USE THE
PRE-EXISTING FLAG WIRING TO THE GTN Xi.
LRU
PXX
5
s
s
Figure B-34 GTN Xi - Collins Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-84
TO MAIN CDI
LATERAL - FLAG
VERTICAL - FLAG
LATERAL + FLAG
VERTICAL + DOWN
VERTICAL + FLAG
LATERAL + RIGHT
VERTICAL + UP
LATERAL + LEFT
GTN Xi S-TEC AUTOPILOT
System System System System System System System System System
P1001 20 30 40 50 55 55 X 60-1 60 PSS 60-2 / 65
s P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P2 P1 P2 0109 0110 0109 0110
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 - - - - 13 - 13 - 24 - 24 - NAV FLAG+
MAIN LATERAL –FLAG OUT 69 - - - - 14 - 14 - 6 - 6 - NAV FLAG-
s
12 s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 9 9 14 14 31 - 31 - 23 - 23 - L/R +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 10 10 13 13 30 - 30 - 21 - 21 - L/R +RT
s
12 s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 - - - - - 1 - 1 - 77 - 77 G/S FLAG+
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 - - - - - 2 - 2 - 58 - 58 G/S FLAG-
s
12 s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 - - - - - 18 - 18 - 46 - 46 G/S +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 - - - - - 19 - 19 - 45 - 45 G/S +DOWN
s 6 12
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 22 AWG - - - - - - - 38 - - - - GPSS STEERING
17 GPS SELECT* 74 22 AWG 42 42 26 26 - - 49 - - - - - GPS TRACK GAIN 7
17
ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 22 AWG - - - - 32 - 32 - 16 - 16 - LOC SWITCH
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 - - - - - - GPSS DATA IN A

11 - - - 36 - - - -
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 - - - - - - - 37 - - GPSS DATA IN B
s
Figure B-35 GTN Xi - S-TEC Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. 11 Page B-85
S-TEC ST-901 GPSS CONVERTER CONNECTION 8 S-TEC ST-901 GPSS CONVERTER CONNECTION 9
S-TEC ST-901 S-TEC ST-901

GTN Xi GTN Xi 10
GPSS CONVERTER GPSS CONVERTER
P1001 J3 P1001 GPSS (RELAXED) J3
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 8 ARINC DATA IN A 8 ARINC DATA IN A
11 ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 9 ARINC DATA IN B 11 9 ARINC DATA IN B
s ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29
s
TO OTHER SYSTEM REQURING

VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 22 AWG 22 GPS OVERRIDE VLOC ANNUNCIATE SIGNAL
4 NO GPSS (ENERGIZED)
10 VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 22 AWG
13
AIRCRAFT POWER
14
CONNECTION TO OTHER SYSTEMS

GPS ANNUNCIATE VLOC ANNUNCIATE
S-TEC ST-901 GPSS
GTN Xi S-TEC AUTOPILOT GTN Xi CONVERTER
J3
16
GPSS STEERING 22 GPS OVERRIDE
GPS TRACK GAIN

VLOC ANNUNCIATE SIGNAL
GPS ANNUNCIATE SIGNAL
P1001 P1001
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 22 AWG VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 22 AWG
13 13
AIRCRAFT POWER 4 AIRCRAFT POWER
14 14

Sheet 2 of 4

Rev. 11 Page B-86
NOTES
A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
IF VLOC ANNUNCIATE SIGNAL IS USED ONLY BY AUTOPILOT, THIS MAY BE CONNECTED DIRECTLY. IF
4 VLOC ANNUNCIATE SIGNAL IS REQUIRED BY OTHER SYSTEMS, CONNECT AS SHOWN IN ABOVE FIGURE
LABELED “CONNECTION TO OTHER SYSTEMS.”
CONNECT OTHER PINS THAT ARE NOT SHOWN IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S
5 INSTRUCTIONS.
IF GPS ANNUNCIATE SIGNAL IS USED ONLY BY AUTOPILOT, THIS MAY BE CONNECTED DIRECTLY. IF GPS
6 ANNUNCIATE SIGNAL IS REQUIRED BY OTHER SYSTEMS (E.G., CDI, REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR), CONNECT
AS SHOWN IN ABOVE FIGURE LABELED “CONNECTION TO OTHER SYSTEMS.”
GPS TRACK GAIN IS USED TO IMPROVE TRACKING WHEN GPS IS SELECTED ON THE CDI AND THE
7 AUTOPILOT IS IN ANALOG NAVIGATION MODE (AND ROLL STEERING IS NOT ENGAGED).
8 FOR CONVERTERS 01278-() S/N 600A AND ABOVE.
9 FOR CONVERTERS 01278-() S/N 599 AND BELOW.
10 ONLY REQUIRED FOR GTN 650Xi/750Xi.
ALL GAMA FORMAT CONFIGURATIONS OF THE GPS ARINC 429 OUTPUT PROVIDE DATA REQUIRED BY
11 THE AUTOPILOT FOR GPSS. THE ARINC 429 CONFIGURATION CANNOT BE USED. REFER TO
SECTION 5.4.3.1 FOR CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
LRU
PXX
12
s
s
13 CONNECT TO AUTOPILOT CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR AIRCRAFT POWER.
14 AN ACCEPTABLE RELAY IS LEACH P/N WN460-( )( )( ).

Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. 11 Page B-87
NOTES CONTINUED
15 NOT USED.
16 REFER TO SHEET 1 OF THIS FIGURE FOR PINOUT INFORMATION.
THE AUTOPILOT GPS TRACK GAIN INPUT MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GTN XI GPS ANNUNCIATE OUTPUT
17 (P1001-15) INSTEAD OF THE GPS SELECT OUTPUT (P1001-74). THIS IS NOT RECOMMENDED FOR NEW
INSTALLATIONS.

Sheet 4 of 4

Rev. 11 Page B-88
GTN 7XX Xi BENDIX/KING HSI
P2 (BOT)
7
P1005 KI-525A
5
SYNCHRO X 35 S HDG XMT X
SYNCHRO Y 14 V HDG XMT Y
SYNCHRO Z 56 T HDG XMT Z

s
SYNCHRO VALID INPUT (ACTIVE LOW) 33 s

6
SYNCHRO VALID INPUT (ACTIVE HI) 54 N/C
SYNCRO REF HI 36 R HDG XMT H
SYNCHRO REF LO 15 U HDG XMT C

s
s
A/C 26VAC 400 HZ HI
A/C 26VAC 400 HZ LO
Figure B-36 GTN 7XX Xi - Heading Synchro Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-89
NOTES

A DIRECTIONAL GYRO OR HSI BOOTSTRAP OUTPUT MAY BE USED TO PROVIDE SYNCHRO HEADING TO
5 THE GTN 7XX Xi. IN A DUAL GTN Xi INSTALLATION, THE GTN 7XX Xi WILL CROSSFILL SYNCHRO HEADING
TO THE OTHER GTN Xi.
EITHER THE HDG VALID IN (ACTIVE HI) OR HDG VALID IN (ACTIVE LO) SHOULD BE CONNECTED. DO NOT
6 CONNECT BOTH OF THESE INPUTS TO THE SYNCHRO.
REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.10 FOR CONFIGURATION SETTINGS. THE SYNCHRO HEADING INPUT MUST BE
7 CONFIGURED AS “CONNECTED.”
8 LOWER CASE LETTERS ARE SHOWN AS UNDERLINED UPPERCASE LETTERS.
LRU PXX
9
s
s
Figure B-36 GTN 7XX Xi - Heading Synchro Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-90
GTN Xi #1 GTN 6XX/7XX or
P1002 P1002 GTN Xi #2
5
s s
22 AWG 10 SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 4
s
NOTES
CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS MUST
3 BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES.
FOR GTN 6XX/7XX SOFTWARE PRIOR TO v5.00: GROUNDING THIS PROGRAM PIN TO THE CONNECTOR
4 BACKSHELL ALLOWS THE SYSTEM TO IDENTIFY ITSELF AS GTN 2.
Figure B-37 GTN Xi - GTN Xi or GTN 6XX/7XX Crossfill Interconnect

Rev. 11 Page B-91
GTN Xi GARMIN
GSR 56
P1002 P561
GSR AUDIO ATTENUATE* 3 22 AWG 18 ATTENUATE OUTPUT* 7
6 GSR STATUS IN* 11 22 AWG 31 STATUS DISCRETE* OUT

6 GSR REMOTE PWR* 12 22 AWG 16 IRIDIUM RMT PWR ON*
P1001 8
RS-232 IN 4 24 12 RS-232 OUT
5 RS-232 OUT 4 5 13 RS-232 IN
s s
AUDIO PANEL
4
TEL MIC AUDIO OUT HI 4 GSR 56 AUDIO IN HI
TEL MIC AUDIO OUT LO 5 GSR 56 AUDIO IN LO
(OPTIONAL)
TEL AUDIO IN HI 1 GSR 56 AUDIO OUT HI
TEL AUDIO IN LO 2 GSR 56 AUDIO OUT LO
s
NOTES
AT GTN Xi, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE
3 LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GSR 56 TO ITS CONNECTOR
BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH GSR 56 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
4 OPTIONAL AUDIO CONNECTIONS ARE REQUIRED IF THE PHONE FEATURE OF THE GSR 56 IS UTILIZED.
IF THIS RS-232 PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE
5 CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THIS PORT. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR RS-232 SETTINGS.
DEFAULT DISCRETE FUNCTION SHOWN FOR GSR STATUS AND GSR REMOTE PWR. GSR AUDIO
6 ATTENUATE ON THE GTN Xi MUST BE CONFIGURED TO AN AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT. DISCRETE
CONFIGURATION IS IN SECTION 5.
7 ATTENUATE OUTPUT* IS NOT AVAILABLE ON GSR 56 (P/N 011-01706-00).
IF A GDL 60 IS INSTALLED IN THE SYSTEM, SELECT GSR 56 INTERFACES MUST BE WIRED THROUGH THE
8 GDL 60 INSTEAD OF THROUGH THE GTN Xi. REFER TO GDL 60 PART 23 AML STC INSTALLATION MANUAL
(P/N 190-02525-10).
Figure B-38 GTN Xi - GSR 56 Interconnect

Rev. 11 Page B-92
DUAL GTN INTERCONNECT – SINGLE GDU
4
GTN Xi #1 P1004 P6202 GDU 620 PFD/MFD
VOR/ILS 429 OUT A 24 7 ARINC 429 IN 4A
NAV 1
VOR/ILS 429 OUT B 23 24 ARINC 429 IN 4B
s s
P1002
6 P6201
s s
P1001 P6202
RS-232 OUT 2 7 12 RS-232 IN 3
RS-232 GND 2 45 46 RS-232 GND 3
s s
TIME MARK OUT A 3 40 TIME MARK IN 1A
GPS 1
TIME MARK OUT B 22 41 TIME MARK IN 1B
s s
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 9 6 ARINC 429 IN 3A
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 28 23 ARINC 429 IN 3B
s s
ARINC 429 IN 2A 47 3 ARINC 429 OUT 1A

ARINC 429 IN 2B 66 20 ARINC 429 OUT 1B
s s
GTN Xi #2
4 P1001
ARINC 429 IN 2A 47
ARINC 429 IN 2B 66
s
RS-232 OUT 2 7 13 RS-232 IN 4
RS-232 GND 2 45 47 RS-232 GND 4
s s
TIME MARK OUT A 3 42 TIME MARK IN 2A GPS 2

s s
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 9 8 ARINC 429 IN 5A
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 28 25 ARINC 429 IN 5B
s s
P1002 P6201
6
s
s
P1004 P6202
VOR/ILS 429 OUT A 24 9 ARINC 429 IN 6A
VOR/ILS 429 OUT B NAV 2
23 26 ARINC 429 IN 6B
s s
Figure B-39 GTN Xi - GDU 620 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-93
NOTES
IF ONLY ONE GTN Xi IS INSTALLED, CONNECT AS SHOWN FOR GTN Xi #1. FOR GTN Xi WITH SOFTWARE
3 PRIOR TO v5.00, GROUNDING THE SYSTEM ID PROGRAM PIN TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL ALLOWS
THE SYSTEM TO IDENTIFY ITSELF AS GTN 2.
ONLY TAWS ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GTN 1 ARE DISPLAYED ON THE PFD. IN THE EVENT OF A GTN 1
4 FAILURE, TAWS ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GTN 2 (IF CONFIGURED FOR TAWS ALERTING) WILL BE
DISPLAYED ON THE PFD INSTEAD.
REFER TO THE GDU 620 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT
CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN
7 3.0 INCHES.
Figure B-39 GTN Xi - GDU 620 Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-94
SINGLE GTN AND GDL 88/88D
GTN Xi 3
TO EXISTING GDL 88/88D
P1001 AIRCRAFT WIRING P881
S
TIME MARK OUT A 3 22 TIME MARK 1A
TIME MARK OUT B 22 3 TIME MARK 1B

S S
7
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 35 22 AWG 37 AUDIO INHIBIT #1*
(GTN Xi TAWS UNITS ONLY)
P1002
4 6
S S
DUAL GTNs AND GDL 88

GTN Xi #1 3
TO EXISTING GDL 88/88D
P1001 AIRCRAFT WIRING
P881
S

S S
7
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 35 22 AWG 37 AUDIO INHIBIT #1*
(GTN Xi TAWS UNITS ONLY)
P1002
4 5 6
S S
ETHERNET IN 4A 13
ETHERNET IN 4B 14
4
ETHERNET OUT 4A 4
ETHERNET OUT 4B 5
S
GTN Xi #2 6
P1002
ETHERNET IN 3B 24
ETHERNET IN 3A 23
4
ETHERNET OUT 3B 26
ETHERNET OUT 3A 25
S
3
TO EXISTING
P1001 AIRCRAFT WIRING
S

S S
Figure B-40 GTN Xi - GDL 88/88D Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-95
NOTES
IF GTN Xi TIME MARK OUTPUT IS ALREADY CONNECTED TO AIRCRAFT WIRING, SPLICE INTO THIS WIRING
3 FOR THE CONNECTION TO THE GDL 88.
IF ETHERNET PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY ETHERNET PORT MAY BE
4 CONNECTED. REFER TO APPENDIX A FOR PINOUT INFORMATION.
5 CONNECTION MAY BE MADE TO GTN Xi #2 IN LIEU OF GTN Xi #1.
Figure B-40 GTN Xi - GDL 88/88D Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-96
TO MAIN CDI
AUTOPILOT
LATERAL SUPERFLAG
VERTICAL SUPERFLAG
LATERAL + LEFT
LATERAL + RIGHT
VERTICAL + DOWN
VERTICAL + UP
SPERRY COMPUTER
SPZ-200A/500
FZ-500
GTN Xi FD Computer
J1A J1B
P1001
s s
LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT 13 16 - LAT SUPERFLAG
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 20 - LAT DEV +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 21 - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT 32 - 7 G/S SUPERFLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 - 16 GS DEV +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 - 17 GS DEV +DN
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 22 AWG 22 - LOC FREQ GROUND
NOTES
A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL
Figure B-41 GTN Xi - Sperry Autopilot Interconnect

Rev. 11 Page B-97
GARMIN GTN Xi
FLIGHT STREAM 210
P301 P1001
3
RS-232 IN 2 9 8 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 2 8 27 RS-232 IN 1
46 SIGNAL GROUND
s
GDL 69/69A
P691
RS-232 IN 1 12 8 RS-232 OUT 1
3
RS-232 OUT 1 11 7 RS-232 IN 1
13 SIGNAL GROUND
s
s
GDL 88
P881
RS-422 IN A 4 56 RS-422 OUT 1A
RS-422 IN B 10 75 RS-422 OUT 1B
s s
4
RS-422 OUT A 13 57 RS-422 IN 1A
RS-422 OUT B 14 76 RS-422 IN 1B
s s
BT LINK
POWER INPUT 5 22 AWG (28V/14V)
22 AWG
GROUND 15
NOTES
ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THESE PORTS. REFER TO APPLICABLE MANUAL FOR
3 ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
ANY RS-422 PORT MAY BE CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THESE PORTS. REFER TO GDL 88 INSTALLATION
4 MANUAL (P/N 190-01122-00) FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
5 RS-232 PORT 1 SHOULD BE USED WHEN CONNECTING A GDL 69/69A TO THE FLIGHT STREAM 210.
6 VERIFY THE AIRCRAFT GROUND MEETS BONDING REQUIREMENTS IN SECTION 3.6.6.
Figure B-42 GTN Xi - Flight Stream 210 Interconnect

Rev. 11 Page B-98
DUAL GTN INTERCONNECT – SINGLE GDU
3 GTN Xi #1 GDU 700/1060 PFD
P1002
5 P2
s s
P1001 P3
s s
3 GTN Xi #2
P1001
s s
P1002 P2
5
s
s
NOTES
SHIELD BLOCK GROUND. AIRFRAME GROUND
ONLY TAWS ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GTN 1 ARE DISPLAYED ON THE PFD. IN THE EVENT OF A GTN 1
3 FAILURE, TAWS ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GTN 2 (IF CONFIGURED FOR TAWS ALERTING) WILL BE
DISPLAYED ON THE PFD INSTEAD.
REFER TO G500/G600 TXI PART 23 AML STC INSTALLATION MANUAL (P/N190-01717-B3) FOR COMPLETE
4 PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
6 3.0 INCHES.
Figure B-43 GTN Xi - GDU 700/1060 Interconnect

Rev. 11 Page B-99
SINGLE GTN INTERCONNECT – SINGLE G5 ADI w/GPS
GTN Xi #1 G5 (ATTITUDE INDICATOR)
P1001 1P51
3 4
RS-232 OUT 2 7 4 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 6 RS-232 GND 1
5
s s
SINGLE GTN INTERCONNECT – SINGLE G5 (HSI) w/ GPS/VHF NAVIGATOR

GTN Xi #1 G5 (HSI)
P1001 3 P51
RS-232 OUT 2 7 4 RS-232 IN 1 4
RS-232 GND 2 45 6 RS-232 GND 1
5
s s
1 CAN-H
2 CAN-L
s
P111 GMU 11 4
1 CAN-H
2 CAN-L
s
P291 GAD 29/29B

s 4
1 CAN-H
2 CAN-L
s
P292
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 9 23 ARINC 429 RX 1A (GPS)
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 28 11 ARINC 429 RX 1B (GPS)
s s
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 24 ARINC 429 TX 1A (EFIS/AIR DATA)

ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 12 ARINC 429 TX 1B (EFIS/AIR DATA)
s s
ARINC 429 IN 2A 47
6
ARINC 429 IN 2B 66
s
P1004
7
VOR/ILS 429 OUT A 24 22 ARINC 429 RX 2A (NAV)
VOR/ILS 429 OUT B 23 10 ARINC 429 RX 2B (NAV)
s s
9 CAN TERM 1
21 CAN TERM 2
Figure B-44 GTN Xi - G5 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-100
NOTES
3 IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO SPLICE WIRES TO EXISTING WIRING.
REFER TO G5 ELECTRONIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENT PART 23 AML STC INSTALLATION MANUAL

(GARMIN P/N 190-01112-10) FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF
4 OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. CAN BUS MUST BE TERMINATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE G5 STC INSTALLATION MANUAL.
CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD MUST BE LESS THAN
5 3.0 INCHES.
CONNECTION ONLY REQUIRED WHEN INTERFACING TO A NON-GARMIN AUTOPILOT. SEE THE G5 STC
6 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR DETAILS.
7 GTN Xi VOR/ILS 429 OUT CONNECTION IS ONLY APPLICABLE WITH GTN 650Xi AND GTN 750Xi.
THIS STC DOES NOT APPROVE THE USE OF EXTERNAL CDIs IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE G5 HSI EFI
8 INTERFACED TO THE SAME GTN Xi UNIT.
Figure B-44 GTN Xi - G5 Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-101
GTN Xi #1 GMC 605
(MODE CONTROLLER)
P1002 P6051
7 8
ETHERNET IN 2B 16 47 ETHERNET OUT 2B HSDB
5
s s
P1001
P6052
10
RS-232 OUT 2 7 46 RS-232 IN 4
RS-232 GND 2 45 26 RS-232 GND
s s
10 GPS 1
s s
6 LAT FLAG + 50 51 LAT FLAG +

LAT FLAG - 69 50 LAT FLAG -
s s
VERT FLAG + 51 53 VERT FLAG +

VERT FLAG - 70 52 VERT FLAG -
s s ANALOG
NAV/GPS
+ LEFT 49 59 + LEFT
+ RIGHT 68 58 + RIGHT
s s
+ UP 12 57 + UP
+ DOWN 31 56 + DOWN
s s
P6051
APPR MODE 56 35 APPR MODE (DISC 18 IN)
s s ANALOG
NAV/GPS
9 GPS SELECT 74 59 GPS SEL (DISC 25 IN)
s s
Figure B-45 GTN Xi - GFC 600 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-102
NOTES
3 3.0 INCHES.
REFER TO GFC 600 AFCS PART 23 AML STC INSTALLATION MANUAL (P/N 190-01937-00) FOR COMPLETE
4 PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
IF A SINGLE OR DUAL GTN Xi INSTALLATION WITHOUT A GARMIN GDU, ONLY CONNECT THE ETHERNET
5 (HSDB) WIRING TO GTN Xi #1.
ONLY REQUIRED IF INSTALLATION IS A SINGLE OR DUAL GTN Xi INSTALLATION WITHOUT A GARMIN GDU.
6 THE ANALOG NAV/GPS CONNECTIONS MUST BE USED BETWEEN THE GMC 605 AND GTN Xi #1. THE
GFC 600 WILL ONLY COUPLE TO NAVIGATION GUIDANCE FROM GTN Xi #1.
IF INSTALLATION HAS AN EXISTING NAV 1/NAV 2 SWITCH WITHOUT A GARMIN GDU OR EFIS, DO NOT
7 CONNECT THE ETHERNET (HSDB) WIRING TO THE GTN Xi.
9 DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.4.3.14.
10 IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO SPLICE WIRES TO EXISTING WIRES.
Figure B-45 GTN Xi - GFC 600 Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-103
Single GTN Xi with Single GDU 4X0
GTN Xi P1001 J4X02
GDU 4X0 (PFD)
RS-232 RX (MAP MX) 27 48 RS-232 TX 1 7
RS-232 TX (MAP MX) 8 47 RS-232 RX 1
RS-232 GND (MAP MX) 46 34 SIGNAL GROUND
s s
RS-232 RX (CONNEXT) 26 13 RS-232 TX 3

RS-232 TX (CONNEXT) 7 29 RS-232 RX 3
RS-232 GND (CONNEXT) 45 36 SIGNAL GROUND
s s
P292
GAD 29B
6
ARINC 429 TX A 10 23 ARINC 429 RX 1A (GPS)
ARINC 429 TX B 29 11 ARINC 429 RX 1B (GPS)
s s
ARINC 429 RX A 48 24 ARINC 429 TX 1A (EFIS/AIR DATA)

ARINC 429 RX B 67 12 ARINC 429 TX 1B (EFIS/AIR DATA)
s s
P1004
6
ARINC 429 TX A 24 22 ARINC 429 RX 2A (NAV)
5 ARINC 429 TX B 23 10 ARINC 429 RX 2B (NAV) 5
s s
Figure B-46 GTN Xi - G3X Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. 11 Page B-104
Dual GTN Xi with Single GDU 4X0 (RS-232 Interfaces)
GTN Xi #1 P1001 J4X02
GDU 4X0 (PFD)
RS-232 RX (MAP MX) 27 48 RS-232 TX 1
9 RS-232 TX (MAP MX) 8 47 RS-232 RX 1 9
RS-232 GND (MAP MX) 46 34 SIGNAL GROUND 1
s s
RS-232 RX (CONNEXT) 26 13 RS-232 TX 3

8 RS-232 TX (CONNEXT) 7 29 RS-232 RX 3 8
RS-232 GND (CONNEXT) 45 36 SIGNAL GROUND 3
s s
GTN Xi #2 P1001
RS-232 RX (MAP MX) 27 30 RS-232 TX 2

9 RS-232 TX (MAP MX) 8 14 RS-232 RX 2 9
RS-232 GND (MAP MX) 46 35 SIGNAL GROUND 2
s s

Sheet 2 of 4

Rev. 11 Page B-105
Dual GTN Xi with Single GDU 4X0 (ARINC 429 Interfaces)
GTN Xi #1 P1001 P292
GAD 29B
6
s s

s s
P1004
6
s s
GTN Xi #2 P1001
6
s s

s s
P1004
6
s s

Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. 11 Page B-106
NOTES
3 3.0 INCHES.
REFER TO G3X TOUCH EFIS PART 23 AML STC INSTALLATION MANUAL (P/N 190-02472-01) FOR COMPLETE
4 PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION AND DUAL DISPLAY INSTALLATION (PFD AND MFD). PINOUTS
OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
5 ARINC 429 TX (NAV) CONNECTION NOT APPLICABLE WHEN INTERFACING WITH GTN 625Xi/725Xi UNITS.
6 IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO SPLICE WIRES TO EXISTING WIRING.
THESE RS-232 CONNECTIONS ARE APPLICABLE TO SINGLE AND DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS WITH A
7 SINGLE GPS/VHF NAVIGATOR INSTALLED.
8 THE CONNEXT BUS MUST BE CONNECTED TO GTN Xi #1.
IN DUAL GTN Xi INSTALLATIONS, THE #1 GTN Xi MapMX BUS MUST BE CONNECTED TO A LOWER
9 NUMBERED PORT ON THE PFD THAN THE #2 GTN Xi. ONE CONNECTION IS REQUIRED TO EACH GTN Xi
MapMX BUS.

Sheet 4 of 4

Rev. 11 Page B-107
GTN Xi GI 275
P1002 P2751
ETHERNET IN A 15 46 ETHERNET 1 OUT A
ETHERNET IN B 16 47 ETHERNET 1 OUT B
ETHERNET OUT A 17 65 ETHERNET 1 IN A
1
ETHERNET OUT B 18 66 ETHERNET 1 IN B
s s
OR
P1004
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 5 25 LATERAL DEVIATION + L
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 6 64 LATERAL DEVIATION + R
s s
+TO OUT 1 50 +TO FLAG

+FROM OUT 2 32 +FROM FLAG
s s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 3 26 LATERAL + FLAG
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 4 7 LATERAL - FLAG
s s
VERTICAL + UP OUT 34 6 GS DEVIATION + UP

VERT + DOWN OUT 55 45 GS DEVIATION + DOWN
s s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 32 11 GS+ FLAG

VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 53 31 GS- FLAG
s s
OBS ROTOR H (GND) 10 13 OBS ROTOR {H/A}

OBS ROTOR C 9 71 OBS ROTOR {C}
s s
OBS STATOR D 13 29 OBS STATOR {D}

OBS STATOR E (GND) 11 68 OBS STATOR {E}
s s
OBS STATOR F 12 10 OBS STATOR {F}

OBS STATOR G (GND) 14 67 OBS STATOR {G}
s s
NOTES
HSDB IS THE RECOMMENDED CONNECTION METHOD FOR GI 275 INTERFACE TO ALLOW FULL INTENDED
FUNCTIONALITY. ANALOG CDI CONNECTIONS CAN BE USED WITH LIMITED FUNCTIONALITY. DO NOT USE
1 BOTH INTERFACES. REFER TO GI 275 PART 23 AML STC INSTALLATION MANUAL (P/N 190-02246-10) FOR
MORE INFORMATION.
Figure B-47 GTN Xi - GI 275 Interconnect

Rev. 11 Page B-108
GTN Xi #1
GPS 175 #2
P1002 P1751

s s
GTN Xi #1
GNC 355 #2
P1002 P3551
s s
GTN Xi #1
GNX 375 #2
P1002 P3752

s s
Figure B-48 GTN Xi - GPS 175/GNC 355/GNX 375 Interconnect

Rev. 11 Page B-109
SINGLE RADAR ALTIMETERS
6 GTN Xi #2
P1001 RADAR
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 FREE ALTIMETER
5 GARMIN COLLINS HONEYWELL
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 FLIGHT
s
GRA 55/
5500 RA-4500 RAC 870 ALT-4000 KRA 405B
P1 P1 P1 P1 P4051
6 GTN Xi #1
4
P1001
s
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 52 12 2 2 B ARINC 429 OUT A
5 ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 55 11 3 10 C ARINC 429 OUT B
s
DUAL RADAR ALTIMETERS

RADAR
FREE ALTIMETER
GARMIN FLIGHT COLLINS HONEYWELL
GTN Xi #1 #1
6 GRA 55/
5500 RA-4500 RAC 870 ALT-4000 KRA 405B
P1001 P1 P1 P1 P1 P4051
4
s
RADAR
GARMIN FREE COLLINS HONEYWELL ALTIMETER
GTN Xi #2 FLIGHT
6
#2
GRA 55/
5500 RA-4500 RAC 870 ALT-4000 KRA 405B
P1001 P1 P1 P1 P1 P4051
4
s
NOTES
S
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: SHIELD BLOCK GROUND. AIRFRAME GROUND
3 3.0 INCHES.
4 IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO SPLICE WIRES TO EXISTING WIRES.
5 ANY AVAILABLE ARINC 429 PORT CAN BE USED.
CONNECTION FROM RADAR ALTIMETER CAN BE MADE TO ANY GTN Xi OR GDU IN A G500/G600 TXi
6 SYSTEM AND RADAR ALTITUDE INFORMATION WILL BE CROSSFILLED TO ALL OTHER UNITS AS LONG AS
THEY ARE CONFIGURED AS RADAR ALTIMETER: PRESENT.
Figure B-49 GTN Xi - Radio Altimeter Interconnect

Rev. 11 Page B-110
B.2 GMA 35 Interconnects
GMA 35/35c *Refer to Sheet 2 for COM Wiring COM 1 Transceiver*

to GMA 35 with GTN 750 COM Garmin
Audio Panel SL 30/ GTN 635/ 400/500
3
SL 40 650/750 Series
P4002/
P1 P1003
4 P5002
P3501
COM 1 AUDIO IN HI 9 14 7 7 500 Ω COM AUDIO HI
COM 1 AUDIO LO 10 13 18 19 500 Ω COM AUDIO LO
s
7 20 18 COM MIC AUDIO LO
COM 1 MIC KEY OUT* 12 4 11 4 COM MIC KEY
COM 1 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 11 8 5 6 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s
COM 2 Transceiver*
Garmin 3
SL 30/ GTN 635/ 420W/
SL 40 650/750 430W/530W
P4002/
P1 P1003
P5002
4
s
COM 2 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 15 8 5 6 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s
COM 3 Transceiver
Garmin
SL 30/ GTN 635/ 420W/
SL 40 650/750 430W/530W
P4002/
P1 P1003
P5002
4
s
XCVR 3 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 5 8 5 6 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s
NAV 1 Receiver
Garmin
GTN GNS 430W/
SL 30
650/750 530W
37-Pin P4006/
4 P1004
Connector P5006
NAV 1 AUDIO IN HI 17 23 16 16 500 Ω VLOC AUDIO OUT HI
NAV 1 AUDIO IN LO 18 20 17 17 500 Ω VLOC AUDIO OUT LO
s
NAV 2 Receiver
Garmin
GTN GNS 430W/
SL 30
650/750 530W
37-Pin P4006/
4 P1004
Connector P5006
NAV 2 AUDIO IN HI 19 23 16 16 500 Ω VLOC AUDIO OUT HI
NAV 2 AUDIO IN LO 20 20 17 17 500 Ω VLOC AUDIO OUT LO
s
Figure B-50 GMA 35/35c - COM/NAV Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-111
GTN 750Xi Installation with Second COM 3
GMA 35/35c COM 1 Transceiver

Audio Panel Garmin (Connected as COM 2)
GTN 750Xi
P3501 P1003
COM 2 AUDIO IN HI 13 7 500 Ω COM AUDIO HI
COM 2 AUDIO LO 14 18 500 Ω COM AUDIO LO
s
20 COM MIC AUDIO LO
COM 2 MIC KEY OUT* 30 11 COM MIC KEY
COM 2 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 15 5 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s
COM 2 Transceiver
Garmin (Connected as COM 1)
GNS 530W
P5002
COM 1 AUDIO IN HI 9 7 500 Ω COM AUDIO HI
COM 1 AUDIO LO 10 19 500 Ω COM AUDIO LO
s
18 COM MIC AUDIO LO
COM 1 MIC KEY OUT* 12 4 COM MIC KEY
COM 1 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 11 6 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s
NOTES
WHEN A SECOND COM RADIO IS INSTALLED WITH THE GTN 750Xi AND GMA 35, THE GTN 750Xi SHOULD
BE CONNECTED TO THE GMA 35 COM 2 PINS AND THE OTHER RADIO SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO COM 1
PINS. THIS WILL PREVENT LOSS OF BOTH COM RADIOS IN THE EVENT THE GTN 750Xi LOSES RS-232
3 COMMUNICATION WITH THE GMA 35. A FAILSAFE CIRCUIT IN THE GMA 35 CONNECTS THE PILOT’S
HEADSET AND MICROPHONE DIRECTLY TO COM 1 IN CASE POWER TO THE GMA 35 OR RS-232
COMMUNICATION WITH THE GTN 750Xi IS LOST. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.6.6.2.2 FOR CONFIGURATION
SETTINGS. REFER TO SECTION 3.6.17 FOR ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR FAILSAFE OPERATION.
TO PREVENT COUPLED INTERFERENCE AND GROUND LOOPS FROM BEING INJECTED INTO THE AUDIO
4 INPUTS, GROUND THE SHIELDS AT ONLY ONE END. EITHER END OF THE SHIELD MAY BE GROUNDED.
Figure B-50 GMA 35/35c - COM/NAV Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-112
GMA 35/35c 5
Audio Panel P3502 AUDIO
14/28 VDC AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT POWER 8 20 AWG POWER
AIRCRAFT POWER 9 3A (14/28 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GROUND 10 20 AWG AIRCRAFT

AIRCRAFT GROUND 11 GROUND
GTN 725Xi/750Xi
3 P1001
RS-232 IN 17 7 RS-232 OUT 2
RS-232 OUT 18 26 RS-232 IN 2 6
45 RS-232 GND 2
s s
Marker Beacon
Antenna
P3501
4
MARKER ANTENNA IN HI 1
MARKER ANTENNA IN LO 2
AIRCRAFT
7 GROUND
Figure B-51 GMA 35 - Power/RS-232/Marker Beacon Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-113
NOTES
THE RS-232 CONNECTION TO THE GTN 725Xi/750Xi IS REQUIRED FOR COMMAND AND CONTROL OF THE
3 AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS. THE GTN 7XX Xi IS THE CONTROLLER FOR THE GMA 35.
4 REFER TO SECTION 4.1 FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON WIRING THE ANTENNA CONNECTIONS TO THE GMA 35.
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS SHOWN DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE CIRCUIT
5 BREAKER. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST BE READILY ACCESSIBLE TO THE PILOT.
IF THIS RS-232 PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE
6 CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THIS PORT. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR RS-232 SETTINGS.
7 VERIFY THE AIRCRAFT GROUND MEETS BONDING REQUIREMENTS IN SECTION 3.6.6.
Figure B-51 GMA 35 - Power/RS-232/Marker Beacon Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-114
GMA 35/35c Audio Panel
P3501
4
RCVR 5 AUDIO IN HI 23 PASS 5 MIC JACK
ALERT 2,3,4 AUDIO IN LO 43
s
PILOT PTC KEY IN* 16 PILOT PTC
s
6 7 MIC JACK
PILOT MIC KEY IN* 34 22 AWG
PILOT MIC AUDIO IN HI 33 PILOT PTT
PILOT MIC AUDIO IN LO 35
s
P3502 MIC JACK

COPILOT MIC KEY IN* 33 22 AWG
COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN HI 32 COPILOT PTT
COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN LO 34
s
6 7
COPILOT PTC KEY IN* 30 COPILOT PTC
s
PASS 1 MIC AUDIO IN HI 35 PASS 1 MIC JACK

PASS 1 MIC AUDIO IN LO 36
s

s

s

s
PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT L 16

PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT R 31 PILOT HEADSET
PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO 1
s
COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT L 3

COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT R 4 COPILOT HEADSET
COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO 2
s
SPEAKER AUDIO OUT HI 44 +
- COCKPIT SPEAKER
SPEAKER AUDIO OUT LO 43
s
P3501
PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT L 40
PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT R 41 PASS 1 HEADSET
PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO 42
s
PASS 2,3,4 HEADSETS 4
Figure B-52 GMA 35 - Headset Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-115
NOTES
THE RS-232 CONNECTION TO THE GTN 725Xi/750Xi IS REQUIRED FOR COMMAND AND CONTROL OF THE
3 GMA 35 AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS. THE GTN 7XX Xi IS THE CONTROLLER FOR THE GMA 35.
RCVR 5 AUDIO IN HI MAY BE CONFIGURED FOR A FIFTH PASSENGER MIC AUDIO SOURCE. REFER TO
4 SECTION 5.4.6.6.2 FOR DETAILS CONFIGURING INPUT FOR PASSENGER MIC AUDIO.
ALL HEADSET, MICROPHONE, AND MUSIC PHONE PLUGS MUST BE ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED FROM
5 GROUND. THIS MAY REQUIRE THE USE OF INSULATING WASHERS WHEN MOUNTING THE PHONE PLUGS.
ADDITIONALLY, THE SPEAKER RETURN MUST BE ISOLATED FROM GROUND.
SWITCH REQUIREMENTS:
• USE ANY OF THE OTTO P7-81612X SERIES OF SWITCHES, EXCEPT P7-816121, P7-816123, AND
P7-816124
OR FOLLOW THE GUIDELINES BELOW:
6 • ALTERNATE SWITCHES MUST MEET MIL-PRF-8805/110
• A SWITCH THAT HAS A DIFFERENT TACTILE FEEL (BUTTON SHAPE, ACTUATION PRESSURE, BUTTON
PROFILE, BUTTON BEZEL SHAPE, ETC.) THAN THE PUSH TO TALK SWITCH
• THE SWITCH MUST NOT BE RED OR AMBER
• SWITCH MUST BE MOMENTARY OR NON-LATCHING
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
• SWITCH SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN A LOCATION THAT USES A DIFFERENT HAND THAN THE PUSH-TO-
7 TALK SWITCH. IT IS ALSO ACCEPTABLE FOR THE PTC TO BE INSTALLED ON THE SAME GRIP/YOKE,
BUT IT MUST BE OPERATED WITH A SEPARATE FINGER
• SWITCH MUST BE LABELED “PTC”
Figure B-52 GMA 35 - Headset Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-116
GMA 35/35c Traffic Advisory
Audio Panel L3 COMM HONEYWELL RYAN GARMIN System
KTA 870 KTA 970 GTX GTS 8XX GDL 88
TRC 497 TRC 899 KMH 880 KMH 980 9900B 9900BX 330/33
P3501 P1 P1 J10 J10 P1 P1 P3301 P8002 P881
4
ALERT 1 AUDIO IN HI 31 92 89 20 20 3 3 15 58 4 ALERT AUDIO OUT HI
3
ALERT 1 AUDIO IN LO 32 90 91 21 21 4 4 16 59 23 ALERT AUDIO OUT LO
s
POTS Telephone
4
TEL AUDIO IN HI 25 AUDIO OUT HI
TEL AUDIO IN LO 26 AUDIO OUT LO
s
TEL MIC OUT HI 27 AUDIO IN HI
TEL MIC OUT LO 28 AUDIO IN LO
s
ALERT 4 (TEL RING)
44 TEL RING AUDIO OUT HI
AUDIO IN HI
ALERT 2,3,4 AUDIO IN LO 43 TEL RING AUDIO OUT LO
s
7
GDU 700/
GDU 620 GDU 5
1060
P2 P6201
9 29 AUDIO OUT LO
ALERT 3 AUDIO IN HI 29 10 28 AUDIO OUT HI
s
4 P1001 GTN Xi
P3502 23 AUDIO OUT LO
7
7 ALERT 2 AUDIO IN HI 15 4 AUDIO OUT HI
s
FAILSAFE WARN TO FAILSAFE AUDIO SOURCE 6

29
AUDIO IN HI s
MUSIC 2 IN LEFT 26
MUSIC 2 IN RIGHT 27 TO OTHER STEREO AUDIO SOURCE GDL 69/69A
MUSIC 2 IN LO 28 P691
s 4
MUSIC 1 IN LEFT 23 19 AUDIO OUT LEFT
MUSIC 1 IN RIGHT 24 18 AUDIO OUT RIGHT
MUSIC 1 IN LO 25 17 AUDIO OUT LO
s
Figure B-53 GMA 35/35c - Other Audio Sources Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-117
NOTES
THE GMA 35 HAS FIVE UNSWITCHED ALERT AUDIO INPUTS (ALERT 1-4 AND FAILSAFE WARN). THIS STC
3 ONLY APPROVES THE ALERT AUDIO INPUTS FOR TRAFFIC ALERTS, CLASS B TAWS ALERTS, AUTOPILOT
DISCONNECT TONES, ALTITUDE ALERTING, AND OVERSPEED WARNING.
TO PREVENT COUPLED INTERFERENCE AND GROUND LOOPS FROM BEING INJECTED INTO THE AUDIO
4 INPUTS, GROUND THE SHIELDS AT ONLY ONE END. EITHER END OF THE SHIELD MAY BE GROUNDED.
5 FOR REFERENCE ONLY. REFER TO G500/G600 STC INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR MORE DETAIL.
FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI IS HEARD DURING NORMAL OPERATION AS A FIFTH ALERT INPUT. DURING
FAILSAFE MODE, BOTH FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI AND COM 1 AUDIO INPUT ARE CONNECTED TO THE
PILOT HEADSET LEFT OUTPUT. DURING THIS TIME, THE OUTPUT OF THE COM 1 RADIO AND THE OUTPUT
OF THE DEVICE CONNECTED TO FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI WILL BECOME SHORTED TOGETHER,
6 POTENTIALLY CAUSING DAMAGE OR INTERFERENCE. IF THE FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI IS USED,
INSTALL SUMMING RESISTORS IN SERIES BETWEEN THESE SOURCES AND THE INPUTS TO THE AUDIO
PANEL TO PROTECT THE OUTPUTS FROM DAMAGE. A TYPICAL VALUE FOR MIXING RESISTORS IS
390 Ω ¼ W. THE AUDIO LEVELS OF EXISTING AUDIO SOURCES WILL HAVE TO BE RE-EVALUATED AFTER
MIXING RESISTORS ARE INSTALLED.
7 AIRCRAFT.
Figure B-53 GMA 35/35c - Other Audio Sources Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 11 Page B-118
GMA 35/35c
Audio Panel P3501
COM ACTIVE* OUT 24 4
P3502 3
MARKER HI SENS* IN 13
PA MUTE* OUT 12 5
PASS ICS KEY* IN 14
PA MODE SELECTED* OUT 19 6
COM CYCLE* IN 20
3
CLEARANCE RECORDER
22
PLAYBACK* IN
NOTES
THESE SWITCHES ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. INSTALLATION OF THESE SWITCHES IS NOT
3 COVERED BY THIS STC.
THIS OUTPUT MAY BE USED BY OTHER SYSTEMS TO MUTE APPLICABLE AUDIO SOURCES WHEN COM
4 RECEIVE IS ACTIVE. REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR THESE SYSTEMS FOR
MORE DETAIL.
THIS OUTPUT MAY BE USED BY EXTERNAL PA SYSTEMS TO MUTE THE PA WHEN PA MODE IS ACTIVE AND
5 THE PTT KEY IS PRESSED. REFER TO THE EXTERNAL PA SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION FOR MORE DETAIL.
THIS OUTPUT MAY BE USED BY EXTERNAL PA SYSTEMS TO ENABLE THE EXTERNAL PA SYSTEM WHEN
6 PA MODE IS ACTIVE. REFER TO THE EXTERNAL PA SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION FOR MORE DETAIL.
Figure B-54 GMA 35/35c - Discrete Connect (Optional)

Rev. 11 Page B-119
APPENDIX C EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION
C.1 GTN Xi ............................................................................................................................................ C-2

C.1.1 Audio Panel ............................................................................................................................... C-2
C.1.2 Air Data Computer .................................................................................................................... C-3
C.1.3 Altitude Serializer or Fuel/Air Data .......................................................................................... C-4
C.1.4 Autopilot.................................................................................................................................... C-5
C.1.5 EFIS Displays............................................................................................................................ C-7
C.1.6 EHSI ........................................................................................................................................ C-14
C.1.7 IRU/AHRS .............................................................................................................................. C-15
C.1.8 Transponder............................................................................................................................. C-16
C.1.9 NAV Indicator......................................................................................................................... C-18
C.1.10 Weather, Traffic, and Terrain.................................................................................................. C-19
C.1.11 DME ........................................................................................................................................ C-20
C.1.12 CDI/HSI Source Selection Annunciators ................................................................................ C-21
C.1.13 TAWS Annunciator Panels ..................................................................................................... C-22
C.1.14 Multifunction Displays............................................................................................................ C-23
C.1.15 Interface Adapters ................................................................................................................... C-23
C.1.16 Synchro Heading Sources ....................................................................................................... C-24
C.1.17 Weather Radar......................................................................................................................... C-24
C.1.18 Iridium Transceiver ................................................................................................................. C-25
C.1.19 ADS-B Traffic and FIS-B Weather Sources ........................................................................... C-25
C.1.20 Flight Stream ........................................................................................................................... C-25
C.1.21 Flight Stream 210/510 Equipment Compatibility ................................................................... C-26
C.1.22 Radio Altimeter ....................................................................................................................... C-26
C.2 GMA 35 ......................................................................................................................................... C-27
C.2.1 COM Radios............................................................................................................................ C-27
C.2.2 NAV Radios ............................................................................................................................ C-27
C.2.3 Other Audio Sources ............................................................................................................... C-27
C.3 GDL 60 .......................................................................................................................................... C-28

Rev. 11 Page C-1
C.1 GTN Xi
The equipment listed in this appendix is compatible with the GTN Xi system when configured as described
herein. For detailed configuration information, refer to Section 5.
C.1.1 Audio Panel

Audio panels not listed below can still be approved under this GTN AML STC if all of the following
conditions are met:
 The installation of the audio panel was previously FAA-approved.
 The VHF COM audio and VHF NAV audio (if applicable) must be verified as described in
Section 6.2.4 and Section 6.2.4.1.
 The audio panel must have an unswitched audio input that is used for the GTN Xi audio.
Table C-1 Compatible Audio Panels

Mfr Model Data Format Notes
SL10, SL10MS,
SL10M, SL10S,
SL15, SL15M Analog Audio
GMA 340, GMA 347
GTN Xi RS-232 format must be configured for
GMA 35 “GMA Format 1”.
(P/N 011-02299-00)
GMA SW v4.20A or later is required.
Garmin Analog Audio
GMA 35
RS-232
(P/N 011-02299-20)
GMA SW v4.21C or later is required.
GMA 35c
(P/N 011-02299-40)
GTN Xi RS-232 format must be configured for
GMA 350/350H/ Analog Audio
“GMA Format 2”.
350C RS-232
GMA SW v4.20A/4.21C or later is required.
KMA 24,
Honeywell
KMA 24H-70/71, Analog Audio
(Bendix/King)
KMA 26, KMA 28
PMA 6000
PS Engineering PMA 7000 Series Analog Audio
PMA 8000 Series

Rev. 11 Page C-2
C.1.2 Air Data Computer
Air data computers not listed below can still be approved under this GTN AML STC if all of the following
conditions are met:
 The air data computer provides the following labels:
203 – Pressure Altitude
204 – Barometric-Corrected Altitude
210 – True Airspeed
 The interface check for the altitude encoder described in Section 6.1.10 must be successfully
completed.
 The installation of the air data computer was previously FAA-approved.
 The air data computer is TSO-approved.
 The connections to the GTN Xi must utilize shielding wiring of the type specified in this manual.
Shields must be terminated on the GTN Xi side to connector shield block ground and on the air
data computer side in accordance with the air data computer installation data. If the air data
computer installation data does not specify a shielding method, then terminate the shield at the air
data computer using the guidelines provided in Section 3.6.12.3.
Table C-2 Compatible Air Data Computers

Mfg Model Data Format Configuration
B&D 90004-003 ARINC 429 Airdata, low speed
Honeywell KDC 281 ARINC 429 Airdata, low speed
(Bendix/King) KDC 481 ARINC 429 Airdata, low speed
Insight TAS 1000 RS-232 FADC Format 1

Rev. 11 Page C-3
C.1.3 Altitude Serializer or Fuel/Air Data
Altitude serializers/encoders not listed below can still be approved under this GTN AML STC if all of the
following conditions are met:
 The altitude serializer/encoder is TSO-approved.
 The installation of the altitude serializer/encoder was previously FAA-approved.
 The interface check for the altitude serializer/encoder described in Section 6.1.10 must be
successfully completed.
Shields must be terminated on the GTN Xi side to connector shield block ground and on the
altitude serializer or fuel/air data installation data. If the altitude serializer or fuel/air data
installation data does not specify a shielding method, then terminate the shield at the Altitude
Serializer or Fuel/Air Data using the guidelines provided in Section 3.6.12.3.
Table C-3 Compatible Altitude Serializers and Fuel/Air Data Models

Mfg Model Data Format Configuration
ACK Technologies A-30 (Mod 8 and above) RS-232 Altitude Format 1
FC-10 RS-232 Fuel Format 1
ARNAV
FT-10 RS-232 Fuel Format 1
Electronics International FP-5L RS-232 Fuel Format 1
Garmin GTX 327 RS-232 Altitude Format 1
Icarus Instruments 3000 RS-232 Altitude Format 1
JP Instruments EDM-700 RS-232 Fuel Format 2
Sandia SAE 5-35 RS-232 Altitude Format 1
833811-00 (AIS-380) RS-232 FADC Format 1
8800T RS-232 Altitude Format 3
9000T [1] RS-232 Altitude Format 3
9200T [1] RS-232 Altitude Format 3
Airdata Format 1 or
F/ADC-200 [2] RS-232
FADC Format 1
Shadin
Airdata Format 1 or
F/ADC-2000 [2] RS-232
FADC Format 1
91204XT(38)D (Miniflo-L) RS-232 Fuel Format 2
91053XP (Digiflo-L) RS-232 Fuel Format 2
91053XT-D (Digiflo-L) RS-232 Fuel Format 2
912802-( ) (Digidata) RS-232 Fuel Format 2
IA-RS232-X RS-232 Altitude Format 1
Trans-Cal Industries
SSD120 RS-232 Altitude Format 1
Notes:
[1] This source must not be connected to the GTN Xi if the GTN Xi is the pressure altitude source
for a Mode S transponder.
[2] Configure the Shadin F/ADC to Garmin G Format to provide fuel and air data to the GTN Xi.
Garmin G Format should only be configured if the GTN Xi is set to FADC Format 1.

Rev. 11 Page C-4
C.1.4 Autopilot
Use Appendix Section C.1.4 to determine whether an autopilot can be directly wired to the GTN Xi and
the interface is approved under this STC. This STC imposes no additional vertical coupling limitations for
installations when the autopilot is wired to an EFIS/EHSI rather than directly to the GTN Xi. Some EFIS/
EHSI may not be capable of coupling vertical guidance to the autopilot. Autopilots that will be coupled to
GPS for vertical guidance during approaches must be specifically listed in Table C-4.
Autopilots not listed below can still be approved for lateral coupling under the GTN AML STC if all of the
following conditions are met:
 The installation of the autopilot was previously FAA-approved.
 All interfaces between the GTN Xi and the autopilot are analog.
 The installation must use existing navigation signals that interface the autopilot to a standard VHF
navigation receiver (i.e., CDI/HSI L/R).
 A successful in-air flight check must be completed prior to returning the aircraft to service.
 The AFMS is properly completed, limiting the GPS to lateral coupling only (LNAV), unless the
interface to the autopilot is listed as an approved interface in the G500/G600 AML STC.
These autopilots are limited to those operations for which they were previously FAA-approved when
interfaced with the other TC’d or STC’d navigation units (i.e., if the previous unit was installed and
approved for coupled VOR, ILS, LOC, BC, and GPS LNAV approaches, this upgraded installation will
also be approved for these operations; however, GPS and RNAV approaches with GPS/SBAS-based
vertical guidance (LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP+V, and LPV modes on the GTN Xi) are not authorized when
coupled to the autopilot).
Table C-4 Compatible Autopilots
Mfr. Model Data Format Notes
KAP 100/140/150,
Analog Deviation, Discrete [1] (KAP 140)
Honeywell KFC 150/200/250/300
(Bendix/King) Analog Deviation, Discrete, [1] (KFC 225)
KFC 225/275/325
ARINC 429 GPSS [2]
I / II / III / IV, 21/31/41,
Analog Deviation, Discrete
Century 2000, Trident
AK 1081 ARINC 429 GPSS [2] [3]
System 20/30/40/50/
55/60-1/60-2/60 Analog Deviation, Discrete
PSS/65
S-TEC
Analog Deviation, Discrete,
System 55X [2]
ARINC 429 GPSS
ST-901 ARINC 429 GPSS [2] [3]
300B/400B/800B (CA550A/FD computer)
Cessna 300 IFCS/400 IFCS/ Analog Deviation, Discrete 400A Nav-o-matic (CA530FD
800 IFCS/1000 IFCS computer)
Bendix M4C, M4D Analog Deviation, Discrete
Collins APS 65 ( )
Sperry SPZ 200A/500 Analog Deviation, Discrete
GFC 500 ARINC 429, RS-232 [4]
Garmin HSDB, Analog Deviation,
GFC 600 [5] [6] [7]
Discrete

Rev. 11 Page C-5
Notes:
[1] GPS Select configuration should be set to “Prompt.”
[2] Configure output to any ARINC or GAMA format.
[3] GPSS Roll Steering converter.
[4] The GFC 500 system requires the G5 to be installed per Garmin G5 Electronic Flight
Instrument Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual (P/N 190-01112-10) as a prerequisite. Refer
to GFC 500 Autopilot with Electronic Stability and Protection Part 23 AML STC Installation
Manual (P/N 190-02291-00) for details.
[5] If the GTN Xi is interfaced to a non-Garmin EFIS, then do not connect the HSDB interface
from the GTN Xi to the GMC 605. Only connect the analog navigation signals from the EFIS to
the GMC 605. Refer to GFC 600 Automatic Flight Control System Part 23 AML STC
Installation Manual (P/N 190-01937-00) for details.
[6] GTN Xi interface to GFC 600 installation requirements:
 RS-232 Out (MapMX Format 1) and Time Mark Out.
 In a single or dual GTN Xi installation with a Garmin G500/G600 system, connect
GTN Xi #1 to the GMC 605 via HSDB.
 In a single or dual GTN Xi installation with a Garmin G500/G600 TXi system, connect the
GMC 605 to the GDU 700/1060 via HSDB.
 In a single or dual GTN Xi installation with no EFIS display, connect GTN Xi #1 to the GMC
605 via HSDB and the analog interfaces. For installations without a Garmin GDU or G5,
the GFC 600 must disable VNAV on the GMC 605.
[7] GMC 605 SW v2.21 or later is required.

Rev. 11 Page C-6
C.1.5 EFIS Displays
Table C-5 Avidyne EFIS Display
Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes
Avidyne EXP5000 P/N 700-00006-() ARINC 429 [1] [2]
EXP5000 Configuration Settings:
GPS 1: GARMIN 430/530 ON ARINC 1
GPS 2: GARMIN 430/530 ON ARINC 3
VHF 1: GARMIN 430/530 ON ARINC 2
VHF 2: GARMIN 430/530 ON ARINC 4
GTN Xi Configuration Settings:

ARINC 429 Setup: IN: Low, EFIS Format 4
OUT: Low, GAMA Format 2
VOR/LOC/GS Setup: ARINC 429 Config: Tx Speed: Low
SDI: VOR/ILS 1 (for NAV 1)
VOR/ILS 2 (for NAV 2)
Notes:
[1] PFD software P/N 530-00194-( ) or later is required.
[2] Capable of Source Selection annunciation that meets the requirements in Section 3.6.11.1.2.

Rev. 11 Page C-7
Table C-6 Honeywell (Bendix/King) EFIS Display
Honeywell
EFS 40/50 (SG 465) ARINC 429 [1] [2] [3]
(Bendix/King)
EFS 40/50 Configuration Settings: (software 1101 or later)
FMS VNAV: 2: FEET OR ANGLE
VARIABLE LNAV: LNAV 1/2: VAR
5: KLN 90-GPS (KLN 90-GPS must be used for vertical GPS deviation to be
FMS #1 / #2:
displayed correctly)

EFS 40/50 Configuration Settings: (software 1501 or later)
FMS #1 / #2: 7: GAM 429-GPS
LNAV X-TRACK
SCALE FACTOR: LNAV 1 / 2: VAR (as applicable)
VNAV DEVIATION
SCALE FACTOR: LNAV 1 / 2: VAR (as applicable)
LNAV VERT APR
COUPLING TO AFCS: LNAV 1 / 2: YES (as applicable)
L/VNAV VERT APR
LP VERT APR
LPV VERT APR
LNAV SELECT OUT: 1: EN ROUTE ONLY (Setting does not matter if this
discrete output is not used in the installation)

Notes:
[1] SG 465 software 1101 or later is required. Vertical guidance is provided for GPS approaches.
SG 465 software 1201 or later will provide air data to the GTN Xi. This setting allows the use of
EFIS course pointer to set OBS.
[2] SG 465 software 1501. Vertical guidance is provided for GPS approaches. This setting does
not allow the use of EFIS course pointer to set OBS.

Rev. 11 Page C-8
Table C-7 Garmin G500/G600 EFIS Display
Garmin GDU 620 ARINC 429, RS-232, HSDB [1] [2] [3]
GDU 620 Configuration Settings:
ARINC 429 INPUT: IN 3: High, GPS1
IN 4: Low, NAV1
ARINC 429 OUTPUT: OUT 1: Low, GPS NAVIGATOR
RS-232: CHNL 3: GPS1
SYSTEM GPS1: (PRESENT) TYPE:
UNIT TYPE
CONFIGURATION:
625Xi GPS 400W
INTERFACING
SYSTEMS 635Xi GNC 420W
650Xi GNS 430W
725Xi GNC 500W
750Xi GNS 530W
NAV1: (PRESENT) TYPE:

UNIT TYPE
650Xi GNS 430W
750Xi GNS 530W

Interfaced Equipment GDU #1: Present Settings: GDU 620
ARINC 429 Setup: IN: Low, GDU Format 1
OUT: High, GAMA Format 1
SDI: LNAV 1 (for GPS 1)
LNAV 2 (for GPS 2)
RS-232 Setup: OUT: MapMX Format 1
Main Indicator (Analog)
CDI: CDI Key: Enabled (for single GDU install)
(i.e., Main CDI/VDI outputs can be GPS or VLOC)
Disabled (for Dual GDU install)
(i.e., Main CDI/VDI outputs can only be GPS)
Notes:
[1] GDU 620 settings are for reference only. To ensure all configuration items for the GDU 620 are
set in accordance with the G500/G600 Part 23 STC, refer to G500/G600 AML STC Installation
Manual (Garmin P/N 190-00601-06).
[2] GDU 620 software v7.30 or later is required for the GDU 620 to receive VNAV features from a
GTN Xi.

Rev. 11 Page C-9
Table C-8 Garmin G5 Display
[1] [2] [3]
Garmin G5 (GAD 29) ARINC 429, RS-232
[4] [5]
G5 Configuration Settings:
RS-232 Configuration: Input Format: MapMX
ARINC 429
Output 1: EFIS/Airdata 1 (SDI 1)
Configuration:
Input 1: Garmin GPS (SDI 1)
Input 2: Garmin VOR/ILS (SDI 1)
(Only set VOR/ILS input
for GTN 650Xi/750Xi)

ARINC 429 Setup: IN (any available port): Low, EFIS Format 2
IN (any available port): Low, GAD Format 1
OUT (any available port): Low, GARMIN 429
RS-232 Setup: OUT: MapMX Format 1
CDI: CDI Key: Enabled
Selected Course for GPS: Allowed
Selected Course for VLOC: Allowed
V-Flag State: Normal
VOR/LOC/GS Setup: Nav Radio: Enabled
(GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)
ARINC 429 Config: Tx Speed: Low
Notes:
[1] G5 settings are for reference only. To ensure all configuration items for the G5 are set in
accordance with the G5 STC, refer to Garmin G5 Electronic Flight Instrument Part 23 AML
STC Installation Manual (Garmin P/N 190-01112-10).
[2] For installations where the G500/G600 system (i.e., GDU 620) is interfaced to the
G5/GAD 29(B), the only direct connection from the GTN Xi to the G5/GAD 29(B) may be via
an optional RS-232 MapMX interface, which provides the G5 with attitude GPS data (refer to
Figure B-44, Sheet 1). Thus, the GTN Xi to GDU 620 configuration settings in Table C-7 must
be used.
[3] The ARINC 429 configuration settings between the G5 and GTN Xi are only necessary when a
GAD 29(B) is installed (refer to Figure E-44, Sheet 2). If a G500/G600 GDU 620 is present and
interfaced to the GAD 29(B), then the GTN Xi ARINC 429 interface must not be connected to
the GAD 29(B).
[4] G5 software v5.50 or later is required for G5 to receive VNAV features from a GTN Xi.

Rev. 11 Page C-10
Table C-9 Garmin G500/G600 TXi EFIS Display
[1] [2] [3]
Garmin GDU 700/1060 HSDB
[4] [5]
GDU 700/1060 Configuration Settings:
GDU 1/2/3/4 Interfaces:
GPS 1 GTN 6XX or GTN 7XX
NAV 1 GTN 650 or GTN 750

Interfaced Equipment GDU #1: Present Settings: GDU TXi
CDI: CDI Key: Enabled/Disabled [6]
Notes:
[1] GDU 700/1060 settings are for reference only. To ensure all configuration items for the
GDU 700/1060 are set in accordance with the G500/G600 TXi Part 23 STC, refer to
G500/G600 TXi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual (Garmin P/N 190-01717-B3).
[2] GDU 700/1060 software v3.01 or later is required.
[3] Set each GPS/NAV format for the number of GTN Xi units present for each GDU. Set GDU TXi
on the GTN Xi for each interfaced GDU.
[4] For installations with a TXi GDU 700/1060 interfaced to the G5/GAD 29( ), the ARINC 429
interfaces between the GTN Xi and G5/GAD 29( ) (refer to Figure B-44, Sheet 1) may be
retained for reversionary purposes.
[6] For GDU 700/1060 software prior to v3.10, set CDI Key to Disabled. For GDU 700/1060
software v3.10 or later, set CDI Key to Enabled to enable localizer autoswitch.

Rev. 11 Page C-11
Table C-10 G3X EFIS Display
Garmin G3X ARINC 429, RS-232 [1] [2]
G3X Configuration Settings:
RS-232 Config: Serial Port ‘x’: MapMX (PFD)
Serial Port ‘y’: GTN Connext 2 (PFD)
(For dual GTN Xi, configure above for GTN Xi #1
and below for GTN Xi #2)
Serial Port ‘z’: MapMX (PFD or MFD) for GTN Xi #2
Note: Letters denote the connected ports
ARINC 429 Config: 429 Output 1: EFIS/Airdata Format 1 and NAV 1
429 Input 1: Garmin GPS and NAV 1
429 Input 2: Garmin VOR/ILS and NAV 1
(Only set VOR/ILS input for GTN 650Xi/750Xi)
(For dual GTN Xi, configure above for GTN Xi #1
and below for GTN Xi #2)
EFIS/Airdata Format 1 and NAV
429 Output 2:
2
429 Input 3: Garmin GPS and NAV 2 for GTN Xi #2
429 Input 4: Garmin VOR/ILS and NAV 2 for GTN Xi #2
(Only set VOR/ILS input for GTN 650Xi/750Xi)
RS-232 Config: RS-232 x/z Input/Output: MapMX Format 2
RS-232 y Input/Ouput: Connext Format 2
(When Connext is used, GTN Xi #1 only)
Note: Letters denote the connected ports
ARINC 429 Config: ARINC 429 IN 1: Low, GDU Format 2
ARINC 429 OUT 1: Low, Garmin 429
SDI: LNAV 1 (for GTN Xi #1)
LNAV 2 (for GTN Xi #2)
Main Indicator (Analog): Selected Course for VLOC: Ignored

VOR/LOC/GS Config: Nav Radio: Enabled (GTN 650Xi/750Xi only)
ARINC 429 Configuration: Tx Speed: Low
Notes:
[1] In dual GTN Xi installations, GTN Xi #1 must be connected to a lower number RS-232 port
than GTN Xi #2. In dual G3X installations, GTN Xi #2 may be connected to any port on the
MFD.

Rev. 11 Page C-12
Table C-11 GI 275 EFIS Display
Garmin GI 275 HSDB [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
GI 275 Configuration Settings:
GI 1/2/3/4/5/6 Interfaces:
GPS 1/2: GTN 6XX or GTN 7XX
NAV 1/2: GTN 650 or GTN 750
Course Selection: Enabled/
Disabled
Transmit Selected Course to
the GTN: Enabled/Disabled
Interfaced Equipment:
GI 275: Present
Select IDs: (select GI 275
Unit IDs in system)
Main Indicator (Analog):
CDI Key: Disabled

Notes:
[1] GI 275 settings are for reference only. Refer to GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual.
[2] Set each GPS/NAV format for the number of GTN Xi units present for each GI 275. Select the
number of interfaced GI 275s under “Select IDs” on each GTN Xi.
[3] The GI 275 is capable of Source Selection annunciation if configured to display the HSI or CDI
page.
[4] If Course Selection is disabled, configure CRS A429 port and speed. Disabling Course
Selection allows the GI 275 to slave to the Selected Course from an external source. Disable
this setting when an external system is providing the primary Selected Course data. Enable
when the GI 275 is the primary source for selected course data.
[5] Disabling the Transmit Selected Course to the GTN setting will prevent the course selected on
the GI 275 from crossfilling to the GTN Xi. Disable this setting when the GI 275 has Course
Selection enabled but is not the primary HSI/CDI interfaced to the GTN Xi.

Rev. 11 Page C-13
C.1.6 EHSI
Table C-12 Compatible EHSIs
Manufacturer Model Data Format Configuration Notes
The GI 275 must be
configured to display
the HSI page. Refer
Garmin GI 275 HSDB to GI 275 Part 23
AML STC Installation
Manual for more
information.
GPS lateral and
Analog GAMA Format 3, vertical guidance is
SN 3308
ARINC 429 low speed provided using the
analog interface.
Sandel Vertical guidance is
provided for GPS
SN3500/4500 ARINC 429 GAMA Format 3 approaches. Software
v3.06 or later is
required for SN3500.
SINGLE GTN Xi INSTALLATIONS:
SN 3308 Configuration Settings:
LNAV 1/2 SELECT: GNS 430 (ARINC) ANNUN: SERIAL RELAY SENSE: NAV-2 OFF
COURSE: OBS/LEG GPS-1: OFF
DEVIATION: SERIAL GPS-2: OFF
OBS ROT: NORMAL CDI SRC SEL: OFF
OBS CAL: 000.0 RCVR 1/2: OFF
NAV/ILS/DME-1/2 ENABLE: YES
PORT: 429 PORT-3 (For software version prior to 2.30, NAV 1/2
must temporarily be set to “ANALOG” and ILS must be set
to “VALID LOW” for proper operation of the VDI).
DUAL GTN Xi INSTALLATIONS:
SN 3308 Configuration Settings:
LNAV 1/2 SELECT: GNS 530 (ARINC) NAV CHANGE: NAV-1 ENABLE: YES
SN 3500/4500 Configuration Settings:

LNAV 1/2 SELECT: GNS 530 (ARINC) ANNUN: SERIAL
LAT DV: SERIAL
VERT DV: SERIAL
VERT ENA: SERIAL
NAV/ILS/DME-1/2: NAV TYPE: 429 TO

Rev. 11 Page C-14
C.1.7 IRU/AHRS
IRU/AHRS not listed below can still be approved under the GTN AML STC if all of the following
conditions are met:
 The IRU/AHRS provides ARINC 429 labels 314 and/or 320.
 The IRU/AHRS is TSO-approved.
 The installation of the IRU/AHRS is previously FAA-approved.
 The checkout procedure described in Section 6.1.11 must be completed successfully before
approving the aircraft for return to service.
Shields must be terminated on the GTN Xi side to connector shield block ground and on the IRU/
AHRS side in accordance with the IRU/AHRS installation data. If the IRU/AHRS installation data
does not specify a shielding method, then terminate the shield at the IRU/AHRS using the
guidelines provided in Section 3.6.12.3.
Table C-13 Compatible IRU/AHRSs

Manufacturer Model Data Format Configuration
Collins AHS-85E ARINC 429 INS/IRU, high speed

Rev. 11 Page C-15
C.1.8 Transponder
Table C-14 Compatible Transponders
GTX 32
RS-232 GTX software v2.10 or later.
GTX 327
GTX 328
GTX 33/33D
GTX 33/33D with ES RS-232 GTX software v6.11 or later.
GTX 330/330D
Garmin
GTX 330/330D with ES
GTX 335/335D/335R/ GTX software v2.02 or later is
RS-232
335DR required.
GTX 345/345D/345R/ RS-232 GTX software v2.02 or later is

345DR HSDB required.

GTX 32: GTX MODE C #1 OR #2
GTX 327: GTX MODE C #1 OR #2 (GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 327)
AVIATION OUTPUT 1 - OUTPUT (NO GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 327) TO
SEND GPS GROUNDSPEED
ALTITUDE FORMAT 1 - INPUT OPTIONAL (NO GTN Xi CONTROL OF
GTX 327) TO RECEIVE PRESSURE ALTITUDE
GTX 328: GTX MODE S #1 OR #2
GTX 33/33D: GTX (MODE S OR W/TIS) #1 OR #2
GTX 33/33D with ES: GTX (MODE S+ OR W/TIS+) #1 OR #2
GTX 330/330D: GTX (MODE S OR W/TIS) #1 OR #2 (GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 330)
PANEL GTX W/TIS #1 OR #2 (NO GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 330)
ADS-B (NO CONTROL OF GTX 330 AND NO TIS)
GTX 330/330D with ES: GTX (MODE S+ OR W/TIS+) #1 OR #2 (GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 330)
PANEL GTX W/TIS+ #1 OR #2 (NO GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 330)
ADS-B + FORMAT 1 (NO CONTROL OF GTX 330 AND NO TIS)
GTX 335/335D/335R/ GTX Mode S+ #1 or #2 or GTX w/TIS+ #1 or #2 (GTN Xi CONTROL OF
335DR: GTX 335/335D/335R/335DR)
Panel GTX W/TIS+ #1 or #2 (No Control of GTX 335)
GTX 345/345D/345R/ RS-232: GTX Mode S+ #1 or #2 (GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 345/345D/
345DR: 345R/345DR.
HSDB: Interfaced Equipment ADS-B In Source: GTX #1 or #2

Rev. 11 Page C-16
Transponder RS-232 Port Settings:
GTX 32: IN: REMOTE
OUT: REMOTE
GTX 33: IN: REMOTE
OUT: REMOTE (FOR NON-TIS) OR REMOTE W/TIS (FOR TIS
UNITS)
GTX 327 (GTN Xi CONTROL): IN: REMOTE
OUT: REMOTE
GTX 327 (NO GTN Xi CONTROL): IN: GPS
OUT: ICARUS ALT (WHEN THE GTX 327 IS NOT BEING
CONTROLLED BY THE GTN Xi, CONNECT THE OUTPUT OF
THE TRANSPONDER TO THE GTN Xi AND USE ICARUS ALT AS
THE OUTPUT FORMAT ONLY IF THE TRANSPONDER IS USED
TO SUPPLY PRESSURE ALTITUDE TO THE GTN Xi).
GTX 328: IN: REMOTE
OUT: REMOTE
GTX 330: IN: REMOTE
OUT: REMOTE
GTX 335/335D/335R/335DR: IN: REMOTE
OUT: REMOTE
GTX 345/345D/345R/345DR: IN: REMOTE
OUT: REMOTE
NOTE
When the GTN Xi is interfaced with a GTX 32, GTX 33, or GTX 33D installed using
STC SA01473SE, then the limitation in STC SA01473SE requiring use of the GNS 480
(CNX 80) is no longer applicable and all configuration and operation functions of the
GNS 480 are replaced by the GTN Xi.

Rev. 11 Page C-17
C.1.9 NAV Indicator
Interface to NAV indicators not listed below can be approved under the GTN AML STC if all of these
conditions are met. Refer to Section 5.4.3.5 for OBS resolver calibration.
 The NAV indicator interface to the GTN Xi conforms to the limitations in Section 2.
 The OBS resolver is calibrated and correctly functioning when performing the self-test sequence.
 The NAV indicator vertical deviation, horizontal deviation, and flags correctly respond when
performing the self-test sequence.
 The switching functionality correctly operates if the NAV indicator is switched between display of
GPS or VLOC. Refer to Section 6.1.4.
 The NAV indicator function works with the GTN Xi during applicable ground and flight checkout
procedures prior to returning the aircraft to service.
 The connections to the GTN Xi must use shielding wiring of the type specified in Appendix B.
 Shields must be terminated on the GTN Xi side to connector shield block ground and on the NAV
indicator side in accordance with the NAV indicator installation data.
 If the NAV indicator installation data does not specify a shielding method, terminate the shield at
the NAV indicator. Refer to Section 3.6.12.3.
 The NAV indicator meets TSO-C34( ), -C36( ), and -C40( ).
Table C-15 Compatible NAV Indicators

Honeywell KI 202, KI 203, KI 204, KI 206, KI 208/A, KI 209/A,
Analog [1]
(Bendix/King) KI 525A, KPI 552/B, KPI 553/A/B
Century NSD 360A, NSD 1000 Analog [1]
331A-6P, 331A-9G, PN101 (331A-3F/3G),
Collins Analog [1]
IND-351D
Garmin GI 102/A, GI 106/A Analog [1]
Mid Continent MD222-402, MD222-406, MD200-302/303/306/307 Analog [1]
Sperry RD 444, RD 550A, RD 650 Analog [1]
S-TEC ST 180 Analog [1]
Notes:
[1] Interfacing to the Collins IND-351 (P/N 622-2083-001) is not covered by this STC.

Rev. 11 Page C-18
C.1.10 Weather, Traffic, and Terrain
Table C-16 Compatible Weather, Traffic, and Terrain Models
GDL 69/69A
GDL 69/69A HSDB software v4.02
or later.
GTX 330/33/330D/
Refer to Appendix
33D (with or without RS-232
Section C.1.8
ES)
HSDB [2]
A429 OUT: Traffic Format
Garmin GTS 800 1, High Speed
ARINC 429
A429 IN: GAMA Format
1-6, High Speed
HSDB [2]
A429 OUT: Traffic Format
GTS 820/850 2, High Speed
ARINC 429
A429 IN: GAMA Format
1-6, High Speed
KGP 560 RS-232 External EGPWS
KTA 870 (KTA 810),
Honeywell KMH 880 (KMH 820),
(Bendix/King) KTA 970 (KTA 910), ARINC 429 Traffic Format 4 High Speed
KMH 980 (KMH 920),
TPU-66A
TAS 6XX (TCAD ARINC 429 or
Traffic Format 5 [1]
Avidyne (Ryan) 9900BX) RS-232
TCAD 9900B RS-232 Traffic Format 7
High Speed,
TRC 497
SKY497 (Skywatch) ARINC 429 Traffic Format 6
software v1.6 or
L-3 later.
Communications
SKY899
ARINC 429 Traffic Format 3 High Speed
(Skywatch HP)
WX-500 RS-232 Lightning Detector 1
Notes:
[1] If using the RS-232: I/O must be set to Traffic Format 8. When interfacing over RS-232, the
GTN Xi can serve as the control display for the 9900BX. To allow this function, the GTN Xi
control of traffic system must be set to “YES”. If a GNS and GTN Xi are connected to the
9900BX via RS-232 at the same time, and the GNS is controlling the device, set the GTN Xi
control of traffic system to “NO”.
If using ARINC 429: Configure the GTN Xi ARINC 429 input to “Traffic Format 5, High Speed”.
For ARINC 429 installations, GTN Xi control of traffic system must be set to “NO”.
[2] If HSDB interface between GTS and GTN Xi is connected, do not connect ARINC 429 and
discrete connections.

Rev. 11 Page C-19
C.1.11 DME
Table C-17 Compatible DMEs
Collins DME 40, DME 42 Parallel 2x5
Parallel 2x5 or
KN62/62A
King Serial
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KN63/KDI 572/KDI 574 King Serial
KN64 King Serial
KDM 706(A)/KDI 572/KDI 574 King Serial
Narco DME 890, IDME 891 Narco 890/891

Rev. 11 Page C-20
C.1.12 CDI/HSI Source Selection Annunciators
An external CDI/HSI Source Selection Annunciation or external GPS annunciations may be required for
some installations. Refer to Section 3.6.11.1 for additional information describing when external
annunciation is required. The following indicators and indicator/switches are suitable for external
annunciation:
Table C-18 Compatible CDI/HSIs
Manufacturer P/N Type Notes
011-03809-00 G5 HSI
011-04489-00,
The GI 275 must be configured to display
Garmin 011-04489-10,
the CDI or HSI page. Refer to GI 275
011-04489-20, GI 275
Part 23 AML Installation Manual for more
011-04489-30,
information.
011-04489-40
MD41-1510,
MD41-1511, Both 14 VDC and 28 VDC indicators
MD41-1512, (refer to Mid-Continent documentation for
MD41-1513, availability of switch functions on each
MD41-1514, unit).
MD41-1515, The MD41-151X ACU is the preferred
MD41-1408A, indicator, although the MD41-14XX ACU
MD41-1404A, is acceptable. Refer to Section 3.6.10 for
Indicator/Switch/
Mid-Continent MD41-1418A, more information.
GPS Annunciations
MD41-1414A, Interface to these annunciators to provide
MD41-1468A, GPS annunciations is limited to
MD41-1478A, replacement of existing approved
MD41-1464A, GTN 6XX/7XX installations. New
MD41-1474A, installations of the GTN Xi cannot utilize
MD41-1470, these annunciators to satisfy the
MD41-1484W, requirements of Section 3.6.11.1.2.
MD41-1488W
992561-1241762200 Indicator 14 VDC Indicator.
Staco Switch
992561-1241862200 Indicator 28 VDC Indicator.
28 VDC Indicator (can be converted to
14 VDC operation by replacing four
95-40-17-B6-E1YGN Indicator
28 VDC lamps with 14 VDC lamps
P/N 14-113).
Vivisun
28 VDC Indicator with momentary switch
(can be converted to 14 VDC operation
95-45-11-B6-E1EMK Indicator/Switch
by replacing four 28 VDC lamps with
14 VDC lamps P/N 14-113).
Vendor Contact Information (provided for convenience only)
Staco Switch Mid-Continent Instrument Co Inc.
1139 Baker Street 9400 E. 34th Street N
Costa Mesa, CA 92626 Wichita, KS 67226
Phone: (877) STACO4U Phone: (316) 630-0101, Website: www.mcico.com
Vivisun Aerospace Optics
3201 Sandy Lane
Fort Worth, Texas 76112
Phone: (888) VIVISUN

Rev. 11 Page C-21
C.1.13 TAWS Annunciator Panels
An external TAWS annunciator may be required for some installations. Refer to Section 3.6.11.1 for
additional information describing when a TAWS annunciator is required. The following indicators are
suitable for external annunciation:
Table C-19 Compatible TAWS Annunciator Panels

Manufacturer P/N Type Notes
MD41-1024 14V, Horizontal
Refer to applicable Mid-Continent
MD41-1028 28V, Horizontal documentation for availability of
MD41-1028(5V) 28V, Horizontal, 5V lighting switch functions on each unit. Include
Mid-Continent
MD41-1034 14V, Vertical the prefix “Kit” to the part number
MD41-1038 28V, Vertical when ordering to receive the
annunciator and installation kit.
MD41-1038(5V) 28V, Vertical, 5V lighting
Vendor Contact Information (provided for convenience only)

Mid-Continent Instruments and Avionics
9400 E. 34th Street N
Wichita, KS 67226
Phone: (316) 630-0101
Website: www.mcico.com

Rev. 11 Page C-22
C.1.14 Multifunction Displays
Table C-20 Compatible MFDs
Aviation Output 2 format for MX20 v5.5 and
earlier.
Aviation Output 1 format for MX20 v5.6 and
later (MX20 will not accept GPS altitude even
MX20 though it is part of Aviation Output 1 Format).
MapMX format for MX20 v5.6 or later.
RS-232
Refer to Section 5.4.3.15 if installation
Garmin enables RF Leg navigation on the GTN Xi.
Aviation Output 1 format.
MapMX format (preferred).
GMX 200
Refer to Section 5.4.3.15 if installation
enables RF Leg navigation on the GTN Xi.
The GI 275 must be configured to display
GI 275 HSDB MFD pages. Refer to GI 275 Part 23 AML
STC Installation Manual for more information
EX500 MFD software P/N 530-00193-( ) or later is
(P/N 700-00007-( )), required.
Avidyne EX5000 ARINC 429
(P/N 700-00004-( ) MFD software P/N 530-00195-( ) or later is
or P/N 700-00030-( )) required.
EX500 Configuration Settings:
RECEIVER 1: GAMA 429 FORMAT
PORT: ARINC 429 1 - GPS A DEFAULT
SPEED: LOW
PORT: ARINC 429 4
SPEED: LOW
EX5000 Configuration Settings:
PORT: ARINC 429 1
SPEED: LOW
PORT: ARINC 429 4
SPEED: LOW
C.1.15 Interface Adapters

Table C-21 Compatible Interface Adapters
Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes/Configuration
GAD Format 1, low speed.
Garmin GAD 42 ARINC 429 Any ARINC 429 output format may be used
to allow configuration of the GAD 42.

Rev. 11 Page C-23
C.1.16 Synchro Heading Sources
Table C-22 Compatible Synchro Heading Sources
Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes/Configuration
Synchro Heading Input = “Connected.”
Bendix/King KI-525A Analog
Refer to Section 5.4.3.10.
C.1.17 Weather Radar

Table C-23 Compatible Weather Radar Models
Manufacturer Model Data Format Configuration Notes/Configuration
Configured for Return Bins:
GWX 68 HSDB HSDB 600.
GWX 68 SW v2.12 or later.
600.
Installations using the 10"
GWX 70 HSDB HSDB antenna require GWX
Garmin software v2.30 for ground
clutter suppression and
turbulence detection.
GWX 75 Configured for Return Bins:
HSDB HSDB
(P/N 011-03997-00) 600. Model: GWX 75.
GWX 8000 HSDB HSDB 600. Model: GWX 8000.
GWX software v2.60 or later.
Overbraiding not required.
ARINC 429 Only horizontal scan is
RDS 81 (RS 811A),
ARINC 429, Setup: supported with the RDS 82.
RDS 82 (RS 181A),
Bendix/King ARINC 708, Configure RDR 2100 (ART
RDR 2000 (ART 2000) OUT: Low,
Discrete 2100) as “ART 2000” on
RDR 2100 (ART 2100) Radar Format 1
ARINC 453/708
Configuration page.
RDR 2000 Configuration Settings:
Desired Antenna Sweep 100
Map Gain Change Accepted
Target Alert Disabled
RDR 2100 Configuration Settings:
Desired Antenna Sweep 100
Wx Gain Change Ignored
Map Gain Change Accepted
ARL Disabled
Auto Step Scan Disabled
Autotilt Disabled
Target Alert Disabled

Rev. 11 Page C-24
C.1.18 Iridium Transceiver
Table C-24 Compatible Iridium Transceivers
Garmin GSR 56 RS-232 GSR Format 1
C.1.19 ADS-B Traffic and FIS-B Weather Sources

Table C-25 Compatible ADS-B Traffic and FIS-B Weather Sources
GDL 88 HSDB HSDB GDL 88 software v2.06 or
later is required.
GTX 345/345D/ RS-232, RS-232,
Garmin GTX software v2.02 or
345R/345DR HSDB HSDB
later is required.
GNX 375 HSDB HSDB GNX 375 software v3.10 or
later is required.
C.1.20 Flight Stream

Table C-26 Compatible Flight Stream Models
Flight Stream 210 ports will
RS-232 automatically configure when
Flight Stream 210 None
RS-422 interfaced to connected LRUs
(e.g., GTN Xi, GDL 88, GDL 69).
Flight Stream automatically
configures when inserted into the
data card slot.
Garmin
For flight data log transfer from an
interfaced G500/G600 TXi or
Flight Stream 510 N/A N/A
GI 275, configure settings per
Section 5.4.3.17.
If a GDL 60 is equipped in the
aircraft, remove the Flight Stream
510.

Rev. 11 Page C-25
C.1.21 Flight Stream 210/510 Equipment Compatibility
Table C-27 Compatible Flight Stream 210/510 Equipment
GTN Xi RS-232 Connext 1
Garmin GDL 88 RS-422 Connext 1 GDL 88 v3.00 or later.
GDL 69 N/A None GDL 69 v3.30 or later.
C.1.22 Radio Altimeter

Table C-28 Compatible Radio Altimeters
ALT-4000 ARINC 429
Collins This is an analog to digital
RAC-870 ARINC 429 converter specifically for use with
the ALT-55B rad alt.
FreeFlight RA-4500 ARINC 429
Garmin GRA 55/5500 ARINC 429
Honeywell
KRA 405B ARINC 429
(Bendix/King)

Rev. 11 Page C-26
C.2 GMA 35
The following equipment listed in this appendix is compatible with the GMA 35 Audio Panel when
configured as described in this section. For detailed configuration information, refer to Section 5.4.6.5.5.
C.2.1 COM Radios

COM radios not listed below can still be approved under this GTN AML STC if all of the following
conditions are met:
 The installation of the COM radio was previously FAA-approved.
 The operational check for the COM radio described in Section 6.2.6.3 must be successfully
completed.
Table C-29 Compatible COM Radios

GNS 430W
GNS 530W
Garmin GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Analog Audio
SL 30
SL 40
C.2.2 NAV Radios

NAV radios not listed below can still be approved under this GTN AML STC if all of the following
conditions are met:
 The installation of the NAV radio was previously FAA-approved.
 The audio check for the NAV radio described in Section 6.2.6.4 must be successfully completed.
Table C-30 Compatible NAV Radios

GNS 430W
GNS 530W
Garmin Analog Audio
GTN 650Xi/750Xi
SL 30
C.2.3 Other Audio Sources

Audio sources listed in Appendix Section B.2 may be interfaced to the GMA 35. Other analog audio
sources may also be interfaced to the GMA 35 under this GTN AML STC if all of the following conditions
are met:
 The installation of the audio source was previously FAA-approved.
 The audio source provides standard analog audio designed to drive at least a 600 Ω load.
 The applicable audio check described in Section 6.2.6.5, Section 6.2.6.6, or Section 6.2.6.9 must
be successfully completed.

Rev. 11 Page C-27
C.3 GDL 60
Table C-31 Compatible RAS Displays
G500/G600 TXi
Garmin HSDB [1] [2]
GI 275
Notes:
[1] The GDL 60 must have a direct HSDB connection to the EIS display.
[2] If a GDL 60 is equipped in the aircraft, remove any Flight Stream 510 device.

Rev. 11 Page C-28
APPENDIX D AIRCRAFT MODEL-SPECIFIC INFORMATION
Additional requirements and limitations that are placed on some aircraft as a part of this STC are provided
in Table D-1.
Table D-1 Aircraft Model Specific Information

Aircraft Make
(TCDS Holder) [common Aircraft Model Requirements and Limitations
name or previous make]
The AT-401 series, AT-402 series, and AT-502 series
must have optional avionics mounting installation
(P/N 61337-X) installed as a prerequisite for the
AT-401, AT-401B, installation of the GTN Xi.
AT-402, AT-402A, AT-504 airplanes must have optional avionics
Air Tractor AT-402B, AT-502, mounting installation (P/N 13750-X) installed as a
(Air Tractor, Inc.) AT-502A, AT-502B, prerequisite for the installation of the GTN Xi.
AT-504, AT-602 AT-802, The AT-602 series and AT-802 series must have
AT-802A either the optional avionics mounting installation
(P/N 61337-X) or (P/N 60663-X) as a prerequisite for
the installation of the GTN Xi.
Installation approved for VFR operation only.
Beechcraft Approved for aircraft with approved firewall
D17S
(Beechcraft Corporation) modification to accommodate the depth of the LRU.
Diamond
(Diamond Aircraft Industries, DA20-A1, DA20-C1 Installation approved for VFR operation only.
Inc.)
Diamond DA 40 and DA 40F aircraft with Diamond
Diamond
OSB 40-004/3 incorporated, or aircraft with similar
(Diamond Aircraft Industries DA 40/DA 40F
factory-installed lightning protection supporting IFR
GmbH)
operation.
One of the following sub-panels must be installed:
• EA-8D501.20 Sub Panel GTN 635/650
• EA-8D501.21 Sub Panel GTN 750
Alternately, aircraft with the following sub panels
previously installed may be used with modifications to
Extra the sub-panel side walls for the GTN Xi installation
(Extra Flugzeugproduktions- EA-300/L, EA-300/LC rack mounting hole pattern.
undVertriebs GmbH) • EA-86501.4
• EA-86501.8
• EA-86501.10
For more information, contact Extra Aircraft
(www.extraaircraft.com/contact.php).
Installation approved for VFR operation only.
G115, G115A, G115B,
GROB
G115C, G115C2, G115D, Installation approved for VFR operation only.
[GROB-WERKE)
G115D2, G115EG
Piaggio
Installation in this aircraft is only approved for models
(Piaggio Aero Industries PIAGGIO P-180
equipped with a Garmin G600 system.
S.p.A.)
Rushmeyer
(Rushmeyer Luftfahrttechnik R90-230RG Installation approved for VFR operation only.
GmbH)

Rev. 11 Page D-1
Aircraft Make
(TCDS Holder) [common Aircraft Model Requirements and Limitations
name or previous make]
Slingsby
T67M260 Installation approved for VFR operation only.
(Slingsby Aviation Ltd.)
Vulcanair S.p.A. This STC only approves the installation of the GTN Xi
P68 Observer, P68TC
(Vulcanair S.p.A.) and GMA 35 in the console and not in the instrument
Observer, P68 Observer 2
[Partenavia] panel.
WACO
(WACO Classic Aircraft
Corporation) 2T-1A, 2T-1A-1, 2T-1A-2 Installation approved for VFR operation only.
[Great Lakes Aircraft
Company] [John Duncan]

Rev. 11 Page D-2
APPENDIX E LIGHTNING PROTECTION
E.1 Lightning Protection for IFR Nonmetallic Aircraft......................................................................... E-2
The following sections provide lightning protection and electrical bonding guidance.
Section 4.2 applies to all aircraft with vibration isolated instrument panels that require electrical bonding.
Refer to Section 3.6.6 for additional information.

Rev. 11 Page E-1
E.1 Lightning Protection for IFR Nonmetallic Aircraft
Detailed information about the lightning protection components that are required for particular aircraft
models is provided in Table E-1. Only nonmetallic models are listed. A “Y” in the Protection Required
column indicates the TVS and fuse combination or GPS coax overbraid is required for the particular
model. An “N” indicates the TVS and fuse combination or GPS coax overbraid is not required. The
interconnect diagrams showing how the TVS and fuse are connected to the GTN Xi are found in
Appendix B.
NOTE
Aircraft models that are limited to VFR operations only are not required to have TVSs and
associated fuses installed. Consequently, these models do not appear in Table E-1. Refer
to Table D-1 for aircraft that are limited to VFR operations.
Table E-1 Lightning Protection for IFR Nonmetallic Aircraft

Protection Required?
Aircraft Make (TCDS Holder) GPS
[common name or previous Aircraft Model Designation Coaxial
make] TVS1 TVS2
Cable
Overbraid
Alexandria Aircraft
14-19, 14-19-2, 14-19-3, 14-19-3A, 17-30, 17-31,17-
(Alexandria Aircraft LLC)[Bellanca, Y N N
31TC
Inc.]
Alexandria Aircraft
(Alexandria Aircraft LLC) [Bellanca
17-30A, 17-31A, 17-3A1TC Y N N
Aircraft Corp;Viking Aviation,
Inc.;Bellanca, Inc.]
American Champion
(American Champion 8KCAB, 8GCBC Y N N
Aircraft Corporation)
American Champion
7GCA, 7GCB, 7KC, 7GCBA, 7GCAA, 7GCBC, 7KCAB,
(American Champion Y N N
7ECA
Aircraft Corporation)
APEX Aircraft
(APEX Aircraft) R 3000/160 Y N N
[AVIONS PIERRE ROBIN]
Bellanca
14-13, 14-13-2, 14-13-3, 14-13-3W Y N N
(Bellanca Aircraft Corporation)
Cessna
(Cessna Aircraft Company)
LC40-550FG, LC41-550FG, LC42-550FG Y Y N
[Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing,
The Lancair Company]
Cessna
T-50 (Army AT-17, UC-78 Series, Navy JRC-1) Y N N
(Cessna Aircraft Company)
Cirrus Design Corporation
SR20, SR22 Y Y N
(Cirrus Design Corporation)
Cub Crafters
CC18-180, CC18-180A Y N N
(Cub Crafters, Inc.)
Diamond
DA 40, DA 40F Y Y N
(Diamond Aircraft Industries GmbH)
Extra
(Extra Flugzeugproduktions- und
EA-400 Y Y N
Vertriebs- GmbH)[Extra
Flugzeugbau GmbH]

Rev. 11 Page E-2
make] TVS1 TVS2
Cable
Overbraid
FS2003 Corp.
(FS 2003 Corporation PA-12, PA-12S Y N N
[New Piper Aircraft]
GROB(GROB-WERKE) G120A Y Y N
Hawker Beechcraft
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation)
D17S (UC43, UC43B, GB-1, GB-2), SD17S Y N N
[Beech Aircraft Company;
Raytheon Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation)
G17S Y N N
[Beech Aircraft Company;
Raytheon Aircraft Company]
Howard
DGA-15P (UC-70, GH-1, GH-2, GH-3, NH-1),
(Howard Aircraft Foundation) Y N N
DGA-15J (UC-70B), DGA15W
[Jobmaster Co]
Liberty
XL-2 Y Y N
(Liberty Aerospace Incorporated)
Bee Dee M-4, M-4, M-4C, M-4S, M-4T, M-4-180C,
M-4-180S, M-4-180T, M-4-210, M-4-210C,M-4-210S,
M-4-210T, M-4-220, M-4-220C,M-4-220S, M-4-220T,
M-5-180C, M-5-200,M-5-210C, M-5-210TC, M-5-220C,
M-5-235C,M-6-180, M-6-235, M-7-235, MX-7-235,
Maule
MX-7-180,MX-7-420, MXT-7-180,MT-7-235, M-8-235, Y N N
(Maule Aerospace Technology, Inc.)
MX-7-160, MXT-7-160, MX-7-180A, MXT-7-180A,
MX-7-180B, M-7-235B, M-7-235A, M-7-235C,
MX-7-180C, M-7-260, MT-7-260, M-7-260C,
M-7-420AC, MX-7-160C, MX-7-180AC, M-7-420A,
MT-7-420, M-4-180V, M-9-235
PA-18, PA-18S, PA-18 “105” (Special),
PA-18S “105” (Special), PA-18A, PA-18 “125”,
Piper Aircraft, Inc.
PA-18S “125”, PA-18AS “125”, PA-18 “135”,
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) Y N N
PA-18A “135”, PA-18S “135”, PA-18AS “135”,
[New Piper]
PA-18 “150”, PA-18A “150”, PA-18S “150”,
PA-18AS “150”, PA-19, PA-19S
PA-20, PA-20S, PA-20 “115”, PA-20S “115”,
PA-20 “135”, PA-20S “135”
[New Piper]
PA-22, PA-22-108, PA-22-135, PA-22S-135,
PA-22-150, PA-22S-150, PA-22-160, PA-22S-160
[New Piper]
Sky International
(Sky International, Inc.)
A-1, A-1A, A-1B, A-1C-180, A-1C-200 Y N N
[Christen Industries; Aviat, Inc.;
White International, LTD.; Pitts]
Symphony Aircraft Industries Inc.
(Symphony Aircraft Industries OMF-100-160, SA 160 Y N N
Inc.)[OMF]
Tecnam
(Constrzioni Aeronautiche Tecnam P2010 Y Y N
srl)

Rev. 11 Page E-3
make] TVS1 TVS2
Cable
Overbraid
Triton Aerospace LLC
(Triton Aerospace LLC)
A500 Y Y N
[Triton America LLC;AAI Acquisition,
Inc.; Adam Aircraft]
Univair
(Univair Aircraft Corporation) 108, 108-1, 108-2, 108-3, 108-5 Y N N
[Stinson]
Vulcanair
Vulcanair V1.0 Y N N
(Vulcanair S.p.A)
WACO
YMF Y N N
(The WACO Aircraft Company)

Rev. 11 Page E-4

Manual Garmin

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Garmin

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Garmin

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GTN Xi

Part 23 AML STC

190-01007-C0 May 2024 Revision 11

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

Software License Notification

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

3. Restrictions; Protection and Third Party Devices.

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

4. Term and Termination.

5. Disclaimer; Limitations of Liability; Indemnity.

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

1.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................1-2

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

1.3.1 Approved Aircraft with Systems Not Covered by the STC

1.3.2 Part 23 Aircraft Not Identified on the AML

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

1.3.4 Required Documentation for All Installations

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

Table 1-1 Attributes of GTN Xi Units

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

NAV Antenna COM AntenQa

GTN 650;L/750;L Only GTN 635;L/650;L/750;LOnly

Satellite Voice/ GSR 56 [1]

Figure 1-1 GTN Xi System Interface Overview

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

&20 Cockpit Speaker

ADF Radio Music Input [

Bluetooth Audio Flight Control

Figure 1-2 GMA 35 System Interface Overview

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

Figure 1-3 Interface Between One GTN Xi and One GTX

Figure 1-4 Interface Between One GTN Xi and Two GTXs

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

HSDB GTX 3X/3XX

RS-232 GTX 3X/3XX

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

RS-232 GTX 33/330

1.4.3.1 GTN Xi/GTX 345 Interface Overview

HSDB GTX 3

GTN ;L GTX 3/3

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

1.4.3.3 Installation without GTN Xi Control of GTX Transponder

190-01007-C0 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

Table 1-2 Garmin Installation Manuals

1.5.1 Environmental Qualification Forms

&20 Cockpit Speaker

ADF Radio Music Input [

RS-232 GTX 33/330

HSDB GTX 3

GTN ;L GTX 3/3